(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Graduate catalog"

:' k.";; 













aVest Virginia 
university 

Graduate Catalog 1988-90 Bulletin 



WEST VIRGINIA 
UNIVERSITY 

1988-90 
Graduate Catalog 



This two year bulletin represents the planned schedules 
and offerings for 1988 through 1990. 

The 1988-90 West Virginia University Graduate Cata- 
log is a general source of information about course 
offerings, academic programs and requirements, ex- 
penses, rules, and policies. The courses, requirements, 
and regulations contained herein are subject to con- 
tinuing review and change by the West Virginia Board 
of Regents, University administrators, and the faculties 
of the schools and colleges to best meet the goals and 
objectives of the University. The University, therefore, 
reserves the right to change, delete, supplement, or 
otherwise amend at any time the information, course 
offerings, requirements, rules, and policies contained 
herein without prior notice. 



UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1988-89 
Summer Sessions, 1988 

May 18, Wednesday Registration, First Summer Session 

May 18, Wednesday First Classes 

May 30, Monday Memorial Day Recess 

June 30, Monday Final Exam for First Six- Week Session 

July 1, Friday Registration, Second Summer Session 

July 1, Friday First Classes 

July 4, Monday Independence Day Recess 

August 12, Friday Final Exam for Second Six-Week Session 

First Semester, 1988-89 

August 18, 19, Thursday and Friday New Student Orientation 

August 19, Friday General Registration 

August 22, Monday First Classes 

August 22, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

August 26, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

September 5, Monday Labor Day Recess 

September 12, Monday Rosh Hashannah — Day of Special Concern 

September 21, Wednesday Yom Kippur— Day of Special Concern 

October 7, Friday Mid-Semester 

October 11, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

October 28, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

November 8, Tuesday Election Day Recess 

November 19, Saturday, 

to November 27, Sunday, inclusive Thanksgiving Recess 

December 8, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

December 9, Friday Last Day of Classes 

December 12, Monday, 

to December 17, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

December 18, Sunday, 

to January 5, Thursday, inclusive Christmas Recess 

Second Semester, 1988-89 

January 6, Friday General Registration 

January 9, Monday First Classes 

January 9, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

January 13, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

January 16, Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Birthday Recess 

February 7, Tuesday (Not a Holiday) West Virginia University Day 

February 24, Friday Mid-Semester 

February 28, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

March 4, Saturday, to March 12, Sunday, inclusive Spring Recess 

March 24, Friday Friday Before Easter Recess 

March 27, Monday Last Day to Drop a Class 

April 11, Tuesday Faculty Assembly 

April 20, Thursday Passover— Day of Special Concern 

April 27, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

April 28, Friday Last Day of Classes 

May 1, Monday, to May 6, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

May 8, Monday Grade Reports for All Graduates Due in Dean's Office 

May 8, Monday Dean's Reports for All Graduates Due in 

Office of Admissions and Records 

May 13, Saturday Alumni Day 

May 14, Sunday Commencement 

The WVU academic year is divided into two semesters of about seventeen weeks 
each and two summer sessions of six weeks each. 



TENTATIVE UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1989-90 
Summer Sessions, 1989 

May 18, Thursday Registration, First Summer Session 

May 18, Thursday First Classes 

May 29, Monday Memorial Day Recess 

June 30, Friday Final Exam for First Six- Week Session 

July 3, Monday Registration, Second Summer Session 

July 3, Monday First Classes 

July 4, Tuesday Independence Day Recess 

August 11, Friday Final Exam for Second Six-Week Session 

First Semester, 1989-90 

August 17, 18, Thursday and Friday New Student Orientation 

August 18, Friday General Registration 

August 21, Monday First Classes 

August 21, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

August 25, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

September 4, Monday Labor Day Recess 

September 13, Saturday Rosh Hashannah— Day of Special Concern 

October 6, Friday Mid-Semester 

October 9, Monday Yom Kippur— Day of Special Concern 

October 10, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

October 27, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

November 18, Saturday, 

to November 26, Sunday, inclusive Thanksgiving Recess 

December 7, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

December 8, Friday Last Day of Classes 

December 11, Monday, 

to December 16, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

December 17, Sunday, 

to January 4, Thursday, inclusive Christmas Recess 

Second Semester, 1989-90 

January 5, Friday General Registration 

January 8, Monday First Classes 

January 8, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

January 12, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

January 15, Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Birthday Recess 

February 7, Wednesday (Not a Holiday) West Virginia University Day 

February 23, Friday Mid-Semester 

February 27, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

March 3, Saturday, to March 11, Sunday, inclusive Spring Recess 

March 23, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

April 10, Tuesday Faculty Assembly 

April 10, Tuesday Passover— Day of Special Concern 

April 13, Friday Friday Before Easter Recess 

April 26, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

April 27, Friday Last Day of Classes 

April 30, Monday, to May 5, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

May 7, Monday Grade Reports for All Graduates Due in Dean's Office 

May 7, Monday Dean's Reports for All Graduates Due in 

Office of Admissions and Records 

May 12, Saturday Alumni Day 

May 13, Sunday Commencement 

The WW academic year is divided into two semesters of about seventeen weeks 
each and two summer sessions of six weeks each. 



West Virginia Board of Regents 

950 Kanawha Boulevard, East 
Charleston, WV 25301 

Charles Connor, Beckley 

Louis Costanzo, Wheeling 

Thomas L. Craig, Jr., Huntington 

Kenneth M. Dunn, Charleston 

the Reverend Paul J. Gilmer, Institute 

Sister Mary Jude Jochum, Wheeling 

James, McCartney, Morgantown 

William T. McLaughlin, Fairmont 

Thomas W. McNeel, Charleston 

Clifton T. Neal, Jr., Bluefield 

Charles Printz, Charles Town 

Michael Niggemyer, ex officio, Morgantown 

Suzanne Snyder, ex officio, Fairmont 

William Simmons, Chancellor, Glenville 



West Virginia University Board of Advisors 
Office of the President 
Morgantown, WV 26506 

David Hardesty, Jr., Chairman, Charleston 

Joseph Powell, Vice-Chairman, Charleston 

J. Reginald Dietz, Weirton 

Sue Seibert Farnsworth, Wheeling 

Lawson Hamilton, Jr., Lewisburg 

the Honorable Robert E. Maxwell, Elkins 

Victorine Monroe, Clarksburg 

Margaret Lucas, Administrative Appointee 

Brad Hoylman, Student Representative 

James Arbogast, Faculty Representative 

Paul Martinelli, Classified Staff Representative 

Neil S. Bucklew, President 



West Virginia University Bulletin (USPS 676-980) (ISSN 0362-3009) 

Series 88, No. 9-1, March, 1988 

Issued Monthly in January, February, April, and October; 

four times in March; and twelve times in June. 

Second-class postage paid at Morgantown, WV 26505 

and at additional mailing offices. 

POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to 
West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506. 



CONTENTS 

University Calendars, 1988-89, 1989-90 2,3 

West Virginia Board of Regents 4 

West Virginia University Board of Advisors 4 

Correspondence 6 

Part 1— West Virginia University 7 

President's Cabinet, Deans 7 

Directors, Distinguished Professors 8 

General Information 9 

Degree Programs Offered by WVU 11 

Academic Common Market 14 

Part 2— Graduate Programs and Courses 15 

Part 3— Other Graduate Courses and Facilities 343 

Part 4 — General Policies and Procedures 356 

Graduate Education at WVU 356 

Government and Organization of WVU 357 

Organization of Graduate Education 358 

Application for Graduate Study 358 

Admission to Graduate Study 359 

Transfer Procedures 363 

Credit Limitations 364 

Time Limits 365 

Undergraduates in Graduate-Level Courses 366 

Enrollment and Registration Requirements 366 

Advising 370 

Scholarship 371 

Off-Campus Graduate Study 374 

Part 5— Graduate Degrees 375 

Candidacy 375 

Master's Degrees 377 

Doctoral Degrees 379 

Special Additional Requirements and Information 383 

College of Agriculture and Forestry 383 

College of Creative Arts 384 

School of Dentistry 384 

College of Engineering 385 

College of Human Resources and Education 387 

Part 6— Other Information 393 

Fees 402 

Fellowships/Assistantships 403 

Other Services 404 

Part 7— Graduate Faculty 406 

Index 434 



CORRESPONDENCE 

Address as follows: 

Academic Programs 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 

and Research 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6001 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6001 

Admissions, Catalogs, Records 

Office of Admissions and Records 

West Virginia University 

P.O. Box 6009 

Morgantown, WV 26506-6009 

Graduate Programs 

Assistant Vice President 

for Curriculum and Instruction 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6001 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6001 

Housing and Residence Life 

Director, Housing and Residence Life 
West Virginia University 
Morgantown, WV 26506 

Scholarships and Work-Study 

Student Financial Aid Office 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6004 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6004 

Student Life 

Dean, Student Life 
West Virginia University 
Morgantown, WV 26506 

Veterans Educational Assistance 

Student Financial Aid Office 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6004 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6004 

6 



Parti 

WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 

West Virginia University Administration 

President's Cabinet 

Neil S. Bucklew, Ph.D., President 

James Arbogast, M.D., Faculty Representative 

Dianne Brown, Ph.D., Special Assistant to the President for Social Justice 

Marion F. Dearnley, J.D., Interim Associate Vice President for Student Affairs 

Edwin Flowers, J.D., Vice President for Institutional Advancement 

Frank A. Franz, Ph.D., Provost and Vice President for Academic Affairs 

and Research 
James K. Hackett, M.B.A., Associate Vice President for Health Sciences 
Mary Jane Hitt, M.A., Special Assistant to the President 
Brad Hoylman, Student Body President 
John E. Jones, M.D., Vice President for Health Sciences 
Paul Martinelli, Staff Council President 

Herman Mertins, Jr., Ph.D., Vice President for Administration and Finance 
Jon A. Reed, J.D., Executive Officer 

John Signorelli, M.B.A., Associate Vice President for Finance 
Rachel B. Tompkins, Ed.D., Associate Vice President for 

University Extension and Public Service 
William E. Vehse, Ph.D., Associate Vice President for Academic Affairs 

and Research 

Deans 

College of Agriculture and Forestry/Agricultural and Forestry 
Experiment Station, Robert H. Maxwell, Ph.D., Dean/Director 

College of Arts and Sciences, Gerald E. Lang, Ph.D. 

College of Business and Economics, Cyril M. Logar, Ph.D. (Interim) 

College of Creative Arts, Margaret O. Lucas, Ed.D. 

School of Dentistry, W. Robert Biddington, D.D.S. 

College of Engineering/Engineering Experiment Station, 
Curtis J. Tompkins, Ph.D., Dean/Director 

College of Human Resources and Education, Diane L. Reinhard, Ph.D. 

Perley Isaac Reed School of Journalism, Guy H. Stewart, Ph.D. 

College of Law, Carl M. Selinger, J.D. 

Library Services, Stokely B. Gribble, M.S. (Interim) 

School of Medicine, James M. Stevenson, M.D. 

College of Mineral and Energy Resources, John L. Schroder, Jr., M.S.E.M. 

School of Nursing, Lorita D. Jenab, Ed.D. 

School of Pharmacy, Sidney A. Rosenbluth, Ph.D. 

School of Physical Education, J. William Douglas, Ph.D. 

Potomac State College, Joseph M. Gratto, Ph.D. 

School of Social Work, Sung Lai Boo, Ph.D. (Interim) 

Student Life, Herman L. Moses, M.A. 

University Extension and Continuing Education, R. Rudy Filek, Ph.D. 



WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 7 



Directors 

Admissions and Records, Glenn G. Carter, Ed.D. 

Air Force Aerospace Studies (ROTC), Col. Michael D. Edwards, M.P.A. 

Alumni Activities, Stephen L. Douglas, M.S. (Interim) 

Book Stores, John J. Porter, M.B.A. 

Budget Office, Richard M. Gardner, M.B.A. 

Bureau of Business Research, Tom S. Witt, Ph.D. 

Career Services Center, Robert L. Kent, M.A. 

Center for Women's Studies, Judith G. Stitzel, Ph.D. 

Computing Services, William J. Logar, B.S. 

Controller, William A. McCune, M.B.A. 

Counseling Service, James F. Carruth, Ph.D. 

Energy and Water Research Center, Richard A. Bajura, Ph.D. 

Facilities Planning and Management, James R. Shaub, M.B.A. 

Gerontology Center, Rick A. Briggs, M.A. (Interim) 

Housing and Residence Life, Stephen S. Showers, M.Ed. 

Human Resources, S. Thomas Serpento, M.A. (Interim Assistant 

Vice President) 
Institutional Analysis and Planning, Kathleen K. Bissonnette, Ph.D. 
Intercollegiate Athletics, Fred A. Schaus, M.S. 
Internal Auditing, William R. Quigley, B.S., C.P.A. 
Military Science (Army ROTC), Lt. Col. Jerald W. Fisher, M.A. 
Mountainlair, Daniel N. Adams, Ed.D. 
News and Information Services, Robert L. Verbosky, M.A. 
Off-Campus Credit, Arthur L. Morris, M.A. (Interim) 
Parking, Robert Roberts 
Physical Plant, Dorsey D. Jacobs 
Printing Services, Paul H. Stevenson, B.S. 
Publications Services, John Luchok, B.S.J. 
Public Safety, William S. Strader, B.A. 

Purchasing, Phillip A. Ondo, B.S. (Interim Associate Director) 
Radio, Television, and Telecommunications, C. Gregory Van Camp, M.S.J. 
Regional Research Institute, Andrew M. Isserman, Ph.D. 
Sponsored Programs, William W. Reeves, M.P.A. 

Student Activities and Educational Programs, Robert F. McWhorter, M.S. 
Student Financial Aid, Brenda Thompson, M.B.A. 
Summer Sessions, R. Rudy Filek, Ph.D. 

Telecommunications and Network Services, Floyd R. Crosby, M.B.A. 
Transportation, and Mail Service, Robert J. Bates, B.S.M.E. 
University Honors Program, William E. Collins, Ph.D. 

Distinguished Professors 

Franklin D. Cleckley, J.D., Arthur B. Hodges Professor of Law. 
Bernard R. Cooper, Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Physics. 
William W. Fleming, Ph.D., Professor, Mylan Chair of Pharmacology. 
Edmund B. Flink, M.D., Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor 

of Medicine. 
Ruel E. Foster, Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor 

of American Literature, Emeritus. 
Frank Gagliano, M.F.A., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Theatre. 
George A. Hedge, Ph.D., Edward J. Van Liere Professor of Physiology. 

8 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 



C. Lawrence Kien, Ph.D., Professor, Charles E. (Jimj Compton Chair of 

Nutrition. 
Joan M. Krauskopf, J.D., William J. Maier, Jr. Visiting Professor of Law. 
Thomas P. Meloy, Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor 

of Mineral Processing. 
Hayne W. Reese, Ph.D., Centennial Professor of Psychology. 
Martin W. Schein, Sc.D., Centennial Professor of Biology. 
George W. Weinstein, M.D., Professor, Jane McDermott Shott Chair of 

Ophthalmology. 

General Information 

West Virginia University combines many of the advantages of a large 
institution with those of a small one. It is both a comprehensive university 
offering 178 degree programs from the bachelor's through the doctoral level 
and a decentralized group of 15 colleges and schools on two campuses in 
Morgantown, which helps maintain the friendly, informal atmosphere of 
smaller institutions. 

With 17,175 students and 1,529 full-time faculty, WVU is large enough to 
support academic diversity. WVU students come from all 55 West Virginia 
counties, 48 other states, and 73 foreign countries. Over the years, the 
University has had 21 students appointed Rhodes Scholars to continue their 
studies at Oxford University. WVU freshman students score well in the 
American College Testing Program— 20.0 compared to 18.7 nationally (1985). 

West Virginia University is one of only 24 state universities in the nation 
that serve as both the comprehensive and land-grant institutions in their 
states. They are called land-grant institutions (there are 72) because the 
Congressional act establishing them in 1862 gave federally owned land to 
each state, which then sold the land and used the funds to begin a college 
offering programs in agriculture and engineering. 

Since its founding in 1867, WVU has developed into the center of graduate 
and professional education, research, and extension programs in West 
Virginia. Coal and energy are a major focus of University research because of 
WVU's location in the heart of the eastern coal fields. 

The Personal Rapid Transit (PRT) System, which was built by the U.S. 
Department of Transportation as a national research and demonstration 
project, connects downtown Morgantown and the campuses. The PRT, 
perhaps the largest research and demonstration project ever built on a 
university campus, consists of computer-directed, electric-powered cars that 
operate on a concrete-and-steel guideway without drivers on board. 

The Morgantown campuses contain 140 buildings on over 1,000 acres, 
valued at $360 million; libraries with 1,113,455 books, 1,446,066 microforms 
and microfilms, and over 9,000 periodicals; and five computer sites utilizing 
an IBM 3081KK, an IBM 3081D, and four DEC VAX ll/780s. 

Branches include the Charleston Division of the WVU Health Sciences 
Center; Wheeling Division of the School of Medicine; Potomac State College at 
Keyser, the state's only residential junior college; and five off-campus 
graduate centers at Jackson's Mill near Weston, in Parkersburg, at Potomac 
State College, Shepherd College in the Eastern Panhandle, and West Liberty 
State College in the Northern Panhandle. 

WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 9 



West Virginia University operates eight experiment farms in Hardy, 
Jefferson, Monongalia, Monroe, and Preston counties; five experiment forests 
in Monongalia, Preston, Randolph, and Wetzel counties; a geology camp in 
Greenbrier County; and the State 4-H Camp and a museum of mid-nineteenth 
century life at Jackson's Mill, the boyhood home of Confederate General 
Stonewall Jackson that has been entered in the National Register of Historic 
Places. 



Equal Opportunity/ Affirmative Action Policy 

West Virginia University is an Equal Opportunity-Affirmative Action 
institution. In compliance with Federal Executive Order No. 11246 as 
amended, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, West Virginia Human Rights Act, 
Title IX (Educational Amendments of 1972), Sections 503 and 504 of the 
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and other applicable laws and regulations, the 
University provides equal opportunity to all prospective and current members 
of the student body, faculty, and staff on the basis of individual qualifications 
and merit without regard to race, sex, religion, age, national origin, or 
handicap, as identified and defined by law. 

The University neither affiliates knowingly with nor grants recognition 
to any individual, group, or organization having policies that discriminate on 
the basis of race, color, age, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap, as 
defined by applicable laws and regulations. 

—Office of the President 



10 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 



Degree Programs 



College of Agriculture and Forestry 

Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/ 

Professional 

Agricultural Biochemistry M.S Ph.D. 

Agricultural Economics M.S. 

Agricultural Education B.S.Agr M.S. 

Agricultural Microbiology M.S Ph.D. 

Agriculture M. Agr. 

Agronomy M.S Ph.D. 

Animal Nutrition Ph.D. 

Animal and Veterinary Sciences B.S., B.S.Agr M.S. 

Entomology M.S. 

Family Resources B.S.Fam.Res. . .M.S. 

Forest Resources Management B.S.F. 

Forest Resources Science Ph.D. 

Forestry M.S.F. 

Horticulture M.S. 

Landscape Architecture B.S.L.A. 

Plant Pathology M.S Ph.D. 

Plant and Soil Sciences B.S.Agr. 

Recreation and Parks Management ..B.S.R M.S. 

Resource Management B.S., B.S.Agr. 

Wildlife Management M.S. 

Wildlife Resources B.S. 

Wood Industries B.S.F. 

College of Arts and Sciences 

Biology B.A M.S Ph.D. 

Chemistry B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D. 

Communication Studies B.A M. A. 

Computer Science B.S M.S. 

Economics B.A. 

English B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Foreign Languages B.A M.A. 

Geography B.A M.A. 

Geology B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D. 

History B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Interdepartmental Studies B.A. 

Mathematics B.A M.S. 

Philosophy B.A. 

Physics B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D. 

Political Science B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Psychology B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Public Administration M.P.A. 

Sociology and Anthropology B.A M.A. 

Statistics B.S M.S. 



WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 11 



Degree Program 



Bachelor 



Master 



Doctorate/ 
Professional 



Board of Regents Bachelor of Arts Degree 

Board of Regents B. A. 

(Intended for older students who wish to resume and complete their college studies. 
Detailed information available from the Coordinator, Board of Regents B.A. Degree 
Program, Student Services Center, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506.) 

College of Business and Economics 

Accounting B.S.B. Ad. 

Business Administration B.S.B. Ad M.B.A. 

Business Management B.S.B. Ad. 

Economics B.S M.A Ph.D. 

Finance B.S.B.Ad. 

Industrial Relations M.S. 

Marketing B.S.B.Ad. 

Professional Accountancy M.P. A. 

College of Creative Arts 

Art B.A M.A. 

Music B.M M.M D.M.A., 

Ph.D. 

Theatre B.F.A M.A.,* M.F.A. 

Visual Art B.F.A M.F.A. 

*The M.A. program will be phased out. 

School of Dentistry 

Dental Hygiene B.S. 

Dentistry D.D.S. 

Endodontics M.S. 

Orthodontics M.S. 



College of Engineering 



Engineering 

Aerospace Engineering 
Chemical Engineering . 

Civil Engineering 

Computer Engineering 
Electrical Engineering . 
Industrial Engineering 
Mechanical Engineering 
Occupational Health and 
Safety Engineering M.S 



M.S.E 

...B.S.A.E M.S.A.E. 

...B.S.Ch.E M.S.Ch.E. 

...B.S.C.E M.S.C.E. 

...B.S.Cp.E. 

...B.S.E.E M.S.E.E. 

...B.S.I.E M.S.I.E. 

...B.S.M.E M.S.M.E. 



.Ph.D. 



12 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 



Degree Program 



Bachelor 



Master 



Doctorate/ 
Professional 



College of Human Resources and Education 



Education Ed.D., 

C.A.S. 

Counseling M. A. 

Education Administration. 
Educational Psychology. . . 



Elementary Education 

Reading 

Rehabilitation Counseling 

Secondary Education 

Special Education 

Speech Pathology and Audiology 
Technology Education 



B.S.E.Ed 



B.S.S.Ed 
B.S. ". 



..M.A. 
..M.A. 
..M.A. 
..M.A. 
..M.S. 
..M.A. 
..M.A. 
..M.S. 
..M.A. 



Interdisciplinary Programs 

Genetics and Developmental Biology M.S Ph.D. 

Liberal Studies M. A.L.S. 

Reproductive Physiology M.S Ph.D. 

Perley Isaac Reed School of Journalism 

Journalism B.S.J M.S.J. 



College of Law 



Law 



.J.D. 



School of Medicine 

Anatomy M.S Ph.D. 

Biochemistry (Medical) M.S Ph.D. 

Biomedical Sciences Ph.D.* 

Medical Technology B.S M.S. 

Medicine M.D. 

Microbiology (Medical) M.S Ph.D. 

Pharmacology and Toxicology M.S Ph.D. 

Physical Therapy B.S. 

Physiology (Medical) M.S Ph.D. 

* Awarded under the auspices of the degree-granting authority of WVU, but in cooperation with 
the Basic Sciences Departments of Marshall University School of Medicine. 

College of Mineral and Energy Resources 

Engineering of Mines B.S.E.M M.S.E.M. 

Mineral and Energy Resources M.S Ph.D. 

Mineral Engineering Ph.D. 

Mineral Processing Engineering B.S. 

Petroleum Engineering B.S. Pet. E M.S.Pet.E. 



WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 13 



Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/ 

Professionl 

School of Nursing 

Nursing B.S.N M.S.N. 

School of Pharmacy 

Pharmaceutical Sciences M.S .Ph.D. 

Pharmacy B.S.Pharm. 

School of Physical Education 

Education Ed.D., 

C.A.S. 

Community Health Education M.S. 

Physical Education B.S.P.Ed M.S. 

Sport and Exercise Studies B.S.P.Ed. 

Safety Studies M.S. 

School of Social Work 

Social Work B.S.W M.S.W. 

Academic Common Market 

West Virginia provides its residents opportunity, through the Academic 
Common Market (ACM) and through contract programs, to pursue academic 
programs not available within the state. Both programs permit West Virginians 
to enter out-of-state institutions at reduced tuition rates. 

Contract programs have been established for study in optometry, 
podiatry, and veterinary medicine. The ACM provides access to numerous 
graduate and undergraduate programs. The programs are restricted to West 
Virginia residents who have been accepted for admission to one of the specific 
programs at designated out-of-state institutions. 

Through reciprocal agreement, WVU allows residents of states within the 
ACM to enroll in graduate and undergraduate programs on an in-state tuition 
basis. 

Further information may be obtained through Dr. Elaine K. Ginsberg, 
Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction, Stewart Hall, West 
Virginia University, P.O. Box 6001, Morgantown, WV 26506-6001. Application 
must be made through the higher education authority of the state of residence. 
For West Virginia residents this is the West Virginia Board of Regents, 950 
Kanawha Boulevard, East, Charleston, WV 25301. 



West Virginia University is a member of the North Central Association of 
Colleges and Schools. The University's educational programs are accredited 
by the North Central Association and by the appropriate accreditation 
agencies for professional programs. 



14 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 



Part 2 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

AND COURSES 

Plan for Numbering Courses 

For convenience, each course is designated by an acronym for the 

department in which it is given and by a number particular to that course. The 

plan for numbering is as follows: 

Courses 200 to 299— Courses for advanced undergraduate students and selected 
graduate students. No more than 40 percent of the credits counted for meeting 
requirements for a graduate degree can be at the 200 level. 

Courses 300-399— Courses for graduate students; students in professional programs 
leading to the doctorate; and selected, advanced undergraduates. Undergraduates in 
any class carrying a 300-level course number must have a 3.0 cumulative grade-point 
average and have written approval on special forms from their instructors and 
advisers. Seniors within 12 semester hours of graduation may, with prior approval of 
their advisers, enroll in 300-level graduate courses for graduate credit. (In summary, 
200-level courses are intended primarily to serve undergraduate students; 300-level 
courses are intended primarily to serve introductory graduate and master's degree 
course needs.) 

Courses 391 (Advanced Topics) and 397 (Master's Degree Research or Thesis) — 
Courses are approved for University-wide use by any academic unit. These courses 
may be graded S or U. 

Courses 400 to 499— Courses for graduate students only. All doctoral degree dissertation 
hours shall be awarded at the 400-level— specifically under course number 497. 
Courses numbered 497 may be graded S or U. 

Courses 492 to 495— Courses are approved by the Assistant Vice President for 
Curriculum and Instruction. Approved requests are forwarded to the Office of 
Admissions and Records for entry into the WVU Schedule of Courses. 
Graduate degree credit-hour requirements must include at least 60 

percent at the 300 and 400 level. 

Abbreviations Used in Course Listings 

I — a course given in the first semester 
II — a course given in the second semester 
I, II — a course given in each semester 
I and II — a course given throughout the year 

Yr. — a course continued through two semesters 
S. — a course given in the summer 
hr. — credit hours per course 
lee. — lecture period 
rec. — recitation period 
lab. — laboratory period 
Cone. — concurrent registration required 

PR — prerequisite 
Coreq. — corequisite 
Consent — consent of instructor required 
CR — credit, but no grade 

Schedule of Courses 

Before the opening of semesters and summer sessions, a Schedule of 
Courses is printed to announce the courses that will be offered by the colleges 
and schools of WVU. Courses in this catalog are subject to change without 
notice. 

15 



ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Program in Accounting 

437 Armstrong Hall 

M.P.A. Program, College of Business and Economics, West Virginia University, P.O. 

Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 
Telephone: (304) 293-5335 
Degree Offered: M.P.A. 
Graduate Faculty: Members G. Smith and Coats. Associate Members Doran, Maust, 

Neidermeyer, Pushkin, Shaw, Titard, and Wilner. 

The objective of the Master of Professional Accountancy (M.P.A.) degree 
is to provide the student with professional competence in accounting and 
executive level business education, including a broad understanding of the 
managerial process. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants 
( AICPA) has stated that a C.P. A. candidate should have 150 semester hours of 
formal education in order to be prepared to cope with the increasingly 
complex nature of accounting practice. Many states have passed, or are 
considering passing, legislation requiring C.P. A. candidates to have completed 
a fifth year of education before receiving permission to sit for the examination. 
The additional accounting education also aids a student in successfully 
preparing for any of the professional accounting examinations (C.P. A., 
CM. A., C.I. A.), and students are encouraged to take these examinations while 
in the M.P.A. program. 

The majority of the M.P.A. graduates have accepted employment in 
public accounting; the remainder have entered doctoral programs in ac- 
counting, industrial accounting, governmental accounting, or college teaching. 
A large number of employers visit the campus and offer access to the national 
job market. 

Financial aid in the form of graduate assistantships and tuition scholar- 
ships is available to qualified students on a competitive basis. Most graduate 
assistants will have the opportunity to teach accounting principles. Graduate 
students are also eligible for the following awards: 

The Harmon/Witschey Award: To honor an accounting graduate student 
in memory of Robert E. Witschey. 

The Prentice-Hall, Inc. Award: To a graduate student in accounting who 
has demonstrated academic performance and exceptional service. 

The M.P.A. program at WVU follows the 150-hour recommendation of the 
AICPA, as published in its report entitled Education Requirements for Entry 
into the Accounting Profession. The College of Business and Economics is 
fully accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business. 

The graduate courses leading to the M.P.A. degree are intended to be 
completed in one calendar year of full-time studies. The program requires that 
the student have an undergraduate degree with a minimum of 24 hours in 
accounting. Work experience is not a requirement for admission. Students 
may enter the program on either a full-time or part-time basis in either 
Summer or Fall. Careful selection of degree candidates limits the size of 
classes, leads to high quality efforts in the program, and permits frequent and 
direct contact between students and faculty. 

To obtain approval for entry into the M.P.A. program an applicant must 
have a baccalaureate degree from an accredited college or university and an 
undergraduate grade-point average of at least 3.0 overall or in the last 60 
credit hours taken. The student must also have an accounting grade-point 
average of at least 3.0. In addition, the applicant must submit a score of 500 or 



16 ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 



above on the Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT). Applicants 
with a GPA below 3.0 (or GMAT scores below 500) must show correspondingly 
higher GMAT (or GPA) achievement. 

To assure that all students in the program have the same foundation in 
business, the following prerequisite courses, or their equivalent, must be 
completed before enrolling in M.P.A. graduate courses: principles of ac- 
counting (6 hours), intermediate accounting (6 hours), advanced accounting, 
cost accounting, tax accounting, auditing, principles of economics (6 hours), 
principles of marketing, principles of management, principles of finance, 
production management, statistics, business law, business policy, and 
computer science. 

A student without the necessary prerequisite courses may be approved to 
enter the M.P.A. program as a provisional graduate student. All applications 
for approval to enter the M.P.A. program must be received in the WVU Office 
of Admissions and Records as early as possible and no later than one month 
before the date for which enrollment is requested. 

Master of Professional Accountancy (M.P.A.) 

The candidate's program will be planned with the assistance and 
approval of the Director of Graduate Programs. The M.P.A. degree requires 39 
hours of graduate credit and is normally completed in one calendar year. The 
program of study is as follows: 
Fall Semester 

Accounting 325— Accounting Information Systems, 2 hr. 

Accounting 330 — Financial Accounting Theory and Practice, 3 hr. 

Accounting 333— Income Taxes and Business Decisions, 3 hr. 

Management 302— Quantitative Analysis of Business Data, 3 hr. 

Speech Pathology and Audiology 280— Oral/Written Skills for Profes- 
sionals, 3 hr. 
Spring Semester 

Accounting 335— Computer Systems Auditing, 2 hr. 

Accounting 338— Controllership, 3 hr. 

Economics 318— Economic Policy, 2 hr. 

Finance 321— Corporate Financial Administration, 3 hr. 

Elective Course— 3 hr. 
Summer I 

Accounting 332— Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 3 hr. 

Accounting 340— Reporting Practices and Problems, 3 hr. 

Accounting 345— Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards, 3 

hr. 

Elective Course— 3 hr. 
No thesis is required in the program, but communication skills are 
emphasized in all courses. Extensive use is made of microcomputers in 
accounting applications. 

The M.P.A. program requires that the student maintain a grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 on all work taken as a graduate student while enrolled 
in the College of Business and Economics, including prescribed work taken to 
remove undergraduate deficiencies. A student whose cumulative grade-point 
average falls below 2.75 will be placed on probation. If the average is not 
brought up to 2.75 by the end of the following semester, the student will be 
suspended from the program. A grade below C in any course taken while 
enrolled as a graduate student will result in suspension from the graduate 
program. 

ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 17 



Complete information about the M.P.A. program may be obtained by 
contacting the Director of Graduate Programs. 

Accounting (Acctg.) 

200. Special Topics. S. 1-4 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to 
accounting. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

211. Accounting Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 5, Acctg. 112 or consent. Analysis of data- 
processing fundamentals and information systems analysis, design, and imple- 
mentation, including necessary computer hardware and software components 
with particular reference to accounting information systems and the controls 
necessary therein. 

214. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213 or consent. The study of Federal 
income tax treatment of partnerships, corporations and estates, and the treatment 
of those property transfers subject to the Federal Gift Tax, together with an 
introduction to tax research and tax procedure. 

216. Advanced Managerial Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill and 115 or 116 or consent. 
Special problems in cost accounting, including tax planning, inventory control, 
and decision models on C. P. A. /CM. A. examination. Selected problems and cases 
will be used. 

217. Auditing Theory. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Acctg. 210 or consent. Auditing fundamentals; 
objectives, ethics, statistical samplings, standards and procedures. Emphasis on 
FASB and SAS disclosures. 

224. Advanced Accounting Problems. 3 hr. PR: Minimum of 18 hr. in accounting with 
an average grade of B or higher. Analysis and solution of representative C.P.A. 
problems. 

230. Advanced Accounting Theory. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112, 115, and consent. Critical 
analysis of accounting concepts and standards with emphasis on their origin, 
development, and significance. 

325. Accounting Information Systems. 2 hr. PR: Consent. The design and use of 
computerized accounting information systems to support the transaction pro- 
cessing, reporting and decision-making systems of most organizations, including 
the use and critical analysis of currently available accounting packages. 

330. Financial Accounting Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Comprehensive 
examination of financial accounting theory as established by the opinions, 
statements and interpretations of professional organizations with special emphasis 
on their application and problem solving. 

332. Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Fund accounting 
and control in governmental and nonprofit entities; identification and control of 
cost centers; cost analysis and cost centers; cost analysis cand cost finding, and 
planning and control of operations and resources. 

333. Income Taxes and Business Decisions. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213. Advanced federal 
income-tax problems with emphasis on tax planning for business decisions and 
tax research methodology. 

335. Computer Systems Auditing. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 325. The analysis and design of 
control systems in a computerized accounting environment. Special emphasis on 
evaluating evidence to determine whether a computing system safeguards assets 
and maintains data integrity. 

18 ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 



338. Contro/lership. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 304. Examination of the role of the controller in 
large entities in planning, measuring, evaluating, and controlling performance and 
in reporting to stockholders and governmental agencies. 

340. Reporting Practices and Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation of financial 
reporting practices and trends, including an examination of the reporting require- 
ments of the SEC and other regulatory agencies. Practitioners will be used 
extensively for class discussion and presentations. 

345. Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 217. Professional 
objectives, principles, and standards of auditing; audit reports and related 
communications; and cash studies of audit sampling, professional ethics, legal 
liability and reporting. 

349. Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 

William G. Martin, Program Chairperson 

1022 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Brooks, Hoover, Ingle, Kaczmarczyk, Martin, Reid, Stelzig, 

and Ulrich. 

The Interdivisional Program of Agricultural Biochemistry of the College 
of Agriculture and Forestry offers graduate studies leading to the degrees of 
Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Each student selects and 
conducts research in the broad areas of biochemical genetics, nutritional 
biochemistry, or plant biochemistry. The research project selected by the 
student represents the base upon which the graduate program is built. 

The objective of the agricultural biochemistry graduate program is to 
prepare the student for a career in biochemistry in agricultural, biological, 
food and veterinary medical sciences. Each student, in concert with the 
adviser and graduate committee, will design the student's research program 
at the beginning of the first semester. The student and adviser then prepare 
the research proposal which, when approved by the graduate committee, will 
become the distinguishing feature of the program and, when completed, will 
provide the data for the thesis or dissertation. 

In addition to the admission requirements on page 383, students must 
have an overall grade-point average of at least 2.5 in general, analytical, 
organic, and physical chemistry. Deficiencies in these courses may be 
removed during the first year of graduate enrollment if prior consent is 
obtained from the agricultural biochemistry faculty. Courses in biology and 
physiology are beneficial, though not required, for admission. 

Master of Science 

The Master of Science (M.S.) degree in Agricultural Biochemistry 
combines the academic and research programs of the student, yielding a 
biochemist prepared for a career in agricultural, biological, food, or veterinary 
medical sciences. The academic program is composed of graduate courses and 
selected supporting courses in genetics, physiology, nutrition, or plant 
sciences. The student will be advised by a committee of three or more faculty. 
Thirty hours of graduate credit is required for the degree, of which no more 
than 6 hours may be for research. The research program terminates with a 

AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 19 



thesis which is presented to the graduate committee and defended in a 
comprehensive examination. 

Doctor of Philosophy 

The program for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) is a research- 
oriented, advanced-level study tailored to the interests of the motivated 
student. This program offers the student the opportunity to conduct original 
research, with course work providing the base from which this independent 
study is launched. The student, aided by graduate-student and faculty 
exchange in seminar, laboratory, and formal courses, becomes prepared for 
the candidacy examinations, which are taken at the end of the first year. 

The candidacy examinations are administered to the student by the 
student's graduate committee, usually five members, and contain a written 
and an oral part. The student is given one written examination by each 
committee member during the first week, and upon the satisfactory completion 
of these, the oral examination is administered during the following week. 

Research is generally initiated during the first semester or when the 
committee and student feel it is appropriate for that individual. The student 
begins the original research, in association with the adviser, and upon its 
completion the research is presented to the committee as a Ph.D. dissertation. 
This work is defended by the candidate in a final oral examination, given as a 
seminar open to the public, and followed by the committee examination. 

Agricultural Biochemistry (Ag. Bi.) 

210. Introductory Biochemistry. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 8 hr. General chemistry, Chem. 131 or 
equiv. Introduction to the chemistry of cellular constituents (proteins, amino 
acids, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, enzymes and coenzymes) and their 
metabolism in animals and plants. 

211. Introductory Biochemistry Laboratory. I. 1 hr. Cone: Ag. Bi. 210. Experiments to 
demonstrate certain principles and properties of animal and plant biochemicals. 

212. Nutritional Biochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210 or consent. Nutritional 
biochemistry of domestic animals. 

213. Nutritional Biochemistry Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210, 211; Cone: Ag. Bi. 
212. Experiments to determine the nutritional constituents in animal and plant 
tissues. 

310. General Biochemistry. 1. 4 hr. PR: 8 hr. organic chemistry. The first half of a general 
course of biochemistry designed for graduate students of biological sciences. The 
course emphasizes the chemical properties of cellular constituents. 

311. Laboratory Experiments in Biochemistry. I. 2 hr. PR or Cone: Ag. Bi. 310. 
Experiments designed to demonstrate some of the basic tools and procedures of 
biochemical research. 

312. General Biochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310 or consent. The second half of a 
general course of biochemistry designed for graduate students of biological 
sciences. The course emphasizes reactions and control of intermediary metabolism. 

414. Enzymes. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312 or consent. A survey of enzymology covering 
general principles as well as current concepts and methods. 

415. Advanced Biochemistry Laboratory. II. 2 hr. PR or Cone: Ag. Bi. 312. Experiments 
in the areas of intermediary metabolism and enzymology. 

20 AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 



416. Vitamin and Coenzyme Biochemistry. II. 2 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312, or Bioch. 231, or 
consent. Chemical and physical properties, analysis, biosynthesis, metabolism, 
pathobiology, pharmacology, and toxicology of vitamins, vitamin-like compounds, 
and coenzymes. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

422. Plant Biochemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312 or consent. Advanced treatment of the 
composition and metabolism of plants. Topics include cell wall structure, sulfur 
and nitrogen metabolism, and photosynthesis. (Offered in Fall of odd years.] 

424. Advanced Nutritional Biochemistry. I. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310, 311, 312 or consent. 
Advanced treatment of the biochemistry and metabolism of amino acids, carbo- 
hydrates and lipids in the diets of ruminants and nonruminants. (Offered in Fall of 
even years.] 

428. Biomembranes and Muscle Biochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312, or Bioch. 231, or 
consent. Chemical, organization, and physiological aspects of membranes and 
muscles; molecular and cellular interactions and integrative mechanisms. 3 hr. lee. 
(Offered in Spring of even years.] 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigations of biochemistry in 
animal and plant systems. Study may be independent, with staff approval, or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Presentation and discussion of current topics in 
agricultural biochemistry, membrane biophysics, and biochemical genetics. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in biochemical genetics, nutritional biochem- 
istry, or plant biochemistry under staff supervision for agricultural biochemistry 
majors. 

NOTE: See other courses listed under "Biochemistry." 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 

Virgil J. Norton, Chairperson of Division of Resource Management 
2018 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Colyer, Jack, Nesselroad, and Smith. Associate Members 
Barr, D'Souza, Eagan, Ferrise, Hock, Mcintosh, Norton, and Templeton 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Master of Science in Agricultural Economics provides advanced 
training in the areas of agricultural, resource, and rural development 
economics. The degree prepares students for further graduate study and a 
wide variety of careers in business and government. 

Requirements for Admission 

Students seeking the degree of Master of Science in Agricultural 
Economics may be accepted for graduate study on a regular or provisional 
basis. The Admissions Committee reviews and evaluates all applications. 

In addition to general requirements on page 383, students must have: 

1. Twelve or more semester credits in economics, agricultural economics, 
statistics, or appropriate social science courses (should include principles of 
economics). 

2. Three or more semester hours of credit in calculus. (May be made up 
after admission but not for graduate credit.) 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 21 



3. A grade-point average of 2.75 for all credit in economics and agricultural 
economics. 

Options and Plan of Study 

A thesis or course work option may be selected. Students should select 
the option by the time 12 hours of course work are completed and after 
consulting with their graduate committees. Candidates with graduate re- 
search assistantships should select the thesis option. 

Thesis Option— A minimum of 30 credit hours of approved work to 
include not more than 6 hours of credit for the thesis, and enough courses to 
provide proficiency in economics and agricultural economics. Courses in 
closely related social sciences may be included. The student's graduate 
committee must approve the student's course of study and thesis topic. 

Course Work Option— A minimum of 36 credit hours of approved course 
work to provide proficiency in economics and agricultural economics. 
Courses in closely related social sciences may be included if approved by the 
student's graduate committee. 

Plan of Study— Each candidate's plan of study is developed by the 
student in consultation with his/her major professor and graduate committee. 
Normally, the plan of study will include graduate-level courses in economic 
theory, statistics, and agricultural economics. The plan of study should be 
developed during the first full term of study. 

Standards of Achievement 

A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 is required for all graduate credit 
courses taken as part of the approved program for the degree. This includes 
graduate credit transferred and graduate credit accumulated while pursuing a 
degree in agricultural economics. Persons requesting transfers of graduate 
credit must obtain approval of their graduate committee for such transfers. 

Examinations 

Thesis Option— Satisfactory completion of an oral examination and, at 
the discretion of the student's graduate committee, a written examination. 

Course Work Option— Satisfactory completion of a written and an oral 
examination. 

Agricultural Economics (Ag. Ec.) 

200. Land Economics. II. 3 hr. Classification, development, tenure, use, conservation, 
valuation, and taxation of rural, urban, mineral, forest, water, and recreational 
land resources. Private and public rights in land and the effect of population on the 
demand for land. 

206. Farm Planning. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Ec. 104 or consent. Planning use of labor, soil, crops, 
livestock, buildings and equipment; principal factors influencing returns on 
farms. (Farm visits required.) 

211. Rural Economic Development. I or II. 3 hr. Resource utilization, economic behavior 
and economic systems and subsystems, trade, public revenue and its allocation, 
distribution of income, manpower problems, development policies, and region- 
alization in rural areas. 

231. Marketing Agricultural Products. I or II. 3 hr. Market organization, policies, 
practices, and factors affecting the marketing of agricultural products. (Tour of 
market agencies and facilities required.} 

22 AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 



235. Marketing Dairy Products. II. 2 hr. Milk-marketing policies and practices, 
including milk-market orders. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

240. Agricultural Prices. I. 3 hr. Analysis of price-making forces which operate in the 
market places for the major agricultural commodities. 

261. Agribusiness Finance. II. 3 hr. Credit needs for agricultural businesses, financing 
farm and market-agency firms, and organization and operation of credit agencies 
which finance agricultural business firms. 

271. Agricultural Policy. II. 3 hr. Examination of economic aspects of governmental 
price programs, production and marketing controls, subsidies, parity, export and 
import policies, and other programs affecting agriculture. 

330. Cooperative Organization. II. 3 hr. Organization, functions, and contributions of 
cooperatives in an economic system. 

342. International Agricultural Economic Development. I. 3 hr. Current problems, 
theories, policies, and strategies in planning for agricultural and rural development 
for increased food production and to improve the well-being of rural people in the 
developing countries of the world. 

343. Agricultural Project Analysis and Evaluation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design, 
analysis, and evaluation of development projects; economic and financial aspects 
of project analysis; identification and measures of comparing projects costs and 
benefits; preparation of feasibility reports. 

355. Resource Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Construction of models consistent 
with economic reality for allocating the factors of production available on farms, 
in forests, and in nonfarm agricultural businesses to produce profit maximizing 
plans through use of linear and dynamic programming and electronic equipment. 

431. Advanced Agricultural Marketing. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Structure of agricultural 
marketing; economic theory as applied to agricultural marketing with emphasis on 
theoretical and practical applications. 

440. Advanced Farm Management. I. 3 hr. 

441. Production Economics. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Economic principles of production 
with special application to agriculture. 

Resource Management (Res. M.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION 

Virgil J. Norton, Chairperson of Division of Resource Management 

2018 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Gartin and Lawrence. Associate Members Bean and Odell. 

The agricultural education faculty offers master's programs for persons 
desiring advanced study in teaching vocational agriculture or in agricultural 
extension education. Candidates for the Master of Science degree in Agricul- 
tural Education may be admitted on a regular or provisional basis. A student 
who does not have a B.S. in Agriculture with a major in agricultural education 
may be required to complete undergraduate courses in agriculture and 
professional education which are prerequisites to essential graduate courses. 

AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION 23 



Students shall combine graduate courses in agriculture and professional 
education by taking 16 to 20 hours in agriculture and 10 to 14 hours in 
education. Programs are planned to ensure that candidates develop an 
understanding of: 

— The teaching/learning process. 

—The design and operation of instructional programs in agriculture. 

—Research and evaluation processes. 

—The philosophy and purposes of public agricultural education. 

All graduate courses offered toward the degree must be approved by the 
student's adviser. A thesis is required as a part of the 30-hour graduation 
requirement. 

Agricultural Education (Ag. Ed.) 

260. Principles of Cooperative Extension. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Background, philosophy, 
and history of cooperative extension. Activities of county cooperative extension 
agents and cooperative extension programs in West Virginia. 

261. Methods and Materials in Extension Education. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Organization 
and preparation for extension teaching and the processes of communication. 
(Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

263. Teaching Young, Adult Farmer, and Off-Farm Agricultural Occupations Classes. 
I. 2 hr. PR: Ed. P. 105, 106 or consent. Participation in conducting young farmer, 
adult farmer, and off-farm agricultural occupations classes; organization, course 
of study, method in teaching, and supervision of classes, young farmers' associ- 
ations, adult farmers' organizations and off-farm agricultural occupations organi- 
zations. (Also listed as C&I 263.) 

264. Cooperative Vocational Education. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Preparation for planning, 
organizing, and conducting high school programs of cooperative vocational 
education, and familiarization with business organization and operation. (Also 
listed as C&I 264.) 

362. Program Building in Cooperative Extension. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Organization in 
relation to program building. Leadership and group action. Overall working and 
educational objectives, principles, method, and goals in developing county 
extension programs. [Offered in Spring of even years.) 

364. Organizing and Directing Supervised Farming and Supervised Occupational 
Experience Programs. S. 2 hr. PR: Ag. Ed. 160 or consent. Planning programs of 
supervised farming and supervised occupational experience; supervising and 
evaluating such programs for day students, young farmer, adult farmer, and 
off-farm agricultural occupations classes and groups. [Also listed as C&I 364.) 

460. Planning Programs and Courses for Vocational Agriculture Departments. S. 2 hr. 
PR: Ag. Ed. 160, 188. Gathering data, studying farming and off-farm agricultural 
occupations problems of day students, young farmers, adult farmers, and off-farm 
agricultural occupational groups and formulating total programs for school 
communities. [Also listed as C&I 460.) 

492. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Overview and analysis of problems, literature, and 
research in agricultural education. 

Resource Management 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

24 AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION 



AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY 

Gary K. Bissonnette, In Charge of Graduate Program in Agricultural Microbiology 

401 Brooks Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Anderson, Bissonnette, Hindal, Morton, and Sexstone. 

The graduate curriculum in agricultural microbiology in the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry places emphasis on the interrelationships of 
microorganisms and their environments. Options leading to the M.S. and 
Ph.D. degrees are designed to prepare students with specialization in 
microbiology as applied to soil, water, wastewater, agriculture, and food. 

The teaching and research faculty have special interests in the areas of 
environmental microbiology, biotransformation of environmental pollutants, 
pollution abatement, public health and sanitary aspects of aquatic, terrestrial, 
and food environments, and the general microbial ecology of such environ- 
ments. 

Graduate training is designed to offer qualified students a broad 
background in the environmental sciences through cooperation with other 
disciplines in the College of Agriculture and Forestry, College of Arts and 
Sciences, College of Engineering, and School of Medicine. A thesis (M.S.) or 
dissertation (Ph.D.) is required. Admission requirements are those listed on 
page 383. 

Agricultural Microbiology (Ag. Micro.) 

201. Environmental Microbiology. II. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 or consent. Microbiology 
as applied to soil, water, wastewater, sewage, air, and the general environment. 
Occurrence, distribution, ecology, and detection of microorganisms in these 
environments. 

347. Food Microbiology. I. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 and Ag. Bi. 210, or consent. Ecology 
and physiology of microorganisms important in the manufacture and deterioration 
of foods. Techniques for the microbiological examination of foods. (Offered in Fall 
of odd years.) 

348. Sanitary Microbiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 or consent. Microbiology and 
health hazards associated with food handling, water treatment, and sanitary 
waste disposal. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

Plant Science (PI. So) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 



AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY 25 



AGRICULTURE 

Robert H. Maxwell, Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry 

1170 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: M.Agr. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Anderson, Baker, Balasko, Baugher, G. K. 
Bissonnette, Blizzard, Brooks, Bryan, Butler, Colyer, Dailey, Diener, Gartin, Hindal, 
Hogmire, Hoover, Horvath, Ingle, Inskeep, Jack, Jencks, Jordan, Kaczmarczyk, 
Keefer, Koes, Kotcon, Kvashny, Lawrence, Lewis, MacDonald, Martin, Morton, Nath, 
Nesselroad, Norton, Prigge, Reid, Sencindiver, Sexstone, Singh, Singha, D. K. Smith, 
Stelzig, Ulrich, Wagner, and R. J. Young. Associate Members D. R. Armstrong, 
Baniecki, Barr, Barratt, Bean, Bearce, Boyer, Collier, Dozsa, D'Souza, Eagan, Elliott, 
Ferrise, Galvin, Hickman, Hock, Karther, Kimmons, Longenecker, Lynch, McBride, 
Mcintosh, Odell, Osborne, Peterson, Skousen, P. M. Smith, Sperow, Templeton, van 
Eck, Weaver, Yoder, R. S. Young, Yuill, Zimmerman, and D. W. Zinn. 

Students desiring this degree must obtain approval from the Master of 
Agriculture Committee and meet the minimum admission requirements on 
page 383. The committee charged with administering the degree program is 
appointed by the Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry. The 
student's baccalaureate degree should be in a field sufficiently related to the 
course of study contemplated to provide the necessary background. A student 
whose baccalaureate degree is in a field considered not sufficiently related to 
the study contemplated may be admitted as a regular or provisional student 
until specific requirements are met or the student may be admitted on the 
basis of evidence of satisfactory professional experience. 

Requirements. Satisfactory completion of 36 hours of course work is 
required for this degree. The student will select a minimum of 27 hours from 
the course offerings of the three divisions in the College of Agriculture 
(Divisions of Animal and Veterinary Sciences, Plant and Soil Sciences, and 
Resource Management). A minimum of 9 hours will be selected from the 
offerings of each division. No more than 3 hours of special topics or advanced 
study from each division may be counted towards the degree. A 3-hour 
problem report may be included at the option of the student and the program 
committee. 

The student may choose the additional courses from within the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry or from offerings of other colleges and schools of 
WVU. An overall grade-point average of 3.0 is required for graduate courses 
included as part of the approved program for the degree. Upon completion of 
the course work, each candidate must undergo a written and oral examination 
by the candidate's graduate committee. 

The graduate committee of each candidate shall have one member of the 
administering committee as a member. This member shall not be the 
chairperson or student adviser. 

Agriculture (Ag.) 

200. Agricultural Travel Course. S. 1-6 hr. Tour and study of production methods in 
major livestock and crop regions of the United States and other countries. 
Influence of population, climate, soil, topography, markets, labor, and other 
factors on agricultural production. 

360. Problem Report for the Degree of Master of Agriculture. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. 



26 AGRICULTURE 



AGRONOMY 

Robert F. Keefer, In Charge of Graduate Program in Agronomy 
1108 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Baker, Balasko, Bryan, Jencks, Keefer, Singh, and Sencin- 
diver. Associate Members Boyer, Sperow, and van Eck. 

The agronomy faculty in the College of Agriculture and Forestry offers 
the Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy degrees. Agronomy is 
customarily divided into crop sciences and soil sciences and deals with the 
problems in plant development and crop production and the properties and 
uses of soils. 

Thesis and dissertation problems in crop sciences are selected in forage 
production, forage quality, forage/livestock systems, grazing management, 
brush and weed control in forage crops, and intercropping of annual forage 
crops. In soil sciences, the problems are selected in the areas of pre-mining 
overburden analyses and minesoils properties, characteristics and utilization 
of sewage sludge, flyash and other soil amendments, and mineral nutrition of 
crops or other soils problems. Research problems change in response to needs 
of the state and region. Cooperative research with other units of WVU, and 
with research units in other states and overseas, are undertaken as the need 
and opportunity occurs. 

Facilities for graduate research include several farms, greenhouses, 
growth chambers, modern laboratories, and specialized equipment. 

The student must have a bachelor's degree from any approved college and 
an adequate background in the physical and biological sciences. Admission 
requirements are those listed on page 383. Additional undergraduate work 
may be required according to the needs of the field of specialization of the 
student. The courses required for graduate study will vary depending on the 
crops and soils emphasis. They are developed in consultation with the 
student's adviser and advisory committee. Normally, a candidate for a Ph.D. 
degree in Agronomy (Crops or Soils) is required to have completed an M.S. 
degree. 

Ph.D. students wishing to emphasize entomology or horticulture enroll in 
the Crop Science option of the graduate program in agronomy. (See Entomology 
and Horticulture courses listed in Part 2.) 

Agronomy (Crop Science) (Agron.) 

251. Weed Control. I. 3 hr. PR: Pi. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. Fundamental principles of 
weed control. Recommended control measures for and identification of common 
weeds. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

252. Grain and Special Crops. II. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. Advanced 
study of methods in the production of grain and special crops. Varieties, 
improvement, tillage, harvesting, storage, and uses of crops grown for seed or 
special purposes. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

254. Pasture and Forage Crops. I. 4 hr. PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. All phases of 
pasture and forage crop production, including identification, seeding, management, 
use, seed production, and storage of forage crops. (3 lee, 1 lab.) 

325. Forage Harvesting and Storage. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254, or consent. Advanced study 
of processes associated with harvesting and storage of forages. 3 hr. lee. (Offered 
in Fall of odd years.) 

354. Pasture Managment and Utilization. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254 and An. Nu. 101, or 
consent. Advanced study of pastures and their management and utilization with 
emphasis on temperate species. 3 hr. lee. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

AGRONOMY 27 



374. Tropical Grasslands. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254 and An. Nu. 101, or consent. Advanced 
study of tropical grasslands and their management and utilization in animal 
production. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent. 
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, empha- 
sizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utilization by 
herbivorous animals. (Also listed as An. Nu. 432.) (Offered in Spring of even 
years.) (3 hr.lec) 

Agronomy (Soil Science) (Agron.) 

210. Soil Fertility. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Soil properties in relation to fertility and 
productivity of soils; scrutiny of essential plant nutrients; use of fertilizers and 
lime; evaluation of soil fertility. 

212. Soil Conservation and Management. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Using soil 
technology to solve soil management problems relating to cropping systems. Field 
diagnosis of soil problems stressed. (2 lee, 2 lab.) 

230. Soil Physics. II. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Physical properties of soils, water and air 
relationships and their influence on soil productivity. (Offered in Spring of even 
years.) 

255. Reclamation of Disturbed Soils. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Pedologic definitions and 
principles will be applied to advance planning and analysis, handling and 
placement, reclamation, and revegetation practices, and continuing use of disturbed 
soils resulting from mining and urbanization activities. (Field trip required.) 

315. Soil Genesis and Classification. 1. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Origin and formation of 
soils. Study of soil profiles and soil-forming processes in field and laboratory. 
Principles of classification and techniques of soil mapping. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Saturday 
field trips required.) (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

410. Advanced Soil Fertility. II. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 210, Biol. 169 or consent. Influence of 
soil chemical and physical properties on availability of plant nutrients; intensive 
study of individual plant nutrients and interactions of nutrients in soils and crops. 
(Offered in Spring of even years.) 

416. Soil Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Chemistry of soil development; chemical and 
mineralogical composition of soils; nature and properties of organic and inorganic 
soil colloids; cation and anion exchange phenomena; soil chemistry of macro- and 
micro-nutrients. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

418. Chemistry of Soil Organic Matter. II. 3 hr. PR: Organic chemistry or consent. 
Chemical composition of soil organic matter studied in relation to its physico- 
chemical properties and humus formation. Methods involving extraction, frac- 
tionation, and purification of soil organic components examined. 2 lee, 1 lab. 
(Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

421. Identification of Clay Minerals in Soil. II. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry or consent. 
Characterization of clay minerals is an important aspect in soils, geology, civil 
engineering, and related fields. Study of methods used in qualitative and 
quantitative identification of these secondary minerals in soils and rocks. 1 lee, 2 
lab. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 



28 AGRONOMY 



451. Seminar in Micropedoiogy. I. 2 or 3 hr. PR: Second-year graduate and consent. 
Principles of optical mineralogy and of the polarizing microscope as applied to the 
study of soil minerals and soil fabrics. {Offered in Fall of even years.) 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

ANATOMY 

James L. Culberson, Acting Chairperson of the Department 
4052 Basic Sciences Building 
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Beresford, Burr, Cilento, Culberson, Overman, Pinkstaff, 
Reilly, and Walker. Associate Members Friedman, Hilloowala, and Pope. 

The Department of Anatomy in the School of Medicine offers graduate 
programs which are committed to the training of competent researchers and 
capable teachers. This is accomplished by the completion of a carefully 
designed plan of study tailored to the individual student's interests. The 
program begins with instruction in basic morphological, developmental, and 
functional aspects of human anatomy. Additional related course work and 
electives are required. These selected courses strengthen the area of interest 
of the student. The student then conducts an original research project which 
culminates in a dissertation (Ph.D.) or a thesis (M.S.). 

Admission Requirements 

In addition to the admission procedure of the University, the Department 
of Anatomy requires that each applicant complete a departmental application 
form obtained from the department. After an application is favorably 
reviewed by the departmental graduate studies committee, applicants are 
invited for a personal interview whenever practical. The applicant is 
admitted by a majority vote of the departmental graduate faculty. 

It is recommended that the following courses be completed before 
entering the graduate program: algebra, trigonometry, general physics, 
inorganic and organic chemistry, general biology or zoology, comparative 
anatomy, embryology, genetics, cell biology or general physiology, and two 
years of French, German, or Russian. At the discretion of the department, a 
student may be allowed to complete a limited number of prerequisites after 
enrolling in the program. A grade-point average above 3.0 is desirable. The 
aptitude portion and an advanced section of the Graduate Record Examination 
are generally required. Also, three letters of recommendation from persons 
who can best evaluate the applicant's potential for graduate study should 
either accompany the application or be mailed to the Department of Anatomy 
separately. Applicants desiring consideration for financial aid should complete 
the application process as early as possible. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The first year of study usually consists of required course work within 
the Department of Anatomy. These courses include gross anatomy, micro 

ANATOMY 29 



anatomy, neurobiology, introduction to research, and seminar in anatomy. 
Required courses in other basic medical sciences, such as biochemistry and 
physiology, are usually taken in the second year. Twelve hours of additional 
graduate-level courses are also required. These requirements will have been 
satisfied when the student earns a grade of at least B in each of the courses 
taken in the Department of Anatomy and has maintained a 2.75 overall 
grade-point average. 

To be admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree, the student must satisfy 
the above requirements, pass a written and oral comprehensive preliminary 
examination, and prepare a plan for a research project to be undertaken for the 
dissertation. To be recommended for the Ph.D. degree, each student must 
complete a dissertation based on original research and defend the dissertation 
at an oral examination. 

This program allows flexibility for each student. The precise plan of 
study is designed by the student and an advisory committee that is composed 
of faculty members selected by the student. 

The student often culminates the training period with presentations at 
regional and/or national scientific meetings. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The master's program in anatomy is offered as a terminal degree 
primarily for students in certain specialized fields, such as physical therapy 
or in a conjoint program in dentistry or medicine. It is not necessary for the 
student to complete the M.S. degree in order to qualify for admission into the 
Ph.D. program, although the student may elect to complete the requirements 
for this degree in progress toward the Ph.D. 

An applicant who shows a special need for the M.S. degree must generally 
be as well qualified as applicants for the doctoral program. The M.S. student 
must complete courses in gross anatomy and microanatomy and 6 to 9 hours 
of required and elective courses. A 2.75 grade-point average must be 
maintained. In addition to course work, the student must complete a thesis 
based on original research and defend the thesis at an oral comprehensive 
examination. 

Research and Instruction 

Gross anatomy: anatomical variations and anomalies, and electromyo- 
graphic studies of specific muscle groups; 

Microscopic anatomy: studies of cells, tissues and organs, under normal 
and experimental conditions with in vivo microscopic, histochemical, electron 
microscopic, autoradiographic, and fluorescent techniques; 

Developmental anatomy: experimental and descriptive embryology, 
cellular differentiation, and dedifferentiation, regeneration and the effects of 
drugs and other environmental agents on development; 

Neuroanatomy: experimental, comparative, and embryological studies of 
specific nerve cell groups and nerve pathways in the spinal cord, brain stem, 
cerebellum, and cerebrum. 

Anatomy (Anat.) 

301. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Trunk. (For medical and a limited number of 
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 5 hr. PR: 
Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross anatomical study of the 
back, thorax, abdomen, pelvis, and perineum emphasizing clinically-related 
concepts. 

30 ANATOMY 



302. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Head-Neck. (For medical and a limited 
number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 3 
hr. PR: Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross anatomical 
study of the head and neck emphasizing clinically-related concepts. 

304. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Extremities. (For medical students and a 
limited number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic 
sciences.) I. 2 hr. PR: Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross 
anatomical and developmental study of the upper and lower limbs emphasizing 
clinically-related concepts. 

305. Microanatomy. (For medical students and a limited number of regular full-time 
graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) II. 5 hr. PR: Medical student 
standing or consent of chairperson. Cells, tissues, and organs. 

306. Gross Anatomy of the Trunk and Extremities. (For dental students and a limited 
number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 4 
hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent of instructor or chairperson. Gross 
anatomical study of the back, upper extremities, thorax, abdomen, and pelvis. 

307. Gross Anatomy of the Head and Neck and Neuroanatomy. (For dental students 
and a limited number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic 
sciences.) II. 5 hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent of instructor or 
chairperson. Gross anatomical study of the head and neck and a brief gross and 
microscopic anatomical study of the central nervous system. 

308. Neuroanatomy. (For students in physical therapy and a limited number of regular 
full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences, and students in other 
health sciences.) II. 2 hr. PR: Consent of instructor or chairperson. Gross and 
microscopic structure of the central nervous system. 

309. Microanatomy and Organology. (For dental students and a limited number of 
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 5 hr. PR: 
Dental student standing or consent of chairperson. Cells, tissues, and organs. 

312. Special Topics in Anatomy. I, II. 2-4 hr. per. sem. PR: Anat. 301 or 306; and Anat. 
305 or 309; consent of chairperson. Different topics of current interest in anatomy 
that are not included in the regular graduate courses. 

314. Applied Anatomy. I, II. 2-6 hr. per sem. PR: Consent of instructor or chairperson. 
Detailed study of anatomy adapted to the needs of the individual student. 

316. Craniofacial Growth and Maturation. I. 3 hr. PR: Anat. 315 or consent of 
instructor. The current concepts of craniofacial growth and maturation are 
presented and integrated for application to clinical problems. 

318. Oral Histology and Embryology. (For dental students and a limited number of 
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) II. 2 hr. PR: 
Dental student standing or consent of instructor or chairperson. Structure, 
function, and development of oral tissues. 

319. Advanced Head and Neck Anatomy. II. 1 hr. PR: Dental, medical, or graduate 
student, or consent. Advanced head and neck craniofacial embryology and related 
functions as they apply to specialties in dental or medical practice. 

401. Advanced Gross Anatomy. I, II. 2-6 hr. per sem. PR: Anat. 301, 302, 304, or 306, 307, 
and consent of instructor or chairperson. Morphological and functional analysis of 
a selected region, with dissection. 



ANATOMY 31 



402. Advanced Developmental Anatomy. II. 2-4 per sem. PR: Anat. 301, 302, 304, and 
consent of instructor or chairperson. Detailed developmental anatomy of the fetal 
period and infancy. With dissections and analysis of variations and malformations. 

403. Seminar. I, II. 1-6 hr. (1 hr. per sem.) (Course may be repeated.) PR: Consent of 
Graduate Committee. Special topics of current or historical interest. 

405. Experimental Embryology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Embryology and 
cellular physiology and biochemistry and consent of instructor or chairperson. 
Development, differentiation, and regeneration. 

406. Advanced Neuroanatomy. I. 2-4 hr. per sem. (Course may be repeated.) PR: CC MD 
375 and consent of instructor or chairperson. Detailed study of selected areas of 
the nervous system. 

408. Histochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Anat. 305 or 309, biochemistry, and consent of 
instructor or chairperson. Histochemical theory and techniques. (Offered in odd 
numbered years.) 

451. Advanced Microanatomy. I, II, or S. 2-4 hr. PR: Anat. 305 or 309, or Biol. 263 and 
consent of instructor or chairperson. An extension of the major topics included in 
Anat. 305 or 309. Special emphasis on recent contributions. 

490. Teaching Practicum I and II. 1-3 hr. Consent of chairperson. Supervised practice in 
college teaching of anatomy. Graded a S or U. 

491. Advanced Anatomy. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent of chairperson. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent of Graduate Committee. (May be repeated as 
needed with consent of Graduate Studies Committee.) 

ANIMAL NUTRITION 

Paul E. Lewis, Chairperson of Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences 
G-038 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Hoover, Horvath, Martin, Prigge, and Reid. Associate 
Members Peterson and Thomas. 

The Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences offers a Doctor of 
Philosophy in Animal Nutrition which allows maximum flexibility in courses 
and research problems. Students may work with beef and dairy cattle, sheep, 
swine, poultry, or laboratory animals. Research problems in domestic 
animals form the basis for many studies, but a comparative approach is 
emphasized. 

Admission requirements are similar to those in other biological sciences. 
The student should have completed basic courses in the physical and 
biological sciences, including genetics, nutrition, and physiology. In addition, 
analytical chemistry and organic chemistry (one year) are required. Deficien- 
cies may prolong the time needed to complete degree programs. 

Admission requirements are listed on page 383. Applicants meeting the 
above requirements are not guaranteed admission since each professor will 
accept only the number of advisees which can be supervised adequately with 
available facilities, time, and funds. All students prior to the completion of 
this degree must accumulate no fewer than 6 credit hours at the 300 or 400 
level or equivalent in each of the following disciplines: agricultural or medical 
biochemistry, statistics, and animal nutrition. 

See courses listed under the Animal and Veterinary Sciences Master of 
Science Degree Program, pages 33-35. 

32 ANIMAL NUTRITION 



ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 

Paul E. Lewis, Chairperson of Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences 

G-038 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Dailey, Hoover, Horvath, Inskeep, Jordan, Lewis, Martin, 

Prigge, Reid, and Wagner. Associate Members Dozsa, Kidder, Osborne, Peterson, 

Smith, Thomas, Welch, and Zinn. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Master of Science in Animal and Veterinary Sciences in the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry allows maximum flexibility in courses and research 
problems. Students may emphasize physiology, production, breeding, nutri- 
tion, food, or veterinary sciences. They may work with beef and dairy cattle, 
sheep, swine, poultry, or laboratory animals. Research problems in farm 
animals form the basis for many studies, but a comparative approach is 
emphasized. 

Admission requirements are listed on page 383. Additional requirements 
are similar to those in other biological sciences. The student should have 
completed basic courses in the physical and biological sciences, including 
genetics, nutrition, and physiology. Deficiencies may prolong the time needed 
to complete degree programs. 

A composite Graduate Record Examination score of 1,000 or better will be 
considered as a basis of admission. The fact that an applicant meets the above 
requirements shall not guarantee admission since each professor will accept 
only the number of advisees which can be supervised adequately with 
available facilities, time, and funds. 

A minimum of 24 approved hours of course work and a thesis are required 
for all master of science degrees. 

Animal and Veterinary Science (A&vs) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (1 hr. credit in special cases only). Advanced study in 
particular phases of such animal science topics as animal production, nutrition, 
physiology, breeding and genetics, veterinary science, and food. (For the Master's 
Degree, Special Topics ordinarily may count 2 to 4 hr.; max. credit, 6 hr.). 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in animal nutrition, physiology, breeding and 
production, and veterinary science. 

Animal Nutrition (An. Nu.) 

301. Principles of Nutrition and Metabolism. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210 or consent. A basic 
course in principles of nutrition with emphasis on the major classes of dietary 
nutrients and their digestion and utilization. 

302. Nutrition and Physiological Function. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent. 
Sequence to An. Nu. 301. Techniques used in nutritional studies and the 
relationship of nutrient requirements to physiological function in species of 
laboratory and domestic animals and man. 

430. Rumen Metabolism and Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in biochemistry. The 
anatomy and physiology of the forestomachs of ruminants and the rumen 
microbial population. Emphasis on the microbial metabolism as it pertains to the 
utilization of feeds by ruminants. (Offered in Fall of odd years.] 

ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 33 



432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent. 
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, empha- 
sizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utilitzation by 
herbivorous animals. (Also listed as Agron. 432.) (Offered in Spring of even 
years.) 

434. Minerai Nutrition of Animals. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent. Mineral 
nutrition of livestock and man; soil-plant-animal interactions. Detailed treatment 
of function of individual elements and their involvement in deficiency and toxicity 
conditions on an international basis. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (Repeat registration permitted for maximum of 6 
credit hours per year.) Topics in advanced nutrition. Subject will be selected by 
staff for formal presentation. 

Animal Physiology and Breeding (An. Ph.) 

200. Animal Growth and Lactation Physiology. 3 hr. PR: An. Ph. 100, or consent. 
Animal life cycles; nature of growth and lactation; effects of biological, environ- 
mental, and social-psychological variants; physiological regulation and control. 

204. Animal Physiology Laboratory. I. 2 hr. PR: An. Ph. 100 or consent. Laboratory 
study of the physiological systems of animals and the influences of environment 
on these systems. 

225. Physiology of Reproduction. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in biology. Comparative 
physiology of reproduction in higher animals; endocrine functions involved in 
reproduction; genetic and environmental variations in fertility mechanisms. 

226. Breeding of Farm Animals. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in genetics or consent. Application of 
principles of quantitative genetics to the improvement of farm animals. 

280. Behavioral Patterns of Domestic Animals. II. 3 hr. Examination of the bases for 
exhibition and control of behavioral patterns of domestic animals. 1 lab. 

425. Endocrinology of Reproduction. II. 4 hr. (2 labs.). PR: An. Ph. 225 or Biol. 268 or 
equiv. Discussion of and laboratory experience in classical and current concepts of 
hormonal and neurohormonal regulations of reproductive phenomena with empha- 
sis on species differences and similarities. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

426. Advanced Animal Selection. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in statistics and course in genetics 
or equiv. An advanced course dealing with the basic concepts of experimental and 
statistical approaches in the analysis of quantitative inheritance with special 
reference to the magnitude and nature of genotypic and nongenotypic variability. 
(Offered in Spring of even years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. 

Animal Production (An. Pr.) 

240. Poultry Production. I. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101. Special phases of broiler and egg 
production, disease control, labor-saving studies, and recent designs in housing 
and equipment for all types of poultry. 1 lab. 

250. Current Literature in Animal Science. I. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101. Evaluation of 
current research in animal science and its application to production and manage- 
ment. 

422. Advanced Milk Production. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101 or consent. Advanced study of 
the feeding, breeding, and management of dairy cattle. 

34 ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 



Food Science (Fd. Sc.) 

267. Advanced Meat Science. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Fd. Sc. 167. Theoretical and experimental 
aspects of meat science, meat product/process systems, and the quantitative 
biology of muscle systems used for food. 

Veterinary Science (Vet. s.) 

205. Parasitology. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in biology or consent. Common parasites of farm 
animals, their life cycles, effects on the host, diagnosis, control, and public health 
importance. 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

210. Principles of Laboratory Animal Science. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent for undergraduates. 
The management, genetics, physiology, nutrition, disease, and germ-free quartering 
of common laboratory animals. 1 lab. 

ART 

Urban Couch, Chairperson, Division of Art and Graduate Adviser 
419-A Creative Arts Center 
Degrees Offered: M.A., M.F.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Anderson, Couch, Freedman, Harvey, Rajam, and Thomas. 
Associate Members Colangelo, Faulkes, Lucas, and Schultz. 

The graduate programs in art lead to a Master of Arts in Art (one to two 
years or 30 credit hours) and to a Master of Fine Arts in Visual Art (two to 
three years or 60 hours). Both of these programs are highly selective and 
closely integrated parts of the professional education in art offered by the 
Division of Art. All applicants are expected to have artistic maturity and the 
motivation to achieve excellence in their areas of concentration. 

The Division of Art is an accredited institutional member of the National 
Association of Schools of Art, the only nationally recognized accrediting 
agency for professional art instruction. Applicants to programs in art must 
comply with the standards for admission set by West Virginia University, the 
College of Creative Arts, and the Division of Art. 

All students enter the graduate programs in art as probationary candi- 
dates. Students in the M.F.A. program are reviewed for advancement at the 
end of their first year of study or upon the completion of 28-30 credit hours. 
Students in the M. A. program are reviewed at the end of their first semester of 
study or upon the completion of 12-15 credit hours. A satisfactory review 
allows students to have degree candidate status. Candidacy status must be 
approved by the student's graduate committee. All students in degree 
programs, either M.F.A. or M.A., must prepare a written problem report. A 
graduate exhibition may be required of a student on the recommendation of 
his/her graduate committee. 

General Requirements 

Deficiencies: Before students are admitted, they must meet any deficiencies 
in their undergraduate preparation. Credits taken to erase deficiencies do not 
count toward a graduate degree. 

Academic Standards: The Division of Art has high expectations for its 
graduate students. Because of this, certain standards of achievement exceed 
the minimum standards set by the University for all graduate students. The 
Division of Art reserves the right to impose stricter limitations on all art 
graduate students. Credit hours in courses with an earned grade of "C" do not 
automatically count toward graduate degree requirements. The graduate 

ART 35 



committee and the divisional chairperson have the right to declare such credit 
hours unacceptable. 

Materials and Equipment: All graduate art majors are required to 
purchase most of their personal equipment and expendable supplies. Some 
studio areas purchase bulk supplies for student use in their courses. The 
average cost to students sharing the cost of bulk purchases ranges from $100 
to $150 per semester. 

Problem Report: All candidates for a graduate degree in art must prepare 
a written problem report related to their work and activity as a graduate 
student. The chairperson of the student's graduate committee supervises the 
preparation of the problem report, which must be completed at least one 
month before the anticipated graduation date. The problem report must be 
prepared according to the form prescribed in the WVU regulations governing 
the preparation of dissertations and theses unless an exception is authorized 
in advance by the student's graduate committee and the divisional chairperson. 

Change of Graduate Program: A probationary candidate in a graduate art 
program is not guaranteed acceptance into another graduate art program. A 
change from the M.F. A. program to the M. A. program (or the reverse) must be 
approved by the graduate faculty of the Division of Art. Under normal 
conditions, such a change is not considered until the student has established 
credibility by successfully completing 12-15 approved credit hours of study 
at WVU. A change to a program outside the Division of Art must be approved 
by the receiving unit. To make an application for a double degree program or 
special interdepartmental programs at the graduate level, students must have 
prior approval of the divisional chairperson. 

Application Procedures 

Requests for application forms for admission to graduate degree programs 
in art must be addressed to the Office of Admissions and Records, West 
Virginia University, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. Applicants 
must specify the degree and subject area of their choice and return the 
application and transcripts from each college or university previously 
attended to the above address with a $20 non-refundable processing fee. 

All applicants, for both the M.F. A. and the M. A., must present a portfolio 
for admission to the Department of Art. Applicants should take care to select 
slides of recent and representative work for inclusion in the portfolio. The 
portfolio must contain a statement of purpose, and three letters of recommen- 
dation from college faculty or persons knowledgeable of the applicant's 
interests and abilities, and twenty 35mm slides as they come from the 
processing laboratory, (neither remounted nor retaped). Each slide should be 
labeled with name, date of completion, size of work, and type of medium and 
arranged in an 8" by 11" transparent plastic slide holder for mailing. The 
complete portfolio, with the purpose statement, three letters, and 20 slides, 
should be submitted to: 

Graduate Adviser 

Division of Art 

College of Creative Arts 

West Virginia University 

P.O. Box 6111 

Morgantown, WV 26506-6111 
Provide a stamped, self-addressed envelope to assure prompt, safe return of 
the slides. 



36 ART 



Master of Fine Arts in Visual Arts 

The M.F.A., a professionally oriented terminal degree in the studio arts, 
requires a baccalaureate degree in art or its equivalent for admission. 
Preparation should include 12 hours of art history, 70 hours of studio art 
related to professional needs, and 36 hours of general education. 

Requirements: The suggested distribution of studies for the 60 credit hour 
program is: 

Art Studio Major Area 36 hours 

Art Studio Elective 6 hours 

Teaching practicum or Professional Practice 6 hours 

Art History 6 hours 

Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report 6 hours 

To earn the M.F.A., a student must complete a combined (undergraduate and 
graduate) total of 118 hours in studio, 18 hours in art history, and the 
appropriate number of credit hours in general education courses. 

All students in the M.F.A. program are required to submit a statement of 
intention after completion of 12 credit hours, to indicate the direction and 
implementation of their studio involvement, with an outline of their problem 
report. 

Transfer M.F.A. Credit: In addition to the application materials listed, 
transfer students must ask to transfer graduate work completed elsewhere. 
Transcripts must accompany the written request. Transfer credit is not 
automatic. The art faculty review committee, the graduate adviser, and the 
division chairperson will determine how much, if any, previous graduate- 
level work may be transferred. At least 60 percent of the work for the M.F.A. 
must be completed at WVU in the studio arts. 

M.F.A. Curriculum: The M.F.A. student must complete the stated require- 
ments in order to graduate, usually in a two-year period. Most students take 
15 hours per semester. All students accepted into the M.F.A. program are 
required to spend four full-time semesters (excluding summer sessions) in 
residence. A waiver of this requirement may be requested from the graduate 
adviser of the Division of Art, based on accepted transfer credit or previously 
completed requirements. Concentrations for the M.F.A. include ceramics, 
graphic design, painting, printmaking, and sculpture. 

The following is the recommended distribution of required M.F.A. 
courses: 

First Year— Probationary Candidate Hr. 

Art Studio Major Area 18 

Art Studio Elective 3 

Teaching Practicum or Professional Practice* 6 

Art History** 3 

30 

*Professional practice courses will be practical, including business studies for students 
intending to maintain studios as a private enterprise; administrative studies for those intending to 
work in art centers, museums, or school administration; teaching practicum for those who expect to 
teach at the college or university level. Graduate Assistants expecting to teach during their second 
year should complete 6 hours of teaching practicum during the first year. Students with teaching 
experience may be exempt from this restriction. 

**Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to 
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level. 



ART 37 



Second Year— M.F.A. Candidate Hr. 

Art Studio Major Area 18 

Art Studio Elective 3 

Art History* 3 

Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report** 6 

30 

*Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to 
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level. 

**Graduate exhibition and problem report (Art 400) will include organized graduate seminars, 
problem report review periods, committee meetings, and exhibition preparation discussions. 

Master of Art in Art 
Art Education Concentration 
(30 credit hours) 

Art education is a popular option for graduate study in art. Specialization 
in art education requires the completion of 30 credit hours program. The exact 
course of study is determined through consultation with a student's adviser. 
The art education concentration may be completed in one year of full time 
study. The general distribution of graduate credits is as follows: 

Hr. 

Art studio major area 9 

Art studio elective 6 

Art education or approved studies 15 

Art 400 (Problem report) 3 

30 
Every graduate student is required to prepare a written problem report. The 
graduate art faculty recommend those students who may be required to hold a 
graduate exhibition. 

Art History Concentration 
(30 credit hours) 

The art history concentration is accredited by the National Association of 
Schools of Art and Design. For information about this option, please contact 
the coordinator of art history or the graduate adviser in the Division of Art. 
The general distribution of graduate credits for a concentration in art history 
is as follows: 

Hr. 

Art history 21 

Cognate courses 6 

Art 400 (Problem report) 3 

30 

Studio Art Concentration 
(30 credit hours) 

The studio art concentration allows students to specialize in ceramics, 
graphic design, painting, printmaking, or sculpture. 

Admission Requirements: Applicants desiring to begin a course of study 
leading to the Master of Arts in Art and concentration in the studio arts must 
have a baccalaureate degree in art or the equivalent. Undergraduate study 
should include 12 hours of art history, 45 hours of studio art related to 
professional needs, and 36 hours of general education courses. 

38 ART 



The concentration in studio art requires: 

Hr. 

Art Studio Major Area 18 

Art Studio Elective or Professional Practice* 3 

Art History** 6 

Art 400 (Problem report) 3 

30 

*In lieu of art studio elective instruction, students may take professional practice courses 
which are practical in nature. Exact courses of study are determined in consultation with the 
graduate adviser. 

**Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to 
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level. 

The student must complete the stated degree requirements in order to 
graduate. These credits can be earned in one year. After consultation with the 
graduate adviser, students specializing in studio arts are required to prepare a 
study list of course to be taken to satisfy Division of Art requirements. 
Changes in this list must be requested in writing and approved by the 
chairperson of the division. 

Financial Aid and Graduate Assistantships: Financial aid information is 
available through the Student Financial Aid Office, West Virginia University, 
P.O. Box 6004, Morgantown WV 26506-6004. Graduate assistantships in art 
are awarded to students of exceptional promise by the faculty of the Division 
of Art. Application forms must be requested from the graduate adviser, 
Division of Art, College of Creative Arts, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 
6111, Morgantown, WV 26506-6111, and submitted with the portfolio. 

Art (Art) 

200. Directed Art Studies. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. 
Studies in painting, sculpture, printmaking, graphic design, ceramics, drawing, 
art education, art history; includes independent study. 

211. Figure Drawing. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Art 12, 121orequiv. 
A course in compositional structure from the figure. 

212. Advanced Drawing. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.} PR: Art 211 orequiv. 
Advance tutorial drawing course. 

300. Graduate Art Studies. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. 
Studies in painting, sculpture, printmaking, graphic design, ceramics, drawing, 
art education, art history; includes independent study. 

400. Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report. I, II. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of studio art. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate 
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate 
student body. 



ART 39 



BIOCHEMISTRY 

Diana S. Beattie, Chair 

3124 Basic Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Beattie, Blair, Butcher, Canady, Caterson, Durham, Harris, 

Jagannathan, Kien, Kletzien, Miller, Rafter, Spearman, Sprague, Tryfiates, Vrana, 

Wimmer, and Wirtz. 

Graduate programs in the Department of Biochemistry are designed to 
assist students in the development of their own capabilities for independent 
thought and research. All students are provided with a strong biochemistry 
background; however, the program has sufficient flexibility to allow individual 
students to select advanced specialty courses in biochemistry which are of 
particular importance to their career goals. Faculty research problems are of 
current interest and are diverse, reflecting the broad spectrum of areas 
encompassing biochemistry. 

Admission Requirements 

A prospective graduate student should hold a bachelor's degree with a 
science major and should have successfully completed courses in qualitative- 
quantitative chemical analysis, organic chemistry, calculus, physics, and 
physical chemistry. In some cases, a deficiency in the above may be made up 
after admission into the program. 

Application is made by submission of the following items to the 
Department of Biochemistry: (a) the completed departmental application 
form (sent on request); (b) three letters of recommendation from professors 
who can evaluate the student's present abilities and potential; (c) official 
transcript of the applicant's college grades; and (d) official copy of Graduate 
Record Examination scores. Due to the sequence of courses, entrance in the 
fall is preferred, but exceptions may be made as necessary. Application 
material and program details may be obtained by writing: The Graduate 
Coordinator, Department of Biochemistry, School of Medicine, West Virginia 
University, Morgantown, WV 26506. The deadline for receipt of applications 
and supporting documents by the department is June 1; to be considered for 
financial support, applications should be submitted by February 1. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

To assure that all students become familiar with the basic principles of 
biochemistry, the first year of the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program is 
devoted primarily to course work. In addition to formal courses during the 
first semester, students participate in a laboratory program which involves 
all faculty members. This laboratory experience is designed to illustrate the 
basic research skills involved in biochemistry. During the second semester, 
students will undertake research in at least two laboratories of their choice. 

Upon successful completion of the first year, students will choose a 
dissertation research adviser, at which time emphasis will be placed on 
research. During the second year, specialized courses in biochemistry will be 
offered as the students continue their research programs. During subsequent 
years, the students emphasize independent thesis research, and a few formal 
courses are taken. 

An essential component of the Ph.D. program is participation in depart- 
mental journal clubs and seminars. Both students and faculty participate, 



40 BIOCHEMISTRY 



thus students learn to effectively organize and present research material to a 
large group of people. 

Completion of the Ph.D. program is realized when the student successfully 
presents the research results to both the Department of Biochemistry and a 
graduate advisory committee. Typically, four years are required to realize 
this goal. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Department of Biochemistry offers the thesis master's degree. This 
program involves completion of a master's research project in addition to 
formal course work. Two to three years are generally required to complete the 
M.S. program. 

Research and Instruction 

Research Areas— Hormonal regulation of metabolism. Structure and 
function of nucleic acids. Chemistry of enzymes and serum proteins. Structure 
of connective tissue. Nutritional oncology. Secretory mechanisms. Biogenesis 
of membranes. Regulation of gene expression. 

Biochemistry (Bioch.) 

231. Genera] Biochemistry. I. 7 hr. PR: General chemistry, organic chemistry. (For 
medical students; others by consent.) Consists of seven main lectures, one clinical 
correlation lecture, and one problem session per week. 

239. Clinical Chemical Techniques. II. 4 hr. PR: Bioch. 139, 231 or equiv. (Primarily for 
medical technology students; open to other qualified students by consent.) 

305. General Biochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Inorganic chemistry, organic chemistry, and 
consent. (For dental and graduate students.) Lecture, conference, and demonstra- 
tion. 

399. Special Topics. I, II. 1-2 hr. PR: Consent. Journal Club, Teaching and Laboratory 
Rotations. 

490. Teaching Practicum / and II. 1-3 hr. Consent of chairperson. Supervised practice in 
college teaching of biochemistry. Graded as S or U. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Physical techniques in biochemistry; 
nucleic acids and protein biosynthesis; enzymology and protein chemistry; 
metabolic regulation (each topic— one semester; offered alternate years). Designed 
primarily to provide a background for students who will do research in biochem- 
istry and molecular biology. (Nucleic Acids— Fall, 1987; Cell Biology— Spring, 
1988; Metabolic Regulation— Fall 1988; Enzymology— Spring, 1989.) 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Presentation and discussion of special 
topics. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 



BIOCHEMISTRY 41 



BIOLOGY 

Leah A. Williams, Chairperson of the Department 
200 Brooks Hall 
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Blaydes, Clarkson, DeCosta, Gallagher, Garbutt, Katula, 
Keller, Kotarski, Lang, McGraw, Marshall, Quinlan, Schein, Sutter, and Williams. 

The Department of Biology offers graduate studies leading to the degrees 
of Doctor of Philosophy and Master of Science. The Doctor of Philosophy 
degree is offered in the area of cellular and molecular biology with research 
concentration in the areas of gene regulation and transcriptional control 
during development; repair to DNA damaged by radiation and chemicals; 
positional effect on gene expression in drosophilia; cellular and molecular 
bases of regulation of cell proliferation; pheromonal communication. The 
Master of Science provides specialization in population genetics, plant 
ecology, environmental plant systematics, plankton ecology, environmental 
ecology, and animal behavior as well as in cellular and molecular biology. 
Each degree requires completion of an original research project which 
represents the principal theme about which the graduate program is construc- 
ted. Students may work toward an advanced degree only with the approval of 
the department. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Applicants for the master of science program in biology must show at the 
minimum the equivalent of a bachelor's degree from an accredited institution, 
an undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0, a 50th percentile ranking for the 
verbal and 50th percentile ranking for the quantitative sections of the 
Graduate Record Examination; an adequate science background, which 
normally includes one year of physics and two years of chemistry; and a 
sufficient knowledge in biology as reflected in scores normally greater than 
the 50th percentile on all three sections of the advanced Biology Test of the 
GRE. Applicants are requested to submit an essay describing past research 
experience and expectations for career goals. Three letters of recommendation 
from individuals familiar with the applicant's academic performance are 
required as well as the official transcript from all colleges or universities 
attended as an undergraduate. The graduate committee of the department 
reviews the applicant's records and makes the decision to admit or reject the 
applicant. 

The WVU general requirements for the master of science degree are 
outlined elsewhere in the graduate catalog. Students in the biology M.S. 
program may apply up to 6 hours of research credit toward the 30-hour 
requirement; the remaining 24 hours of credit must be earned in graduate 
courses which reflect a diversified exposure to biology. The establishment of 
an advisory committee and the generation of a program of study are explained 
in detail in the department's Graduate Student Handbook. A final oral 
examination is administered by the advisory committee after the program of 
study has been completed and the thesis has been submitted. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The program for the degree of doctor of philosophy concentrating in 
cellular and molecular biology reflects a flexible, research-oriented approach 
geared to develop the interests, capabilities, and potentials of mature 
students. Applicants must have met all the entrance requirements for the M.S. 

42 BIOLOGY 



program. In addition, each applicant must find a sponsor from among the 
department's graduate faculty. Usually the sponsor will subsequently serve 
as the student's major adviser. Acceptance into the Ph.D. program is by vote 
of the Graduate Admissions Committee. The admissions committee insures 
that all entrance requirements are met or that provisions have been made to 
remedy the deficiencies, and that facilities and personnel are adequate to 
support the program to a successful conclusion. 

Each student admitted to the Ph.D. program works under the close 
supervision of a faculty adviser and an advisory committee, both of which 
must be approved by the graduate committee; details on the composition and 
establishment of an advisory committee are available in the Graduate 
Student Handbook. Students must have a program of study formulated and 
approved by their advisory committee and by the graduate committee within 
15 months of entering the Ph.D. program; all deficiencies must have been 
removed earlier. Significant deviations from an established program of study 
require approval from the advisory committee and the graduate committee. 

The advisory committee is responsible for overseeing the progress of the 
student and for administering and judging performance in the several 
required examinations; it insures that all Department of Biology, College of 
Arts and Sciences, and University requirements are met during the course of 
the student's study program. The program of study outlines the research to be 
conducted and specifies the courses to be taken in support of the proposed 
research. Doctoral candidates enroll in basic graduate courses, which present 
the essentials of the specialty at an advanced level; specific details are 
available in the Graduate Student Handbook. In addition to the designated 
courses required of all students in the specialty area, the program of study 
includes additional courses tailored to meet the individual needs of each 
student. Thus, no two students are likely to have identical programs of study. 

Students must successfully complete a series of three written and oral 
intermediate examinations in order to be promoted to candidacy. The first, a 
dissertation proposal examination, consists of a written dissertation research 
proposal submitted to the advisory committee and to the graduate committee 
for approval. Thereafter, the proposed research is presented orally in the form 
of a departmental seminar. The next is a series of written qualifying 
examinations Each member of the student's advisory committee contributes 
questions to the overall test, and performance is judged by all. The written 
qualifying examination is followed by an oral examination designed to 
determine the student's ability to deal with a specific area of research 
(approved by the advisory committee) not directly related to his/her own 
research proposal; the student must present a public seminar on the topic and 
be prepared to answer questions on any matter related to the topic. Judgment 
is based on presentation style, demonstrated understanding of the topic, 
synthesis, creativity, and scholarship. 

The three intermediate examinations are usually taken during the third, 
fourth, and fifth semesters of the program. In the event the student does not 
pass an examination, the student may repeat the examination during the 
following semester; a second failure leads to termination in the program. 
Successful passage of the three intermediate examinations leads to promotion 
to candidacy, wherein the student may concentrate fully upon the dissertation 
research and prepare for the final examination. The final examination 
consists of the submission of a completed and acceptable written dissertation, 
an oral dissertation defense, and the presentation of a formal departmental 
seminar covering the dissertation research. 

BIOLOGY 43 



Biology (Biol.) 

201. History of Biology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or equiv. History of development of 
biological knowledge, with philosophical and social backgrounds. 

209. Topics and Problems in Biology. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (May be repeated for max. of 6 hr.) 
PR: Permit required. Topics and problems in contemporary biology. All topics or 
problems must be selected in consultation with the instructor. 

211. Advanced Cellular /Molecular Biology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or consent. 
Advanced study of fundamental cellular activities and their underlying molecular 
processes. 

212. Advanced Cellular/Molecular Biology— Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol. 211 
or consent. Experimental approaches to the study of cellular systems. 1 hr. lab. 

214. Molecular Basis of Cellular Growth. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or consent. Study of 
the integration of molecular events as they regulate the growth and division of 
cells. Topics include: hormones as cell effectors, control of gene expression, and 
the cancer cell as a model system. 

216. Cell and Molecular Biology Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or consent. 
Introduction to the theory and application of basic analytical tools used in 
molecular biology. Selected topics included are: hydrodynamic methods, chroma- 
tography, electrophoresis, and general laboratory methods. [Offered in Fall of 
even years.) 

219. Introduction to Recombinant DNA Technology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or 
consent. An introductory course covering the basic principles and techniques of 
recombinant DNA technology. Includes molecular cloning, isolation of plasmid 
DNA, agarose/acrylamide gel electrophoresis, restriction enzyme mapping, nucleic 
acid hybridization, and DNA sequencing. 

231. Animal Behavior. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or 15, Psych. 1, or consent. 
Introduction to animal behavior (ethology) emphasizing the biological bases and 
evolution of individual and social behaviors; laboratory includes independent 
investigation of behavioral phenomena. 

232. Physiological Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. psychology, behavior, physiology, or 
graduate standing. Introduction to physiological mechanisms and the neural basis 
of behavior. (Also listed as Psych. 232.) 

233. Behavioral Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or consent. Consideration of the influences 
of environmental factors on the short- and long-term regulation, control, and 
evolution of the behaviors of animals. [Offered in Fall of even years.) 

234. Physiology of Animal Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 231 or consent. Explores the way 
behavior is controlled in a wide variety of animals so that commonalities and 
varieties of neural and endocrine mechanisms may be better understood. [Offered 
in Spring of even years.) 

235. Primate Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or 15 or consent. Primates as they 
exist in their natural habitats, as they suggest clues to human behavior and the 
evolution of behavior. Case studies and comparative primate behavior of prosim- 
ians to monkeys, to apes, to human hunters and gatherers. (Also listed as Soc. 8rA. 
257.) 

240. Methods in Ecology and Biogeochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or consent. 
Introduction to the theory and application of basic analytical tools used in ecology 
and biogeochemistry. Topics include sampling of terrestrial and aquatic organisms 
and their environment, and chemical analyses of biological materials. [Offered in 
Spring of odd years.) 

44 BIOLOGY 



242. Acid Precipitation on Aquatic Ecosystems. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or Biol. 15, 
or equiv. Acid precipitation and its effects on freshwater ecosystems including all 
biological communities as well as overall effects on system functions and studies 
to assess the recovery from whole lake treatments. 

243. Plant Ecology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Environmental and 
ecological relationships of plants. 

246. Limnology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Physical, chemical, and 
biological characteristics of inland waters with an introduction to the principles of 
biological productivity. 

247. Aquaculture. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, or consent. An introduction to the 
farming and husbandry of freshwater and marine organisms. (Overnight field 
trips are voluntary. J (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

250. Aquatic Seed Plants. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Classification, 
ecology, and economic importance of aquatic seed plants. 

251. Principles of Evolution. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, 16, 17, 18, or consent. 
Introduction to the study of evolution. 

252. Flora of West Virginia. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or consent. Consideration of 
the native plant life of the state. 

253. Structure of Vascular Plants. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or PI. Sc. 52, or 
consent. Development and evolution of vegetative and reproductive structures of 
vascular plants. 

254. Plant Geography. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, or consent. Study of plant 
groupings and worldwide distribution of plants. 

255. Invertebrate Zoology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18. Advanced study of 
animals without backbones. 

256. Ornithology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Lecture and laboratory 
studies on ancestry, evolution, topography, anatomy and physiology, systematics, 
behavior, migration, and ectoparasites of birds. Field studies will be limited in 
scope. (Also listed as W. Man. 122. J 

257. Ichthyology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Internal and external 
structure of fishes, their systematic and ecological relationships, and their 
distribution in time and space. (Dissection kit required.) 

258. Mammalogy. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or W. Man. 224 or consent. Mammals and their 
biological properties with emphasis on life history, ecology, and distribution of 
regional forms. (Also listed as W. Man. 225. ) 

259. General Parasitology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Introduction 
to the biology of parasites. (Dissection kit required.] (Also listed as M. Bio. 224.) 

260. Plant Development. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, and organic chemistry or 
biochemistry, or consent. Experimental studies of plant growth and development. 

261. Comparative Anatomy. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. A functional 
and evolutionary study of vertebrate structure. (Dissection kit required.] 

262. Vertebrate Embryology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. An 
experimental and descriptive analysis of vertebrate development. 

263. Vertebrate Microanatomy. II. 5 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. 
Structural and functional approach to the study of tissues and organs of 
vertebrates. 



BIOLOGY 45 



268. Physiology of the Endocrines. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. 
Regulation of the organs of internal secretions, and mechanisms of action of the 
hormones produced. 

269. Physiology of the Endocrines— Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol 268. 
Experimental techniques used in study of the endocrine system. 

270. General Animal Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. 
In-depth, current treatment of physiological principles which operate at various 
levels of biological organization in animals of diverse taxonomic relationships. 
Understanding is developed from background lectures and student analysis in 
discussion sessions of research literature. 

271. Genera] Animal Physiology— Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol. 270. After 
learning basic techniques, students are provided the opportunity to design, 
execute, and report on an independent research project in physiology. 

309. Topics and Problems in Biology. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Topics and problems 
in contemporary biology, to be selected in consultation with instructor. 

311. Biology Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Discussions and presentations of general interest to 
biologists. 

315. Molecular Basis of Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or equiv., or consent. Lectures on 
bacterial, animal, and plant viruses; their structure, replication, and interaction 
with host cells. Discussion of the contributions virology has made to the 
understanding of molecular mechanisms in biology. 

340. Ecosystem Dynamics. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or equiv. Studies of modern approaches 
to ecosystem analysis. Emphasis will be on energy and material transfers. 
Approach will be holistic. 

345. Fisheries Science. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 257 or equiv., or consent. Population dynamics 
in relation to principles and techniques of fish management. [Offered in Spring of 
even years.) 

355. Advanced Plant Systematics 1. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 151 or equiv. Taxonomy of 
pteridophytes, gymnosperms, and monocotyledons. 

356. Advanced Plant Systematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 151 or equiv. Taxonomy of 
dicotyledons. 

362. Developmental Biology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 262 or equiv., organic chemistry or 
biochemistry, or consent. The molecular and cellular basis of differentiation and 
morphogenesis. [Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

364. Advanced Plant Physiology. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 169 or equiv., organic chemistry, 
general physics, and consent. Advanced studies of plant processes including 
recent advances in the field. I. Second Semester, odd-numbered years— Water 
relations and mineral nutrition and translocation. II. First Semester, odd- 
numbered years— Plant growth and development. III. Second Semester, even- 
numbered years — Environmental physiology. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 



46 BIOLOGY 



BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES— MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 

Frederick J. Lotspeich, Coordinator of the Program 

Marshall University Medical Education Building, 1542 Spring Valley Dr., 
Huntington, WV 25704 

Degree Offered: Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Belshe, Berk, DeMesquita, Fenger, Gruetter, Kasvinsky, 
Larson, McCumbee, Moore, Mufson, Rankin, Reichenbecher, Valentovic, Wang, and 
Wright. Associate Members Brown, Fix, Guyer, Lotspeich, and Moat. 

The Basic Science Departments of Marshall University School of Medicine 
offer a program of study conjointly with West Virginia University which 
leads to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the Biomedical Sciences. The 
work for this degree is done on the Marshall University campus in Huntington, 
West Virginia, with the degree awarded by West Virginia University. 

The primary aim of the program is to graduate doctoral students who are 
broadly based in the biomedical sciences, but who have definite interests and 
special training in anatomy, biochemistry, microbiology, pharmacology, or 
physiology. The program is designed to be flexible and research oriented in 
order to prepare a student for a career in one of the areas of academic or 
industrial biomedical science. 

Admission. Students who wish to enroll in the Doctor of Philosophy 
program must apply for admission through the Marshall University Graduate 
School. They must meet the admission requirements of West Virginia 
University, the Marshall University Graduate School, and the Graduate 
Study Committee of the Marshall University School of Medicine. Interested 
persons should contact the Biomedical Program Coordinator, Department of 
Biochemistry, Marshall University School of Medicine, Huntington, WV 
25701. 

Applicants to the Doctor of Philosophy in Biomedical Sciences program 
must possess a baccalaureate degree with undergraduate-level course work 
including: 1 year of general biology, 1 year of general physics, 1 year of 
introductory chemistry, and 1 year of organic chemistry, all with associated 
laboratories. Although not required for admission, undergraduate course 
work in calculus and physical chemistry is desirable as it may be prerequisite 
for advanced course work in certain areas of specialization. 

Applicants should submit to the Biomedical Program Coordinator three 
letters of recommendation and Graduate Record Examination scores (aptitude 
and advanced). In addition, transcripts and an admission application must be 
sent to the Marshall University Office of Admissions, Huntington, WV 25701. 

Applicants who already possess a Master of Science in Biomedical 
Sciences, or equivalent experience, are eligible to apply for full admission 
directly into the Doctor of Philosophy program in Biomedical Sciences. The 
requirements for full admission into the program are essentially the same as 
those as those required for award of the Master of Science in Biomedical 
Sciences with the exception that a requirement for a master's thesis may be 
waived. 

Applicants who do not possess a Master of Science in Biomedical Science, 
or equivalent experience, but who do meet all of the other requirements listed 
above can be provisionally accepted into the doctoral program. Provisional 
acceptance requires the student to successfully complete the master's course 
work prior to full acceptance. 

Program Requirements. Every student must take courses in cellular and 
molecular biology, statistics, and seminar. In addition, each student, with 
approval of his/her advisory committee, must successfully complete at least 

BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES-MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 47 



one basic course (minimum 4 credit hours) in a minimum of three basic 
biomedical science departments. Elective courses, chosen with concurrence of 
the student's advisory committee, will provide the remainder of the required 
credit hours (a minimum of 18). 

Upon admission to the doctoral program, the student's doctoral advisory 
committee will be formed. The doctoral advisory committee consisting of six 
members will periodically review the student's progress as well as act as the 
examination committee. One member, the student's research adviser, will 
serve as the committee chairperson. One other member from the student's 
major department and two from other departments (one each from the 
student's two minor departments) will be recommended to the Marshall 
Graduate School Dean for appointment to the committee by the student's 
research adviser. The two remaining members of the advisory committee will 
be appointed from faculty in appropriate departments at West Virginia 
University. 

The doctoral student's plan of study and research will be guided by the 
student's advisory committee. Course work will consist of seminar each 
semester and electives as directed by the student's advisory committee. After 
satisfactory completion of all general and specialty course work requirements, 
the student must successfully complete a preliminary qualifying examination 
to be admitted to candidacy for the Doctor of Philosophy degree. 

The preliminary qualifying examination, the most rigorous and compre- 
hensive examination that the student must take, will be given at the discretion 
of the student's advisory committee and must be completed by the end of the 
second year or 48 credit hours after full admission into the doctoral degree 
program. This examination will consist of both written and oral portions. 

After admission to candidacy and completion of course work and 
research, the student must prepare and successfully defend in a final 
examination a dissertation of his/her research. Satisfactory performance on 
the examination requires approval by five members of the student's advisory 
committee, which then recommends award of the Doctor of Philosophy 
degree. 

To receive a degree, all students in the Biomedical Sciences graduate 
program must have a scholastic grade-point average of not less than 3.0 (B) in 
all graduate work completed in the program. All grades of C or less are 
counted in computing averages, but no more than 6 credit hours of C, and no 
credit hours below C, may be applied toward degree requirements. Credit/No 
Credit hours may be included toward degree requirements, but they will not 
affect the quality grade-point computation. 

Residence. The doctoral program will normally require 2 x k to 3 years of 
full-time graduate work beyond the M.S. degree. This must include a 
minimum of two semesters of residence in full-time graduate study at 
Marshall University. In addition, all doctoral students in this program, 
regardless of receipt of financial assistance, must participate in the teaching 
and research programs as an integral part of their advanced training. 

Research. Experimental neuroanatomy/sensorimotor pathways, hypo- 
thalamic pathways, mammalian male reproductive morphology, retinoids 
and vitamin D interactions, physical anthropology, neuropathology, autora- 
diography and axonal transport, lipid metabolism, mechanisms of enzyme 
regulation, retinoids and carcinogenesis, estrogen receptors in human breast 
cancer, structure and function of mammalian ribosomes, measle virus 
proteins, microbial genetics, B vitamins, cyclic nucleotides, calcium in 
hypertension, metabolism of monamine oxidase inhibitors, behavioral neuro 

48 BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES -MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 



pharmacology, sleep physiology, respiratory mechanics, cartilage metabolism, 
human aging and hypertension and Ca>+. 

Courses of Instruction: For courses of instruction, see the Marshal] 
University Graduate School Catalog (contact: Office of Admissions, Marshall 
University, Huntington, WV 25701). 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Robert S. Maust, Director of Master of Business Administration Program 

302 Armstrong Hall 

M.B.A. Degree Program, College of Business and Economics, West Virginia University, 
P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 

Telephone: (304) 293-5408 

Degree Offered: M.B.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Brewer, Coats, Cook, Fuller, Mansour, Riley, Rose, 
Schaupp, Scherr, G. Smith, and Wilson. Associate Members Abbott, Beggs, Bone, 
Britt, Gunter, Harpell, Lane, Lin, Logar, McClung, Maust, Neidermeyer, Ponzurick, 
Pushkin, Rahmatian, Shaw, Speaker, Sypolt, Titard, Twomey, Wilner, and Wilson. 

The Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.) program is accredited 
by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB) and is 
the only M.B.A. program in West Virginia so accredited. It is offered as a 
full-time, day-class program in Morgantown and as a part-time, weekend- 
class program in Morgantown, Wheeling, and Parkersburg. The standards of 
excellence that support accreditation by the AACSB are maintained at all 
instructional sites. 

The M.B.A. degree program recognizes the need for a manager of the 
future to be able to anticipate and recognize change and then manage 
resources advantageously in that environment. Thus, the curriculum empha- 
sizes a general, broad-based approach to graduate educatiort in management 
which provides the student with the qualitative and quantitative skills 
necessary for a manager to succeed in such an environment. The program 
develops a managerial perspective that is primarily line as opposed to staff 
oriented and is relevant to those in both private and public organizations. 

The plan of study requires a total of 48 semester hours of graduate credit. 
The program is designed for individuals with varying educational and 
professional backgrounds. No prior course work in business administration 
is required as a condition of admission to the program. No master's thesis is 
required for completion of the degree. 

The M.B.A. degree program is completed in 13V2 months of full-time study 
on the Morgantown campus. A full-time student can enter the program only 
on July 1 of each year and graduates in mid-August of the following year. 
Students may enter the part-time M.B.A. program in any semester. A 
minimum of three years is required for the part-time student to complete the 
program, assuming that the student takes at least two courses in each of the 
three semesters per year. 

To gain admission into the Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.) 
program, an applicant must have a bachelor's degree (in any field) from an 
accredited institution and a grade-point average (GPA) of at least 3.0 based on 
the last 60 hours of undergraduate and/or graduate work completed. In 
addition, the applicant must have a minimum score on the Graduate 
Management Admission Test (GMAT) of at least 500. Applicants with a GPA 
below 3.0 (or GMAT scores below 500) must show correspondingly higher 
GMAT (or GPA) achievement. Depending on the number of qualified 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 49 



applicants, preference is given to those with GMAT scores above 540. 
Significant experience at increasing levels of responsibility and evidence of 
leadership potential (such as class officer) is given consideration. Such 
information should be summarized and attached to the application for 
admission. No action is taken on an application for admission until a GMAT 
score is submitted. Since GMAT is given only in January, March, June, and 
October, an applicant should take the test no later than March for July 
admission. 

In addition to the above requirements, international student applicants 
are required to submit a "Test of English As a Foreign Language" (TOEFL) 
score in the range of 570-600 or above. International students may be required 
to take up to 6 hours of prerequisite course work in English as a foreign 
language, such as EFL 53, 54, or 55. 

Applications for admission to the M.B. A. program and official transcripts 
of all prior academic work should be submitted to the WVU Office of 
Admissions and Records as early as possible. Applicants who have attended 
institutions other than WVU must request the registrar or records office of 
those institutions to forward a complete official transcript directly to the 
WVU Office of Admissions and Records. The absolute deadline for receipt of 
applications and transcripts at the Office of Admissions and Records is two 
months prior to the admission date. Thus, the deadline for July admission is 
April 30. 

Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.) 

The M.B.A. degree program requires 48 hours of graduate credit, 
including the following courses: 
Preparatory Modules: 

Economics 319 — Applied Business and Economics Statistics, 3 hr. 

Management 302— Introduction to Management Science, 3 hr. 
Foundation Courses: 

Accounting 311 — Financial Accounting for Decision Making, 3 hr. 

Business Law 311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment, 2 hr. 

Economics 317 — Economic Decision Making, 2 hr. 

Finance 311 — Managerial Finance, 2 hr. 

Management 301 — Organizational Behavior and Ethics, 3 hr. 

Management 311— Management Information Systems, 3 hr. 

Marketing 311 — Marketing Management, 2 hr. 
Application Courses: 

Accounting 321— Managerial Control, 2 hr. 

Economics 318 — Economic Policy, 2 hr. 

Finance 321 — Corporate Financial Administration, 3 hr. 

Management 321— Operations Management/Applied Quantitative 
Analysis, 3 hr. 

Management 325— Seminar in Organizational Processes, 3 hr. 

Marketing 321— Marketing Strategy, 3 hr. 
Integration and Elective Courses: 

Management 351— Policy and Strategy 2 hr. 

Seminar — 3 hr. 

Seminar — 3 hr. 
Selected graduate courses may be waived depending on an individual's 
undergraduate degree and the recency of the degree; however, other graduate 
courses must be substituted for waived courses. 



50 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



The M.B. A. requires that the candidate achieve a cumulative grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 on all work counting toward the graduate degree. A 
Regular Graduate Student whose cumulative grade-point average falls below 
2.75 will be placed on probation. If the average is not brought up to 2.75 by the 
end of the following semester, the student will be suspended from the 
program. A grade below C in any course taken while enrolled as a graduate 
student will result in suspension from the program. In addition, the student 
must maintain a 3.0 average in all work counting toward the graduate degree. 

Students in the part-time program are subject to the same requirements 
and restrictions as students enrolled in the full-time program. Classes in the 
part-time program are taught by the same graduate faculty members as teach 
in the full-time program. The M.B. A. program is offered in its entirety at 
off-campus locations in Parkersburg and Wheeling. There is no requirement 
that an off-campus student travel to Morgantown; however, Saturday classes 
in Morgantown increase the number of courses available to off-campus 
students in any semester. Off-campus classes normally meet on Friday 
evenings (7:00 to 10:00) and Saturdays (9:00 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. or 9:00 a.m. to 
4:00 p.m.). A 3 semester-hour course normally meets for 5 weekends and a 2 
semester-hour course for 3 weekends. Part-time classes in Morgantown meet 
on Saturdays (9:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.) for six weekends (3 semester-hour 
course) or four weekends (2 semester-hour course). Part-time classes may 
have examinations scheduled on weekday evenings. 

Complete information about the M.B. A. program may be obtained by 
contacting the Director of Graduate Programs. 

Accounting (Acctg.) 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to 
accounting. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward 
bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

210. Advanced Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Accounting for partnerships, 
consolidations, foreign exchanges, and governmental (nonprofit) entities. 

211. Accounting Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 5, Acctg. 112 or consent. Analysis of data- 
processing fundamentals and information systems analysis, design, and imple- 
mentation, including necessary computer hardware and software components 
with particular reference to accounting information systems and the controls 
necessary therein. 

213. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or 115 or 116 or consent. Tax laws and 
the investment and business decisions they affect. Taxes are presented in 
meaningful relationships in order to form a general pattern of knowledge that is 
easier understood. 

214. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213 or consent. The study of federal 
income tax treatment of partnerships, corporations and estates, and the treatment 
of those property transfers subject to the Federal Gift Tax, together with an 
introduction of tax research and tax procedure. 

216. Advanced Managerial Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill and Acctg. 115 or 116. 
Special problems in cost accounting, including tax planning, inventory control, 
and decision models on C. P. A. /CM. A. examination. Selected problems and cases 
will be used. 

217. Auditing Theory. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Acctg. 210. Auditing fundamentals; objectives, 
ethics, statistical samplings, standards and procedures. Emphasis on FASB and 
SAS disclosures. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 51 



218. Auditing Practice. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Application of auditing theory and procedures, 
with emphasis on decisions which invoke judgment and are important in 
independent audits; audit working papers and reports; case studies. 

224. Advanced Accounting Problems. 3 hr. PR: Minimum of 18 hr. in accounting with 
an average grade of B or higher. Analysis and solution of representative C.P.A. 
problems. 

230. Advanced Accounting Theory. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112, 115, and consent. Critical 
analysis of accounting concepts and standards with emphasis on their origin, 
development, and significance. 

311. Financial Accounting for Decision Making. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic accounting 
assumptions and standards underlying financial statements, the significance of 
financial statement measurements, and the relevance of such data for planning 
and control. Emphasis on financial statement and cash-flow analysis. 

321. Managerial Control. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 311 or consent. Managerial accounting 
concepts and techniques used for planning and control. Interpretation and use of 
internal accounting reports. The use of accounting information in decision making. 
Emphasis on development of an effective management control system. 

325. Accounting Information Systems. 2 hr. PR: Consent. The design and use of 
computerized accounting information systems to support the transaction proces- 
sing, reporting and decision-making systems of most organizations, including the 
use and critical analysis of currently available accounting packages. 

330. Financial Accounting Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Comprehensive 
examination of financial accounting theory as established by the opinions, 
statements and interpretations of professional organizations with special emphasis 
on their application and problem solving. 

332. Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Fund accounting 
and control in governmental and nonprofit entities; identification and control of 
cost centers; cost analysis and cost centers; cost analysis and cost finding, and 
planning and control of operations and resources. 

333. Income Taxes and Business Decisions. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213. Advanced federal 
income-tax problems with emphasis on tax planning for business decisions and 
tax research methodology. 

335. Computer Systems Auditing. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 325. The analysis and design of 
control systems in a computerized accounting environment. Special emphasis on 
evaluating evidence to determine whether a computing system safeguards assets 
and maintains data integrity. 

338. ControIIership. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 304. Examination of the role of the controller in 
large entities in planning, measuring, evaluating, and controlling performance and 
in reporting to stockholders and governmental agencies. 

340. Reporting Practices and Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation of financial 
reporting practices and trends, including an examination of the reporting require- 
ments of the SEC and other regulatory agencies. Practitioners will be used 
extensively for class discussion and presentations. 

345. Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 217. Professional 
objectives, principles, and standards of auditing; audit reports and related 
communications; and case studies of audit sampling, professional ethics, legal 
liability and reporting. 

349. Seminar in Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 



52 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



Business Law (B. Law) 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: B. Law 112 or consent. Special topics relevant to 
business law. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward 
bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

211. Personnel Relations and the Law. 3 hr. The legal principles guiding employer- 
employee relations, including agency law and the law regulating employee health, 
safety, compensation and benefits, job opportunity, and labor organizing. 

311. LegaJ and Regulatory Environment. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the legal 
environment in which business decisions are made and the response of the legal 
environment to change. Familiarization with the role of administrative agencies in 
the regulatory process. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Economics (Econ.) 

317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. [Primarily for M.B.A. 
students.) Analysis of the firm as an optimizing unit operating in the market place. 
Examination of product demand, production and costs, pricing theory and 
practices, risk, and capital budgeting. 

318. Economic Policy. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 317 or consent. (Primarily for M.B.A. and M.P.A. 
students.) Microeconomic analysis of macroeconomic phenomena is considered 
with particular attention paid to the reaction by firms to price and interest rate 
effects of fiscal and monetary policy. 

319. Applied Business and Economics Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Primary statistical 
methods used in business and economics research including hypothesis testing, 
estimation, linear regression, time series, and business forecasting. Statistical 
computer software is an integral part of the course. 

Finance (Fin.) 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, orFin. 311, orconsent. Special topics relevant 
to finance. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

212. Working Capita/ Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill or Fin. 112, Econ. 125. 
Management of current assets and liabilities. Topics include management of cash, 
marketable securities, accounts receivable, inventories, trade accounts payable, 
and short-term bank borrowings. Decision models are used extensively. 

216. Risk Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent; PR or Coreq.: Fin. 112. 
Transferable risks with which the entrepreneur must deal. Emphasis on the 
process by which decisions are made for handling these risks, including an 
examination of contributions and limitations of insurance system. 

220. Social Insurance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent. Our social and political efforts to 
provide economic security for the general public. An examination of the parallel 
developments of private insurance. 

250. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 150 or consent; PR or 
Coreq.: Fin. 112. The systematic selection, assessment, and ranking of corporate 
securities in a portfolio framework through a synthesis of fundamental analysis, 
technical analysis, and random walk. 

252. Bank Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 251 or consent. An advanced course in 
commercial banking involving problems of management of the money position, 
loan and investment portfolio, and capital adequacy. The student simulates actual 
bank operation, conducts case studies, and analyzes bank performance. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 53 



261. Real Estate Appraising. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 161. The appraisal problem, plan the 
approach, acquire, classify, analyze and interpret data into an estimate of value by 
the cost or replacement approach, income approach and market approach. 

262. Real Estate Finance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. How financing, the 
tax system, and supply and demand interact to create values which, when coupled 
with investment decision, leads to choosing an investment strategy in real estate. 

263. Real Estate Investments/Land Development. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 161 or consent. 
Designed to investigate various types of real estate investments including 
apartments, office buildings, shopping centers, and residential land developments 
with emphasis on financial analysis, profitability analysis, and rates of return. 

311. Managerial Finance. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 311, Econ. 319. Analysis of the standard 
financial activities of the firm including: financial planning, structure of financing, 
and asset selection. Introduction to microcomputer problem solution. 

321. Corporate Financial Administration. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. A 
study of theoretical concepts of corporate financial administration and the 
application of these concepts to real world case studies. 

331. Bank Management. 3 hr. PR or Coreq.: Fin. 311 or consent. (May not be taken for 
both undergraduate and graduate credit.) Management of bank funds. Principles 
of organization lending and investment. Policy relationships to bank productivity, 
organization, and profitability; preparation of financial reports; management of a 
simulated bank in a changing environment. [Same as Fin. 251 with the addition of a 
research paper.) 

335. Money and Capital Markets. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. Advanced 
study of money and capital markets, institutions involved, effect of monetary and 
fiscal policies on private finance, and detailed study of major managerial problems 
of financial institutions. 

337. Capital Budgeting. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. Advanced study in 
modern techniques and theory of the capital budgeting process. Emphasis is 
placed on the application of quantitative models and the methods of handling risk. 

349. Seminar in Finance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 321. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Management (Manag.) 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics relevant to management. 
(Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 offered by the 
College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

201. Business Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 101 and 105 or consent. Use of 
EDP for management control and decision making with emphasis on application in 
the functions of finance, marketing, personnel, accounting, and operations 
management. 3 hr. lee. 

206. Organizational Theory and Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105 or consent. Influences 
of structure on the behavior and dynamics of the business organization. Attention 
on how to be an effective manager. 

211. Advanced Production Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 111. Integration of quanti- 
tative techniques and their application to production problems. Utilizes cases and 
projects. 

212. Management Science. I. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. The study and application of 
quantitative methods to business problems in which deterministic conditions 
prevail. 

54 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



216. Personnel Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. Fundamental principles and 
practices related to the procurement, development, maintenance and utilization of 
human resources. Focus on areas such as human resource planning, selection, 
training, performance appraising, compensation, safety and health, and labor 
relations. 

217. Personnel and Compensation. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 216 or consent. Designing and 
implementing total compensation systems in both private and public sectors. The 
emerging elements of total compensation systems are included providing insights 
into problems and opportunities for personnel. 

218. Focal Pointsin Management. 1-3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. In-depth study of specialized 
management subjects, e.g., personnel interviewing, job descriptions, consulting, 
or organizational development. (Each subject is self-contained, spans one-third of 
a semester, and is valued at 1 credit hour.) 

222. Management Science. II. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 212 or consent. The study and 
application of quantitative methods to business problems in which probabilistic 
conditions prevail. 

230. Entrepreneurship. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The role of the entrepreneur in business and 
society; includes an analysis of the individual entrepreneur, and investigates the 
nature and problems of establishing a new business enterprise. 

260. Practicum in Small Business. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A practical training ground in the 
identification and solution of small business problems. Through interaction with 
the business community, students are exposed to the opportunities and difficulties 
of small business entrepreneurship. 

301. Organizational Behavior and Ethics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpersonal relation- 
ships through which administration becomes effective. Emphasis on human 
factors, but influences of economic and technological factors also are considered. 
Focus on ethics and importance of harmony between individual needs and 
organization goals. 

302. Introduction to Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of management 
science models and techniques with applications in business decision making 
problems. Coverage includes mathematical programming models, decision theory, 
simulation, network models, and other current management science topics. 

304. Quantitative Business Methods. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Quantitative methods useful to 
the professional accountant. Emphasis on techniques which appear on profes- 
sional accounting certification examinations. 

311. Management Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines computer 
technology, applications, information systems, and performance. Computer system 
planning, selection and implementation. Computer impact upon management, 
organization, and society from a managerial viewpoint. 

321. Operations Management/Applied Quantitative Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Review of concepts, techniques, and models encountered in manufacturing and 
service operations. Modeling approach and computer applications in operations 
management and management science are emphasized. 

325. Seminar in Organizational Processes. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the 
dynamics of the successful organization. Emphasis on the organization as an 
institution and the role of the manager in the organization. Implications of 
international competition will be addressed. 

330. Organizational Development. II. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 325. Emphasis on using 
knowledge of the behavioral sciences to aid organizations in adjusting to changing 
environments. A systems view is employed in order to simultaneously consider 
organizational structure, environment and climate, and social awareness. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 55 



335. Human Resource Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 301. Examination of interrelated 
issues in human resource management. Focus on role of human resources, 
manpower development, performance measurement, and compensation. 

336. Managerial Skills Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis on management skills. 
Focuses on such topics as stress reduction, power, decision making, conflict 
resolution, supportive communication, and employee instruction. 

340. Methodology of Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 300, 302, or consent. 
Philosophy, methodology, and applications of management science to decision 
making in business functional areas. Extensive use of cases and projects to 
integrate topical material with the functional areas of management, marketing, 
and finance. 

349. Seminar in Management. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

351. Policy and Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Capstone course. Integrates functional 
knowledge with strategy formulation and strategy implementation concepts. 
Cases of organizations varying in size, national affiliation, and profit orientation 
are analyzed with special emphasis on ethics and social responsibility. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Marketing (Mrktg.) 

200. Special Topics. S. 1-4 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to 
marketing. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

201. Focal Points in Marketing. 1-3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. In-depth study of 
specialized marketing subjects, e.g., franchising, tourism, packaging, or product 
development. (Each subject is self-contained, spans one-third of a semester, and is 
valued at 1 credit hour.] 

203. Sales Management. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 114 or consent. Concentrates on the 
managerial responsibilities of sales managers for directing, motivating, and 
controlling a sales force plus the techniques of selling including handling 
objections and closing. 

205. Consumer Behavior. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. The consumer decision 
process in a marketing framework. Emphasis on psychological and sociological 
concepts which influence the decision process. 

207. Business Logistics Management. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 115 or consent. Examination of 
transportation, warehousing, materials handling, containerization, inventory 
control, purchasing, and warehouse location. Significant use made of problem 
solving with analytical tools. 

210. Industrial Marketing. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. A study of marketing to 
three classes of customers: the industrial market, the institutional market, and 
governmental agencies. 

311. Marketing Management. 2 hr. Introduction to marketing management with 
specific emphasis on consumer behavior and market segmentation, product 
planning, promotion, distribution, and pricing. 

321. Marketing Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 311. Emphasis on formulating a marketing 
strategy and developing analytical and decision-making capabilities. Cases will 
be used to illustrate specific business situations. 

330. Management of Product Development. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 321. An advanced analysis 
of the problems in the conceptualization, development, and marketing of new 
products. 



56 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



335. Management of Distribution Systems. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 321. Advanced analysis of 
the design and operations of distribution systems. Topics include distribution 
channel selection, administration and control; demand forecasting facility location, 
choice and scheduling of transport, and the allocation and control of inventories. 

349. Seminar in Marketing. 3 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 

J. D. Henry, Chairperson of the Department 
425 Engineering Sciences Building 
Degrees Offered: M.S.Ch.E., M.S.E., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bailie, Cilento, Dadyburjor, Henry, Kono, Shaeiwitz, 
Stiller, Turton, Whiting, Yang, and Zondlo. 

The Department of Chemical Engineering, with 11 faculty members, 75 
undergraduates, and over 30 graduate students, has one of the oldest doctoral- 
granting programs in the University. From the initial doctoral degree in 1932, 
the graduate course program has been based on advanced chemical engineering 
fundamentals, while the research program has reflected a balance of funda- 
mental research areas and their application to relevant technological areas 
such as coal conversion. 

Chemical engineering faculty are presently involved in the following 
research areas: biochemical engineering, bioengineering, catalysis, fluid 
mechanics, heat transfer, mathematical modeling and simulation, reaction 
engineering, separation processes, solution chemistry, and thermodynamics. 
These fundamental areas are finding applications in biomass conversion 
technology, blood flow, coal gasification and liquefaction, in-situ combustion, 
and synthetic fuels. 

Faculty members possess a wide variety of industrial experience and are 
routinely in contact with their counterparts in industry. This contact with 
real engineering problems enables them to convey a practical experience to 
students while keeping in perspective many of the fundamental concepts 
involved in the graduate program. 

During the last 10 years, the chemical engineering faculty have authored 
or co-authored 5 books, published 190 journal articles, have been issued 8 
patents, made 174 presentations at professional meetings, and supervised the 
completion of 95 master's and 19 doctoral degrees. In addition, several faculty 
members have written textbooks and taught short courses throughout the 
United States. 

The department is authorized to admit students to the following degree 
programs: Master of Science in Chemical Engineering (M.S.Ch.E.), Master of 
Science in Engineering (M.S.E.), and College of Engineering interdisciplinary 
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.). Students in these programs must comply with 
the rules and regulations as presented in the general requirements for 
graduate work in the College of Engineering and in the Department of 
Chemical Engineering. Students interested in pursuing work for a master's or 
doctoral degree in chemical engineering should contact the department for 
copies of the required guidelines. Students should refer to Part 5 of this 
catalog for a general description of the graduate programs in engineering. 



CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 57 



Master of Science in Chemical Engineering (M.S.Ch.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

Admission Requirements. Admission to the M.S.Ch.E. program is restrict- 
ed to those holding a baccalaureate degree in chemical engineering or its 
equivalent. The M.S.E. program is available to students holding baccalaureate 
degrees in other fields of engineering and the physical sciences who wish to 
pursue a broad interdisciplinary program relevant to the major graduate 
areas administered by the department. 

To be admitted as a regular graduate student, an applicant must have a 
B.S. degree and a sound record in previous college work with a minimum 
3.0/4.0 cumulative grade-point average. Applicants who cannot meet these 
conditions may be considered for admission in a conditional category (see 
Part 4 of this catalog). Students admitted with deficiencies in their under- 
graduate programs are required to take some chemical engineering courses as 
prerequisites for graduate courses. These requirements are stated as a 
condition for admission. 

M.S.Ch.E. candidates should expect to obtain their degree in about 18 
months. M.S.E. students typically require I-IV2 years beyond completion of 
prerequisite courses. 

All M.S. degree candidates are required to perform research and will 
follow a planned program which conforms to either of the following outlines: 

1. A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, excluding seminar, not more 
than 6 of which are in research leading to an acceptable thesis. 

2. A minimum of 33 semester credit hours, excluding seminar, not more 
than 3 of which are in research leading to an acceptable problem report. 

The non-thesis M.S. degree option is not offered by the Department of 
Chemical Engineering. 

Courses. All students are required to take Ch.E. 301, 344, and 345, and all 
full-time students are required to take one credit of journal club/seminar 
(Ch.E. 400) for each semester enrolled. The research adviser, in conjunction 
with an advisory and examining committee (AEC) to be designated by each 
student, will be responsible for following departmental guidelines to determine 
the plan of study appropriate to the student's program. 

Research Proposal. A written research proposal and oral presentation of 
this proposal is required of all M.S. students. This oral defense is administered 
by the student's AEC and must be completed by the end of the second semester 
of the first year for M.S.Ch.E. candidates, and as soon as possible but not later 
than the end of the second semester of the second year for M.S.E. candidates. 

Final Examination. All students are required to pass a final oral 
examination, administered by their AEC, covering both the thesis or problem 
report (depending on the program selected) and related course material. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the Ph.D. program 
must comply with the rules and regulations as outlined in the general 
requirements for graduate work in engineering and the specific requirements 
stated in the departmental guidelines. Students who are interested in 
pursuing a Ph.D. degree in the Department of Chemical Engineering should 
contact the department for specific information about the interdisciplinary 
Ph.D. degree program. (See also Part 4 of this catalog.) A program with a 
major in chemical engineering, designed to meet the needs and objectives of 
each student, will be developed in consultation with the student's research 

58 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 



adviser and advisory and examining committee (AEC). It should be emphasized 
that the Ph.D. degree is primarily a research degree and therefore the research 
work for a doctoral dissertation should show a high order of originality on the 
part of the student and must offer an original contribution to the field of 
engineering science. 

Admission Requirements. Admission to the Ph.D. program is open to 
students who qualify as regular graduate students (see Part 4 of this catalog) 
and who have obtained a B.S. or M.S. degree in science or engineering. 
Students admitted must have demonstrated an excellent academic 
record in previously completed college course work with a minimum cumula- 
tive grade-point average of 3.0/4.0. Three letters of recommendation are 
required, and GRE scores may be requested by the department. Students who 
enter the Ph.D. program should complete the requirements in 2-4 years. 

Course Requirements. All B.S. students entering the Ph.D. program are 
required to take Ch.E. 301, 344, and 345, while M.S. students entering the 
program must demonstrate equivalent courses taken for graduate credit in 
their previous work. In addition, all full-time students must take one credit of 
seminar/journal club (Ch.E. 400) each semester. For a student admitted 
directly after the B.S. degree, the Ph.D. program consists of a minimum of 36 
course credit hours, excluding research (Ch.E. 497) and seminar/journal club 
(Ch.E. 400). If the student has an M.S. in chemical engineering from WVU, the 
program consists of a minimum of 12 course credit hours (excluding Ch.E. 497 
and Ch.E. 400). If the student has an M.S. in chemical engineering from 
another institution, the program consists of a minimum of 18 course credit 
hours (excluding Ch.E. 497 and Ch.E. 400). Students must complete a minor, 
consisting of a minimum of 9 semester hours of a coherent set of courses taken 
outside the department. These courses may be related to the major research 
area. Non-technical courses would be considered only under exceptional 
circumstances. Courses at the 200-level may be acceptable. All courses must 
be approved by the AEC and the academic adviser. Students must complete 
graduate courses with an overall course work average of 3.0 or better 
(exclusive of research credits) and complete all Ch.E. courses with an overall 
grade-point average of 3.0 (exclusive of research credits). A minimum of 24 
graduate credits in dissertation research is required. Also, two semesters of 
full-time attendance at West Virginia University, Morgantown campus, is 
required to complete the residency requirement. 

Qualifying Examination. All students must pass the Ph.D. qualifying 
examination given in their first summer at WVU. This examination is 
designed to assess the basic competency of students in the chemical 
engineering field to determine if they have sufficient knowledge to undertake 
independent research. 

Original Research Proposition. Within six months of passing the qualifying 
examination or of entering the Ph.D. program, whichever is later, the student 
must successfully defend an original research proposition in an oral exam- 
ination. The written proposition, developed by the student alone, remains the 
intellectual property of the student and must be on a topic unrelated to the 
student's own research work for the dissertation. 

Dissertation Research Proposal. A student must receive acceptance of a 
written dissertation research proposal and must also successfully defend this 
proposal to the student's AEC. This requirement must be completed within 
six months of passing the qualifying examination or of entering the Ph.D. 
program, whichever is later. The research work for the doctoral dissertation 



CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 59 



should show a high order of originality on the part of the student and must 
offer an original contribution to the field of engineering science. 

Candidacy. A student who has successfully completed all course work, 
passed the qualifying examination, and successfully defended the original 
research proposition and research proposal is defined as one who is a 
candidate for the Ph.D. degree. 

Final Examination. In order to complete the Ph.D. requirements, a student 
must pass a final oral examination on the results embodied in the dissertation. 
This examination is open to the public, and in order to evaluate critically the 
student's competency, may include testing on material in related fields, as 
deemed necessary by the AEC. In addition, since the Ph.D. degree is primarily 
a research degree that embodies the results of an original research proposal 
and represents a significant contribution to the scientific literature, the 
student must submit a manuscript on this research to the AEC. 

Chemical Engineering (Ch. E.) 

224. Process Development. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, 144; Ch. E. Ill, 145, or consent. Coal 
conversion process systems from the modified unit operations-unit process 
concept. Thermodynamics and kinetics in evaluation of system requirements and 
performance. 3 hr. rec. 

231. Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. Classification 
and solution of mathematical problems important in chemical engineering. 
Treatment and interpretation of engineering data. Analytical methods for ordinary 
and partial differential equations including orthogonal functions and integral 
transforms. 3 hr. rec. 

251. Metallurgical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 12. Principles of production of metals 
and alloys, plastic deformation of metals, corrosion, and metal failure. 3 hr. rec. 

258. Polymers and Polymer Processing. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, Ch. E. 110. Polymers and 
their handling. Properties of macromolecules as influenced by molecular weight, 
polymerization methods, plastics technology, polymer engineering, polymerization 
kinetics, polymer characterization, commercial production processes, injection 
molding processes, blow molding and composites. 3 hr. lee. 

270. Strategy of Process Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. Ill or consent. Latest theories of 
process design and process optimization, proven through regular use by practicing 
engineers, are applied to the major problems of process engineering. 3 hr. rec. 

280. Chemical Engineering Problems. 1-6 hr. For juniors, seniors, and graduate 
students. May be used to correct deficiencies preparatory to or following courses 
such as Ch. E. 170 and 171, or for other students desiring to take only a portion of a 
course. 

301. Transport Phenomena. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to equations of change 
(heat, mass and momentum transfer) with a differential balance approach. Use in 
Newtonian flow, turbulent flow, mass and energy transfer, radiation, convection. 
Estimation of transport coefficients. 3 hr. rec. 

330. Process Dynamics and Control. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Dynamic response of processes 
and control instruments. Use of Laplace transforms and frequency response 
methods in analysis of control systems. Application of control systems in chemical 
reactors, distillation, and heat transfer operations. Introduction to nonlinear 
systems. 3 hr. rec. 



60 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 



331. Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 and consent. 
Classification and solution of mathematical problems important in chemical 
engineering. Treatment and interpretation of engineering data. Analytical methods 
for ordinary and partial differential equations including orthogonal functions and 
integral transforms. Vector calculus. 

344. Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Logical development of thermodynamic 
principles. These are applied to selected topics including development and 
application of the phase rule, physical and chemical equilibria in complex 
systems, and nonideal solutions. Introduction to nonequilibrium thermodynam- 
ics. 3 hr. rec. 

345. Chemical Reaction Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Homogeneous reactions, batch 
and flow reactors, ideal reactors, macro and micro mixing, nonideal flow reactors, 
heterogeneous reaction systems, catalytic and noncatalytic reactions, reactor 
stability analysis, reactor optimization. 3 hr. rec. 

351. Fluidization Engineering. PR: Consent. Fundamentals of fluidization, two-phase 
flow theory and powder characteristics, structure and property of the emulsion 
phase and bubbles, mass- and heat-transfer in fluidized beds with and without 
chemical reaction. 

371. Advanced Separation Processes. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 301 or consent. Design and 
selection of separation processes including crystallization, leaching, extraction, 
distillation, absorption, filtration, membrane, and diffusional separation processes. 
Similarities between separation processes based on mode of operation are 
emphasized. 

391. Advanced Topics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of topics not covered in 
regularly scheduled courses. 

400. Chemical Engineering Seminar. 1 hr. Seminars on current research by visitors and 
graduate students. 

402. Advanced Fluid Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of flow of fluids and 
transport of momentum and mechanical energy. Differential equations of fluid 
flow; potential flow, flow in porous media, laminar boundary layer theory, and 
non-Newtonian fluids. 3 hr. rec. 

404. Advanced Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of transport of thermal energy 
in solids and fluids as well as radiative transfer. Steady and transient conduction; 
heat transfer to flowing fluids; evaporation; boiling and condensation; packed and 
fluid bed heat transfer. 3 hr. rec. 

406. Advanced Mass Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of diffusion, interphase mass 
transfer theory, turbulent transport, simultaneous mass and heat transfer, mass 
transfer with chemical reaction, high mass transfer rates, multicomponent 
macroscopic balances. 3 hr. rec. 

432. Optimization of Chemical Engineering Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Optimization 
in engineering design, unconstrained optimization and differential calculus 
equality constraints optimization, search technique, maximum principles, geo- 
metric and dynamic programming, linear and nonlinear programming, calculus of 
variations. 3 hr. rec. 

446. Catalysis. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 345 or consent. Physical and chemical properties of 
catalytic solids, nature and theories of absorption, thermodynamics of catalysis, 
theories of mass and energy transport, theoretical and experimental reaction rates, 
reactor design and optimization. 3 hr. rec. 



CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 61 



447. Non-Catalytic Solid-Fluid Reactions. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 345 or consent. Reaction 
models, pseudo-steady approximation, effectiveness factor, transport and chemical 
reaction properties, geometric, thermal and transitional instabilities, simultaneous 
multiple reactions, selectivities in fixed, moving and fluidized bed reactor design. 
3 hr. rec. 

480. Advanced Independent Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to increase the depth 
of study in a specialized area of chemical engineering. 

491. Special Topics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not covered in 
regularly-scheduled courses. Recent topics have included: Biochemical Engineering, 
Fluidization, Mathematical Methods, Numerical Methods, Powder Technology, 
and Surfaces and Colloids. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

CHEMISTRY 

Anthony Winston, Chairperson of the Department 

222 Clark Hall or 471 Chemistry Research Laboratory 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Dalai, Finklea, Fodor, Gibson, Hall, Jagodzinski, Lovett, 

MacDowell, Magriotis, Mintz, Nakon, Penn, Petersen, Showalter, Smart, Wang, and 

Winston. Associate members Moore, Muth, and Strohl. 

The Department of Chemistry offers graduate studies leading to the 
degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy with research 
concentration in the areas of analytical, inorganic, organic, physical, and 
theoretical chemistry. The Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy 
degrees require completion of a research project which represents the 
principal theme about which the graduate program is constructed. 

Applicants for graduate studies in chemistry must have a bachelor's 
degree as a minimum requirement. Applicants must have a major or 
concentration in chemistry and an appropriate background in physics and 
mathematics. All entering graduate students in chemistry are required to take 
departmental guidance examinations in the major areas of chemistry. These 
examinations, on the undergraduate level, are administered before registration 
and serve to guide the faculty in recommending a course program for the 
beginning graduate student. Deficiencies revealed on the departmental 
guidance examinations need to be corrected in a manner prescribed by the 
faculty. All graduate students pursuing M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in chemistry 
are required to teach in the instructional laboratories for a minimum of two 
semesters. 

The WVU general requirements for the Master of Science degree are 
outlined in Part 5 of this catalog. Graduate students in the M.S. program in 
chemistry are required to submit a research thesis. They may apply up to 6 
hours of research credit toward the 30-hour requirement. The remaining 24 
hours of credit must be earned in the basic graduate courses which reflect a 
diversified exposure to chemistry; no more than 9 hours of 200-level 
chemistry courses may be included; no more than 10 hours may be elected 
outside the department; and course work taken at the 300 to 400-level must 
include at least three, 3-credit-hour courses distributed in two of the three 
areas of chemistry outside the student's major area of research. A final oral 
examination is administered after completion and submission of the thesis. 

The program for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy reflects a flexible, 
research-oriented approach geared to develop the interests, capability, and 

62 CHEMISTRY 



potential of mature students. A program of courses is recommended to suit 
individual needs based on background, ability, and maturity. These courses 
are classified as basic graduate courses which present the essentials of a 
given discipline on an advanced level, and specialized graduate courses which 
take one to the frontiers in a specific area of research. The course offerings are 
designed to provide guidelines from which students can launch their inde- 
pendent studies in preparation for candidacy examinations. Students are 
required to enroll in the departmental seminar program and are expected to 
attend special lectures and seminars offered by visiting chemists. 

Graduate students in the Ph.D. program are required to complete 
satisfactorily a minimum of three 3-hour courses at the 300-400-course level 
which are offered by the Department of Chemistry and which are distributed 
in two areas of outside their major area of research. In addition, each major 
area in chemistry requires students in that area to enroll in basic graduate 
courses which present the essentials of that discipline on an advanced level. 

Candidacy examinations consist of both a written and oral portion. The 
written examinations are of the cumulative type, and are offered eight times a 
year. The oral examination is based on a proposition for a research problem 
not intimately related to the student's own problem, or any particular 
research problem being actively pursued at WVU. This proposition is 
presented in writing to the student's research committee and defended before 
that group and any other interested faculty members. 

Each candidate for the Ph.D. must satisfy a departmental language 
requirement in a language approved by the student's research committee. 

Research, which is the major theme of graduate studies, may be initiated 
as early as the student and faculty feel appropriate for each individual case. 
Normally, a student will begin laboratory work no later than the second 
semester. Upon successful completion of an original piece of research, the 
candidate will present results in a Ph.D. dissertation and at the appropriate 
time defend the work in a final oral examination. 

Chemistry (Chem.) 

Note: A charge is made for breakage and supplies in laboratory courses and for failure to 
check out of the laboratory. 

201. Chemical Literature. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and Chem. 141 or 246. Study of 
techniques of locating, utilizing, and compiling information needed by the 
research worker in chemistry. 1 hr. lee. 

202. Selected Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Written consent, 
with at least a 2.0 grade-point average in chemistry courses. Individual instruction 
under supervision of an instructor. 

210. Instrumental Analysis. II. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 115 and Physical chemistry. Lectures 
and demonstrations. Basic electronics, electrochemistry, spectroscopy, mass spec- 
trometry and gas chromatography. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. demonstration. 

211. Intermediate Analytical Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115 and physical chemistry. 
Principles of analytical procedures and separations at an intermediate level. 3 hr. 
lee. 

212. Environmental Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115, 134, and physical chemistry. 
Study of the nature, reactions, transport, and fates of chemical species in the 
environment. 

213. Instrumental Analysis Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 210. Experiments using 
modern chemical instrumentation. 3 hr. lab. 

CHEMISTRY 63 



214. Computer Interfacing Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 210; Cone: Chem. 213. 
Computer interfacing of chemical instruments. 

222. Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds. I. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry. Correlation of 
reactions and properties of elements and compounds based on modern theories of 
chemical bonding and structure. Acid-base theory, non-aqueous solvents, ligand 
field theory, and stereochemistry. 3 hr. lee. 

235. Methods of Structure Determination. I. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and 136. Use of 
chemical methods and uv, ir, nmr, esr, Raman and mass spectroscopy to elucidate 
structures of organic compounds. For students in chemistry and related fields who 
may need these methods in research and applied science. 2 hr. lee, two 3-hr. lab. 

237. Polymer Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and physical chemistry. Methods, 
mechanisms, and underlying theory of polymerization. Structure and stereochem- 
istry of polymers in relation to chemical, physical, and mechanical properties. 3 hr. 
lee. 

239. Organic Syntheses. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, 136. Modern synthetic methods of 
organic chemistry. One 1-hr. lee, two 3-hr. lab. 

241. Crystallography. II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Physical chemistry or consent. Applications 
of X-ray diffraction of crystals to the study of crystal and molecular structure. 
Includes theories of diffraction and crystallographic methods of analysis. 3 hr. lee 
[Not offered in 1988-90.} 

243. Introduction to Radiochemistry and Radiation Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone: 
Physical chemistry. Fundamentals of radiochemistry and the use of tracer 
techniques. An introduction to radiation chemistry and how ionizing radiation 
interacts with matter. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. (Not offered in 1988-90.) 

244. Colloid and Surface Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry. Selected topics in 
the properties and physical chemistry of systems involving macromolecules, 
lyophobic colloids, and surfaces. 3 hr. lee [Not offered in 1988-90.) 

246. Physical Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, Math. 16, and Phys. 12. A first course in 
physical chemistry. Topics include a study of thermodynamics and chemical 
equilibria. 3 hr. lee (Students may not receive credit for Chem. 246 and for Chem. 
141.) 

247. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 18 or 115 and Chem. 246. 
Experimentation illustrating the principles of physical chemistry and offering 
experience with chemical instrumentation. One 3-hr. lab. 

248. Physical Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 246 and Math. 17. Continuation of Chem. 
246. Chemical dynamics and the structure of matter. 3 hr. lee (Students may not 
receive credit for Chem. 248 and for Chem. 141.) 

249. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. I. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 246, 247, 248. Continuation of 
Chem. 247. Two 3-hr. lab. 

250. Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Introduction to 
the quantum theory of chemical bonding. Atomic structure, theoretical spectro- 
scopy, predictions of molecular structures and bond properties. 3 hr. lee 

315. Chemical Separations. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115, 133, and physical chemistry. Modern 
methods of chromatography from a theoretical and practical standpoint. General 
principles of separation stressing the practical implementation of these principles 
with particular emphasis on high performance liquid chromatography and gas 
chromatography. 3 hr. lee [Offered Fall 1989 and every third semester.) 

331. Advanced Organic Chemistry 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134. Structural concepts, 
bonding, tautomerism, static and dynamic stereochemistry, mechanistic classi- 
fications of reagents, and reactions including some applications. 3 hr. lee 

64 CHEMISTRY 



332. Advaced Organic Chemistry 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Continuation of Chem. 331 
with emphasis upon synthetic methods and reaction mechanisms. 3 hr. lee. 

341. Chemical Thermodynamics. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Principles of classical and 
statistical thermodynamics and their application to chemical problems. 3 hr. lee. 
(Not offered in 1988-90.) 

411, 412. Seminar in Analytical Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

413. Electrochemistry and Instrumentation. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 210. Electronic instru- 
mentation applied to study of mass transfer kinetics of electrode reactions, 
voltammetry, and high-frequency methods. 3 hr. lee. (Offered Spring 1989 and 
every third semester.) 

414. Spectroscopic Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 213. Problems in design of instruments 
for each of the various spectral regions. 3 hr. lee. (Offered Fall 1988 and every third 
semester.) 

417, 418. Advanced Topics in Analytical Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. 

421, 422. Seminar in Inorganic Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

423. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 222. Bonding theories, 
stereochemistry, nonaqueous solvent systems, physical methods and current 
topics. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

424. Coordination Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 222. Ligand field theory, spectral 
interpretations, stability considerations, synthetic methods, unusual oxidation 
states, organometallic compounds, other topics of current interest. 3 hr. lee. (Not 
offered in 1989-90.) 

425. Inorganic Reactions and Mechanisms. I. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 222 and 443. Substitution, 
isomerization, racemization, and oxidation-reduction reactions. 2 hr. lee. (Not 
offered in 1989-90.) Register for Chem. 427—1 hr. 

427, 428. Advanced Topics in Inorganic Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. 

431, 432. Seminar in Organic Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

433. Physical Organic Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Theoretical considerations of 
organic molecules, kinetics and other methods used in the study of organic 
structure and reaction mechanisms, linear free energy relationship and other 
related topics. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1989-90.) 

436. Heterocyclic Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Major heterocyclic systems and 
discussion of selected natural products containing heterocycles. 3 hr. lee. (Offered 
on demand.) 

437, 438. Advanced Topics in Organic Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. 

441, 442. Seminar in Physical Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

443. Chemical Kinetics. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Theories and applications of kinetics in 
gaseous state and in solution. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

444. Statistical Mechanics. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 446. Theory and application of 
statistical mechanics to chemical systems. 3 hr. lee. (Offered on demand.) 



CHEMISTRY 65 



445. Theoretical Chemistry 1. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Differential equations. Theoretical 
background for quantum mechanics. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1989-90.) 

446. Theoretical Chemistry 2. 1 or II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 445. Theories and applications of 
quantum mechanics in chemistry. 3 hr. lee. (Offered on demand.] 

447. Molecular Spectroscopy and Structure. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 250. Advanced 
applications of spectral methods to a study of molecular structure. 3 hr. lee. [Not 
offered in 1989-90.) 

448. 449. Advanced Topics in Physical Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. (Offered on demand.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

492. Research Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Graduate student in chemistry. Research 
seminars by visiting lecturers. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in academic and cultural programs. 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 

Lyle K. Moulton, Chairperson of Department 
623 Engineering Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: M.S.C.E. 

M.S.E., Ph.D. available with civil engineering options 
Graduate Faculty: Members Bowders, Dean, Eck, Eli, Gidley, Gray, Halvorsen, Head, 

Hota, Jenkins, Luttrell, Moulton, Neumann, Sack, Siriwardane, Spyrakos, and 

Usmen. 

The Department of Civil Engineering offers the Master of Science in Civil 
Engineering in conjunction with the College of Engineering. The Master of 
Science in Engineering and the Doctor of Philosophy degrees are available 
with emphases in civil engineering. 

The Department of Civil Engineering has a full-time faculty of 17, who are 
active in teaching, research, and professional commitments. There are four 
major areas of interest of the faculty and graduate studies: 

1. Environmental engineering and water resources, which include air 
pollution, occupational health, solid-hazardous waste management, water 
supply and pollution, groundwater hydraulics, and hydrology. 

2. Geotechnical and materials engineering, which covers soil mechanics, 
foundations engineering, soil-structure interaction, groundwater and seepage, 
and earthwork design, as well as construction materials and waste product 
utilization. 

3. Transportation engineering, which includes transportation systems 
principles, design, and planning. 

4. Structural engineering, which involves work and study in advanced 
structural analysis, bridge engineering, and building design. 

With few exceptions, the members of the faculty are registered profes- 
sional engineers in one or more states and are involved in state, regional, and 
national professional organizations, serving on numerous technical commit- 
tees. They are successful researchers and have published extensively in 
various technical journals. The civil engineering faculty is concerned with 

66 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



more than the technical education of students; it is concerned with the 
development of a professional engineer, able to assume the roles of a problem 
solver, decision maker, and technical leader, and with the educational 
background to undergird the continuing development required during an 
engineer's professional career. 

Each graduate student can tailor a program of study to satisfy the 
student's own special interest. Opportunities abound within the master's and 
doctoral tracks for a research experience which provides a chance for a 
student to tackle an engineering problem individually, with guidance from a 
faculty adviser. The graduate program in civil engineering has been established 
with the philosophy of developing in the student the ability to use today's 
contemporary methods of engineering analysis and design so that they can 
solve tomorrow's engineering problems. 

Master of Science in Civil Engineering (M.S.C.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

Students must comply with rules and regulations as outlined in the 
general requirements for graduate work. Each candidate will, with the 
approval and at the discretion of the graduate committee, follow a planned 
program which must conform to one of the following outlines: 

1. A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, not more than 6 of which are in 
research leading to an acceptable thesis. 

2. A minimum of 33 semester credit hours, not more than 3 of which are in 
research leading to an acceptable problem report. 

3. A minimum of 36 semester credit hours, with no thesis or problem 
report required. 

Courses: No rigid curricula are prescribed for the degrees of Master of 
Science in Civil Engineering and Master of Science in Engineering. Graduate- 
level work in mathematics, mechanics, or other appropriate areas of science is 
customary; however, at least 15 semester hours of credit should normally be 
selected from graduate civil engineering courses. 

Thesis or Problem Report. A thesis or problem is normally required of all 
candidates. While required credit in research (C.E. 497) is devoted to the 
thesis or report preparation, the thesis or problem report is not automatically 
approved after the required number of semester hours of research work have 
been completed. The thesis or problem report must conform with the general 
WVU requirements for graduate study and with any additional requirements 
established by the Department of Civil Engineering. 

Final Examination. A candidate shall be required to pass an examination 
which may be written, oral, or both, to be administered by the student's 
Advisory and Examining Committee. The examination shall cover course 
material and the thesis or problem report, depending upon the program 
followed. 

Approval for the M.S.C.E. degree is restricted to those holding a 
baccalaureate degree in civil engineering. 

Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

The Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) program is available to 
students approved for the graduate program who possess a baccalaureate 
degree in a technical area other than civil engineering. Students entering this 
graduate program must complete appropriate undergraduate work as specified 



CIVIL ENGINEERING 67 



by departmental regulations. This degree program is administered by the 
College of Engineering; the program may emphasize civil engineering. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree is administered through the 
College of Engineering Interdisciplinary Program; it may have civil engineering 
as an option. A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must comply 
with the rules and regulations outlined in the general requirements. The 
research work for the doctoral dissertation must show a high degree of 
originality on the part of the student and must constitute an original 
contribution to the art and science of civil engineering. 

Civil Engineering (C.E.) 

201. Principles of Boundary Surveying. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101 or consent. A study of the 
retracement requirements for metes and bounds survey systems. The study will 
include interpretation and writing of the property descriptions, legal principles 
related to boundary establishment, and analytical approaches to boundary 
location. 3 hr. rec. 

208. Control Surveying. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. A study of the measurement and 
computation techniques used to locate positions on the surface of the earth. 2 hr. 
rec, 3 hr. lab. 

212. Concrete and Aggregates. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110 or consent. Considerations and 
methods for the design of concrete mixes. Properties of portland cement and 
aggregates and their influence on the design and performance of concrete 
mixtures. Testing of concrete and aggregate and the significance of these tests. 2 
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

213. Construction Methods. 3 hr. PR: Junior or senior standing in civil engineering. 
Study of construction methods, equipment, and administration with particular 
emphasis on the influence of new developments in technology. 3 hr. rec. 

220. Computational Fluid Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120, E. 2 or consent. Use of the 
computer in elementary hydraulics, open channel flow, potential flow, and 
boundary layer flow, numerical techniques for solution of algebraic equations, 
ordinary differential equations, and partial differential equations. 3 hr. rec. 

231. Highway Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132, 181. Highway administration, economics 
and finance; planning and design; subgrade soils and drainage; construction and 
maintenance. Design of a highway. Center-line and grade-line projections, 
earthwork and cost estimate. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

233. Urban Transportation Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. 
Principles of planning and physical design of transportation systems for different 
parts of the urban area. Land use, social, economic, and environmental compatibil- 
ities are emphasized. Evaluation and impact assessment. 

235. Railway Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. Development and importance of the 
railroad industry. Location, construction, operation, and maintenance. 3 hr. rec. 

240. Applied Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The hydrologic cycle with emphasis on 
precipitation and runoff as related to design of hydraulic structures, soil and water 
conservation, and flood control. 3 hr. rec. 

245. Properties of Air Pollutants. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Physical, chemical, and biological 
behavioral properties of dusts, droplets, and gases in the atmosphere. Air 
pollutant sampling and analysis. Planning and operating air pollution surveys. 2 
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

68 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



251. Public Health Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Engineering aspects involved in 
control of the environment for protection of health and promotion of comfort of 
humans. Communicable disease control, milk and food sanitation, air pollution, 
refuse disposal, industrial hygiene, and radiological health hazards. 3 hr. rec. 

252. Water Resources Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 146. Application of hydrologic and 
hydraulic principles in the design and analysis of water resources systems. Topics 
include hydraulic structures, economics and water law irrigation, hydroelectric 
power, navigation, flood-drainage litigation, and water-resources planning. 3 hr. 
rec. 

260. Structural Analysis 2. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 160. Fundamental theory of statically 
indeterminate structures. Analysis of indeterminate beams, frames and trusses by 
stiffness and flexibility methods; computer-aided structural analysis by standard 
computer codes; study of influence lines for beams, frames, and trusses. 3 hr. rec. 

270. Reinforced Concrete Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Behavior 
and design of reinforced concrete members. Material properties; design methods 
and safety considerations; flexure; shear; bond and anchorage; combined flexure 
and axial load; footings; introduction to torsion, slender columns, and prestressed 
concrete. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

271. Steel Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Design of steel bridge 
and building systems with emphasis on connections, beams, columns, plastic 
design, and cost estimates. 3 hr. rec. 

274. Timber Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Fundamentals of 
modern timber design and analysis. Topics include wood properties, design of 
beams, columns, trusses and pole structures using dimension lumber, glue- 
laminated products, and plywood. 3 hr. rec. 

281. Foundations Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181. The practice of geotechnical 
engineering, subsurface explorations, geotechnical analysis and design of shallow 
and deep foundations, retaining structures, stability of earth slopes, soil and site 
improvement. 3 hr. rec. 

283. Earthwork Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181. Use of soil mechanics principles in the 
analysis, design, and construction of earth structures. Principles of compaction 
and compaction control; an introduction to slope stability analysis and landslides, 
earth reinforcement systems, and ground improvement techniques. 3 hr. rec. 

290. Civil Engineering Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior or senior standing. Special topics in 
various aspects of civil engineering analysis, design, and construction. 

291. Comprehensive Project for Civil Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in civil 
engineering. Application of civil engineering principles, through group studies, to 
develop a solution for a comprehensive engineering problem. Consideration given 
to a problem involving all aspects of civil engineering. 1 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

293. Basic Finite Element Methods. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing or consent. Simplified 
treatment of theoretical basis of finite element method, background theory, 
formulation and applications: stress analysis in axial columns, one-dimensional 
heat and fluid flow, consolidation, beam-column analysis, mass transport, and 
overland flow. 

296. Civil Engineering Studies. 1-3 hr. (Only 3 hr. credit may he applied toward the 
B.S.C.E. degree.) PR: Consent. Supervised internships and field experience in civil 
engineering analysis, design, 'and construction. 

307. Photogrammetry. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. Camera calibration, stereoscopy, parallax, 
geometry of vertical and oblique photographs, theory and techniques of orientation, 
stereoscopic plotting instruments and analytical methods. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 



CIVIL ENGINEERING 69 



310. Bituminous Materials and Mixtures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110 or consent. Manufacture, 
testing, and nature of bituminous mixtures including the influence of aggregates, 
temperature, and other variables on mix design. Significance of test methods and 
specifications. Construction practice. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

311. Pavement Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Effects of traffic, soil, environment, 
and loads on the design and behavior of pavement systems. Design of pavement 
systems. Consideration of drainage and climate. Pavement performance and 
performance surveys. 3 hr. rec. 

320. Groundwater Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to groundwater, formu- 
lation of equations for saturated and unsaturated flow, analytical solutions for 
steady and transient cases, transport of pollutants and numerical techniques. 3 hr. 
rec. 

321. Environmental Fluid Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Equations of motion including 
buoyancy and Coriolis force, mechanics of jets and plumes, diffusion, dispersion 
and mixing in rivers, lakes, reservoirs, and estuaries. 3 hr. rec. 

332. Airport Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. Financing, air travel 
demand modeling, aircraft trends, traffic control, site selection, ground access, 
noise control, geometric design, pavement design, terminal facilities. 3 hr. rec. 

333. Geometric Design of Highways. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The theory and practice of 
geometric design of modern highways. Horizontal and vertical alignment, cross- 
slope, design speed, sight distances, interchanges, and intersections. Critical 
analysis of design specifications. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

334. Introduction to Traffic Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. The purpose, 
scope, and methods of traffic engineering. Emphasis on the three basic elements of 
each element and interactions between the elements. Laboratory devoted to 
conducting simple traffic studies, solving practical problems, and designing 
traffic facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

336. Highway Planning. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory and practice of highway investment 
decision-making with emphasis on quantitative techniques of traffic assignment 
and travel demand forecasting, system evaluation, establishing priorities and 
programming. Both rural and urban highway systems are considered. 3 hr. rec 

337. Public Transportation Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design of rail and highway 
modes for urban and rural areas. Consideration of vehicle technology, facility and 
route design, conventional and paratransit services, and related marketing, 
finance and coordination issues. 3 hr. rec 

338. Highway Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 231 or consent. Relationship between 
human, vehicular, and roadway factors which impact safety; functional require- 
ments of highway safety features; legal aspects; accident analysis; evaluation of 
highway safety projects. 3 hr. rec 

339. Traffic Engineering Operations. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 334. Theory and practice of 
application of traffic engineering regulations; traffic control concepts for urban 
street systems and freeways; freeway surveillance and incident management; 
driver information systems; traffic control system technology and management. 3 
hr. rec 

349. Solid Waste Disposal. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Patterns and problems of solid waste 
storage, transport, and disposal. Examinations of various engineering alternatives 
with appropriate consideration for air and water pollution control and land 
reclamation. Analytical approaches to recovery and reuse of materials. 2 hr. rec, 3 
hr. lab. 

70 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



350. Sanitary Chemistry and Biology. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 147 or consent. Study of physical 
and chemical properties of water. Theory and methods of chemical analysis of 
water, sewage, and industrial wastes. Biological aspects of stream pollution 
problems. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

353. Hazardous Waste Control Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Definition of hazards; 
unit processes for hazardous waste treatment; secure land disposal of hazardous 
wastes; cleanup of hazardous material spills and abandoned waste dumps; and 
related topics. 3 hr. rec. 

356. Principles of Biological Waste Treatment. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 350 or consent. Examination 
of biological treatment systems related to microbiology and function. Models used 
to describe system behavior and kinetics are developed. Laboratory and field 
experiments are performed to understand the relation between operation and 
design. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

361. Statically Indeterminate Structures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260 or consent. Force and 
displacement methods of analysis; energy principles and their application to 
trusses, frames, and grids; effects of axial forces; influence lines for frames, 
arches, and trusses; secondary stress analysis. 3 hr. rec. 

363. Introduction to Structural Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or 460. General theory for 
dynamic response of systems having one or several degrees of freedom. Emphasis 
on the application of dynamic response theory to structural design. 3 hr. rec. 

373. Prestressed Concrete. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260, 270 or consent. Behavior and design of 
prestressed concrete members. Materials, bending, shear, torsion, methods of 
prestressing, prestress losses, deflections, compression members, composite 
members, indeterminate structures. 3 hr. rec. 

380. Soil Properties and Behavior. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Soil mineralogy and the 
physico-chemical properties of soils and their application to an understanding of 
permeability, consolidation, shear strength, and compaction. Prediction of engi- 
neering behavior of soils in light of physico-chemical concepts. 3 hr. rec. 

381. Soil Testing. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181 or consent. Experimental evaluation of soil 
properties and behavior. Emphasis is placed on the proper interpretation of 
experimental results and application of such results to practical problems. 1 hr. 
rec, 6 hr. lab. 

385. Airphoto Interpretation. 3 hr. Study of techniques for obtaining qualitative 
information concerning type and engineering characteristics of surficial materials. 
Use of airphoto interpretation for evaluation of engineering problems encountered 
in design and location of engineering facilities. 3 hr. rec. 

393. Advanced Finite Element Methods. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 293 or consent. Formulation 
procedures and applications of finite element methods to two- and three- 
dimensional problems, techniques for nonlinear analysis computer implementation; 
applications in field problems, flow, and dynamics. 

431. Traffic Flow Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 213 and C.E. 438 or consent. Basic concepts of 
quantitative analysis of traffic systems. Probability theory, queuing theory, 
pedestrian and traffic delay at traffic signals, turning at intersections, parking 
problems, merging traffic on two-lane roads, simulation of traffic problems. 3 hr. 
rec. (Also listed as I.E. 431.} 

432. Transportation Systems Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Systematic examination of 
the interaction between transport technology, activity systems, and traffic flows. 
Quantitative analysis of the relationship among vehicle cycles, networks, con- 
gestion, choice behavior, cost functions, and resulting travel-market equilibration. 
3 hr. rec. 



CIVIL ENGINEERING 71 



434. Urban Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Problems of transportation in the urban area 
as they relate to general development of the city. Emphasis on the engineer in 
planning for urban transportation and relationship of engineer to the city planner 
and city administration. 3 hr. rec. 

440. Deterministic Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An in-depth treatment of the 
dynamics of the accumulation of runoff, including the formulation of the unsteady 
surface flow equations and the unsteady saturated-unsaturated subsurface flow 
equations. Both analytical and numerical solutions are presented with applications. 
3 hr. rec. 

441. Stochastic Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The use of probabilistic and random 
processes techniques in the study of hydrologic problems, including multivariate 
time series and frequency-domain analyses of hydrologic data, and stochastic 
modeling of multidimensional hydrologic processes. 3 hr. rec. 

450. Environmental Systems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 252 or consent. Mathematical 
and computer modelling of environmental systems with emphasis on decision- 
making; applications will be selected from some or all of the following areas: water 
quality, water resources planning, solid waste management, waste treatment. 3 hr. 
rec. 

452. Water Treatment Theory. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 350. Theory of various procedures and 
techniques utilized in treatment of water for municipal and industrial use. Review 
of water quality criteria. Design of water purification facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

454. Industrial and Advanced Waste Treatment. 3 hr. PR or Cone: C.E. 350 or consent. 
Basic physical and chemical unit operations used in industrial and advanced 
waste treatment; applications for waste water reclamation and reuse; study of 
industrial wastes from standpoint of process, source, and treatment. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. 
lab. 

457. Hydraulics of Sanitary Engineering Works. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120. Hydraulics of 
sanitary sewers, storm sewers, and water distribution systems; design of special 
structures including pumping stations, siphons and retention basins; analysis of 
flow sources including sewer infiltration studies, material selection, and construc- 
tion methods. 3 hr. rec. 

458. Design of Sanitary Works. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120. Water supply and waste water 
disposal problems. Design of treatment facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

460. Finite Element Methods in Structural Analysis. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. 
Relationships of elasticity theory; definitions and basic element operations; direct 
and variational methods of triangular and rectangular elements related to plane 
stress, plane strain, and flat plates in bending; variational principles in global 
analysis. 3 hr. rec. 

461. Bridge Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. Statically indeterminate trusses, 
continuous trussels; steel and concrete arches; long-span and suspension bridges; 
secondary stresses. 3 hr. rec. 

462. Numerical Analysis of Engineering Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. 
Numerical methods for the solution of equilibrium, eigenvalue and propagation 
problems of discrete and continuous structural systems with special emphasis on 
weighted residual techniques. 3 hr. rec. 

470. Behavior of Steel Members. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 271 or consent. Elastic behavior of steel 
members subjected to axial load, bending, and torsion. Elastic and inelastic 
response of beams, columns, and beam-columns to load and the resulting design 
implications. Comparison with standard steel codes and specifications. 3 hr. rec. 

72 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



471. Light Gage Metal Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260, 271, or consent. Analysis and design of 
light gage material systems; flexural and compression members design; investi- 
gations into post buckling strength and optimum weight systems. 3 hr. rec. 

473. Structural Design for Dynamic Loads. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 363 or consent. Nature of 
dynamic loading caused by earthquakes and nuclear weapons blasts; nature of 
dynamic resistance of structural elements and structural systems; criteria for 
design of blast-resistant and earthquake resistant structures; simplified and 
approximate design methods. 3 hr. rec. 

475. Analysis and Design of Multistory Structures. 3 hr. (May be repeated once.) PR: 
C.E. 363, and C.E. 270 or 271. Introduction; service, structural and construction 
systems; analysis and design for lateral and gravity forces; structural modeling; 
computer applications; approximate methods; connections; foundations; review of 
standard building codes; special topics. 3 hr. rec. 

476. Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Members. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 270 or consent. Studies of 
actual member behavior; members in flexure, combined flexure, shear, and 
torsion; bond and anchorage; combined axial load and flexure; slender columns; 
deep beams; derivation of current code provisions. 3 hr. rec. 

477. Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Structures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 476. Continuation of 
C.E. 476. Limit state design; continuous beams and frames; moment redistribution; 
flat plates and flat slabs; two-way slabs; yield line theory; comparison of theory 
with standard practice; results of recent research; special topics. 3 hr. rec. 

481. Advanced Mechanics of Soils. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181, 381, M.A.E. 318 or consent. Stress 
invariants, stress history and stress path, elastic and quasi-elastic models for 
soils; soil plasticity, failure theories for soils; critical state soil mechanics, and 
determination of construction parameters. 3 hr. rec. 

482. Advanced Foundation Analysis. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Study of soil- 
structure interaction. Applications of principles of soil mechanics and numerical 
methods for analysis and design of geotechnical structures: strip footings, axially 
and laterally loaded piles, braced excavations, sheet pile walls, tunnel lining, and 
buried pipes and culverts. 3 hr. rec. 

483. Advanced Earthwork Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 283 or consent. Application of the 
principles of theoretical soil mechanics to the design of embankments of earth and 
rock. In-depth study of compaction theory, stability of natural and man-made 
slopes by limit equilibrium and deformation considerations. 3 hr. rec. 

484. Groundwater and Seepage. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Flow of groundwater through soils 
and its application to the design of highways and dams and to construction 
operations. Emphasis is placed on both the analytical and classical flow net 
techniques for solving seepage problems. 3 hr. rec. 

485. Geotechnical Risk Assessment. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281, 283 or consent. Application of 
probabilistic and statistical principles to geotechnical analysis and design. 
Random and spatial variability of soil properties; decision under uncertainty; 
reliablity of geotechnical structures. 3 hr. rec. 

486. Soil Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 380 and consent. Consideration of the simple damped 
oscillator, wave propagation in elastic media, dynamic field and laboratory tests, 
dynamic soil properties, and foundation vibrations. Introduction to geotechnical 
aspects of earthquake engineering. 3 hr. rec. 

487. Design of Earth Dams. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 283 and 484, or consent. Application of the 
principles of geotechnical engineering to the analysis, design and construction of 
earth and earth-rock embankment dams. 3 hr. rec. 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 73 



488. Geotechnical Case Histories. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 and 283 or consent. Application of 
principles of geotechnical engineering to professional practice as taught through 
the case histories approach. Study of ctual problems in geotechnical engineering 
and their solutions. 3 hr. rec. 

490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college teaching 
of civil engineering. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which 
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

495. Seminar. 1-2 hr. PR: Consent. Studies and group discussion of structural, fluid 
mechanics, surveying, transportation, soil mechanics and foundations, and 
sanitary problems. 

496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Each graduate student will present at least 
one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student body of the student's 
program. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not seeking 
course-work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

COMMUNICATION STUDIES 

James C. McCroskey, Chairperson of the Department 
130 Armstrong Hall 
Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Booth-Butterfield, Davis, Gorham, Klopf, McCroskey, 
Richmond, L. Wheeless, V. Wheeless, and Zakahi 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

The Department of Communication Studies offers work leading to the 
degree of Master of Arts (M.A.), with a concentration in communication 
theory and research. Persons who possess a bachelor's degree from an 
accredited college or university may be admitted to the program. Qualified 
graduate students from a variety of disciplines are admitted to the program. 
The master of arts degree program is intended to qualify the student to: 

1. Assume a variety of professional roles in educational, industrial, 
governmental, or media institutions. 

2. Teach the subject matter in high school and/or college. 

3. Undertake advanced training toward a doctorate in the behavioral 
sciences. 

In addition to the general WVU requirements, the graduate student in 
communication studies must meet departmental requirements. These include 
successful completion of the minimum number of required graduate hours as 
set forth in Program A, B, or C, below with a grade of B or above in each class 
and the maintenance of a minimum grade-point average of 3.0. 

Applicants for admission must specify the program they wish to pursue. 
Program A is open only to full-time resident students. Programs B and C are 
open to both part-time and full-time students. 



74 COMMUNICATION STUDIES 



Program A— Thesis Program 

All students planning to continue graduate study past the M.A. level are 
encouraged to enter this program. The following are required: 

1. At least 36 hours of graduate credit, 30 of which must be in the 
Department of Communication Studies. A maximum of 6 hours of thesis 
credit will be allowed. 

2. Completion of Comm. 401 and 420. 

3. A thesis. 

4. An oral examination on the thesis. 

Program B— -Non-Thesis Program 

All students planning a professional career in a field other than education 
are encouraged to enter this program. This is normally a terminal degree 
program in communication studies. The following are required: 

1. A minimum of 36 hours of course work with at least 30 hours in the 
Department of Communication Studies: 

2. Completion of Comm. 401 and 420. 

3. Successful completion of written and oral comprehensive exami- 
nations. The oral examination may be waived with the approval of the 
student's examination committee and the departmental coordinator of graduate 
studies 

Program C— Non-Thesis Program 

All students planning a professional career in elementary or secondary 
education are encouraged to enter this program. This is normally a terminal 
degree program in communication studies. Students may complete this 
program through off-campus study, on-campus study, or a combination. The 
following are required: 

1. A minimum of 33 hours of course work with at least 24 hours in the 
Department of Communication Studies including Comm. 361, 362, 363, and 
491. 

2. Successful completion of written and oral comprehensive examina- 
tions. The oral examination may be waived with the approval of the student's 
examination committee and the departmental Coordinator of Graduate 
Studies. 

Communication Studies (Comm.) 

201. Principles of Communication Education. I. 3 hr. PR: 15 hr. communication studies. 
Literature, principles, and current practices of communication education in public 
schools with directed application. Intended for teachers in communication and 
language arts. 

206. Advanced Study in Nonverbal Communication. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 106. Functions 
of nonverbal communication including status, power, immediacy, relationship 
development, regulation, turn-taking, leakage and deception, intuition, person 
perception, and emotional expressions. 

221. Persuasion. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. Theory and research in persuasion, 
emphasizing a critical understanding and working knowledge of the effects of 
social communication on attitudes, beliefs, and behavior. 

230. Survey of Rhetorical-Communication Theory. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. A survey of 
theory in the rhetorical communication context with emphasis upon periods 
preceding the twentieth century. 

COMMUNICATIONS STUDIES 75 



231. Communication and Symbol Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 131. Advanced study of 
language in communication. Specific attention to conversational analysis. 

361. Communication in the Classroom. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Teaching experience or consent. 
Role of interpersonal communication in classroom environment, with particular 
emphasis on communication between students and teachers. Recommended for 
elementary, secondary, and college teachers in all fields. 

362. Nonverbal Communication in the Classroom. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 361. Impact of 
nonverbal communication behaviors of students and teachers on teacher-student 
interaction and student learning. Recommended for elementary, secondary, and 
college teachers in all fields. 

363. Communication in the Educational Organization. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 361. 
Problems of communication within educational organizations with emphasis on 
elements that impact educational change, conflict management, and interpersonal 
influence. Recommended for elementary, secondary, and college teachers in all 
fields. 

364. Communication Problems of Children. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. (Primarily for 
elementary and secondary school teachers and language arts supervisors.] Normal 
maturational development of listening and speaking skills, their relationships to 
language acquisition, and influence upon achievement. 

365. Media in Communication and Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Use of the media in 
educational and other communication environments with emphasis on communi- 
cation processes and principles relevant to television and film. 

370. Interpersonal Communication: Theory and Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Survey of the theory and research in dyadic interpersonal communication. 
Attention to accuracy, coordination, and congruency models with emphasis upon 
relational communication and intimate communication in interpersonal relation- 
ships. 

371. Theory and Research in Language. II. 3 hr. Syntactics, semantics, and pragmatics 
of language behavior. Analyses of contemporary linguistic theories. 

372. Theory and Research in Mass Communication. I, II. 3 hr. Mass communication 
from a consumer's viewpoint. Use of consumer-oriented mass media research also 
stressed. 

373. Theory and Research in Persuasion. I, II, S. 3 hr. Various theories and principles of 
persuasion with emphasis on contemporary research literature. 

374. Intercultural Communication: Theory and Research. 3 hr. Advanced seminar in 
communication of various cultures. Special emphasis on research in diffusion of 
innovations. 

375. Communication Apprehension and Avoidance. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. 
Theory and research related to individuals' predispositional and situational 
tendencies to approach or avoid communication. Emphasis on work in the areas of 
willingness to communicate, communication apprehension, reticence, and shyness. 

376. Theory and Research in Organizational Communication. I, II. 3 hr. Contemporary 
research linking communication variables and networks to organizational change, 
effectiveness, leadership, power, and management practices. Analysis of com- 
munication problems within a variety of organizations. 

377. Small Group Theory and Practice. I, II, S. 3 hr. Specific research areas in 
interpersonal communication with intensive emphasis on small groups. 

76 COMMUNICATION STUDIES 



401. Introduction to Graduate Study in Human Communication. I. 3 hr. Major emphasis 
on designing and conducting experimental and laboratory research in human 
communication. Computer applications to social science research also given 
consideration. Should be taken the first semester of graduate study. 

402. Advanced Seminar in Research Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 401. Research 
techniques necessary to conduct original communication research. Emphasis on 
advanced statistical techniques. 

420. Survey of Human Communication Theory. I. 3 hr. Broad overview of contemporary 
theories in human communication. Should be taken the first semester of graduate 
study. 

433. SpeciaJ Topics. I, II, S. 3-12 hr. PR: Consent. Thorough study of special topics in 
human communication including interpersonal and small group, language, inter- 
cultural, organizational, persuasion, and mass communication, nonverbal com- 
munication, and communication education. 

475. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Open to graduate students 
pursuing independent study in communication. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Open only to graduate assistants in 
the Department of Speech Communication.) Supervised experience in classroom 
teaching. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 3 hr. Advanced study in a variety of areas in human 
communication. 

496. Seminar in Human Communication. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. Current problems and research 
in human communication. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 
499. Thesis. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. 

COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 

J. William Douglas, Dean, School of Physical Education 

Daniel E. Della-Giustina, Chairperson, Department of Safety and Health Studies 

274 Coliseum 

Degrees Offered: M.S., M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Member Simon. Associate Member Douglas. 

The Master of Science in Community Health Education and the Master of 
Arts Degree in Secondary Education through the Department of Education 
with an emphasis in school health are available. These programs involve a 
core of courses in health education combined with other courses designed to 
satisfy individual needs and professional objectives. All applicants must 
comply with the WVU requirements for graduate study and the requirements 
of the Department of Community Health Education. 

Community Health Education (M.S.) 

To be admitted to the M.S. program in community health education, an 
applicant must have sufficient background in the area of specialization to 
qualify for admission to graduate courses in community health education. 
Students with inadequate backgrounds may be required to take additional 
course work which may not apply to the program. 



COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 77 



Secondary Education (M.A.) 

Applicants who are interested in admission to the M.A. program in 
secondary education with an emphasis in school health through the Depart- 
ment of Education should see a faculty member in health education. 

Health Education (HI. Ed.) 

220. Drug and Alcohol Abuse Prevention. 3 hr. Experiences designed to prevent the 
development of abusive drug-taking relationships by focusing on psychological 
variables such as self-esteem, coping skills, and development of support networks. 

290. Women and Health. 3 hr. Examination of theories, myths, and practices surrounding 
women's physical and mental health from both historical and present-day 
perspectives. Exploration of specific health issues and controversies and the rise 
of the women's health movement. 

301. Advanced School Health. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Analysis of 
problems in school health services, healthful school living, nature of health 
education, and scope of health instruction which confronts teachers and adminis- 
trators. 

305. Philosophy of Health Education. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
Analysis of the scientific bases, purposes, procedures, and content, with impli- 
cations for school and public health education. 

306. Community Health. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Health problems 
requiring community action, basic public health activities, community organi- 
zations for health protection, voluntary health agencies, school health programs, 
and the role of state and federal agencies in the community health program. 

307. Community Health: Human Sexuality. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of sex-related 
issues including parenting, sex education, sexual sanctions, pornography, sexual 
dysfunction, and sexual variance. Designed for teachers, health professionals, and 
interested laypeople. 

308. Community Health: Death Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Surveys death/dying 
from humanistic viewpoint. Examines philosophical, psychological, legal, and 
sociological aspects of death, grief, and mourning. Appropriate for teachers, 
health professionals, and others desiring understanding of death as a part of 
living. 

309. Community Health: Drug Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to help students 
learn appropriate components of a drug education program, gain an understanding 
of drug taking in this society, and acquire insights into dependent behaviors. 

320. Roles and Functions of Health Educators. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
An investigation of the roles and functions of the health educator in a variety of 
community settings including hospitals, clinics, voluntary agencies, etc. 

330. Health Education and Behavioral Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Integrates the 
concepts of health education and behavioral science to facilitate changes in health 
behavior of individuals and groups. 

373. Professional Development. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Departmental 
consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in advancing profes- 
sional skills in a particular specialty. [Not for degree credit in programs in the 
College of Human Resources and Education.) 

376. Evaluation of Health Education Research. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311 or consent. Study of 
published research to determine basic scientific accuracy and value. 

78 COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 



385. Practicum (Field). 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Under the guidance 
of faculty and counselors, students may assume major responsibility during a 
semester in a community-wide program. (Required of all students in the M.S. 
program.) 

391. Advanced Topics. 1-6 hr. 

397. Master's Degree Thesis. 1-15 hr. 

401. Health Care Organization and Management. 3 hr. PR: Consent. To provide future 
managers, present practitioners, and interested students with organizational and 
managerial concepts and theories to help analyze and resolve administrative 
problems in planning and delivering health services in the community. 

402. Designing Public Health Education Programs. 3 hr. PR: HI. Ed. 306 and/or HI. Ed. 
and consent. Theory and practice of developing health education programs for 
community health agencies. Students will work in task groups as consultants to 
local agencies and design comprehensive programs consistent with theory. 

482. Supervised Applied Health Education Project. 1 hr. PR: Advanced graduate 
standing or consent. Doctoral students only. Plan and conduct a health education 
intervention in other than a classroom setting, i.e., a defined community. 

483. Supervised Health Education Research Report. 1 hr. PR: Advanced graduate 
standing and consent. Doctoral students only. A written report of empirical 
research of either a survey or an experiment. 

490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Supervised 
practices in college teaching of health-related learning experiences. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Investigation in 
advanced subjects which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study 
may be independent or through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Graduate students 
will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student 
body of this program. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 

498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. 2-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Donald F. Butcher, Chairperson of Department of Statistics and Computer Science 
George E. Trapp, Director of Computer Science Graduate Programs 
302 Knapp Hall 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Atkins, Butcher, Henry, Lane, Mooney, Muth, Reddy, 
Trapp, and Van Scoy. Associate Members Chilko, Dodrill, Hiergeist, and Nassif. 

The Department of Statistics and Computer Science offers a Master of 
Science (M.S.) degree with a major in computer science. The degree is 
intended to qualify the student to assume a professional role in an educational, 
industrial, or governmental research project, teach in a junior or senior 
college, or undertake advanced training toward a doctorate in computer 
science. 

Because many students receive baccalaureate degrees from colleges 
which do not offer undergraduate programs in computer science, a student 
with an outstanding undergraduate record does not need a degree in computer 
science to enter the M.S. degree program in computer science. 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 79 



Applications from students not eligible for admission as regular graduate 
students and from foreign students are normally evaluated during January for 
admission to the summer session. 

The Graduate Record Examination is required for admission into the M.S. 
program in computer science. 

Students are expected to know the material contained in the following 
courses upon admission to the program. Otherwise, the deficiencies must be 
removed as early as possible in the student's degree program. 

1. One year of calculus (Math. 15, 16, or equiv.). 

2. Thorough knowledge of the PL/1 or Pascal programming language 
(C.S. 1, 2, or equiv.). 

3. Assembler Language and Computer Organization (C.S. 50). 

4. Data Structures and File Processing Methods (C.S. 51). 

5. Discrete Mathematics (C.S. 120). 

6. Probability and Statistics (Stat. 201 or equiv.). 

Two options are available for students seeking a Master of Science in 
Computer Science. They are: 

1. Problem Report Option: 36 hours of course work including 3 hours of 
credit for a problem report. 

2. Thesis Option: 30 hours of course work including 6 hours of credit for a 
thesis. Students with a B.S. in Computer Science or equivalent should pursue 
this option. 

Minimum required courses for either option are: 

(a) Three courses from C.S. 320 (or 325 in lieu of 320), 330, 340, 350, 360, 
370, 380. 

(b) Two additional 300-level computer science courses. 

(c) Three additional 200- or 300-level courses in statistics, computer 
science, mathematics, industrial engineering, or electrical and computer 
engineering approved by the student's graduate committee. 

All students must pass a final oral examination over the problem 
report/thesis and course work. 

No more than one course in which a grade of C is received may be counted 
toward meeting degree requirements. 

More information concerning graduate studies may be found in "Graduate 
Programs in Computer Science" available from the department. 

(For statistics courses of instruction, see "Statistics.") 

Computer Science (C.s.) 

220. Numerical Analysis 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17 or C.S. 120 and a programming 
language. Computer arithmetic, roots of equations, interpolation, Gaussian 
Elimination, numerical integration and differentiation. Numerical solution of 
initial value problems for ordinary differential equations. Least square approxi- 
mations. (Equiv. to Math. 220.) 

221. Numerical Analysis 2. 1, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 and Math. 241 or consent. Solutions of 
linear systems by direct and iterative methods. Calculation of eigenvalues, 
eigenvectors, and inverses of matrices. Applications to ordinary and partial 
differential equations. (Equiv. to Math. 221.) 

228. Discrete Mathematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 120 and Math. 16 or equiv. Applications 
of discrete mathematics to computer science. Methods of solving homogeneous 
and non-homogeneous recurrence relations using generating functions and char- 
acteristic equations; digraphs to analyze computer algorithms; graph theory and 
its ramifications to computer algorithms. (Equiv. to Math. 228.) 



80 COMPUTER SCIENCE 



230. Programming Languages. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Formal definition of programming 
languages including specification of syntax and semantics. Structure of simple 
statements and algorithmic languages. List processing and string manipulation 
languages. 

235. Principles of Programming Languages. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or consent. Survey of 
several programming languages: historical, current, special-purpose, and experi- 
mental. Emphasis on comparison of languages features, implementation techniques, 
and selection of appropriate language for given application. 

240. Systems Programming. I, II. 4 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Software organization for the 
support of computer components. Addressing techniques, process and data 
modules, file system organization and management. Traffic control and communi- 
cation with peripheral devices. 

241. Systems Programming. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240. Memory management; name 
management; file systems; segmentation; protection; resource allocation; pragmatic 
aspects in the design and analysis of operating systems. 

245. Microcomputer Programming and Interfacing. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Detailed study 
of a typical microcomputer system including its architecture, operating system, 
assembly language programming, data communication, computer networking and 
microcomputer applications (3 hr. lee, 1 2-hr. lab.). 

260. Information Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Information analysis and logical 
design of a computer system. Exercises and case studies are used to give students 
proficiency in information analysis techniques. Projects are assigned to provide 
practical experience in systems development and implementation. 

270. System Design. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Underlying principles of system design and 
techniques. A theme to be carried throughout the course is the iterative nature of 
the analysis and design process. Implementation and conversion problems also are 
considered. Practical projects are assigned to give students experience in actual 
situations. 

275. Software Engineering. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Two 200-level computer science courses or 
equivalent. The study of software life cycle, programming methodologies, and 
project management, with emphasis on an engineering approach to the software 
development process. Relies on a project-based approach for applying software 
engineering principles. 

280. Introduction to Computer Graphics. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51, 120. Overview of computer 
graphics systems. Topics include software, algorithms for graphics primitives, 
two-dimensional viewing and transformations, segmentation, methods of input, 
and three-dimensional concepts. 

281. Introduction to Artifical Intelligence. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or consent. Introductory 
treatment of foundations of AI and the symbol manipulation language LISP. 
Survey of the field of AI, production systems, search strategies, game playing, 
knowledge engineering, weak methods. Applications of AI will be briefly studied. 

285. Computer Organization and Architecture. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 50 and 51. Architecture 
of current computers and their effects on software design. Von Neumann 
machines; gates and registers; instruction and address decoding; memory systems; 
input-output systems; micros, supercomputers, specialized systems. 

291. Topics in Computer Science. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or equiv. Advanced study of 
topics in computer science. 

301. Computers in Research. I. 3 hr. (Statistics and Computer Science majors should 
obtain their graduate committee approval before registering.) Use of computers in 
research. Algorithms and programming. Scientific and statistical programming 
packages. 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 81 



303. Microcomputers in Mathematics/Science. S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3 or consent. An 
integrated course in computer science, statistics and mathematics for secondary 
educators. Focuses on programming techniques and uses problems from the areas 
of statistics and mathematics at the high school level as examples. 

311. Scientific Computing Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Application of mathe- 
matical modelling and simulation methodology, languages, and systems. Discrete 
simulation using GPSS-V language. Linear programming. Finite difference methods 
using higher-level languages. 

320. Solution of Nonlinear Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. 
Solution of nonlinear systems of equations. Newton and Secant Methods. 
Unconstrained optimization. Nonlinear overtaxation techniques. Nonlinear 
least squares problems. (Equiv. to Math. 320.) 

325. Numerical Interpolation and Approximation. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or consent. 
Interpolation and approximation using Chebychev polynomials, Pade approxi- 
mations, Chebychev economization of Taylor Series. Hermite interpolation, 
orthogonal polynomials and Gaussian Quadrature. 

330. Design of Language Processors. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 230. Study of the design and 
construction of automatic programming language processors. Investigation of the 
structure of scientific and business oriented compilers, list processors, and 
information processing languages. 

340. Theory of Operating Systems. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240. Theoretical aspects of 
multiprogrammed and virtual operating systems. Topics include: concurrent 
processes, processor management, storage management, scheduling alogrithms, 
and resource protection. 

341. Computer Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 340 and Stat. 312, or consent. Simulation, 
evaluation, and measurement of computer systems. Techniques of measurement 
and evaluation using hardware and software monitors, methods of model 
validation, and creation of management reports. 

350. Software Engineering in Data Communications. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240 or consent. 
Data communication principles, software design techniques for implementing 
data communications systems, testing and debugging techniques, networks and 
data link control, software design in a network environment. A "hands-on" project 
in data communications design is included. 

360. Design of Database Systems. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 260 or consent. Design, evaluation, 
implementation, and user interface of database systems. Topics include: storage 
structures, data languages, security, and relational, hierarchial and network 
implementation approaches. 

365. Distributed Database Management Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 260. Reference 
architectures for distributed database management systems. Integration of local 
databases stored at different sites into a global database. Heterogeneity of data 
models. Query translation and optimization. Synchronization of concurrent 
access. Integrity and reliability. 

370. System Implementation. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or 260 or consent. Underlying 
principles of system implementation are covered both from a theoretical and from 
a practical point of view. As part of the course, each student will participate with 
other students in the implementation of a production system. 

380. Interactive Computer Graphics. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 230 or 240 or 260 or consent. Data 
structures and list handling; picture structures and transformations; rendering of 
surfaces and solids; interaction handling; display processors and programming 
systems; and graphics system organization. 

82 COMPUTER SCIENCE 



390. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of computer science. 

391. Advanced Topics in Computer Science. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in 
advanced computer science subjects which are not covered in regularly scheduled 
courses. Study may be independent or through specially scheduled lectures. 

396. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

397. Research in Computer Science. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

COUNSELING 

Jeffrey K. Messing, Division Director, Department Chairperson 

502 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members L. S. Cormier, W. H. Cormier, Jacobs, Majumder, Marinelli, 

Masson, Messing, Srebalus, Tunick, and Yura. Associate Members DeLo, Greever, 

and Moriarty. 

Master of Arts in Counseling 

The Department of Counseling Psychology and Rehabilitation of the 
College of Human Resources and Education offers a master's program in 
counseling. Variations in the curricula allow emphasis in school counseling, 
community agency/mental health counseling, human resource development 
counseling for business, industrial, or health settings, and student personnel 
work in higher education. All candidates for the Master of Arts in Counseling 
enroll for a common departmental core during the first semester of study. 
Selection of an area for concentration is made at the beginning of the second 
semester; this area governs the choice of courses for the balance of the 
graduate program. All applicants must comply with University requirements, 
the College of Human Resources and Education requirements, and depart- 
mental requirements. 

Students are encouraged to pursue their studies on a full-time basis; 
however, part-time students are accepted. 

Required Counseling Courses 

All students who are candidates for a master's in counseling are required 
to take the following core courses: 

Coun. 301 — Counseling Techniques 

Coun. 302— Human Relationships 

Coun. 303 — Introduction to the Counseling Profession 

Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 

Coun. 306 — Counseling Theories 

Coun. 308 — Organization of School Guidance Services* 

Coun. 320 — Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 

Coun. 330/382— Counseling Children/Counseling Adults 

Coun. 331— Consultation Theory and Techniques* 

Coun. 382— Internship 

Coun. 385— Practicum 

*Courses required for school counselor certification only. A special school counselor certificate 
is available for individuals without a teaching background. The program includes an additional 12 
hours of course work. During the first half of the degree program, the student must complete 
successfully an assessment of his competency in basic skill, language, comprehension, and 
computer literacy. 

Please note: Doctoral level courses in counseling have the prefix "CoPsy". 

COUNSELING 83 



Ed. Psych. 320 — Introduction to Educational Research 
Coun. 331 — Consultation Theory and Techniques* 
Electives (2) 
*Courses required for school counselor certification only. A special school counselor certificate 
is available for individuals without a teaching background. The program includes an additional 12 
hours of course work. During the first half of the degree program, the student must complete 
successfully an assessment of his competency in basic skill, language, comprehension, and 
computer literacy. 

Please note: Doctoral level courses in counseling have the prefix "CoPsy". 

Admission Requirements 

Applications for admission to the counseling program should be made to 
West Virginia University, Office of Admissions and Records. In addition to 
the admission requirements of the University and the College of Human 
Resources and Education, the Department of Counseling Psychology and 
Rehabilitation has the following admission requirements: 

• A baccalaureate degree with course work in appropriate areas; 

• A minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 2.8, based on a 4.0 
system; 

• Three letters of reference; 

• Completion of the application to the counseling program. 

The initial screening decision is based upon this information. Successful 
applicants are then interviewed by program faculty. Final decisions about 
admission are based on both the requirements and the interview process. Of 
the two steps in the process, the grade-point average and interpersonal skills 
demonstrated during the interview have the greatest input into the decision 
process. 

Counseling provides a broad opportunity to work with children at the 
elementary-school level, adolescents at the secondary-school level, young 
adults at the college level, and adults in business and industry and in 
community agencies. The school counselor is involved in personal counseling, 
career guidance, vocational and educational counseling, family counseling, 
and consultation on classroom problems with teachers and administrators. 
Counselors must be equipped to work with both individuals and groups. 
Much of the school counselor's work is carried out in classrooms with 
teachers and students. The school counselor also is active in working with 
community agencies. At the college level, the counselor may work extensively 
with the special educational services available for the benefit of the college 
student. Degree requirements include completion of the core curriculum, and 
additional required courses, required counseling course work, and 6 semester 
hours of pre-practicum under faculty direction. A minimum of 48 hours of 
course work with a 3.0 grade-point average is required. 

In addition to completing all course work and the pre-practicum and 
internship satisfactorily, the candidate must demonstrate the ability to 
assume the responsibility required of a professional counselor and the 
personal characteristics and ethical standards essential to effective working 
relationships with others. 

These personal characteristics are assessed during the clinical course 
work components of the program and during the pre-practicum and field 
experience. Students who do not meet professional and clinical standards in 
these areas are provided feedback, and resources for remediation are recom- 
mended. In these cases, successful remediation is required as a prerequisite 



84 COUNSELING 



for successful program completion, with an additional 6-9 hours of internship. 
Students who violate AACD ethical standards are dismissed from the 
program. 

Please contact the program for a listing of the additional required courses 
in this area. 

Areas of Specialization 

Community Counseling: In reviewing the curriculum available in coun- 
seling, the applicant will note that much of the course work provides the 
background applicable for employment in general community agency work. 
Some graduates who do not take employment directly in rehabilitation or 
school settings find a limited number of opportunities as general counselors in 
the fields of public welfare, mental health, drug and alcohol counseling, 
employment security, and corrections. 

Human Resource Development Counseling: A limited number of oppor- 
tunities exist to emphasize counseling and employee development training for 
application in business, industry, and health settings. This program prepares 
personnel to deal with employee assistance needs (i.e., substance abuse), 
organizational development and human relations training, employee career 
development, performance assessment, and productivity enhancement. An 
undergraduate program in business, management, or nursing is helpful but 
not required. Admission preference is given to persons currently employed in 
business and industry. 

Please contact the program for a listing of additional required courses in 
this area. 

All students enrolled in the Master of Arts in Counseling program are 
expected to attend a minimum of eight different continuing education/profes- 
sional development training seminars. These seminars or workshops must be 
related to counseling. The counseling program will provide many of these 
activities. The student should check with the assigned adviser for a list of 
seminar options. 

Counseling programs are available for both full-time and part-time 
students. An active summer program is available for part-time students. 
Degree requirements may be completed in four consecutive summers. Since 
there is a limited number of summer sites, there can be no guarantee of 
summer practicum placement. 

Certification Requirements For School Counselors in West Virginia 

Admission requirements for the certification program in school counseling 
are the same as for the Masters of Arts in Counseling, except as noted below: 

1. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0. 

2. Recommendation of the faculty. 

3. A valid professional teaching certificate at the level for which 
counseling and guidance endorsement is desired, or the completion of a 9-hour 
block of professional education course work and competency assessment in 
addition to the 48-hour master's degree program. 

4. Completion of the required pattern of certification courses. (Contact 
the department for this list.) 

5. A one-year experience in supervision during the first year of employ- 
ment as a West Virginia school counselor. 

6. Specialization area examination. Satisfactory performance is required 
for certification eligibility. 

COUNSELING 85 



Counseling Option for C.A.S. 

Additional Admission Requirements 

All applicants must comply with the WVU requirements, requirements of 
the College of Human Resources and Education, and the Counseling Psychology 
and Rehabilitation Department. 

1. Completion of a master's degree in counseling or equivalent, comparable 
to the WVU master's degree in counseling with approved practicum experience. 

2. Minimum graduate grade-point average of 3.0. 

3. A total score of 1,000 on the Graduate Record Examination aptitude 
test. 

4. Personal interview with faculty members in counseling psychology. 

5. Demonstration of competency in counseling, measurement, statistics, 
and the guidance function in education as evidenced by letters of reference 
and appropriate examinations. 

6. Evidence of successful appropriate work experience. 

7. Written justification for choice in area of specialization. 

8. Three references for recommendation. 

9. Plan of study approved by adviser. 

Areas of Specialization 

Elementary-School Counseling 
Student Personnel Work 
Employment Counseling 
Pupil Personnel Services 
Secondary-School Counseling 

Requirements for Graduation 

1. Completion of 36 semester hours of approved graduate work. 

2. A minimum grade-point of 3.2 on all course work attempted under the 
Certificate of Advanced Study program. 

3. Demonstration of competencies as a specialist in the chosen area of 
specialization. 

4. Recommendation of the department. 

Program 

1. 12 semester hours core from Counseling: 

Coun. 331 — Consultation Theory and Techniques, 3 hr. 
Coun. 385— Practicum, 3 hr. 

Psych. 401 — Advanced Counseling Techniques, 3 hr. 
Psych. 469 — Theory and Practice of Student Appraisal, 3 hr. 

2. 12 semester hours elected with adviser's consent in specialty area of 
advanced courses either internal or external to the counseling program. 

3. 6 hours to achieve competence in consumption and production of field 
research. 

4. 6 hours research problem in area of specialization. 

Residency (Minimum) 

1. One semester or two summers (12 hr.) on campus. 

2. Program completion of 12 hr. off-campus and transfer, or approved 
interuniversity cooperative program. 



86 COUNSELING 



Counseling Psychology Option for Ed.D. 

All applicants must comply with the graduate requirements of the 
College of Human Resources and Education and the program of counseling 
psychology. The program includes course work hours in addition to the 
College of Human Resources and Education requirements for the Ed.D. 
degree. 

The area of specialization for the doctoral degree is oriented primarily 
toward training practitioners who have a substantial background in the 
philosophy and methods of psychology as a comprehensive science. Students 
are expected to work closely with faculty in doing research and in supervised 
therapy practice. Successful completion of the program requires core course- 
work in counseling psychology, as well as in clinical psychology, statistics 
and research, and supervised practice. 

Additional Entrance Requirements 

The admission process is a two-stage procedure. Each spring, applications 
received by January 15th are reviewed for admission to the next academic 
year. 

Stage I 

Applicants are screened based on written information and credentials 
provided to the admissions committee, including the following: 

1. Completion of a master's degree in an area related to counseling 
pyschology. 

2. Graduate grade-point average of 3.5, vertified by official transcripts of 
graduate course work. 

3. Three letters of recommendation to support applicant's competency in 
counseling, testing, research, and personal qualities of readiness for comple- 
tion of a doctoral degree. 

4. A minimum total score of 1,000 on the Graduate Record Examination. 

5. At least two years of relevant work experience. 

Stage II 

Those persons who are successful in the Stage I process are invited to 
campus for a personal interview with the program faculty. The personal 
interview is required for a final admission decision. The interview helps to 
determine the applicant's interpersonal and clinical skills, which are predictive 
of success in graduate study, internship, and post-degree placement. 

Announcements regarding admission are made on or before May 15. 
Materials received after January 15th are not reviewed until the following 
year, unless space is available. Students are accepted for study toward the 
Ed.D. degree upon admission into the department. Requirements for doctoral 
candidacy are the following: 

1. Completion of prerequisite doctoral coursework with a 3.0 grade-point 
average; 

2. A written comprehensive examination of major areas in counseling 
psychology and research; 

3. Completion of an approved research prospectus. 

After admission to candidacy, students are eligible to enroll in internship. 
The internship is a full-time academic or calendar year in an off-campus 
training site approved by the internship committee. After successful comple- 
tion of the internship and the research dissertation, students take a final oral 
examination regarding their dissertation research. 

COUNSELING 87 



The College of Human Resources and Education is currently undergoing 
curriculum review and revision. Deviations may occur in the following published 
pattern of anticipated course availability by semester. 



Counseling (Coun.) 

216. Behavior Problems and the School. II. 3 hr. A course primarily oriented toward 
assisting educators utilize current psychological principles related to classroom 
discipline, as well as academic and social adjustment. 

283. Workshop in Counseling and Guidance. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. To take care 
of credits for special workshops and short intensive limit courses on methods, 
supervision, and other special topics. 

301. Counseling Techniques. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development and application of 
basic counseling skills including interviewing, clinical observation, and a general 
orientation to counseling settings. Evaluation will be based on strengths and 
deficits in intra and interpersonal skills and on demonstration of counseling skills 
in checkout situations. In-setting laboratory experience required. 

302. Human Relationships. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Experientially based learning 
model which focuses on group processes and procedures. Provides self-screening 
opportunities for prospective counselors. Evaluation is based on personal char- 
acteristics essential to effective working relations with others. 

303. Introduction to the Counseling Profession. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of the 
counseling profession, treating current practices and issues. 

305. Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of 
standardized evaluation methods commonly utilized in educational and rehabili- 
tation settings. Experience is provided in selection, administration, and interpre- 
tation of selected instruments. 

306. Counseling Theories. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 301, 302, 303 and consent. A study of 
counseling approaches commonly used in public schools, colleges, and rehabili- 
tation agencies. Application of theory emphasized. 

308. Organization/Development: School Guidance Services. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303, 
305, 306, 320, and consent. Design and conduct of a school needs assessment, 
development of an annual guidance program, and review of current professional 
legal issues. 

309. Group Counseling Theory and Techniques. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 306 and consent. 
Theories of group counseling and demonstrations of specific group techniques. 
Evaluation will be based on expertise in group facilitation. 

310. Introduction to Student Personnel Work in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
A historical and topical study of the development of student personnel structure 
and functions in higher education. 

320. Lifespan Career Counseling. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303, 305. Principles and methods 
involved in career counseling with diverse populations. Emphasis on theories of 
career development and life-style planning, career choices, and life-long work 
adjustment. 

330. Counseling Children. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of the principles 
of guidance to the elementary school. 

331. Consultation Theory and Techniques. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 306 and consent. A 
specialized multiple training experience covering advanced theory, techniques 
and practices, skill development in teacher, and parental consulting. 



88 COUNSELING 



382. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Independent 
study and directed readings in specialized areas of counseling and guidance. 
(Some sections of Coun. 382 have prerequisite requirements. Check with the 
instructor.) 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Preregistration; liability insurance; cleared for 
internship at close of semester, or M.A. degree, and consent of department 
practicum evaluation committee. An intensive supervised practical experience in 
public schools or agencies, in counseling with individual critique and appropriate 
small-group experiences. Demonstration of high professional standards, counseling 
skills, and personal characteristics appropriate to the counseling relationship are 
essential. (Due to the limited number of summer sites, there can be no guarantee of 
Summer practicum placement.] [Practicum is a prerequisite for internship 
placement. Internship is a one-semester, minimum four-day per week field 
experience following practicum. This two-semester sequence replaces the previous 
one-semester practicum.] 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. Problem in Counseling and Guidance. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Study and 
research for master's degree in counseling and guidance. 

Counseling Psychology (Co. Psy.) 

401. Advanced Counseling Psychology Techniques. I. 3 hr. PR: Advanced standing and 
consent. Comprehensive development of counseling psychology techniques related 
to generic and specific theoretical models. In-setting laboratory experience and 
demonstration of therapy techniques required. 

431. Advanced Consultation Techniques. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 331 or equiv., or consent. 
Multiple training and experiences in theories and techniques of consultation and 
delivery of human services to educational and community personnel. Simulated 
classroom and laboratory experiences. 

463. Advanced Theories of Counseling Psychology. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 385; admission 
to graduate study; and consent. A comprehensive study of the theoretical issues in 
contemporary counseling. 

464. Intellectual Assessment. II. 4 hr. PR: Advanced standing and preregistration with 
instructor (9 hr. psychology, and demonstration of proficiency in measurement 
needed for admission). Administering, scoring, and interpreting individual intel- 
ligence tests. 

466. Vocational Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 320 or equiv., advanced standing or 
consent. Advanced study of theory development and research in vocational 
psychology and counseling; emphasis on counseling psychology, women's issues 
and cross-cultural counseling. 

469. Personality Testing and Interpretation. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 305 and consent. 
Advanced study in the application of personality assessment procedures and 
consideration of alternative methods for measuring human behavior. 

472. Internship. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Written approval from the Department Internship 
Committee, satisfactory completion of written doctoral comprehensive exams and 
approval of research prospectus. Full-time supervised practice in an approved 
counseling psychology internship training program; minimum duration one 
academic year. 

480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Seminar in counseling 
psychology for students in certificate of advanced study and doctoral programs. 

COUNSELING 89 



483. Counseling Psychology Supervision Models. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 401, advanced 
standing and consent. Overview of major assumptions and techniques of major 
counseling supervision models. Training activities include simulated and actual 
demonstrations of each of the supervision models and critique of their assumptions, 
advantages, and constraints. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students with 
college teaching responsibility in counseling psychology. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced areas of 
counseling psychology and rehabilitation counseling. 

492. Professional and Ethical Issues in Counseling and Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: 
Advanced standing and consent. Overview of current ethical, legal, and profes- 
sional issues in counseling psychology. Readings, discussion, and a written 
literature review of a topic related to the practice of counseling psychology. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I. 3 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Written and oral 
presentation of methodology and results of one's own research study with 
supervision and critique by the instructor and members of the seminar. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Dissertation. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
registered in regular course work but who have need to use University facilities for 
completion of their research or program. 

ECONOMICS 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs 

223 Armstrong Hall 

Graduate Programs in Economics, College of Business and Economics, West Virginia 

University, P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 
Telephone: (304) 293-5721 
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D. 
Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Bhandari, Cushing, Dorsey, Hawley, Hwang, 

Isserman, Kraft, Kymn, Labys, Mann, Mitchell, and Rahmatian. Associate Members 

Bell, Britt, Cornwell, Rupert, Trumbull, and Witt. 

The Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy degrees in economics enable 
students to broaden and refine their knowledge of the concepts and methods 
of economic analysis. These programs are designed to prepare students for 
careers in business, government, and higher education. Student programs are 
planned with the assistance of a faculty adviser and approval of the Director 
of Graduate Programs. Complete information about the graduate programs in 
economics, and the regulations and requirements pertaining to them, may be 
obtained by securing a copy of "Graduate Programs in Economics" from the 
graduate director. Students are bound by these regulations and requirements, 
as well as those of the College of Business and Economics. 

Admission. To be admitted as a regular student, applicants must have a 
grade-point average of 2.75 or better for all undergraduate work completed 
and a minimum combined score of 1,500 for the three parts of the general 
aptitude portion of the Graduate Record Examination. All students must 
submit their scores on the general aptitude portion of the Graduate Record 
Examination (GRE) and international students must also submit their scores 
on the TOEFL. In addition, it is required that all applicants will have 
completed at least one semester of each of the following courses: intermediate 



90 ECONOMICS 



microeconomic theory, intermediate macroeconomic theory, calculus, and 
statistics. Applicants not meeting these entrance requirements may be 
admitted on a provisional and/or deficiency basis, subject to certain perfor- 
mance conditions during their first semester in residence. 

Financial Aid. A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition 
scholarships are available on a competitive basis to full-time students. Major 
selection criteria include prior academic performance and GRE scores. 
Graduate assistants receive a cash stipend that is comparable in amount to 
that offered at other universities. Graduate assistants engage in research 
and/or teaching activities. The faculty of the Department of Economics also 
nominates outstanding applicants for University fellowships. Special scholar- 
ships are also available on a competitive basis to minority students. Further 
information and applications can be obtained from the Director of Graduate 
Programs. 

Academic Performance. To qualify for a graduate degree in economics, 
students must earn a cumulative grade-point average (GPA) of 3.0 or better 
for all courses attempted as a graduate student at WVU. A regular graduate 
student in economics whose cumulative GPA falls below 3.0 (B) upon 
completion of the first 9 hours of graduate study is not in good standing and 
will be placed on probation. A student in the program whose cumulative GPA 
falls below 3.0 will be placed on probation as of the close of the semester in 
which the GPA fell below 3.0. Such a student, placed on probation, who fails 
to raise his/her cumulative GPA to 3.0 by the end of the semester succeeding 
that in which his/her GPA fell below 3.0 is subject to suspension from the 
program at the end of that probationary semester. 

Other academic reasons for suspension from the program include failing 
grades on more than 50 percent of the course work taken in any semester, a 
third failure on either a microeconomic theory or macroeconomic theory 
comprehensive examination, a fourth failure on comprehensive field exami- 
nations, or failure to complete all degree requirements within the specified 
time limits. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

The Master of Arts (M.A.) program requires a total of 36 hours of 
graduate credit, including 21 hours of economics. At least 24 hours of course 
work completed must be at the 300 level. To qualify for the M.A. degree, 
graduate students in economics must earn a grade of B- or better in Economics 
310 and 312, and a grade-point average of 3.0 in all courses attempted as a 
graduate student at WVU. The M.A. program contains a thesis and a 
nonthesis option. Specific course requirements include: 
Core Courses- 
Economics 220— Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3 hr. 
Economics 310— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 1, 3 hr. 
Economics 312— Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 1, 3 hr. 
Economics 316— History of Economic Development and Analysis, 3 hr. 
(If the student has recently successfully completed Economics 216 
(History of Economic Thought) or its equivalent before entering the 
M.A. program, then this requirement may be waived by approval of the 
graduate director.) 



ECONOMICS 91 



Statistics Requirement — [6 credit hours are required.) 

Option A: 

Statistics 231— Sampling Methods, 3 hr. 

Economics 226 — Applied Econometrics, 3 hr. 

Option B: For students who consider going into the Ph.D. Program. 

Economics 320— Mathematical Economics, 3 hr. (substitute for Eco- 
nomics 220 in the core) 

Statistics 262— Statistics and Probability, 3 hr. 

Economics 325 — Econometrics, 3 hr. 
Thesis/Nonthesis Options— 

a. Thesis Option: An acceptable thesis, 6 hr. With the thesis option, 
the student must pass a final oral examination. 

b. Nonthesis Option: In lieu of a thesis, the requirements for the M.A. 
are met by: (1) completion of two 300-level courses in one field of 
concentration in economics; and (2) submission of a research paper that 
gives evidence of substantial ability to conduct scholarly research. 

Program Options 

The M.A. program in economics includes special options administered by 
the College of Business and Economics jointly with other units on campus. 
These options include business analysis, energy economics, law and eco- 
nomics, mathematical economics, public policy, and statistics and economics. 
To earn the M.A. in Economics, students must complete the M.A. requirements 
(above) and fulfill other requirements pertaining to the particular option. The 
options are best viewed as coherent sample programs developed in conjunction 
with other units and are designed to prepare students for employment in a 
particular area or specialty of economics. 

Business Analysis— Conducted in cooperation with other departments of 
the College of Business and Economics, this option is designed to prepare 
students for employment in the business analysis area. As part of their M.A. 
program in economics, students complete 12 hours of business courses: 
Managerial Control, Administrative Practices, Financial Administration, and 
Marketing Administration. 

Energy Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the College of Mineral 
and Energy Resources, this option is designed to prepare students in the area 
of resource economics, including energy and environmental issues. Courses 
include: Economics of the Energy and Petrochemical Sectors, Theory and 
Policy of Mineral Economics, Models of Mineral Commodity Markets 
(COMER), Energy Economics and Environmental Economics (B&E). Students 
are required to submit three graduate papers. 

Law and Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the College of Law, 
this option is designed to enable students to develop a degree of expertise and 
knowledge in both law and economics. Law students may receive the M.A. in 
economics by combining their law courses with 24 hours of economics. The 
economics major may receive the M.A. by completing 21 hours of economics 
and 12 hours of law courses. 

Mathematical Economics— This option is conducted in cooperation with 
the Department of Mathematics. Students entering this option must previously 
have taken 12 hours in mathematics, including a course in calculus equivalent 
to Math. 15. Courses include Advanced Micro Theory 2, Advanced Macro 
Theory 2, Econometrics, Mathematical Economics, Seminar in Mathematical 
Economics, Introduction to Linear Algebra, and Introduction to Real Analysis. 

92 ECONOMICS 



Public Policy— Conducted in cooperation with the Department of Political 
Science (PS), this option is designed to provide students with sufficient 
analytical and research skills to become competent researchers, particularly 
with regard to public policy problems. Field training on an optional basis may 
be obtained through a research residency or internship in a public agency. 
Courses include Politics of Planned Development, Theory of Public Policy 
Development, Seminar in Policy Development, Political Science Methodology 
(PS), and economics electives selected on the basis of the student's special 
interests. For the M.A. degree in economics, students must complete 21 hours 
in economics, including the core. 

Statistics and Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the Department 
of Statistics and Computer Science (Stat.), this option is designed to prepare 
students for employment in the public or private sector which demands the 
use of quantitative skills. Courses include Statistics and Probability, Applied 
Regression Analysis (Stat.), and Econometrics (B&E). 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Usually four years of full-time graduate work beyond the baccalaureate 
degree are required to complete the doctorate. A minimum of two consecutive 
semesters in actual residence as a full-time graduate student is required. To 
qualify for the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree in economics, a student 
must earn a cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 in courses completed at 
WVU. 

The Ph.D. degree is not awarded for the mere accumulation of course 
credits nor for the completion of the specified residence requirements. All 
students are required to complete the graduate core curriculum, prepare 
themselves in three fields of concentration, and submit an acceptable 
dissertation. A minimum of 39 hours of graduate work in economics at the 300 
level is required for all candidates for the Ph.D. degree in economics. 
Core Courses (each, 3 hr.): 
Economics 310— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 1 
Economics 311— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 2 
Economics 312— Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 1 
Economics 313 — Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 2 
Economics 316 — History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis 
Economics 320 — Mathematical Economics 
Economics 325 — Econometrics 
Statistics 262 — Statistics and Probability 
Fields of Concentration. Six semester hours (or the equivalent) must be 
taken in each of the student's three fields of concentration. Areas of 
concentration include: econometrics, monetary economics, public finance, 
international economics, regional and urban economics, laboreconomics, and 
energy and environmental economics. One of the fields of concentration may 
be in an outside area; selection must be approved by the graduate economics 
faculty. 

Comprehensive Examinations. Students must pass written comprehensive 
examinations in economic theory (microeconomics and macroeconomics) and 
in three fields. For possible waiver of one field examination, and other 
detailed rules, see departmental "Graduate Programs in Economics" filed in 
the Office of Graduate Director. 

Candidacy and Dissertation. When an applicant has successfully passed 
the written comprehensive examinations, the applicant will be formally 
promoted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. The candidate must submit a 

ECONOMICS 93 



dissertation pursued under the supervision of a member of the graduate 
faculty in economics on some problem in the area of the candidate's major 
interest. The dissertation must present the results of the candidate's individual 
investigation and must embody a definite contribution to knowledge. It must 
be approved by a committee of the graduate faculty in economics. After 
approval of the candidate's dissertation and satisfactory completion of other 
graduate requirements, a final oral examination on the dissertation is 
required. 

Each Ph.D. candidate is required to present a dissertation proposal to the 
Graduate Director subsequent to approval by at least three members of his or 
her dissertation committee including the chairperson. This proposal will 
include a statement of the problem (topic summary), a preliminary survey of 
the literature, a description of the research methodology, and other pertinent 
material. With the approval of the graduate director, the student is then 
required to present the proposal in a faculty-student seminar. 

Credit for dissertation research and writing is available under Economics 
497, but only if the student has a dissertation chairperson and the approval of 
the graduate director. 

Ph.D. Program Options 

The Ph.D. program includes special options conducted in cooperation 
with other units on campus. These include energy economics, industrial 
relations, and mathematical economics. The options specify certain concen- 
trations of course work and comprehensive examinations. Acceptable dis- 
sertations are required of all students. 

Energy Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the College of Mineral 
and Energy Resources (COMER), the energy economics option is designed for 
students wishing to specialize in the area of energy, resource, and environ- 
mental economics. In addition to the core theory courses, students are 
expected to complete a field (12 semester hours at the 300 level) in mineral 
resource economics (COMER), and fields in energy and environmental 
economics and econometrics in the Department of Economics. One field in the 
Department of Economics may be substituted for econometrics, provided the 
student successfully completes Economics 325. 

See Appendix B, Ph.D. Options, Energy Economics of departmental 
"Graduate Programs in Economics," for regulations governing comprehensive 
examinations. 

Industrial and Labor Relations— Graduate work in industrial and labor 
relations typically is interdisciplinary in nature. The Ph.D. option retains the 
interdisciplinary orientation while providing students with a Ph.D. -level of 
understanding of economic theory and economic analysis. Students in the 
industrial and labor relations option take the eight core courses in the Ph.D. 
program and take comprehensive examinations in microeconomic and macro- 
economic theory. 

Students are required to complete three fields of concentration. One field 
must be industrial and labor relations. Since industrial and labor relations is 
within the College of Business and Economics at WVU, it is not necessary that 
both of the two remaining fields be in economics. However, it is necessary that 
there be a 12-hour (four courses) field in this discipline within the WVU 



94 ECONOMICS 



College of Business and Economics. The 12-hour field of industrial and labor 
relations is listed below and consists of four courses: 

Industrial and Labor Relations 334 — Leadership and Work Group 
Dynamics 

Industrial and Labor Relations 342— Advanced Collective Bargaining 

Industrial and Labor Relations 491A— Practicum in Research Methods 

Industrial and Labor Relations 491B— Research Theory 
Of the two remaining fields, each typically 6 credit hours, one must be from 
within the Department of Economics. Most commonly, this field is labor 
economics. The second field may be selected from economics, industrial 
psychology, public administration, statistics, human resources management, 
industrial engineering, or law, and ideally should complement the student's 
research interest. 

Students must pass written comprehensive examinations in their three 
fields of concentrations. 

Mathematical Economics— The mathematical economics option is con- 
ducted in cooperation with the Department of Mathematics. To be admitted 
into this option, students must have completed a minimum of 12 hours in 
mathematics, including a course in calculus equivalent to Mathematics 15. In 
addition to the Economics Ph.D. core, students are required to take the 
following courses: 

Economics 326— Econometrics 2 

Economics 328— Advanced Mathematical Economics 

Economics 329— Seminar in Econometrics 

Mathematics 241— Introduction to Linear Algebra 

Mathematics 251, 252— Introduction to Real Analysis 
(Math. 251 and 252 may be replaced by Math. 317, 318.) 

Mathematics 490— Seminar in Mathematical Economics 

Mathematics Elective— 3 hr. 
Students are required to successfully complete comprehensive exami- 
nations in microeconomic and macroeconomic theory, mathematical econom- 
ics, econometrics, and one other field in economics or mathematics. 

For further details, see "Graduate Programs in Economics" Appendix B, 
Ph.D. options, Mathematical Economics. 

Economics (Econ.) 
Specialized Courses 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 or consent. Special topics relevant to 
economics. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward 
bachelor's and master's degrees. J 

205. Current Economic Problems. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 or consent. (For students in 
Education only.) Acquaints public school teachers with reliable source materials 
in economics and instructs them in studying current economic problems. 

297. Internship. 1-12 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 and departmental approval. Field experience 
in the analysis and solution of economic problems in the public and private 
sectors. 

317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. (Non-credit for Graduate 
students in Economics.) Analysis of the firm as an optimizing unit operating in the 
market place. Examination of product demand, production and costs, pricing 
theory and practice theory and practices, risk and capital budgeting. 



ECONOMICS 95 



318. Economic Policy. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 317 or consent. (Non-credit for Graduate students 
in Economics.] Microeconomic analysis of macroeconomic phenomena is considered 
with particular attention paid to the reaction by firms to price and interest rate 
effects of fiscal and monetary policy. 

319. Applied Business and Economics Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Primary statistical 
methods used in business and economics research including hypothesis testing, 
estimation, linear regression, time series, and business forecasting. Statistical 
computer software is an integral part of the course. 

343. Economic Analysis of Public Policies. 3 hr. Application of economic analysis to 
questions of public policy. Consideration of problems of public goods and other 
market failures and usefulness of cost-benefit analysis to policy-making. (Equiv. 
to Pol. S. 331.) 

Economic Theory 

211. Intermediate Microeconomic Theory. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 54. Consumer choice and 
demand; economics of time; price and output determination and resource allocation 
in the firm and market under a variety of competitive conditions; welfare 
economics, externalities, public goods, and market failure. 

212. Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Forces which 
determine the level of income, employment, and output. Particular attention to 
consumer behavior, investment determination, and government fiscal policy. 

216. History of Economic Thought. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Economic ideas in 
perspective of historic development. 

310. Advanced Micro Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211 and 220 and graduate standing or 
consent. Theory of production and allocation, utility theory, theory of the firm, 
pricing in perfect and imperfect markets, models of firm's operations. 

311. Advanced Micro Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310. General equilibrium analysis, 
distribution theory, welfare economics. 

312. Advanced Macro Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 212 and 220 and graduate standing or 
consent. Classical, Keynesian, and Post-Keynesian theories. 

313. Advanced Macro Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312. Model of economic growth and 
fluctuations, and other advanced topics in macroeconomic theory. 

316. History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate 
standing or consent. Writings of the major figures in the development of economic 
doctrines and analysis. 

Quantitative Economics 

220. Introduction to Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 15 or 128, and Econ. 51 or 
55; or consent. Principal mathematical techniques including set operation, matrix 
albegra, differential and integral calculus employed in economic analysis. Partic- 
ular attention given to static (or equilibrium) analysis, comparative-static 
analysis and optimization problems in economics. 

225. Applied Business and Economic Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 125 or Stat. 101 or 
consent. Continuation of Econ. 125. Principal statistical methods used in applied 
business and economic research including multiple regression, index numbers, 
time series analysis, forecasting models and methods, and sampling design. 

226. Introductory Econometrics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 125 or consent. Statistical methods 
applied to the analysis of economic models and data. Emphasis placed on multiple 
regression, multicollinearity, seasonality, heteroscedasticity, autocorrelation, 
dummy variables, time series analysis, distributed lags and simultaneous equations 
with economics and computer applications. 

96 ECONOMICS 



320. Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 220 or consent. Linear programming, 
input-output analysis, complex numbers, linear difference and differential equa- 
tions, comparative-static and dynamic analysis and optimization techniques. 

325. Econometrics 1. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 262 or consent. Specification, estimation, and 
verification of single-equation models. Topics covered include multicollinearity, 
autocorrelation, heteroscedasticity, dummy variables, time series analyses and 
forecasting, functional form, and specification error analysis. Students should be 
familiar with matrix algebra. 

326. Econometrics 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 325 or consent. Identification and estimation of 
simultaneous equation models and their use in forecasting and simulation. Other 
advanced topics include distributed lags, autoregressive models, errors in variables 
models, aggregation problems, and pooled cross-section/time-series models. 

328. Advanced Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Mathematical properties 
of microeconomic models of general equilibrium and welfare, existence, uniqueness, 
and stability of equilibrium. Applications of Hamiltonian and maximum principles 
to growth models and economic control problems. Investigation of separability 
theorems. 

329. Seminar in Econometrics. 3 hr. 

Monetary Economics 

330. Monetary Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312 or consent. Sources and determinants of 
supply of money; demand for money for transactions and speculative purposes; 
general equilibrium theory of money, interest, prices, and output; role of money in 
policy. 

334. Seminar in Monetary Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312 or consent. 

Public Finance 

241. Public Finance. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Governmental fiscal organizations and 
policy; taxes and tax systems with particular emphasis on federal government and 
state of West Virginia. 

340. Theory of Public Finance. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 
Economic role of government in a mixed economy with regard to resource 
allocation between public and private sectors, influence of government upon 
income distribution and economic stability and growth. 

344. Seminar in Public Finance. 3 hr. 

Public Regulation and Control 

245. Government and Business. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Market structure, conduct and 
performance: analysis of the antitrust laws — judicial interpretation and effect on 
the business sector. 

246. Transportation Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Economic and institutional 
analysis of the domestic transportation system of the United States. Topics 
include role of transportation, carrier characteristics and services, transportation 
rates and costs, regulation of transportation. 

345. Industrial Organization. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 
Economic analysis of market structure, conduct, and performance: in-depth 
evaluation of markets and industries in the United States and the effect of 
government intervention on firm behavior. 

349. Public Regulation of Business. I or II. 3 hr. Economic analysis of regulation of 
specific industries such as public utilities. 

ECONOMICS 97 



International Economics 

250. International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Development of trade among 
nations; theories of trade, policies, physical factors, trends, and barriers in 
international economics. 

350. Advanced International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211 and 212. Contemporary 
theories of international economics; analysis of current problems in world trade 
and finance. 

354. Seminar in international Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 212. 

Regional Economics 

255. Regional Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Analysis of the regional economy's 
spatial dimension, emphasizing interregional capital and labor mobility, the role 
of cities, objectives and issues of regional policy, lagging regions and Appalachia, 
growth poles, and regional growth and income distribution. 

257. Urban Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Analyzes the spatial dimensions of the 
urban economy, emphasizing both urban economic theory and urban policy. Issues 
include cities and income inequality, urban upgrading function, blight, economics 
of ghettos, the economics of urban size. 

355. Advanced Regional Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or 
consent. Regional income and flow of funds estimation, regional cyclical behavior 
and multiplier analysis, industrial location and analysis, techniques of regional 
input-output measurement, impact of local government reorganization on regional 
public service and economic development. 

357. Advanced Urban Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 
Analyzes the spatial dimensions of the urban economy, emphasizing urban theory, 
policy, and empirical research. Major subjects include urban income distribution, 
residential location theory, spatial structure, neighborhood change, blight, ghettos, 
segregation, renewal, and city size. 

359. Seminar in Regional Economics. 3 hr. 

Labor Economics 

360. Advanced Human Resource Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing 
or consent. Examination and analysis of our social and economic efforts to solve 
current manpower problems in the U.S., including structural unemployment and 
inflation. 

364. Seminar in Labor Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 

Economic History 

270. Growth of the American Economy. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Central issues in 
development of the American economy. 

370. Economic History. 3 hr. Examination of the methods of research and issues in 
economic history of the United States. 

374. Seminar in Economic History. 3 hr. 

Economic Development 

213. Economic Development. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 54 and 55. The problems, changes, and 
principal policy issues faced by nonindustrialized countries. 



98 ECONOMICS 



Energy and Environmental Economics 

380. Energy Economics. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Welfare analysis of 
supply interruptions and the foreign dependence question. Study of various 
energy resources in reference to policy alternatives under variant growth 
conditions and input-output models. Examination of coal industry and coal 
externalities. 

384. Environmental Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and Econ. 380 or M.E.R. 345 and 
graduate standing or consent. Examination of the theoretical and empirical 
literature dealing with externalities (pollution), the relationships between pollution 
and social costs, the relationships between energy production and environmental 
quality, and the optimal strategies for pollution abatement. 

Other Economics Courses 

299. Independent Readings in Economics. 3-6 hr. Supervised readings for undergraduate 
and graduate students in special areas. 

390. Independent Reading in Economics. 3-6 hr. Supervised readings. For graduate 
students in special areas. 

491. Seminar in Applied Economic Analysis. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of graduate-level 
economics. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

EDUCATION 

Diane L. Reinhard, Dean of College of Human Resources and Education 

802 Allen Hall 

Degrees Offered: C.A.S., Ed.D. (M.A. and M.S. programs are listed separately, by 
program major, in this catalog.) 

Graduate Faculty: Members Andes, B. Bailey, Baker, Bontempo, Bower, Childress, 
Clements, S. Cormier, W. Cormier, Deay, DeCosta, DeVore, Fraley, Gibbins, Goeres, 
Goodwin, Grasso, Haas, Hartnett, Hazi, Helfeldt, Holtan, Hursh, Ianonne, Jacobs, 
Kaczmarek, Koay, Lass, Leary, Lilley, Lombardi, Lundeen, McAvoy, McCrory, 
Majumder, Marinelli, Martin, Masson, Maughan, Meckley, Monahan, Moriarty, 
Moxley, Murphy, A. Nardi, Neal, Obenauf, Phillips, Piatt, Pytlik, Reed, Reinhard, 
Ruscello, Saltz, Shea, Shuck, Shuster, E. R. Smith, P. Smith, Srebalus, Stepp, 
St. Louis, C. Sunal, D. Sunal, Thomas, Tompkins, Tseng, Tunick, E. Vargas, J. Vargas, 
Walls, Wienke, Woodford, Woodrum, Yeazell, and Yura. Associate Members Atkins, 
N. Bailey, Carline, DeLo, Freeman, Gordon, Greever, Hall, Hayes, Hobbs, Hunt, 
Hursh, Joyce, Ludlow, Messing, G. Nardi, J. Paterson, Queen, Savage, Shuman, 
Sloane, Stead, Toth, Vaughn, Wolf, J. Yeager, and Young. 

Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.) 

This program is designed to prepare school and related personnel who 
wish professional training beyond the master's degree. Candidates for the 
Certificate of Advanced Study in Education may choose from among the 
following areas of study for their area(s) of concentration: administration and 
supervision, curriculum and instruction, counseling and guidance, educational 
psychology, reading, or special education. Persons interested in the certificate 
should consult with the chairpersons of the appropriate department or the 
Dean of the College of Human Resources and Education. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

The program of study leading to the degree of Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 
is planned with the student's graduate adviser and committee and is made 

EDUCATION 99 



available through the faculty and support services of the College of Human 
Resources and Education. It combines courses of instruction, seminars, 
supervised research, and ancillary experience intended to provide the 
candidate with a variety of educationally related competencies. Special 
requirements, such as tools of research, also may be specified by the student's 
committee. 

The Ed.D. is a program based on competencies and thus given may 
provide a broad overview of education or it may delve very deeply into a 
single aspect. College facilities and faculty expertise make it possible for 
students wishing to do so to concentrate more heavily in such fields as 
curriculum development, counseling and guidance, education administration, 
rehabilitation services, special education, and technology education. 

Curriculum and Instruction 

Options in curriculum and instruction are available for the C.A.S., the 
Ed.D., and the various M. A. programs. Since the development of curricula and 
teaching methodology is central to all levels of education, specific tracks in 
curriculum and instruction have been designed for elementary, secondary, 
and reading options in the masters' programs offered by the Division of 
Education. In addition, discrete subject areas may also serve as the core of 
specialization within curriculum and instruction. 

Additional information about curriculum and instruction within the 
Division of Education may be obtained through writing to: 

Cynthia S. Sunal 

Chairperson of Graduate Programs 

Division of Education 

604 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122 

West Virginia University 

Morgantown, WV 26506-6122 

EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 

Richard A. Hartnett, Chairperson 

606 Allen Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Andes, Childress, Gibbins, Goeres, Goodwin, Hartnett, 
Hazi, Leary, Lilley, Martin, Meckley, Monahan, Neal, E. R. Smith, Stepp, and 
Tompkins. Associate Members N. Bailey, Freeman, Gordon, Hall, Hayes, Hunt, 
Queen, Sloane, Toth, J. E. Yeager, and Young. 

The education administration program prepares individuals for leader- 
ship positions primarily in elementary, secondary, and postsecondary insti- 
tutions. Although most students are pursuing administrative careers, some 
are training for research or staff positions. The unit offers graduate programs 
leading to the Master of Arts and for certification in the principalship, 
supervision, and superintendency. Upon admission to the program, all 
students are assigned an academic adviser. All students should contact their 
adviser for specific program and certification requirements. 

At all degree levels, the program is dedicated to the preparation of 
outstanding individuals to administer and improve education. 

Graduates of education administration occupy such prominent positions 
as: 

1. Administrative posts in school systems as superintendents, super- 
visors, and principals. 

100 EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 



2. Administrative posts in colleges and universities, including general 
administration, academic affairs, financial affairs, student affairs, adult and 
continuing education, and institutional research and planning. 

3. Administrative posts in governmental and public service agencies, 
including the West Virginia State Department of Education, regional educa- 
tional service agencies, and vocational rehabilitation agencies. 

Applicants must comply with the WVU requirements, the requirements 
of the College of Human Resources and Education, and the education 
administration program. Admission to all programs is contingent on assess- 
ment of complete official transcripts of all higher-education work attempted 
and other evidence the faculty may deem necessary to judge probable success 
in the graduate program. 



The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia 
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification 
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the Catalog may not be in 
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon 
arrival on campus. 



Master of Arts (M.A.) 

Optional programs are available in public school administration and 
supervision, higher education administration, and extension and continuing 
education. A two-semester, field-based experience is required before perma- 
nent professional certification can be acquired in public school administration 
and supervision. In order to graduate, the student must earn at least a 3.25 
grade-point average on all program work attempted. Students seeking WV 
certification must pass a West Virginia Department of Education content 
specialization examination upon completion of their academic program. 

Certificate of Advanced Study Concentrations 

Advanced work beyond the master's degree may be taken with emphasis 
in school district central office administration or in principalship. A research 
project or a 6-hour planned field-based experience is required. In order to 
graduate, the student must defend the research project and earn at least a 3.25 
grade-point average on all program work attempted. 

Doctor of Education Concentrations 

The Doctor of Education degree is offered with tracks in public school 
administration, higher education, and related educational organizations 
(such as state departments of education). Consistent with the regulations of 
the University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the 
program of education administration, each track is individually designed by 
the doctoral student, the student's adviser, and the doctoral committee to meet 
the student's career aspirations. 

Education Administration (Ed. A.) 

300. Public School Organization and Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. Basic concepts 
through which administrators, supervisors, and teachers gain understanding of 
general problems related to operation of schools and school systems. 

318. School Business Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Sound business 
administration for central office school administrators. 

EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 101 



320. Personnel Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The determination of student, 
employee, and organizational personnel needs and the development of plans and 
programs to meet these needs. 

330. Principles of Education Leadership. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Problems of school 
leaders in the areas of administration, supervision, and instruction. 

331. Principles of Supervision. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Elementary, junior high, and 
senior high supervision. 

333. School Law. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Overview of the generally accepted legal 
principles which affect the student, teacher, and principal in a public school 
setting. 

351. Administrative Procedures in Adult Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered 
off-campus only.) Theories and principles of administering adult education 
organizations as they relate to planning, organizing, staffing, initiating, delegating, 
integrating, motivating, decision making, communicating, establishing standards, 
financing, budget defense and control, and measuring results. 

352. Professionalism in Extension Service. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered off-campus 
only.) Role of Extension Service professionals in social change, study community 
systems; professional relationships, accountability, ethics, obligations to clientele. 

353. Community Education: Administration and Organization. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
(Offered off-campus only.) Study of the rationale, methods, and procedures in 
administering and programming community education. Experiences in planning, 
adapting, and evaluating programs independently and in consort with school and 
community plans. 

354. Management of Youth Development Programs. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered 
off-campus only.) Study of the management of youth programs. Emphasis on 
relationships of management principles to program development, youth needs, 
work plans, curriculum, resources, and evaluation. 

355. Leadership Development for Youth Programs. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered 
off-campus only.) Fundamentals of administrative leadership development in 
youth programs. An overview analysis of the tools, tasks, and competencies with 
emphasis on group dynamics in developing leadership skills of volunteers. 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Department consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in 
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in 
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. 

388. Research-Evaluation-Assessment. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Research, evaluation, 
and assessment procedures related to administrative decision making and 
problem solving to increase the general effectiveness of educational institutions. 

389. School-Community Relations. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A study of the systems 
through which the school can be interpreted to its community. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. The Principalship. I, S. 3 hr. A study of the active role of principals in Early, 
Middle, and Adolescent schools. Specific emphasis is placed upon the areas of 
effective schools, instructional leadership, special services and facilities man- 
agement. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 
102 EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 



402. Superintendency. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., or 
consent. Roles, relationships, behaviors, and competencies which characterize the 
school superintendent and staff. (Offered in Fall and Summer of even years.] 

403. Education Administration Theory. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education adminis- 
tration, or equiv., or consent. Interdisciplinary study of the major concepts of 
education administration theory and the application to educational settings. 

404. Public Education Finance. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or 
equiv., or consent. Basic concepts. (Offered in Spring of even years.} 

405. Administration of Educational Facilities. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education 
administration, or equiv., or consent. The planning, evaluation, and management 
of current and future school facilities. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

406. Public Education and the Law. S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration or 
equiv., or consent. Legal permissives and limitations involved in setting policy for 
organization of, and administration of public schools. (Offered in Fail and Summer 
of even years.) 

407. Collective Bargaining in Public Education. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education 
administration, or equiv., or consent. This course is designed to inform school 
administrators about the concepts and principles of negotiating and implementing 
collective bargaining agreements. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

408. Organizational Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., 
or consent. An examination of alternative means for the analysis of organizational 
structures, interrelationships, and functions. A field analysis is required. 

409. Politics of Education. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., or 
consent. An examination of the internal political nature of school systems, and of 
the external influence of legislative, judicial, and administrative bodies, and 
interest groups. 

458. College Business Management. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or 
equiv., or consent. Covers knowledge of such areas as budgeting, grants and 
contracts preparation and administration, formula funding, management infor- 
mation systems, purchasing procedures and practices, and zero base budgeting. 
(Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

459. Adult and Continuing Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Principles, concepts, and processes 
involved in programming for adults in a community setting. Nature of adult 
learning, subject matter, and learning environment. (Offered in Summer of even 
years.) 

460. Development of Administration in American Higher Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. The 
administrative development of American higher education from 1636 to the 
present, including internal trends and external forces. 

461. Higher Education Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. Organization and administration of 
higher education institutions. 

462. Higher Education Law. I, II, S. 3 hr. Critical legal issues of higher education — 
public and private — using a case study approach. 

463. Higher Education Finance. I, II, S. 3 hr. Financial concerns in higher education with 
emphasis on taxation and legislative actions, sources of income, budgeting, and 
cost analysis. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

464. Issues in Higher Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Current societal and institutional issues 
which tend to shape the mission and life-style of an institution. (Offered in Fall of 
odd years.) 

EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 103 



465. Institutional Research and Planning. I, II, S. 3 hr. Accumulation, analysis, and 
interpretation of data relevant to decision making and the allocation of institutional 
resources. (Offered in Spring of even years.] 

466. The College Student. I, II, S. 3 hr. Review of research and literature on college 
students from freshman through graduate school. Emphasis on student subcultural 
patterns. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

467. Higher Education Collective Bargaining. I, II, S. 3 hr. The process and content of 
collective bargaining in higher education and its impact on institutional governance 
and academic jurisdictions. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

468. Community and Junior Colleges. I, II, S. 3 hr. Development, role, functions, 
organization, and curriculum of community and junior colleges in the United 
States, with special emphasis on West Virginia. 

469. Higher Education Internship. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) Practical 
experiences in the administration of an organizational unit under supervision of 
the unit's chief administrator. 

470. Principal's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Three years of 
successful experience as a teacher and have a position as principal or assistant 
principal. Consists of problem-solving techniques and seminar activities as 
applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. (Required for 
permanent certification as a principal.] 

471. Supervisor's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Three years of 
teaching experience, 15 hours completed in a master's degree program, and be 
employed full-time as a supervisor. Consists of problem-solving techniques and 
seminar activities as applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. 
(Required for permanent certification as a supervisor.] 

472. Superintendent's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Five years of 
successful experience as a teacher or supervisor, and employed as a superintendent 
or assistant superintendent. Consists of problem-solving techniques and seminar 
activities as applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. 
(Required for permanent certification as a superintendent.) 

480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

485. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced subjects which are not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through 
specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

Anne H. Nardi, Department Chairperson 

608 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members B. Bailey, Baker, Fraley, Grasso, Hursh, McAvoy, A. H. 

Nardi, Reinhard, M. Tseng, E. A. Vargas, J. S. Vargas, and Walls. Associate Members 

Paterson and Stead. 

The educational psychology program in the College of Human Resources 
and Education offers opportunities for graduate study and research leading to 
the Master of Art. The principal goal of the program is to educate professionals 
in instruction, service, and research. Professional preparation focuses on 
learning and development, instructional development, and measurement, 

104 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 



research, and statistics. Accordingly, students are expected to achieve 
competencies in these areas. 

Programs are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser, and 
the student's committee to meet particular career needs. Minor fields of study 
are also planned for each student as appropriate. In addition to the general 
requirements of the University and the College of Human Resources and 
Education, the department requires a core of courses and supporting compe- 
tencies of all graduate students. 

Educational psychologists function in a variety of settings. The program 
prepares and places competent educational psychologists in educational 
settings at all levels, such as educational agencies at local, state, and federal 
levels; public and private human service centers; medical centers; and 
business and industrial settings. 



The educational psychology doctoral option is being revised. Students who 
wish to pursue the Ed.D. degree are advised that the Ed.D. option printed in this 
section may not be in effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see the 
department chairperson for details upon arrival. 



Requirements 

All applicants must comply with the general requirements of the 
University and the College of Human Resources and Education. The applicant 
must have an undergraduate degree from an accredited institution and must 
submit official transcripts of the undergraduate work, the official scores for 
either the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) or the Miller Analogy Test 
(MAT), and three letters of reference. 

Each student is expected to complete the following core of courses as part 
of the master's plan of studies: 

Ed. P. 300— Advanced Educational Psychology 

Ed. P. 311— Statistical Methods 1 

Ed. P. 320 — Introduction to Research 

Ed. P. 330— Foundations of Educational Measurement 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) Option 

All applicants must comply with the graduate requirements of the 
University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the option in 
educational psychology. Admission to candidacy for the Ed.D. degree is 
granted only to individuals holding a master's degree. Students may enter the 
doctoral program without a master's degree within the program before 
advancing to candidacy for the Ed.D. degree. A master's thesis is required of 
all the students. If a student enters the program with a master's degree, the 
relevant part of that degree, but no more than 30 hours, may be accepted into 
the student's doctoral program of study. 

Performance Standards 

The credentials for all applicants are screened by a three member 
admissions committee of the department. The guidelines employed in evalu- 
ating applications are: 

1. Total GRE scores of 1,100 or MAT score of 60, 

2. An undergraduate GPA of 3.0, 

3. Level of graduate work completed to date, 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 105 



4. The sources and strength of letters of recommendation, 

5. Nature and quality of former scholarly work, 

6. The degree to which the applicant's goals and objectives may be 
accomplished if admitted to the program, and 

7. The applicant's potential for contributing to the department if awarded 
financial aid. 

To remain in good standing, a student must have an average grade of B or 
better for all courses in the program and make satisfactory progress toward 
the completion of the program competencies (as described in the following 
section). 

Option Requirements 

The option requires a minimum of 72 hours of graduate credit beyond a 
bachelor's degree or 42 hours beyond a master's degree. In addition, completion 
of a core of required courses, fulfillment of competency requirements, and an 
approved dissertation are mandatory. 

Each student is expected to complete the following core courses as part of 
the doctoral plan of studies: 

Ed.P. 420— Advanced Educational Research (PR: Ed.P. 311) 

Ed. P. 440 — Human Development and Behavior 

Ed.P. 450 — Psychological Foundations of Learning 

Ed.P. 451 — Principles of Instruction 

The student is also expected to enroll in a doctoral seminar, Ed.P. 496, for 
two semesters for in-depth coverage of specialized content issues in educa- 
tional psychology. 

There are three competency areas in the program. They are learning and 
development, instructional development, and measurement, research, and 
statistics. Students are expected to fulfill the program competency require- 
ments by meeting the goals and objectives specified for the program. The 
learning and development competency product will take the form of a 
theoretical paper, the instructional development competency product will be 
a course or other type of instructional sequence of comparable magnitude, and 
the measurement, research, and statistics competency product will be a data- 
based research paper of publishable quality. 

Application Information 

Inquiries should be addressed to the Chairperson of the Department of 
Educational Psychology, Allen Hall, College of Human Resources and 
Education, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 
26505-6122. 

Educational Psychology (Ed. P.) 

231. Sampling Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: An introductory course in statistics. Methods of 
sampling from finite and infinite populations, choice of sampling unit, sample 
survey design, estimation of confidence limits and optimum sample size, and 
single- and multi-stage sampling procedures. (Aiso listed as Stat. 231.) 

260. Media and Microcomputers in Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. The effective operation and 
educational uses of educational media including microcomputers. Hands-on 
experience with equipment, and in designing materials for an instructional unit 
incorporating media and/or microcomputers. 



106 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 



269. Behavioral Technology for Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 105 recommended. 
Behavioral science applied to instructional systems. Complex systems; feedback 
loops; measuring relevant variables, collecting data. Applying schedules of 
reinforcement. Effective stimulus control for students and administrators. Rela- 
tionship between system and institution. Behavioral ethics. 

300. Advanced Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 3 hr. Design for beginning graduate 
students. Psychological principles of learning and development as they relate to 
processes of classroom instruction. 

301. Introductory Behavior Analysis: Human Resources. I, II, S. 3 hr. Introduction to 
behavior analysis in education and human resources. Basic practice in measuring 
and shaping human behavior. A comprehensive examination of relationships 
among human organisms, environment, and behavior. 

311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Basic concepts of statistical 
models, distributions, probability, random, variables, tests of hypotheses, con- 
fidence, intervals, regressions, correlation, transformation, F and X 2 distributions, 
analysis of variance and sample size. 

312. Statistical Methods 2. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311. Extension of basic concepts of 
statistical models, design of experiments, multiway classification models, facto- 
rials, split plot design, simple covariance, orthogonal comparisons, multiple linear 
and nonlinear regression and correlation analysis, chi-square and nonparametric 
statistics. 

320. Introduction to Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311. Basic concepts, strategies, 
methodologies, designs, and procedures of research in education. Major emphasis 
on integrating research designs, measurements, and statistics for initiating 
research projects, collecting and analyzing data, and interpreting and reporting 
findings. 

321. Design of Experiments. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 320 or 330 or equiv. Elements of 
experimental design and their implications for (including computergraph) setting 
up research, sampling methods, recording and display of data, interpretation of 
data, design and analysis of experiments over time, trend analysis statistics 
appropriate in individual and group designs. 

330. Foundations of Educational Measurement. I, II, S. 3 hr. An examination and 
application of norm-referenced and criterion-referenced principles and procedures 
to the measurement and prediction of pupil performance. 

333. Nonparametric Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Introductory course in statistics. Single 
sample tests; for related samples, two independent samples, K related samples, K 
independent samples, and measures of correlation. 

341. Multivariate Methods 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Basic matrix operations, 
multiple regression analysis, discriminant analysis for two groups, multivariate 
analysis of variance for one- and two-way designs, and analysis of covariance 
involving multiple covariates. Applying SAS Procedure Matrix for data analyses. 

342. Multivariate Methods 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Matrix operations, 
multivariate multiple regression analysis, canonical correlation analysis, dis- 
criminant analysis for multiple groups, qualitative discriminant analysis applying 
Bayes' theorem, principal component analysis, and fundamentals of common 
factor analysis. Data analyses with SAS Procedure Matrix. 

343. Statistical Analysis in Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 330 or consent. Review 
measures of central tendency, percentiles, and correlation. Emphasis placed on 
correlation, regression, testing hypothesis, non-parametric tests, and other mea- 
sures in analysis and inference. 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 107 



350. Applied Behavior Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 301 or equiv. Application of 
reinforcement theory as an instructional technique in changing human behavior. 
Analysis of problems in terms of behavior and the design of instruction and 
treatment programs to produce desired change. 

359. Conceptual Foundations of Behavior Analysis. I. 3 hr. Comprehensive introduction 
to the basic science of human behavior and its philosophy. Provides a conceptual 
framework for a variety of applied fields. 

360. Behavior Analysis: Teaching/Training Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analyzing 
behavior of teachers/trainers; behavior analytic designs for teaching arrangements 
that respect scientific principles of human behavior from perspectives of both 
teachers and students; comparative analysis of teaching systems; cybernetic 
teaching; practice designing instruction. 

361. Cybernetic Systems of Individualized Instruction. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed.P. 360. 
Advanced analysis of behavioral education systems. Principles of designing and 
developing behavioral teaching systems. Applied design. Instructional system 
projects will be undertaken either individually or in teams. 

362. Instructional Systems— Administration and Management. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 
361 or consent. The conduct of instructional operations within instructional 
systems; the administration and management of organizational arrangements to 
support system approaches to instruction. 

364. Precision Teaching. II. 3 hr. Design and adapt materials for precision teaching for 
educational decisions and for research. 

370. Programmatic Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. How to conduct programmatic 
research: how to phrase the question, select a measurement procedure, collect 
data, and use data to make experimental decisions as work progresses. 

371. Behavioral Measurement. I, II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Analysis of the behavior of 
measuring. Measurements of the behavior of individuals and in groups in applied 
settings. The role of measures in contingencies governing the behavior of subjects 
and practitioner. Techniques for graphic analysis. 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. 

391. Problems in Advanced Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

400. Verbal Behavior 1. 1. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 350 or consent. Behavioral analysis of complex 
verbal behavior in person to person contacts in text materials, and in instructional 
systems. 

401. Verbal Behavior 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 400 or consent. Advanced concepts in the 
analysis of verbal behavior. Review of current theoretical and experimental 
literature. 

420. Seminar in Educational Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311 and consent. 
Identification of research problems in education, consideration of alternative 
designs and methods of investigations, and development of a research proposal at 
the advanced graduate level. 

423. Designing Single Case/Group Research. I. 3 hr. Strategies and tactics for 
observation, measurement, and experimental investigation of functional relation- 
ships between the behavior of individuals and their environment are presented as 
a means for understanding what controls human behavior. 

440. Human Development and Behavior. I, II, S. 3 hr. Psychological theories of human 
development. Contemporary theories analyzed and compared with emphasis on 
their implication for classroom behavior and the educational process. 

108 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 



450. Psychological Foundations of Learning. I, II, S. 3 hr. Psychological and philosophi- 
cal foundations of major learning theories and their implications for instructional 
procedures. 

451. Principles of Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic principles of teaching- 
learning process implied in major learning theories; study of factors in learning, 
variables in instructional program, and principles of instructional design. 

452. Stimulus Conditions in Learning. II. 3 hr. Stimulus conditions and stimulus 
control in human association learning, discrimination learning, sequence learning, 
concept learning, and problem solving. 

480. Seminar in Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

481. Special Topics in Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students with 
college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience for graduate 
students in a teaching situation. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced areas of 
educational psychology. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to permit graduate students an 
opportunity to present research to the assembled faculty and the graduate student 
body. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Dissertation. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 

Ronald L. Klein, Chairperson of the Department 

823 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S.E.E., M.S.E., Ph.D.* 

Graduate Faculty: Members Alajajian, Choudhry, Cooley, Feliachi, Jerabek, Joseph, 

Klein, Kumar, McConnell, Middleton, Mikhael, Noore, Nutter, Roumeliotis, Sims, 

Smith, and Swartwout. 

The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, with 17 faculty 
members, 275 undergraduate students, and over 65 graduate students, offers 
excellent graduate areas of emphasis in: 

1. Digital systems design, including microprocessor applications, ad- 
vanced computer architecture, and computer engineering. 

2. Control systems, including classical and modern theory and appli- 
cations. 

3. Signal processing, including digital filtering and communications. 

4. Electric power systems, including stability, transients, real time 
control, protection and steady state analysis. 

5. Electromagnetics, including antennas and microwave systems. 

6. Electronics, including circuit analysis, integrated circuit devices, and 
VLSI design. 

Approximately seven M.S. and two Ph.D. degrees are awarded each year 
and these graduates are in great demand by industry. 

*The department is authorized to award the B.S.Cp.E. degree (Computer Engineering). At this 
time the department is planning for the M.S.Cp.E. degree, however it has not yet been authorized. 
The Ph.D. is awarded by the College of Engineering and is available with emphasis in electrical or 
computer engineering. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 109 



Digital Systems Design 

Digital computer and microprocessor systems design is the most techno- 
logically intensive component in the electrical and computer engineering 
curriculum. Integrated circuits with increasing capabilities are rapidly being 
developed. In turn, the demand for electrical engineers and computer 
engineers with strong educational backgrounds is rising very rapidly. The 
electrical and computer engineering curriculum offers a large selection of both 
required and elective graduate courses in computer systems. These cover 
such topics as digital logic, microprocessor applications, interfacing, computer 
architecture, computer arithmetic, computer networks, performance evalua- 
tion, VLSI testing techniques, and fault tolerant computing. In addition, the 
department cooperates closely with the University's computer science faculty 
so that E.C.E. graduate students are able to include computer science courses 
in real-time operating systems, data structures, digital communication 
software, artificial intellegence, and interactive graphics in their program. A 
number of research projects utilizing computers and/or design of computer 
systems has been completed or are being completed by faculty and graduate 
students in the department. Some examples are real-time monitoring of 
environmental conditions in a coal mine using digital communications and a 
minicomputer, a distributed microprocessor monitoring system, a study of 
the methodology whereby reliability of an environmental monitoring system 
can be established, and a knowledge based decision support system for 
mining. 

The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering operates and 
maintains a number of dedicated computers running the UNIX operating 
system. These computers support both the instructional and research activities 
of the department. These systems are a VAX 11/780, several PDP ll's, a 
variety of stand-alone microcomputers, and workstations. In addition the 
department is linked to two College of Engineering computers, a Harris HCX- 
9 and a VAX 11/785, and to the extensive computing facilities of WVNET by 
means of an ETHERNET system. Through this link and a 1.5 megabit 
microwave link to the computers in Computer Science, the department has 
access to several additional VAX systems and to many computing networks 
as well as to the Pittsburgh Supercomputing Center. 

Control Systems 

The study of control systems is a highly mathematical topic with a broad 
range of applications. This subject area interests those who wish to apply 
technology to control dynamical systems. Signals from sensors, usually 
processed by a computer, are necessary for proper control of a system. 
Consequently, the student interested in control systems will also take course 
work in computer systems and in digital signal processing. 

The graduate curriculum in control and systems engineering consists of 
courses in both classical and modern control theory and applications. These 
include modeling techniques in both the frequency and time domains for 
continuous and discrete time systems, optimal control, digital control, and 
estimation theory. Classical techniques for control systems and design tools 
such as root locus, Nyquist, and Bode methods for linear time-variant systems 
are also included. Also offered are courses in adaptive control, large scale 
systems, and stochastic control. 

Currently, the faculty in the control area are actively involved in a 
number of research areas. These include both sponsored and unsponsored 

110 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



research activities with some projects related to a specific application and 
some being of a theoretical nature having a wide range of applications. 
Research projects in control and systems engineering include the following: 

1. Research in Large Scale Systems. The primary emphasis is on 
designing fast estimate algorithms for distributed systems. 

2. Analysis and design of tracking systems. Signal processing algorithms 
are designed to improve the position estimates provided by a tracking radar. 
Kalman filtering is the principal algorithm used in this study. 

3. Reduced order systems design. The optimization of reduced-order 
models, filters, and controllers is considered in this investigation. Optimal 
control theory is applied to linear stochastic models to obtain designs having 
limited complexity but excellent performance. 

4. Deconvolution methods for seismic signal processing. Methods of 
deconvolution for nonstationary seismic signals are investigated. These 
include modified Wiener and Kalman filtering techniques. 

5. Fast algorithm design. Minimum mean-square-error signal processing 
algorithms are developed subject to a constraint on the allowable number of 
multiplications per iteration. 

6. Modeling of power-system load dynamics. The daily variations in an 
electric utility's power demand are quite significant. For operational control 
of generation to meet user's demands, a dynamic model of the variations is 
useful. When developed, this model can be used to forecast future demand 
values and schedule power generation accordingly. 

The faculty in the control area has research sponsored by the U.S. Office 
of Naval Research, the National Science Foundation, the state of West 
Virginia, and private organizations. In addition to the topics listed above, the 
control group is beginning to be involved with control research in the robotics 
and flexible manufacturing area. 

Signal Processing and Communications 

Signal processing and communications is an area of emphasis and 
strength in the department. Faculty and graduate students conduct basic and 
applied research covering a wide range of topics. Signal detection, and circuit 
and system designs for processing these signals, particularly those using 
digital hardware, have experienced dramatic evolution recently. Important 
areas of application of research results obtained in the department include: 
medical diagnosis, geophysical prospecting, speech and speaker recognition, 
echo cancellation in satellite communications, and noise cancellation in 
acoustic systems. The graduate program includes several courses to support 
ongoing research in adaptive systems, fundamentals of digital signal process- 
ing (DSP), applications of DSP, and advanced topics in DSP. Also the 
department has a well established and equipped DSP research laboratory. 
Specific examples of research in progress are: speech modeling and compres- 
sion, adaptive noise cancellation, and three-dimensional tomographic imaging. 

In the speech modeling area, several new techniques for representing 
speech signals that promise more accurate representation without increasing 
the data rate are under investigation. The noise cancellation research 
addresses the generation of optimum algorithms as well as their time and 
frequency domain implementations. Hardware realizations of these algorithms 
using DSP microprocessors for acoustic noise cancellation are in progress. 
The three-dimensional tomographic research under way explores nondestruc- 
tive methods which are attractive ecologically, technically, and economically 
and which identify the properties to characterize underground resources. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 1 1 1 



Electrical communications have made dramatic impacts on human life. 
The department offers courses in the basics of communications as well as 
more contemporary new developments, such as digital communications, 
pulse code modulation, frequency shift keying, and spread spectrum systems. 
Examples of research projects in communications engineering being conducted 
by faculty and graduate students are: development of an improved communi- 
cation system for an urban transportation system, electronically program- 
mable active filters, and the use of spread spectrum techniques. 

Electric Power Systems 

Electric power systems historically have been an area of emphasis in the 
electrical engineering curriculum, and the graduate program in power 
systems at WVU is quite mature. Five graduate courses are offered in this area 
on a regular basis. In addition, there are four senior elective/graduate courses 
on such subjects as distribution, industrial power systems, power electronics, 
and advanced power systems analysis. Outside research funding for work on 
reliability, grounding, transmission, electric transportation, and optimal 
design provides excellent support for both graduate students and faculty 
research. Extensive cooperation with industry also provides ample opportu- 
nity for field study. 

Electromagnetics, Antennas, and Microwave Systems 

Electromagnetics encompasses the generation, radiation, propagation, 
scattering, interaction with matter, and reception of electromagnetic energy 
from radio to optical frequencies. The electromagnetics faculty has strong 
credentials for, and interest in, theoretical, experimental, and numerical 
techniques. The department offers senior/graduate courses in antennas, 
microwaves, and radar. In addition, graduate-level courses in advanced 
electromagnetics, wave propagation, relativistic field theory, antenna theory, 
and guided waves are offered on a regular basis. Research projects, most of 
which have been funded by sponsors outside the University, have been 
conducted in the following areas: Fourier transform inversion methods, 
geometrical theory of diffraction, numerical techniques, electromagnetic 
wave propagation, electrical properties of coal at radio frequencies, tomo- 
graphical reconstruction methods, electromagnetic instrumentation for coal- 
related applications, microwave communication analysis (terrestrial and 
satellite), relativisitic rotational electrodynamics, and new solutions to the 
Einstein-Maxwell field equations. 

Electronics, Circuit Analysis, Integrated Circuits and VLSI 

Electronics, circuit analysis, IC's and VLSI are all areas of emphasis in the 
department. Courses are offered in advanced circuit analysis, integrated 
circuits (both analog and digital), radio frequency electronics, noise and 
grounding and power electronics. Recent research efforts in electronics 
include the development of electronic systems for monitoring and control 
with applications in mining and agriculture, RF high voltage electronics, and 
power electronics. Work in power electronics applications includes the 
development of an arc reduction controller for mine transportation systems 
and the design of a power system stabilizer. 

A major new thrust in the department is in the area of VLSI systems 
design. Circuit fundamentals, device physics, and system principles are 
emphasized along with teaching the fundamentals of CAD/CAE tools. 
Structured design and testing is also an active area of research. 

1 12 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering is authorized to 
admit students to the degree programs of the Master of Science in Electrical 
Engineering (M.S.E.E.) and the Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.). It 
also participates in the College of Engineering interdisciplinary Ph.D. degree 
program. M.S. graduate students must comply with the rules for Master's 
degrees as set forth in the Guidelines for Masters Degree Programs Offered in 
the College of Engineering. Ph.D. students must comply with the rule set forth 
in the brochure, The College of Engineering Doctor of Philosophy in Engi- 
neering. 

Master of Science in Electrical Engineering (M.S.E.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 
Admission Requirements 

1. An applicant must have an excellent record in previous college work. 
To be admitted as a regular graduate student in Electrical and Computer 
Engineering, a cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 (of 4.0), or its equivalent, 
is required. 

2. An applicant who cannot meet condition 1 may be considered for 
admission in one of several conditional categories (See "Classification of 
Graduate Students," Part 4.) 

3. Applicants who are not WVU graduates must submit scores of the 
Aptitude Test of the Graduate Record Examination. 

4. All international applicants whose native language is not English 
must submit Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores. A 
minimum of 550 is required for admission. 

Course Requirements. All M.S. degree candidates will be required to meet 
the following minimum requirements: 

1. E.C.E. 325 and at least one course selected from the following: E.C.E. 
315, 333, 340, 350 or 357, 364, and 370—6 hr. (min.). 

2. Selected courses offered outside the Department of Electrical and 
Computer Engineering to provide analytical techniques supporting the 
student's graduate program. (For example: mathematics, physics, computer 
science, etc.)— 6 hr. (min.). 

Each graduate student will be required to make an oral presentation of 
his/her research program to a graduate seminar near the conclusion of the 
student's research but before scheduling the final examination. 

Entrance Interview. All students beginning graduate study in the 
department will be given an entrance interview. The interview determines if a 
student needs any course work in order to pursue a graduate degree program 
and aids the faculty in advising the student. As a result of the interview, the 
student and the committee will prepare a mutually acceptable preliminary 
plan of study. 

Students with deficiencies in their undergraduate programs may be 
required to take some engineering or other courses as prerequisites for 
graduate courses. These deficiencies are usually noted as a condition for 
admission. However, they may also be specified as a result of the entrance 
interview. 

Qualifying Examination. Each student entering graduate study leading to 
the M.S. or the Ph.D. degree must pass the qualifying examination at the level 
of competence appropriate to the degree sought. Details regarding this exami- 
nation are available from the departmental graduate academic adviser. 

Thesis. Normally, a thesis is required of all M.S. candidates in electrical 
engineering. Approval by the Advisory and Examining Committee is necessary 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 113 



before the thesis will be accepted. The thesis must be presented in a form that 
conforms to general requirements of the University. 

Final Examination. Each candidate for an M.S. degree shall pass a final 
examination administered by the student's Advisory and Examining Com- 
mittee. This examination will be oral and shall cover the defense of the thesis, 
or report, when applicable. 

Students may be admitted to the M.S.E.E. program if they hold a 
baccalaureate degree in electrical engineering or its equivalent. Students who 
lack this requirement may either make up the necessary undergraduate 
course work or may apply for admission to the M.S.E. program with emphasis 
in electrical engineering. 

The M.S.E. program is available to students who are interested in 
graduate work in electrical engineering, but who hold a baccalaureate degree 
from another field of engineering or from another discipline. Students with a 
baccalaureate degree from another field of engineering, or from one of the 
sciences, should contact the department for further information. In general, a 
student in the M.S.E. program will be expected to either complete certain 
undergraduate prerequisite courses or attain equivalent competence but will 
not be required to complete all of the requirements equivalent to the B.S.E.E. 
degree. However, all graduate students will be required to meet the prerequi- 
sites for each course taken for credit. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Students interested in the graduate program in Electrical and Computer 
Engineering and who wish to pursue the Ph.D. degree should contact the 
department for information about the interdisciplinary Ph.D. program in 
engineering. While it is possible for a student with only a B.S. degree to enroll 
directly in the Ph.D. program, it is usually advisable for the student to earn an 
M.S. degree first. The reason for this is the fact that a student's performance in 
an M.S. degree program with thesis provides insight into the student's 
research ability whereas most B.S. degree programs do not. Students in the 
Ph.D. program must comply with the regulations set forth in the College of 
Engineering brochure describing the Doctor of Philosophy in Engineering. 

A Typical Ph.D. Degree Program 

A typical Ph.D. program will take between three and four years beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. The courses chosen for a student's program are 
selected to develop the student's expertise in his/her area of interest and to 
strengthen knowledge of other areas that will support the student's research 
endeavors. A possible outline for a Ph.D. program: 

First Year — M.S. degree 

Second Year — 

(a) An approved plan of study consisting mainly of courses in the 
300 and 400 series. 

(b) A pass in the qualifying examination for a Ph.D. 

(c) Admission to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. 

(1) Passes on written and oral comprehensive examinations. 

(2) Successful defense of research proposal. 

(3) Completion of all program requirements set by the student's 
advisory and examining committee. 

Third Year- 
fa) Completion of research and the dissertation, 
(b) Dissertation defense in the final examination. 

1 14 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



Research work for the doctoral dissertation is expected to represent a 
significant contribution to engineering. It may entail a fundamental investi- 
gation into a specialized area or a broad and comprehensive system analysis 
or design. 

Electrical and Computer Engineering (E.C.E.) 

208. Power Electronics. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 130 and E.C.E. 158, 159 (concurrently) or 
consent. Application of power semiconductor components and devices to power 
systems problems: power control, conditioning processing, and switching. Course 
supplemented by laboratory problems. 3 hr. rec. 

216. Fundamentals of Control Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 124, 127. Introduction to 
classical and modern control; signal flow graphs; state-variable characterization; 
time-domain, root locus, and frequency techniques; stability criteria. 3 hr. rec. 

230. Electrical Power Distribution Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 136 or consent. 
General considerations; load characteristics; subtransmission and distribution 
substations; primary and secondary distribution; secondary network systems; 
distribution transformers; voltage regulation and application of capacitors; 
voltage fluctuations; protective device coordination. 3 hr. rec. 

231. Power Systems Analysis. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 136 or consent. Incidence and 
network matrices, Y-Bus, symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults, load-flow and 
economic dispatch, MW-frequency and MVAR-voltage control. The power system 
simulator will be used for demonstrations. 3 hr. rec. 

244. Introduction to Antennas and Radiating Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 141 or consent. 
Fundamentals, parameters, radiation integrals, linear antennas, far-field approx- 
imations, loop antennas, arrays and continuous distributions, broadband dipoles 
and matching techniques, broadband antennas, frequency independent antennas, 
and aperture antennas. 3 hr. rec. 

245. Microwave Circuits and Devices. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 141. UHF transmission line 
theory, impedance matching techniques and charts, general circuit theory of one 
port and multiports for waveguiding systems, impedance and scattering matrices, 
wave-guide circuit elements, microwave energy sources. Course will be supple- 
mented by laboratory problems. 3 hr. rec. 

246. Radar and RFSystems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 141, 156, 157, 158, 159. An 
introduction to radar system fundamentals and techniques, including a discussion 
of modulation and detection theory, RF amplifiers, mixers, antennas, and propa- 
gation effects. Application of probability and statistics to signal processing and 
detection in noise. 3 hr. rec. 

248. Fiber Optic Communications. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 141, 151. Fundamentals of optics 
and light wave propagation, guided wave propagation and optical wave guides, 
light sources and light detectors, couplers, connections, and fiber networks, 
modulation, noise, and detection in communication systems. 3 hr. rec. 

251. Noise and Grounding of Electronic Systems. 1 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159 or consent. 
Analysis of extrinsic and intrinsic noise in electronic circuits. Design techniques 
to reduce or eliminate noise. 1 hr. rec. 

252. Operational Amplifier Applications. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159. Linear integrated 
circuit building blocks applied to such functions as amplification, controlled 
frequency response, analog-digital conversion, sampling, and waveform genera- 
tion. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

257. Transistor Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159 or equiv. Analysis and design of 
subcircuits used in analog integrated circuit modules. Transistor models, low- 
frequency response of multistage amplifiers, current sources, output stages and 
active loads. 3 hr. rec. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 115 



259. Solid State RF Engineering. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 141, 156, 158 or corequisite. 
Analysis and design of electronic circuitry for RF telecommunications systems. 
Treatment of electrical noise, RF amplifiers, oscillators and mixers. Applications 
of AM/FM/TV. Receiver and transmitter technology for HF/VHF/UHF and 
satellite communication. 3 hr. rec. 

264. Introduction to Communication Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126. Introduction to the 
first principles of communication system design. Analysis and comparison of 
standard analog and pulse modulation techniques relative to band-width, noise, 
threshold, and hardware constraints. Communication systems are treated as 
opposed to individual circuits and components of the system. 3 hr. rec. 

268. Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 127, 156, 157. 
Theories, techniques, and procedure used in analysis, design, and implementation 
of digital and sampled data filters. Algorithms and computer programming for 
software realization. Digital and sampled data realizations, switched capacitor 
and charge-coupled device IC's. 3 hr. rec. 

270. Digital Systems Design. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71. Hierarchical design methods, from the 
machine architecture, through data flow concepts and control flow concepts, to 
implementation. Topics include: design methodology, design techniques, machine 
organization, control unit implementation and interface design. 3 hr. rec. 

272. Introduction to Computer Architecture. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71. Basic digital systems 
and computer architecture. Definition of information storage concepts, central 
processor designs, and input/output concepts. Content addressable memories, 
microprogrammed control, addressing techniques, interrupts, and cycle stealing. 3 
hr. rec. 

273. Computer Interfacing Techniques. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 274. Analysis and design of 
computer systems with emphasis on interfacing and data communications. Bus 
and memory systems, parallel serial and analog interfaces, the man-machine 
interface. 3 hr. rec. 

274. Introduction to Microprocessor-Based Design. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 156, 157, 272 or 
consent. Coreq.: E.C.E. 276. Microprocessor terminology and system design. A 
systems approach is taken to individual student designs of microprocessor 
systems. A "hands-on" electronic development approach is taken using state-of- 
the-art computer technology. 3 hr. rec. 

275. Microprocessor Interfacing Techniques. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 274. Interfacing com- 
ponents and methods are analyzed in terms of their applications and electronics 
requirements. Includes driver/receiver circuits, high power interace devices, A/D- 
D/A interfacing, timing margins, series/parallel communications, interrupt- 
driven and direct memory access. (A working microprocessor is required.) 3 hr. 
rec. 

276. Microprocessor Laboratory. 1 hr. Coreq.: E.C.E. 274. Laboratory to accompany 
E.C.E. 274. A microprocessor-based single board computer (SBC) is designed and 
built using wire wrap techniques. Once operational, the SBC is programmed in 
assembly language. A semester project is required. 2 hr. lab. 

280. Electrical Problems 1. 1-3 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing. 

281. Biomedical Electrical Measurements. 2 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158 and 159 or consent. 
Biomedical instrumentation for human subjects. Origin and characteristics of 
biological and electrical signals. Instrument design requirements and detailed 
analysis of cardiac support and intensive-care monitoring equipment. 2 hr. rec. 

312. Stochastic Systems Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Probability distribution and 
density functions. Bayes rule and conditional probability. Stochastic processes 
and linear systems. Gauss-Markov Processes. Optimal linear estimation. Intro- 
duction to Wiener and Kalman filtering. Decision theory fundamentals. 3 hr. rec. 

116 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



314. Stochastic Systems Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Probability distribution and 
density functions. Bayes rule and conditional probability. Stochastic process and 
linear systems. Gauss-Markov Process. Optimal linear estimation. Introduction to 
Wiener and Kalman filtering. Decision theory fundamentals. 3 hr. rec. 

315. State Variable Analysis of Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Matrix theory and linear 
transformations as applied to linear control systems. The state-space on time- 
domain study of stability, controllability, observability, etc. 3 hr. rec. 

316. Optimal Control. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 312, 364. Methods of direct synthesis and 
optimization of feedback systems; Wiener theory; Pontryagin's maximum principle; 
dynamic programming; adaptive feedback systems. 3 hr. rec. 

317. Introduction to Digital Control. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 216 or equiv. or consent. Sampling 
of continuous-time signals; transform analysis; analysis of discrete-time systems. 
Translation of analog design. Controllability and observability; State-space 
design methods; and introduction to optimal control for discrete systems. 3 hr. rec. 

325. Advanced Linear Circuit Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Systematic formulation of 
circuit equations. Use of operational techniques to find total solutions. Applications 
and characteristics of the Laplace and Fourier transforms, matrix algebra, 
complex variable theory and state variables are made to circuit analysis and 
elementary ciruit synthesis. 3 hr. rec. 

330. Advanced Electrical Machinery. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 136 or consent. Theory and 
modeling of synchronous, induction, and direct-current machines, and their 
steady-state and transient analysis. 3 hr. rec. 

331. Electrical Power Systems 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 or consent. Electrical transients on 
power systems including traveling waves due to lightning and switching. 
Principles of lightning protection. 3 hr. rec. 

333. Application of Digital Computers to Power System Analysis 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 
or consent. Incidence and network matrices; algorithms for their formulation; 
three-phase networks; short-circuit calculations; load-flow studies. 3 hr. rec. 

334. Power System Control and Stability. II. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 315. Review of 
stability theory, classical transient analysis, dynamical models of synchronous 
machines, power system stability under small and large perturbations, dynamic 
simulation of power systems. 3 hr. rec. 

340. Electromagnetic Fields and Guided Waves 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 141 or equiv. Plane 
waves in dielectrics, conducting, and anistropic media; polarization, radiation; 
duality; image theory; equivalence principle; Green's functions; integral equations; 
plane wave functions. 3 hr. rec. 

344. Advanced Antenna Theory. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 244 or equiv. Aperture antennas; 
geometrical theory of diffraction; horns; reflectors and lens antennas; antenna 
synthesis and continuous sources; moment method; Fourier transform methods; 
antenna measurements. 3 hr. rec. 

350. Electronic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158 and 159, or equiv. Analysis and design of 
electronic circuits; low-pass amplifiers, feedback, frequency response and stability 
of feedback amplifiers, nonlinear analog circuits. 3 hr. rec. 

357. Linear Integrated Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159 or equiv. (Primarily for 
students specializing in communication and electronics.) Techniques of integrated 
circuit design and fabrication. Development of models descriptive of linear and 
nonlinear transistor operation. Design and analysis of high-frequency turned, 
direct-current, and differential amplifiers. 3 hr. rec. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 117 



358. Integrated Logic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 156, 157 or equiv. or consent. (Intended 
for students specializing in digital circuits.) Techniques of integrated circuit 
design and fabrication. Development of transistor model for nonlinear operation. 
Design, analysis, and comparison of emitter-coupled direct-coupled, diode- 
transistor, and transistor-transistor integrated logic circuits. 3 hr. rec. 

364. Communication Theory. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 264 or consent. Detailed study of 
probability theory and its use in describing random variables and stochastic 
processes. Emphasis on applications to problems in communication system 
design. 3 hr. rec. 

366. Information Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 364. Probability concepts; theory of discrete 
systems; encoding; theory of continuous systems; systems with memory; the 
fundamental theorem of information theory. 3 hr. rec. 

370. Switching Circuit Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71 or equiv. Course presumes an 
understanding of the elements of Boolean or switching algebra. Study of both 
combinational and sequential switching circuits with emphasis on sequential 
networks. Advanced manual design and computer-aided design techniques for 
single and multiple output combinational circuits. Analysis and design of 
sequential circuits. Detection and prevention of undesired transient outputs. 3 hr. 
rec. 

372. Advanced Computer Architecture. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71 and 272 or consent. Formal 
tools for designing large digital systems are introduced; formal descriptive 
algebras such as ISP, PMS, AHPL, CDL, and others. An in-depth study of 
computer system designs including instruction design and data path design. 3 hr. 
rec. 

373. Design of Computer Arithmetic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71 or equiv. Study of logic 
networks usable in performing binary arithmetic. Emphasis is on design of high- 
speed, parallel arithmetic units using binary numbers. Consideration of systems 
for representation of negative numbers. Available arithmetic subsystems are 
studied. 3 hr. rec. 

380. Electrical Problems 2. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing. 

390. Advanced Independent Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Individual investigation in 
advanced electrical engineering subjects not covered in formal courses. 

411. Nonlinear Control System Analysis. PR: Consent. Application of Liapunov's and 
Popov's methods to nonlinear control systems, together with classical techniques. 
3 hr. rec. 

413. Sample-Data Control Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 312 or consent. A study of control 
systems in which the activating signal is represented by samples at regular time 
intervals. 3 hr. rec. 

416. Stochastic Estimation and Control. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 316 or consent. Techniques of 
optimal estimation and control for linear systems. Balanced emphasis is placed on 
both continuous and discrete time systems. Some advance topics of interest will be 
considered. 3 hr. rec. 

430. Real-Time Control of Electrical Power Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 or consent. 
Application of computers to modern control theory for reliable and economic 
real-time operation of integrated power systems. 3 hr. rec. 

432. Protection of Power Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 or consent. Principles of relay 
protection for faults on transmission lines and other devices. Use of overcurrent, 
differential distance, and pilot relaying systems. Special relay applications. 
Determination of short-circuit currents and voltages from system studies. 3 hr. 



118 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



440. Electromagnetic Fields and Guided Waves 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 340 or equiv. General 
theory of waveguides, cavity resonators, modes, losses, discontinuities, power 
considerations, scattering, perturbational and variational techniques. 3 hr. rec. 

466. Informational Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 366. Continuation of E.C.E. 366. 3 hr. rec. 

471. Switching Circuit Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 370, Math. 236, or equiv. Switching 
circuit theory is used to model the operations of networks of logic gates and 
flip-flops. Networks of this type are one form of discrete parameter systems. 
Studies the use of linear sequential machine as a means of modeling the general 
class of discrete parameter information systems. Systems approach and the 
techniques of abstract algebra used throughout. 3 hr. rec. 

472. Digital Systems Design 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 372 or consent. Students will design a 
specific digital system, i.e., CPU control, interrupt structure, memory, or input/ 
output system. They will design and test a project oriented toward one specific 
objective. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which 
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Technical presentations by faculty members, 
outside speakers, and graduate students. Each student will give an oral presentation 
describing the student's research before the student's final examination. This will 
typically be a 40-minute presentation before the faculty and graduate students. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 

Cynthia Sunal, Chairperson of Graduate Programs 

604 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.A. in Elementary Education 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bontempo, Bower, Deay, DeCosta, Haas, Helfeldt, Holtan, 

Iannone, Moxley, Obenauf, Phillips, Reed, Saltz, P. Smith, C. S. Sunal, D. W. Sunal, 

and Thomas. Associate Members Carline and Hobbs. 

The Division of Education provides opportunities forgraduate study and 
research leading to the degree of Master of Arts (M.A.) for educators and other 
professionals with educational responsibilities. The primary purpose of the 
masters program in elementary (early/middle) education is to provide 
increased knowledge, skill, and competence for teachers working with 
children in the elementary (early/middle) school setting. The graduate 
elementary (early/middle) teacher education program has three major areas 
of emphasis: general education, subject area curriculum and methods, and 
electives. 

These emphases are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser, 
and the student's committee to meet the career needs of the student. In 
addition to the general requirements of the University and the College of 
Human Resources and Education, there is a core of courses or course areas and 
supporting competencies required of all graduate students in the department. 

The purpose of the program is to prepare master teachers who work with 
children from nursery through elementary school. The program provides the 
opportunity to specialize in early childhood, middle childhood, or a subject 
area. With adviser approval, electives may be selected that enhance the 
student's personal goals. While teacher certification is not a part of the 
master's program, students, through careful planning, may be able to 
complete some courses that are required for certification while working on a 
graduate degree. 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 119 



For further information on admission and program requirements, write 
Chairperson of Graduate Programs, Division of Education, College of Human 
Resources and Education, 604 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 
26506-6122. 

Master of Arts in Elementary Education 

All applicants must comply with the general requirements of the 
University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the Division 
of Education. 

Hours 

I. Required Courses Program ABC 

C&I 301 3 3 3 

C&I330 3 3 3 

C&I 340 3 3 3 

C&I 350 3 3 3 

C&I 388 3 

C&I 391 3 

C&I 497 6 

Ed. F. 320 or 340 3 3 3 

Ed. P. 320 3 3 

Ed. P. 300 or 330 3 3 3 

Rdng. 321, or 323, or 327, or 330 _3_ 3_ 3_ 

Total Required Courses 30 27 24 

General Education Electives 3 12 

(All elective courses must be approved by the 
adviser before enrollment.) 

Total for Master's Degree 30 30 36 

Program A — Thesis required. 

Program B— Research problem required. 

Program C— 36-semester hour course work program. 

Master of Arts 

Emphasis: Early Childhood Education 

Hours 

I. Required Courses Program ABC 

C&I 312 3 3 3 

C&I 314 3 3 3 

C&I 316 3 3 3 

C&I 391 3 

C&I 497 6 

C&I 317 or Rdng. 323 3 3 3 

CDFS 341 3 3 3 

Ed. P. 320 3 3 

Ed. P. 330 _3_ _3_ J_ 

Total Required Courses 27 24 18 

II. Approved Electives 

Restricted Electives in Early Childhood Education 3 3 3 

Supportive Electives in Education 15 

(All elective courses must be approved by the 

adviser before enrollment.) 

Total for Master's Degree 30 30 36 

Program A — Thesis required. 

Program B— Research problem required. 

Program C — 36-semester hour course work program. 



120 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 



Curriculum and Instruction (C&i) 

205. The Junior High School. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Developing philosophy, 
program, and practices of the junior high school. 

210. Early Childhood Education 1. 1, II, S. 3 hr. PR: CDFS 216, Ed. P. 103 or 105. (A field 
experience with children 3-5 years of age is required.) Introduction to methods and 
materials in early childhood education for curriculum, instruction and program 
organization, development, and evaluation. The content of this course is applicable 
to field placement in a preschool, nursery school, day care, and/or child develop- 
ment center. 

211. Early Childhood Education 2. 1, II, S. 3 hr. PR: CDFS 216, Ed. P. 103 or 105. (A field 
of experience with children 3-5 years of age is required.} This course is designed 
for individuals who will be working within early childhood programs for children 
under 8 years of age. The various aspects of early childhood education are studied 
in relationship to organizational and administrative structures. This includes 
planning, budgeting, staffing, supervising, and evaluating comprehensive learning 
facilities for young children. 

212. Methods in Preschool Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or equiv. Development 
of an experiential model of teaching young children. Application of methods in 
basic needs areas of nursery-early childhood education consistent with an 
experiential model of teaching. Emphasis on safety, multicultural education, 
classroom management, working with special needs populations and main- 
streaming, and cooking and nutrition. 

214. Creative Experiences in Early Childhood. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or equiv. 
Examination of creative experiences for young children and their relationship to 
child development. A special focus on play behavior as a learning medium with 
emphasis on program planning, curriculum development, and instructional 
strategies. 

216. Early Language and Communication Experiences. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or 
equiv. This course presents activities for developing language and communication 
skills in children 2-5 years of age. It covers a broad range of temporary and 
enduring forms of communication in visible and audible media. 

218. Management of Preschool Education. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 
7 or equiv. (A field experience with children 2-5 years of age is required.) Planning, 
designing, and assessing programs for children ages 2-5 years with emphasis on 
management skills. 

224. Approaches to Teaching Language. II. 2 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 and Engl. 111. Designed for 
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Focus is upon planning and 
implementing methods of teaching English as a language. Materials and resources 
appropriate to public school instruction are analyzed and utilized. 

225. Approaches to Teaching Literature. II. 2 hr. PR: Junior standing. Designed for 
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Course focuses upon method- 
ologies for teaching literature in public schools. Workshop format will provide 
opportunities for peer teaching activities as students apply methods of teaching 
literature. 



The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia 
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification 
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not he in 
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon 
arrival on campus. 



ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 121 



267. The Music Education Program. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Organization and adminis- 
tration of the complete music education program for grades 1-12. 

280. Special Problems and Workshops. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. (Maximum of 8 semester hours 
may be applied toward the master's degree.] PR: 14 hr. in education. Credits for 
special workshops and short intensive unit courses on methods, supervision, and 
other special topics. 

287. Advanced Clinical Experience. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Clinical experience in 
teaching-learning situations at any level. 

301. The Elementary-School Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate credit 
in elementary education, or consent. Analysis of curriculum designs in elementary 
education with emphasis on methods and techniques of development. 

306. Curriculum for Middle Childhood. I, S. 3 hr. Survey course which includes: 
historical, social, and cultural influences on the curriculum; the learner character- 
istics; curriculum and instructional organization and their relationship to facilities 
available; evaluation and implementation of middle childhood curriculum. 

307. Curriculum Development. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 or C&I 312 and Ed. F. 320 
or consent. Basic foundation in the concepts underlying the school curriculum in 
American society. 

308. Introduction to Alternative Learning Environments. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. 
This course will provide opportunities for educators to explore and analyze the 
trends and issues in alternative learning environments in public education. 

309. Experiences in Alternative Learning Environments. S. (Alternate Years.) 6 hr. PR: 
C&I 308, Ed. F. 320, consent. This course helps teachers to learn and practice skills 
that are needed to be an effective teacher in an alternative teaching environment. 

312. Early Childhood Curriculum. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211, or consent. Historical, 
theoretical perspectives in curriculum development for early childhood education 
including social, creative, cognitive, and physical goals. 

314. Early Childhood Instruction. II. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211, or consent. Design of 
instruction for individualization and development of mastery in curriculum goals 
for early childhood. 

316. Eariy Childhood Program Development and Evaluation. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211 or 
consent. Development and evaluation of facilities, programs, and support systems 
for early childhood education. 

317. Language Skills in Early Childhood. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An examination of 
language skills and the sequence in which they are learned in early childhood with 
special attention to the environment of instructional influences which could 
contribute to their acquisition. [Offered in alternate summers.) 

318. Storytelling in Early Childhood. I, II. 3 hr. This course will assist students in 
telling, reading, and creating stories for children. Techniques, methods, and 
research effective in the art of storytelling will be examined and applied as they 
relate to total child development. 

319. Behavior Modification: Early Childhood Education. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Appli- 
cation of behavior modification to early childhood education with special 
attention to an examination of the methods and values involved. [Offered in 
alternate summers.) 

330. Mathematics in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate 
credit in elementary education or consent. Materials and methods of instruction 
for modern mathematics programs. 

122 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 



333. Corrective Techniques in Mathematics Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Materials and methods used in diagnosis and remediation of learning difficulties 
in mathematics. 

337. Mathematics in the Junior High School and Middle School. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. college 
mathematics or consent. Study of teaching of mathematics in the junior high 
school and/or middle school; application of mathematics content to teaching; 
instructional techniques and materials. 

340. Science in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate credit in 
elementary education, or consent. Analysis of methods, curriculum patterns, and 
trends in elementary school science. Understanding and development of scientific 
attitudes appropriate at the elementary-school level. 

350. Social Studies in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate 
credit in elementary education, or consent. Comprehensive consideration of 
objectives, content, methods, including unit procedures; materials including 
objects, models, exhibits, and museum items, as well as textbooks, collateral 
reading, maps, and graphs; means of evaluating social growth and development. 

357. Principles of Economic Education. S. 3 hr. Workshop for principals, teachers, and 
supervisors with emphasis on the economic structure of our society and methods 
of integrating economics into the school program. (Sponsored jointly by College of 
Human Resources and Education and College of Business and Economics.] 

359. Classroom Simulation Techniques. II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. To provide 
experience in the use of learning games and simulations as an instructional 
technique and the opportunity to develop — under supervision — simulated activities 
and games to be used in a variety of learning environments. 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Department consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in 
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in 
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) (Graded as S/U.) 

377. Children's Television: Problems and Potentials. S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Provides 
parents and teachers with strategies for monitoring, evaluating, and directing 
television viewing habits of youth; pertinent research studies, school and 
community action programs, and home and school education programs are 
discussed and practiced. 

380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

385. Supervision of Student Teachers. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. For persons working or 
intending to work with education students in field experiences. Course focuses on 
the development and application of supervisory skills involved in effective 
guidance of student teachers and education students. 

386. Teaching Strategies for Middle Childhood. II, S. 3 hr. Surveys instructional 
strategies appropriate for facilitating preadolescent learning. Includes the role of 
the teacher; how the teacher uses resources within and outside the classroom as 
they relate to instruction of the learner, age 10-14 years. 

387. Advanced Teaching Strategies. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Deals with 
methods as one critical variable in teaching. Examines ways and means to 
describe, plan the use of, implement, and evaluate teaching methods. Analysis and 
implementation of teaching methods and component skills of teaching. 

388. Classroom Organization and Management. I, S. 3 hr. Discusses research identifying 
components of classroom organization and environment which influence learning; 
reviews teacher behaviors and learning activities which research indicates lead to 
more effective teaching. Stresses implementation strategies relevant to classroom 
settings. 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 123 



389. Education That Is Multicultural. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. 
Provides opportunities for educators to increase awareness of their own ethnic 
backgrounds, foster understanding of racial/ethnic diversity, and develop appro- 
priate teaching materials and methods for elementary and secondary curricula. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. per sem. or session— aggregating not more than 12 hr. 
PR: 9 graduate hr. in Education. (Enrollment with permission of adviser or 
instructor in consultation.) Special individual and group projects. To provide 
appropriate residence credits for special workshops, prolonged systematic con- 
ference, or problems and projects in education. 

407. Instructional Models of Teaching. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 320 or consent. Concepts and 
processes involved in teaching and their relationship to the development of 
teacher education programs. 

408. Contemporary Determinants of Curriculum. II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 307 and Ed. F. 340 
or consent. Contemporary determinants of curriculum development. 

409. Curriculum Theories. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 408 or consent. Theories underlying 
curriculum from the past to the present and projected to the future. 

438. Survey of Major Issues in Mathematics Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Individual and group research on selected topics in mathematics education. 

457. Social Studies Curriculum Development, K-12. 1. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 and C&I 
350 or 354. Stresses the application of principles and procedures pertinent to the 
development of social studies programs in elementary and secondary schools. 
Strong emphasis will be placed on the analysis of current social studies 
curriculum materials. 

488. Higher Education Curriculum. II. 3 hr. Analysis and evaluation of post-secondary 
curriculum with emphasis on organizing, translating, and applying findings. 
Topics include curriculum shaping forces; institutional patterns; policy, compo- 
nents and change; and principles and techniques of development, experimentation, 
and evaluation. 

489. Teaching in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. A general methods 
course involving instructional concepts and strategies for present/prospective 
faculty in higher education. Comprehensive consideration of objectives, planning 
criteria and methods, teaching strategies, and evaluation in meeting the needs of 
adult learners. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students 
with college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience in a 
teaching situation. (Graded as S/U.) 

491. Advanced Study Project in Education. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. Research for the program 
leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Education (C.A.S.). 

496. Advanced Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Opportunity for the advanced graduate 
student to present the student's research to faculty and/or student groups. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Colloquium in Curriculum and Instruction. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For 
graduate students not seeking course work credit, but who wish to participate in 
academic programs. 



124 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 



ENDODONTICS 

Arthur E. Skidmore, Chairperson of the Department 

1067 Basic Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Alberico, Balaban, Biddington, Griffin, and Skidmore. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The School of Dentistry and its Department of Endodontics offer a 
program of advanced study and clinical training leading to the degree of 
Master of Science (M.S.). The program requires a minimum of 24 months (two 
academic years and two summer sessions) of full-time residency in the School 
of Dentistry and is designed to qualify dentists for careers in endodontic 
clinical practice, teaching, and research. 

Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the 
Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs. Applicants will be processed in 
the School of Dentistry. Applicants approved for admission to the program 
will be notified soon after January 15. 

Requirements for Admission to the Endodontic Program 

1. Graduation from an accredited school of dentistry. 

2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement that would indicate 
the applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature. 

3. Each applicant must file with the Department of Endodontics all 
information requested in the departmental application form. 

Requirements for Master of Science Degree 

1. Fulfillment of general requirements of the University. 

2. Twenty-four months (two academic years and two summer sessions) 
of consecutive residency at the WVU School of Dentistry. 

3. An approved master's thesis based on original research completed 
during the period of residency in an area related to endodontics. 

4. Must satisfactorily pass a final oral examination. 

5. Must complete a minimum of 57 credit hours. These include 32 hours of 
endodontic courses, a minimum of 18 hours of selected basic sciences 
subjects, and a thesis (7 hours). 

6. Must have demonstrated satisfactory clinical competency in the 
student's field. 

7. Must have maintained a grade level commensurate with graduate 
education. 

Dentistry (Dent.) 

400. Advanced Oral Surgery. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of 
therapeutics, hospital protocol, and surgical aspects of oral surgery involving 
lectures, seminars, demonstrations, and clinical applications. 

Endodontics (Dent.) 

390. Clinical Endodontics. I, II, S. 1-5 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Graduate of 
an accredited dental school and admission to the Advanced Education Program in 
Endodontics or consent. Clinical endodontic practice in the areas of: ordinary 
endodontic cases, complex endodontic cases, hemisection, root amputation, 
replantation, transplantation, endodontic implantation, vital pulp therapy, apexifi- 
cation, and bleaching. 

ENDODONTICS 125 



391. Endodontic Theory. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Provides seminar discussions in the 
topics of: basic endodontic techniques, advanced endodontic techniques, endo- 
dontic literature review, case presentation, and advanced endodontic theory. 

490. Endodontic Teaching. S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Selected teaching experiences 
including lecture, clinical, and laboratory teaching of undergraduate endodontic 
courses. 

497. Endodontic Research. I, II, S. 2-3 hr. PR: Consent. Students will prepare a research 
protocol.conduct experimental research, and prepare a thesis of original endodontic 
research. 

Microbiology (M. Bio.) 

317. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. 1-7 hr. per sem. with a total of 24 hr. 
available. Pathogenic microorganisms, including immunology and antimicrobial 
agents. 

Pathology (Path.) 

382. Oral Histopathology. I, II. 1-2 hr. PR: Path. 338, 353, consent. Microscopic study of 
head and neck lesions. 

401. Special Studies in Oral Pathology. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced seminar or 
independent study of local and/or systemic disease processes affecting oral and 
facial structures. 

Pharmacology and Toxicology (Pcol.) 

360. Pharmacology. I. 4 hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent. Lecture and 
demonstrations on pharmacologic actions and therapeutic uses of drugs. 

Statistics (Stat.) 

311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Statistical models, distributions, 
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regression, 
correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of variance 
and multiple comparisons. (Also listed as Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311.) 

ENGLISH 

Rudolph P. Almasy, Interim Chairperson of the Department 

Frank Scafella, Ph.D. Supervisor 

Elizabeth Madison, M.A. Supervisor 

Stansbury Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Allen, Blaydes, Conner, Davis, Elfenbein, Foster, 
French, Gandolfo, Gaskins, Ginsberg, Johnston, Nelson, Scafella, Stasny, Stitzel, 
Torsney, B. Ward, and H. Ward. Associate Members Almasy, Buck, Daniell, Eaton, 
Fuller, High, MacDonald, Madison, Miles, Peterson, and Racin. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

Admission. To be admitted to the Department of English as prospective 
candidates for the degree of Master of Arts (M.A.), students are expected to 
have completed work comparable to the department's undergraduate re- 
quirement for English majors (but with records distinctly above the average), 
and to present as part of their applications their scores on the Graduate 
Record Examination General Aptitude Test, and, if non-native speakers of 
English, their TOEFL scores. Past experience has shown that successful 
graduate students usually score at least at the 60th percentile in the verbal 
section of the GRE. 

126 ENGLISH 



The applicant may be admitted as a regulargraduate student— one who is 
approved for a degree program; as a provisional graduate student— one who is 
accepted for study but at the time of acceptance does not meet all the 
requirements for regular admission; or as a non-degree graduate student. (The 
GRE and TOEFL scores are not required of non-degree graduate students.) 

Course Requirements. A candidate for the M.A. degree is expected to 
complete courses covering the major periods and the works of the major 
authors of English and American literature. The minimum requirement is 30 
hours of graduate work in English, 24 hours of which must be on the 300-400 
course levels. English 492, Introduction to Literary Research, is required of all 
master's degree candidates, and must be taken in the first year of graduate 
study. Two 400-level seminars are also required. (Neither English 490, 
required of all teaching assistants, nor English 492 may be substituted for the 
seminar requirements.) No more than 6 hours of course work outside the 
Department of English may apply towards the 30-hour requirement. Any 
hours outside the Department of English to be applied to the requirement must 
be relevant to the student's program and approved by the graduate supervisor 
before registration. 

Thesis Option. A candidate for the M.A. degree has the option of taking 30 
hours of course credit, with the above requirements, or of taking 24 hours of 
course work and writing a thesis, for 6 hours credit, under the supervision of a 
thesis adviser. Information about the procedure for filing application for 
approval of projects, and about dates for the submission of theses, is available 
at the department office. The thesis may be a work of scholarship, of criticism, 
or of creative writing (original poetry, drama, or fiction). A candidate may 
register for up to 12 hours of thesis credit, but only 6 hours may be included in 
the 30 hours required for the degree. Thesis hours will be graded as S 
(Satisfactory) or U (Unsatisfactory) progress. 

Examinations. A student electing to write a thesis is expected to make an 
oral defense of the finished work before his/her thesis committee. All 
students, whether they elect the thesis option or the 30-hours' course work 
option, are required to take two 3-hour comprehensive written examinations 
in English and American literature. Each student taking these examinations 
will have the option, elected and approved in advance of the examination date, 
of having part of the comprehensive examination restructured to provide that 
student the opportunity of being examined in a specialized area of expertise in 
literary, linguistic, or writing studies. The only question for which such a 
substitution may not be made is the analysis of a short poem: answering this 
question is required of all students taking the examinations. 

The student will normally take these examinations in the semester or 
session following that in which the student has established acceptable credit 
in 24 hours of graduate course work with a minimal average of 3.0. The 
examinations will be conducted not later than four weeks before the last day 
of classes of a semester, or three weeks before the end of a summer session. 
With the permission of the examining committee, an unsuccessful candidate 
may be reexamined. Success in the examinations admits the student to 
candidacy for a graduate degree. 

Foreign Language Requirement. A candidate for the degree of Master of 
Arts in English must demonstrate proficiency in one foreign language by 
passing the Graduate Reading Examination in that language. 



ENGLISH 127 



Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Admission. An applicant for admission to the program will be judged on 
the bases of academic record, three recommendations from former teachers, a 
personal, written statement outlining the applicant's academic and profes- 
sional goals, and the Graduate Record Examination Advanced Test scores. If 
a non-native speaker of English, the applicant must also present the TOEFL 
scores 

Provisional admission to the program may be granted to students whose 
credentials, while not exhibiting the high standards of prior academic 
achievement the department expects of doctoral candidates, promise excel- 
lence in the graduate study of English literature. Students admitted provi- 
sionally are expected to show high academic achievement during their first 
semester of doctoral study. All decisions on admission and status shall be 
made by the Graduate Admissions Committee. 

Course Requirements: The doctoral program will normally require three 
years of full-time study beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. Thirty 
hours of credits in courses of the 300 and 400 series are normally required; 
however, exceptionally well-prepared students may be granted permission to 
take fewer than 30 hours of course work, upon recommendation of the 
Graduate Admissions Committee, in consultation with the Ph.D. Supervisor 
and the Graduate Program Committee. Of the normally required 30 hours, 9 
must be taken in 400-level seminars. All doctoral candidates, unless they have 
previously had what the department recognizes as an equivalent course, must 
take English 492 (Introduction to Literary Research). Neither English 490 
(required of all teaching assistants) nor English 492 may be substituted for 
the seminar requirements. English 488, Current Directions in Literary Study, 
is also required of every doctoral student in the program. 

No credit will be given for courses in which the grade is C or less. A 
student who makes C or less in more than three courses will be dropped from 
the program. 

The writing of the doctoral dissertation will carry a value of 12 additional 
hours. 

Preliminary Qualifying Examinations. A doctoral student who did not 
receive the M.A. in English from WVU may be asked to take and pass the 
department's M.A. Comprehensive Examination. This must be done no later 
than the end of the student's first year of study. 

Examination for Formal Admission to Candidacy. When the student has 
completed the course work and has fulfilled the foreign language requirement, 
an examination committee will be appointed. The student and the examination 
committee will draw up a list of books on which the examination for formal 
admission to candidacy will be based. The reading list must be approved by 
the Graduate Program Committee at least one semester before the examination 
is administered. The examination will be both written and oral. 

Ph.D. candidates will be questioned in three areas of special expertise: (1) 
the proposed dissertation project and immediately related critical readings; 
(2) the larger literary-historical period (e.g. the areas identified in the M.A. 
Comprehensive Examination) in which the project fits or out of which it 
grows; and (3) a major period or area — historical, theoretical, or generic — that 
may be related to the first two fields of questioning but should not overlap. 

The oral examination, approximately two hours in length, is meant to 
permit the examination committee to pursue issues raised by the written 
examination, and to permit the student to clarify, expand on, or to raise 
questions about the texts and issues on which the examination was based. 

128 ENGLISH 



Teaching Requirement. While in the program, the doctoral student must 
teach successfully in the department for two semesters, one semester devoted 
to composition, the other to literature. Concurrent with the teaching practicum, 
the student must take one 400-level course in the teaching of composition and 
one 400-level course in the teaching of literature (neither of which qualifies as 
a 400-level seminar). This requirement will be optional for those candidates 
who possess teaching experience approved by the department. 

Minor Subject. A student may, though need not, choose a minor, not to 
exceed 12 hours in 300- or 400-level courses, in a related subject offered by 
another department. Choice of the minor is subject to the approval of the Ph.D. 
Supervisor. 

Foreign Language Requirement. The student must demonstrate proficiency 
in a foreign language acceptable to the Department of English by passing a 
graduate reading examination in that language. 

Doctoral Dissertation. After completing course work, passing the exami- 
nations for formal candidacy, and fulfilling the language requirement and 
teaching requirements, the student shall submit a prospectus of the disserta- 
tion, as specified by the department, to the adviser. On approval of the 
prospectus by the student's dissertation committee, the student may apply for 
admission to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. 

The topic of the proposed dissertation should be such that a candidate can 
reasonably complete the project in one year of full-time work. It is the 
responsibility of the dissertation committee and adviser to see that the topic is 
sufficiently limited. 

Final Examination. When the dissertation has been accepted and approved 
by the candidate's adviser and the dissertation committee, the candidate will 
be given an oral examination by the committee. The examination will deal 
with the dissertation and the field it represents. 

English (Engl.) 

201. Creative Writing Workshop: Fiction. I, II. 3 hr. Advanced workshop in creative 
writing for students seriously engaged in writing fiction. 

202. Creative Writing Workshop: Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Advanced workshop in creative 
writing for students seriously engaged in writing a major group of poems. 

208. Scientific and Technical Writing. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 1 and 2. Writing for scientific 
and technical professions. Descriptions of equipment and processes; reports and 
proposals; scientific experiments; interoffice communications; articles for trade 
and research journals. 

210. Structure of the English Language. I, II. 3 hr. Historical, comparative, and 
descriptive grammar, together with an introduction to English linguistics. 

211. History of the English Language. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the nature of the language; 
questions of origins, language families, development, relationships of English as 
one of the Indo-European languages. 

220. American Poetry. 1,11.3 hr. Major American poets of the nineteenth and twentieth 
centuries. 

223. Modern American Poetics. I, II. 3 hr. A close study of those poets who have shaped 
the aesthetics of contemporary American poetry. 

232. Literary Criticism. I, II. 3 hr. Literary criticism from Aristotle to modern times. 

235. American Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Representative American dramas and history of 
theatre in America. 

ENGLISH 129 



236. Tragedy. I, II. 3 hr. Masterpieces of tragedy from Greek times to modern, with 
consideration of changing concepts of tragedy and of ethical and ideological values 
reflected in works of major tragic authors. 

240. Folk Literature. I, II. 3 hr. The folk ballad, its origin, history, and literary 
significance, based on Child's collection and on American ballad collections. 

241. Folk Literature of the Southern Appalachian Region. I, II. 3 hr. Traditional 
literature of southern Appalachian region, including songs, prose, tales, languages, 
customs, based on material collected in the region — especially in West Virginia. 

245. Studies in Appalachian Literature. I, II, S. 3 hr. Studies of authors, genres, themes, 
or topics in Appalachian literature. 

250. Shakespeare's Art. I, II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Special studies in Shakespeare's 
tragedies, comedies, and/or history plays, with some attention given to his non- 
dramatic poetry. With emphases varying from year to year, studies may include 
textual, historical, critical, and dramaturgical-theatrical. 

255. Chaucer. I, II. 3 hr. Early poems, Troilus and Criseyde, and The Canterbury Tales. 
In addition to an understanding and appreciation of Chaucer's works, the student 
is expected to acquire an adequate knowledge of Chaucer's language. 

256. Milton. I, II. 3 hr. All of Milton's poems and a few selected prose works. 

261. Sixteenth Century Prose and Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Studies from Caxton to Bacon, from 
Skelton to Shakespeare. 

262. Seventeenth Century Prose and Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Studies from Donne to Dryden. 

263. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. I, II. 3 hr. Literature of the period 1660-1744 
in relation to social, political, and religious movements of the time. 

264. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. I, II. 3 hr. Continuation of Engl. 263, covering 
the latter half of the century. May be taken independently of Engl. 263. 

265. The Romantic Movement. I, II. 3 hr. A survey of the works of the major British 
Romantic writers along with an introduction to works of scholarship in British 
Romanticism. 

266. American Romanticism. I, II. 3 hr. Writings of Ralph Waldo Emerson, Henry David 
Thoreau, and Nathaniel Hawthorne. A study of relations of these men to history of 
their own time; their contributions to American thought and art. 

267. Victorian Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. The major Victorian poets— Tennyson, Browning, 
Arnold, Rossetti, Morris, Swinburne, Fitzgerald— and a few of the later Victorian 
poets. 

268. Modern British Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. British poetry from 1880 to present, including the 
Decadents, Counter-Decadents, Hopkins, Housman, Hardy, the Georgians, the 
Imagists, World War I poets, Yeats, Eliot, the Auden Group, and post-World War II 
poets. 

280. Southern Writers. I, II. 3 hr. Twentieth-century Southern essayists, poets, short- 
story writers, and novelists in relation to ideological background. 

283. Study of Selected Authors. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the works of one or more major 
authors. (May be repeated with a change in course content for a maximum of 9 
credit hours.) 

288. Women Writers in England and America. I, II. 3 hr. Syllabus may vary from year to 
year to include writers in a particular country, historical period, or genre; or 
writing on a particular theme. 

130 ENGLISH 



290. Independent Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. (With departmental consent, may be repeated for a 
maximum of 9 credit hours.) PR: Departmental consent. Individual study of 
literary, linguistic, and writing problems. 

293. Practicum in Teaching Composition. I. 1 hr. PR: Engl. 108, 295. Designed to give 
prospective English and language arts teachers supervised practical experiences 
in individual writing tutorials. 

294. Fiction for Adolescents. II. 3 hr. Designed for prospective teachers of English and 
language arts. Course focuses on recent fiction for adolescents as well as on 
traditional literature appropriate to the needs, interests, and abilities of youth. 
Evaluation criteria emphasized. 

295/ 391. Approaches to Teaching Composition. I. 3 hr. (May not be taken for both 
undergraduate and graduate credit.) Surveys attitudes toward and techniques of 
teaching writing in elementary and secondary schools. Provides frequent oppor- 
tunities for students to write, to analyze their writing, and to experiment in class 
with methods of teaching writing. 

310. Old English 1. I, II. 3 hr. Study of Anglo-Saxon with selected readings from the 
literature of the period. 

311. Old English 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 310. Beowulf and other texts in Old English. 

330. Early English Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the medieval and early Tudor drama to the 
age of Shakespeare. 

331. Elizabethan Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Study of dramas of Shakespeare's contemporaries 
and successors to the closing of the theatres in 1642. Includes Kyd, Marlowe, 
Jonson, Heywood, Chapman, Webster, Beaumont, and Fletcher. 

332. Restoration and Eighteenth Century Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Comedy, tragedy, the heroic 
play, the drama of sensibility and the reaction against it: Etherege, Wycherley, 
Farquhar, Congreve, Vanbrugh, Dryden, Otway, Goldsmith, and Sheridan. 

334. Contemporary Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Recent developments in the drama, with special 
attention to Miller, Williams, Sartre, Anouilh, Osborne, Pinter, Bolt, and the 
Absurdists. (Content altered as new playwrights representing new developments 
come into prominence.] 

335. The English Novel to the Time of Scott. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the English novel from 
the sixteenth century to the time of Scott, showing the development of the 
novelistic art from early narrative beginnings. 

336. The English Novel, 1832-1900. 1, II. 3 hr. Continuation of Engl. 335. Development of 
the English novel from the early nineteenth century to the beginning of the 
twentieth century. 

337. The Modern Novel I, II. 3 hr. Twentieth-century novel, with emphasis on works of 
selected British novelists. 

340. The American Novel to 1915, 1. I, II. 3 hr. History of American novel, based on 
reading of ten to twelve novels, from the beginning to World War I. 

341. The American Novei, 2. 1, II. 3 hr. History of the American novel, based on readings 
of ten to twelve novels from World War I to the present. 

345. Appalachian Literature. I, II, S. 3 hr. Intensive study of selected topics, works, and 
writers of Appalachia. 

350. Shakespeare. I, II. 3 hr. Intensive study of selected plays. Special attention to 
textual problems and to language and poetic imagery, together with the history of 
Shakespearean criticism and scholarship. 

ENGLISH 131 



356. Romantic Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Reading and study of the works of selected poets of the 
British Romantic movement with emphasis on related criticism and scholarship. 

365. Victorian Prose. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the nonfictional writings of the great Victorian 
prose critics: Carlyle, Ruskin, Arnold, Newman, Macaulay, Huxley, and Morris. 

366. English Literature, 1880-1918. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the more important writers and 
literary movements of the late Victorian and the Edwardian periods; emphasis on 
Hardy, Housman, Hopkins, Henley, Pater, Gissing, Moore, Butler, and writers of 
the "Aesthetic Movement." 

369. American Literature to 1830. I, II. 3 hr. The major genres and themes of American 
literature in the colonial and early national periods (1620-1830) with special 
attention to the cultural context of the literature. 

370. American Literature, 1830-1865. I, II. 3 hr. The Romantic period in American 
literature, concentrating on Emerson, Thoreau, Poe, Hawthorne, and Melville. 

371. American Literature, 1865-1915. I, II. 3 hr. The literature of transcendentalism, 
realism, and naturalism in America between the Civil War and World War I, 
concentrating on Whitman, Twain, James, Dickinson, Crane, Adams, and Dreiser. 

372. American Literature, 1915-Present. I, II. 3 hr. American prose and poetry. 

383. Recent Literary Criticism. I, II. 3 hr. Brief survey of theories of major schools of 
modern criticism and an application of these theories to selected literary works. 

391/295. Approaches to Teaching Composition. I. 3 hr. (May not be taken for both 
undergraduate and graduate credit.) Surveys attitudes toward and techniques of 
teaching writing in elementary and secondary schools. Provides frequent oppor- 
tunities for students to write, to analyze their writing, and to experiment in class 
with methods of teaching writing. 

392. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of special topics in 
language, literature, or writing. 

400. Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. 

401. Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. 

440. Seminar in Medieval Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Topics from English literature, 1100-1500. 

446. Seminar in Renaissance Studies, 1550-1660. 1, II. 3 hr. Studies in major authors and 
special topics in the Renaissance. 

456. Seminar in Folklore and Folk Literature. I, II. 3 hr. Research projects in folklore, 
including field work in collecting folklore in the Appalachian region and the 
analysis of the use of folklore in the works of British and American authors. 

460. Seminar in Restoration and Eighteenth Century Studies. I, II. 3 hr. 

470. Seminar in British Romanticism. I, II. 3 hr. Studies in major authors and special 
topics in the field of British Romanticism. 

476. Seminar in Victorian Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Research and discussion in selected topics 
in the literature and history of the period. 

484. Seminar in American Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Seminar in principal authors and 
movements in American literature. 

488. Current Directions in Literary Study. II. 3 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing 
(English 383 recommended). Intensive study of one or more current approaches to 
literature and theories of criticism, with some emphasis on the interrelations of 
literary study with other disciplines. 

132 ENGLISH 



490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3-6 hr. I— Supervised practices in college teaching of 
expository writing. II— Supervised practices in college teaching of literature. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 3 hr. Specific topics approved by the instructor. 

492. Introduction to Literary Research. I, II. 3 hr. Bibliography; materials and tools of 
literary investigations; methods of research in various fields of literary history 
and interpretation; problem of editing. Practical guidance in the writing of theses. 

493. Folger Institute Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (Enrollment is by 
special application only. Contact department chairperson for information.) Seminar 
conducted by distinguished scholars and held at the Folger Institute of Renaissance 
and Eighteenth Century Studies in Washington, D.C. Topics vary. (Aiso listed as 
Hist. 493.) 

494. Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. Specific authors to be approved by instructor. 

496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Research paper to be presented orally to the 
faculty and students of the Department of English. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

498. Doctoral Thesis. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Credit for this course may not be 
applied toward satisfaction of the 30-hour degree requirements at either the 
master's or doctoral level. 

ENTOMOLOGY 

Linda Butler, Chairperson of the Entomology Graduate Program 
G-166 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Butler, and Hogmire. Associate Members Baniecki 
and Weaver. 

Entomology is the study of insects and their arthropod relatives. 
Students entering the M.S. program in entomology are expected to have an 
adequate background in biological and physical sciences. Admission require- 
ments are those listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture and Forestry. 
Additional undergraduate course work may be required to make up deficien- 
cies or to meet the needs of the area of specialization of the student. 

Thesis problems in entomology may be selected in areas of pest manage- 
ment; entomology of crops, forests, or urban environments; apiculture; 
aquatic entomology; medical or veterinary entomology; acarology; araneology; 
or insect physiology, morphology, ecology, behavior, or systematics. The 
entomology curriculum is offered by the entomology faculty in the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry. 

Course work and thesis research in entomology are designed to prepare 
students for professional careers in entomology and closely related areas of 
agricultural, biological, and environmental sciences. Graduates of the ento- 
mology program are employed by state and federal agencies, private industry, 
educational institutions, or become self employed. 

Facilities for graduate research include experiment farms, greenhouses, 
laboratories, specialized equipment, and the WVU Arthropod Collection. 

Entomology students seeking to pursue a Ph.D. program should enroll in 
the Crop Science option of Agronomy. 



ENTOMOLOGY 133 



Entomology (Ento.) 

201. Apiculture. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1 and 2, or consent. Development, physiology, and 
behavior of the honey bee with emphasis on colony management, pollination, 
diseases of bees; properties of honey and beeswax. Laboratory emphasizes study 
of anatomy, equipment organization, and field management. 

204. Principles of Entomology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1 and 2 or equiv. Basic course dealing 
with the anatomy, morphology, physiology, reproduction, systematics, ecology, 
and management of insects. 

210. Insect Pests in the Agroecosystem. I. 3 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or consent. Life cycle, 
damage, and economic impact of pestiferous insects in the agroecosystem. 
Included are insect pests of agricultural and ornamental plants, stored products, 
structures, and livestock. 2 lee, 1 lab. 

212. Pest Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or consent. An in-depth look at current 
problems and solutions in controlling insect pests in an environmentally compatible 
manner. Management techniques include cultural, mechanical, physical, biological, 
regulatory, and chemical practices. 3 lee. 

390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or equiv., or consent. Each of the 
following courses is given every other year: Exopterygota; Endopterygota Part I, 
Part II; Larval Insects; Acarology; Araneology; Pesticides in the Environment; 
Insect Morphology; Insect Physiology; Medical Entomology. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

200. Recognition and Diagnosis of Plant Disorders. 1. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204. 
Creates an ability for the student to use systematic inspection to determine cause 
or causes of a plant disorder. 

201. Principles and Methods of Plant Pest Control. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204. 
Concepts of control and how they are implemented by exclusion, eradication, 
protection, and immunization. 

FAMILY RESOURCES (Home Economics) 

Mary K. Head, Interim Division Director, Program Coordinator 
702 Allen Hall 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Albrink, Franz, Head, Lee, Liddell, Nomani, and Rodriguez. 
Associate Members Guthrie and MacDonald. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Family Resources offers work leading to the degree of Master of Science. 
All candidates for the degree must conform to the general WVU regulations, 
the regulations of the College of Agriculture and Forestry, and the Family 
Resources Program. Applicants must present Graduate Record Examination 
(GRE) scores before they will be accepted as regular graduate students. 

Applications are reviewed by the program graduate admissions commit- 
tee. At that time, the applicant will be notified by the chairperson of the 
graduate admissions committee of acceptance to pursue graduate study 
toward candidacy for the master of science degree, according to the three 
types of admission described in the graduate catalog general policies and 
procedures, with the following exception: A student who does not have an 

134 FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS) 



overall undergraduate grade-point average of 2.75 may be admitted only in 
the special provisional category. Reclassification will be considered upon 
completion of 12 hours of course work in Family Resources with a grade-point 
average of 3.0. Additional information may be obtained by writing the 
Program Coordinator of Family Resources. 

The program is designed to offer opportunity to work in a variety of 
different specializations, as well as the opportunity to take graduate-level 
course work in supporting disciplines. 

The following master of science concentrations are offered: 

1. Home Economics Education— A dual program is offered enabling the 
student to be granted a vocational certificate with the master's degree. An 
applicant must have graduated from an accredited institution. Teaching 
and/or work experience is strongly recommended. 

2. Child Development— The program is structured to give the students a 
basis from which to do research and/or clinical work with children. 

3. Human Nutrition— The program in human nutrition has two emphases: 
experimental nutrition and applied nutrition. Background in nutritional 
biochemistry at the undergraduate level is recommended. 

4. Homemaker Rehabilitation— A program to prepare home economists 
for working with the disabled. A practicum and an internship are included in 
the curriculum. A bachelor's degree in home economics is required of all 
applicants. An internship is included in the curriculum. 

If a student does not have a bachelor's degree in a home economics field or 
has an otherwise inadequate background, undergraduate courses which do 
not apply to the master's degree may be required. 

Students pursuing a master's degree in family resources will have a 
choice of the following two options: 

1. A minimum of 36 semester hours, of which 6 hours will be thesis or 
internship credit. The student's graduate committee will be consulted by the 
student selecting a thesis topic and completing the thesis requirement. 
Approval of the thesis, following an oral examination by the graduate 
committee of the student, will be required before the degree is granted. 

2. A minumum of 36 semester hours, of which 3 hours is a written 
research report to be submitted to the student's graduate committee. 

Certain areas have higher requirements. 

After the student has completed 12 semester hours, graduate committee 
will review the course work for academic performance with reference to 
admission to candidacy for the degree of master of science. 

Additional credit hours may be required (beyond the above minimum 
requirements) by the graduate committee if the committee determines a need 
for further strength in specific areas. 

Approval in writing must be secured in advance from the student's 
committee to elect graduate courses offered at other institutions or off- 
campus, with final approval by the student's committee chairperson. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

The Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) is offered through the Division of 
Education for those interested in advanced graduate work in teaching, 
curriculum, and/or research. 



FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS) 135 



Courses of Instruction in Family Resources 

Due to curricular review, course offerings and sequence may vary from 
semester listed. 

(Where permit is required to register for a course offered by Family 
Resources, it may be given only by the instructor or the Program Coordinator.) 

Child Development and Family Studies (CD&FS) 

211. Middie Childhood-Early Adolescent Development. I. 3 hr. PR: CD&FS 10. Analysis 
and investigation of developmental factors in middle childhood-early adolescence. 
Consideration and diagnosis of physical, emotional, social, familial, moral, and 
intellectual interactions affecting the child, age 6-14. [Offered in Fall of odd years.} 

212. Adolescent Development. I. 3 hr. PR: CD&FS 10. Adolescent in contemporary 
American culture, including normative physical, social, and personality devel- 
opment; relationships within various typical social settings (e.g., family, school, 
community, peer group). (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

215. Parenting Strategies. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing or consent. Focus on 
the interactions between parent and child. Analysis of typical problems which 
occur in parenting. Deals solely with normal daily situations which often occur in 
the home. 

216. Child Development Practicum. I, II. 3-4 hr. Application of child development 
principles. Involves planning developmentally appropriate activities for 3- and 
4-year-old children at the University Child Development Laboratory. 

219. The Growing Years. II. 3 hr. A televised course offered primarily for off-campus 
students to become familiar with development of children during their growing 
years. How to recognize the diversity of approaches in child development research 
and theory. 

341. Cognitive Development of the Child. II. 3 hr. Piaget's basic theory, including his 
view of perceptual, symbolic, motor and logico-mathematical development, across 
the life span. 

345. Socio-Emotional Development of the Child. I. 3 hr. A study and examination of 
contemporary theory and research into various facets of the socialization process 
in infancy and childhood. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

348. Theories of Child Development. II. 3 hr. Examination of major theoretical 
conceptions of child development. Work of Werner, Piaget, Freid. Erikson, and the 
American learning theorists compared and contrasted. (Offered in Fall of even 
years.) 

Family Resources (Fam. R.) 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Departmental consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in 
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in 
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) (Graded as S or U.) 

390. Research Methods in Family Resources. II. 3 hr. PR: Introductory statistics or 
written consent. Research methodology, experimental design, and statistical 
analysis as relevant to problems in family resources. 

391. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. per sem.; max. 9 hr. PR: Consent. 
394. Practicum/Internship. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

136 FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS) 



490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of home economics. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

494. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent of graduate adviser. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Home Economics Education (H.E. Ed.) 

219. Occupational Home Economics. II. 3 hr. Prepares teachers to implement occupa- 
tional home economics programs. Emphasis on organizing and administering 
programs, developing laboratory and work experiences, recruiting students, and 
evaluating progress. 

278. Vocational Home Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing or consent. Develops an 
understanding of federal vocational legislation to enable an individual to develop 
and implement programs in vocational education. 

281. Contemporary Problems in Home Economics. I. 3 hr. Applies the broad-based 
philosophy of home economics to current individual family and community 
problems, e.g., societal impact on families, changing consumer market, changing 
roles, day care, diminishing energy resources, career education, etc. 

311. Home Economics Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Experience in teaching home 
economics or consent. Theory and research in home economics curriculum. Change 
in existing programs and development of new programs. 

312. Supervision in Home Economics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Teaching experience and 
consent. For home economics teachers preparing to serve as supervising teachers 
in off-campus training centers. 

313. Evaluation in Home Economics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 30 hr. of family resources, 7 hr. of 
education or consent. Experience in devising, selecting, and using a variety of 
techniques for evaluating progress toward cognitive, affective, and psychomotor 
objectives in home economics. 

314. Adult Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Psychology of adult learning, 
philosophy, types of programs to include organization, methods and techniques, 
and leadership training in working with adult groups. 

Home Management and Family Economics (HMFE) 

261. Consumer Economics. II. 3 hr. Understanding the consumer's role in our economy. 
Study of research methods and techniques used to identify, understand, and solve 
consumer problems. 

262. Introduction to Homemaker Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A comprehensive 
coverage of the historical development, philosophy, legislation, community 
resources, research and professional literature provides a base of knowledge 
needed by the student to enter the field of homemaker rehabilitation. 

FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS] 137 



363. Community Resources for Disabled Homemakers. I. 3 hr. Provides students with 
knowledge and skills needed to utilize other disciplines in the team approach to 
rehabilitating handicapped homemakers. Presentations by team members, such as 
physicians, nurses, counselors, therapists, social workers, etc. 

364. Home Management for Disabled Homemakers. II. 3 hr. PR: HMFE 262 or consent. 
Provides students with skills to teach home management concepts related to the 
disabled homemaker in performance of household tasks. Emphasis on work 
simplification, body mechanics, equipment selection, and adaptation to promote 
independent living. 

Human Nutrition and Foods (HN&F) 

254. Experimental Foods. II. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 55, organic chemistry or consent. Study of 
basic chemical processes that occur within food systems including the effects of 
storage, processing, and alterations in formulation on qualities of food products; 
introduction to laboratory methodology in foods research. 

257. Food, Labor, and Cost Control. II. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 153, Acctg. 51. Food systems 
accounting and cost control. Techniques for analyzing, managing, and controlling 
food and labor costs. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

258. Food Systems Management Practicum. II. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 153 and consent. Ten 
weeks or 400 hours of practical experience in operations of the type in which the 
student is majoring. 

260. Advanced Nutrition. I. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 71, physiology. Coreq.: Biochemistry. Role 
of food nutrients in physiological and biochemical processes of the body; 
nutritional needs of healthy individuals under ordinary conditions. 

261. Nutrition Laboratory Experimentation. I. 1 hr. Coreq.: HN&F 260 or consent. 
Nutrient analysis and introduction to nutrition experimentation. 

272. Community Nutrition 1. II. 2-3 hr. PR: HN&F 71. Beginning planning for 
community nutrition for individuals and families at various stages of the life cycle. 
Roles of agencies and professional groups. Clinical experience in community 
facilities for the third credit hour optional. 

274. Nutrition in Disease. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 71; physiology or consent; biochemistry 
required for dietetics majors. Nutritional care aspect of patients. Modification of 
diet to meet human nutrition needs in various clinical conditions. 

279. Dietetics As a Profession. 1. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing. Discussion of the profession 
of dietetics and the professional organization, American Dietetic Association 
(ADA). Completion of materials to meet ADA membership requirements. 

310. Human Nutrition. I. 3 hr. Principles of nutrition. Emphasizes current research on 
nutrient interactions and implications for diet across the life span. (Not for 
graduate students in Nutrition.) 

370. Human Nutrition Concepts and Application. II. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 260 or equiv., and 
consent. Critical study of the nutrient evaluation methods and the nutrient 
requirements of the human in health and disease, and scope of its application. 
(Offered Spring Semester of even years.) 

Interior Design and Housing (ID&H) 

233. Decorative Arts 1. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. ID&H. The decorative arts— antiquity to 
American periods. 

234. Decorative Arts 2. II. 3 hr. PR: ID&H 233. The decorative arts— American periods 
to present. 

138 FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS) 



235. Contemporary Interior Design. I. 3 hr. PR: ID&H 234. Study of the history of 
interiors, 1900-present. 

238. Portfolio Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Development and preparation of a 
portfolio for interior design and National Council for Interior Design qualifi- 
cations examination. 

239. Interior Design Field Experience. II. 3-9 hr.; max. 9 hr. PR: Written consent; senior 
standing. Opportunity to learn and work within a professional environment with 
practicing designers. 

Textiles and Clothing (Tx & CI) 

221. Socio/Psychological, Cultural Aspects of Dress. II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 121 and senior 
standing or consent. A study of writings and research in the social, psychological, 
and cultural factors affecting clothing choices— historically and contemporarily. 
Original research will be conducted by each student. 

222. Fashion Merchandising. I. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 121 and junior standing. Emphasis is 
placed on merchandising activities performed on the retail level, including 
planning sales and assortments, selecting merchandise for resale, controlling 
inventories, and determining profit. Basic mathematical formulas involved in 
merchandising are practiced. 

224. Flat Pattern Design. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 124, 126, or consent. Opportunity for 
creative expression and for understanding of pattern design through flat pattern. 
Costumes designed and constructed by the student. 

225. Tailoring. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 124, 224. Tailoring suits and coats. Emphasis on 
professional techniques, advanced fitting, and construction of garments. 

226. Apparel Design and Illustration. II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 224 or consent. Art principles 
and fashion terminology explored to increase the ability to analyze apparel 
designs. Examination of different sources of design inspiration. Techniques of 
drawing from a live fashion model and various media for apparel design 
presentation. 

227. Advanced Textiles. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 127. Comparative characteristics of 
all textile fibers are presented. Physical and chemical properties are explained 
with reference to fiber morphology and/or manufacturing processes. 

228. Clothing for Special Needs. I. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 224 or consent. Examines physical, 
psychological, and sociological clothing needs of handicapped and/or aged 
individuals. Historical developments, current research, and research needs are 
explored. Students conduct a pertinent individual research project. 

229. Fashion Merchandising Study Tour. I or II. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing in textiles and 
clothing. An examination of the textiles and clothing industry is made through 
on-site visits to: historic costume and textile collections, apparel manufacturing 
plants, design showrooms, buying offices, pattern companies, and retail estab- 
lishments. Readings included. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

Robert J. Elkins, Chairperson of the Department 

205-B Chitwood Hall 

Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Claesges, Dunbar, Goldberg, Gonzalez, Harss, Hinckley, 
McNerney, Murphy, Reider, Renahan, Schlunk, Siemens, Spleth, Taylor, and 
Whitley. Associate Members Bendena, Clark-Evans, Dixon, Elkins, Marechal, and 
Prentiss. 

The Department of Foreign Languages offers options for graduate study 
in French, German, Spanish (peninsular literature as well as Spanish- 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 139 



American literature}, the teaching of English to speakers of other languages 
(TESOL), linguistics, and comparative literature. Graduate courses are also 
offered in classics, foreign literature in English translation, language teaching 
methods, and bibliography and research. Candidates for the master's degree 
are accepted in any of the option areas as long as they fulfill all requirements 
of the Master of Arts (M.A.) listed below. 

The department chairperson is the official adviser for all departmental 
graduate students. The chairperson, or associate chairperson, serves as 
temporary adviser until the student requests, and has approved by the 
associate chairperson, a committee of three or more faculty members during 
his or her first semester of study. Students should inform themselves of 
faculty members' areas of expertise early in their first semester in order to 
facilitate committee selection. The student should request a meeting of his or 
her committee prior to pre-registration for the second semester to get 
acquainted and discuss his or her professional goals. The student should 
develop a close working relationship with the committee and feel free to 
request a committee meeting whenever necessary — for guidance or course 
selection, advice on professional advancement, examinations, possible thesis 
topics, etc. Students may also request a revision of the composition of their 
committees when professional interests change. 

A student is expected to have an undergraduate major in the areas of 
interest or be required to make up any deficiencies. The student should 
normally show an average of at least 3.0 (B) in undergraduate foreign 
language courses. 

Requirements 

1. Minimum of 24 hours of course work in the department exclusive of 
391 and 397 courses. (A total of 36 hours is required.) 

2. Maximum of 3 hours of 397 credit unless a thesis is undertaken, in 
which case 6 hours of 397 credit can be applied to the 36 required 
hours. 

3. No more than 3 hours of 391 credit can be applied to the 36 hours. (An 
exception can be made only if used to allow a student to enroll in a 200 
course and student has already reached the maximum number of 200 
credits.) 

4. Selection of options in specific areas. 
Options: 

a. French 

Four French literature courses 
Linguistics 247— Structure of Modern French 
Linguistics 341 — History of the French Language 
French 217— French Culture or 

French 292 — French Civilization 
French 344— Explication de Textes 

b. German 

Four German literature courses 
Linguistics 257— Structure of German 
Linguistics 351— History of the German Language 
German 292 or 392— German Culture and Civilization 



140 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



Spanish (Two options) 
Option I: 

Four peninsular literature courses 

Spanish 223— Estudios de Estilo or 
Spanish 324— Explicacion de Textos 

Spanish 392— Spanish Culture 

Linguistics 217— Structure of Spanish 

Linguistics 311— History of the Spanish Language 
Option II: 

Four Spanish American literature courses 

Spanish 223— Estudios de Estilo or 
Spanish 324— Explicacion de Textos 

Spanish 292— Spanish American Culture 

Linguistics 217— Structure of Spanish 

Linguistics 311— History of the Spanish Language 
TESOL 
Language 293— Methods ESL 
Language 392— Theory ESL 
Linguistics 392 — ESL Linguistics 
Language 421— Teaching FL in College 
Linguistics 202— Phonology 
EFL 391— American Culture 
Four courses from the following: 

English 211 — History of the English Language 

English 220— American Poetry 

English 235 — American Drama 

English 340— The American Novel to 1915 

English 341— The American Novel 1915 to Present 

English 369— American Literature to 1830 

English 370— American Literature, 1830-1865 

English 371— American Literature, 1865-1915 

English 372— American Literature, 1915 to Present 
Linguistics 
Minimum of six linguistic courses including: 

Linguistics 202— Phonology 

Linguistics 283— Transformational Grammar 

Linguistics 284— History of Linguistics 

Linguistics 287— Psycholinguistics 

Linguistics 288— Sociolinguistics 

One culture course of a contrastive nature 
In lieu of four literature courses, two of the following can 
substitute for literature courses: (One may double count for the 
linguistics requirement for those students writing a thesis.) 
Language 341— History of French 
Language 351— History of German 
Language 311— History of Spanish 
English 211— History of English 
Linguistics 353— Middle High German 
Linguistics 354— Middle High German 
Linguistics 313— Old Spanish 
Linguistics 343— Old French 
English 310— Old English 
English 311— Old English 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 141 



f. Comparative Literature 

Eight courses of literature (six of the eight must be in the 

department of FL) 

One culture course of a contrastive nature 

One of the following 300-level linguistics courses: 

English 211— History of the English Language 

English 310 or 311— Old English 

g. Other students may petition for another option which falls within 
the general guidelines but is not listed in a-f. A detailed plan must 
be submitted and approved by a committee appointed by the 
department chairperson. 

5. All international students whose native language is not English must 
demonstrate proficiency in English. Proficiency may be demonstrated 
in either of the following ways: 

a. TOEFL of 550 and TSE of 230 

b. ACTFL oral proficiency rating of 2 and successful passing of a 
department English writing examination 

6. Students choosing options a, b, or c must demonstrate proficiency in 
that language by achieving a 2+ oral proficiency rating and success- 
fully passing the departmental writing examination in that language. 

7. Students who choose options d, e, and f and whose native language is 
English must demonstrate proficiency in a second language using the 
criteria in section 6 or present four semesters or the equivalent of two 
foreign languages with at least a B average. 

8. Students choosing option d whose native language is not English 
must demonstrate a higher level of English than that required in point 
five. English proficiency for those students may be demonstrated in 
one of the following ways: 

a. TOEFL of 600 and TSE of 250. 

b. ACTFL oral proficiency rating of 2+ and successful passing of the 
departmental advanced English writing examination. 

9. If required courses are not offered during the time the student is 
enrolled, he/she may request permission to make appropriate substi- 
tutions. Students must declare the option they intend to follow at the 
time of their initial registration. Change in option can be made at 
student request prior to the semester in which the student takes 
his/her written examinations. 

10. A 3.00 GPA is required for graduation. 

11. Demonstration of ability to undertake research and to write clearly 
and succinctly. The five possible options for fulfilling this requirement 
are listed in the departmental graduate student handbook. 

12. Seven-hour written examination based upon the reading list. Student 
will have a reading list composed of seven sections. One may be 
drawn up by the student and the student's major adviser or selected 
from the master reading list. Candidates who write a thesis will have 
the number of sections (and hours of the examination) reduced to 
four. Five of the seven exams must be in the area of the student's 
option unless the student writes a thesis; in this case, three of the four 
must be in the option. 

13. A one- to two-hour oral examination based upon course work and/or 
thesis. 

All graduate assistants are required to complete Language Teaching 
Methods 421 as part of the work in the major fields unless they have had a 

142 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



similar course in their undergraduate study. The candidate's committee, 
together with the student, will determine the distribution of courses and the 
thesis requirement in the light of the student's aims and needs. The committee 
also will administer written and oral comprehensive examinations near the 
end of the candidate's course of study. Both oral and written examinations are 
normally given only twice a year, in November and in April. 

Graduate assistants are required to enroll each semester in Lang. 490 and 
499, although these credits do not count toward the master's. 

Because of staff scheduling difficulties, students should not expect to 
have their committees available for the completion of work on their degrees 
for summer graduation. 

A thesis, if chosen, must be submitted to the student's committee 
chairperson at least one month before the end of the enrollment period in 
which the student expects to complete all requirements for graduation. If this 
requirement is not met, thesis acceptance may be withheld for one semester. 

An acceptable thesis proposal, including a problem statement, a thorough 
review of the literature, and an appropriate research design, is to be submitted 
to, and approved by, the student's committee before a thesis can be 
undertaken. Normally this proposal is submitted at least one semester before 
undertaking the writing of the thesis. 

The thesis defense will be approximately one hour in length and is given 
after successful completion of the written examinations on elective master's 
reading list sections and the oral examination on course work. 

One bound copy of the approved thesis is to be given to the Department of 
Foreign Languages upon completion of work for the degree. 

Normally, the master's program requires four full semesters of study. 
Graduate assistants in particular should take this fact into account when 
planning their programs. 

Special Courses of Study Abroad 

Courses in German have been offered in Germany and Austria during the 
summer, in Spanish in Spain and Colombia during the summer, and in French 
in Canada during the summer and in France during the fall, spring, and 
summer. Students participating in a fall or spring semester abroad enroll for 
15-18 semester hours of credit. 

The Department of Foreign Languages offers a spring and a summer 
session in France and a summer session in Austria and in Spain or Colombia- 
contingent upon funding and faculty availability. 

Bibliography and Research (Bibgy.) 

301. Introduction to Research. I. 1-3 hr. (For seminar credit, counts as 1 hour; for a 
specific project carried out during the course, counts as 3 hours.) PR: Graduate 
standing. Pro-seminar in graduate-level research in foreign languages, literature, 
and linguistics. 

365. Methods of Research. I. 3 hr. 

Classics (Class.) 

201. Roman Novelists. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or consent. 

202. Roman Comedy. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or consent. 
235. Roman Epic. I. 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or equiv. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 143 



292. Pro-Seminar in Latin or Greek Literature. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

392. Seminar in Latin or Greek Literature. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project. 

Foreign Literature in Translation (FLIT) 

211. Chinese Literature in Translation. I. 3 hr. Survey of selected works of Chinese 
literature from ancient times through the eighteenth century. 

221. Japanese Literature in Translation. II. 3 hr. Survey of selected works of Japanese 
literature from ancient period to the mid-nineteenth century and an introduction to 
a few works of the modern period. 

292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 6 hr. of upper-division literature courses or 
consent. Special topics. 

392. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 6 hr. of upper-division literature courses or consent. 
Special topics. 

French (Frch.) 

203. Conversational French. I. 3 hr. PR: Frch. 110 or consent. Intensive spoken French. 
217. French Civilization. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French. 

221. The Romantic Movement. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. 

222. French Realism. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. 

229. Literature of the Sixteenth Century. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. 

231. Phonetics and Pronunciation. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French or equiv. 

292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. Special topics. 

305. Fundamentals for Reading French. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division 
standing. (Frch. 305 and 306 is intended for graduate students from other 
departments to teach them to read general and technical French.) 

306. Reading French. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French or equiv. or Frch. 305. (Graduate 
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement hy achieving a grade 
of B or better in this course.) 

326. Literary Criticism. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 

337. Moliere. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 

344. Explication de Textes. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of French or equiv. 

371. The Modern Novel to 1930. I. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 

372. The Novel After 1930. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 
381. Medieval French Literature. II. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 342 or consent. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

144 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



German (Ger.) 

243. Medieval German Literature. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. 

245. Classicism and Romanticism. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. Critical 
study of German literature from 1750 to 1830. 

246. The Liberal Age. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. Critical study of German 
literature from 1830 to 1880. 

247. The Age of Crisis. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. A critical study of 
German literature from 1880 to present. 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

301. Independent Reading. PR: Consent. I. 3 hr. Supervised reading for students who 
wish to do intensive work. 

302. Independent Reading. II. 3 hr. PR: Ger. 301. Continuation of Ger. 301. 

305. Fundamentals for Reading German. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division 
standing. (Ger. 305-306 is intended for graduate students from other departments 
to teach them to read general and technical German.) 

306. Reading German. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of German or equiv. or Ger. 305. (Graduate 
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement by achieving a grade 
of B or better in this course.) 

361. Lyric Poetry. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of German or consent. 

376. The Modern Novel. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of German or consent. A study of 
representative modern novels from 1900 to 1945. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Graduate standing or consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project. 

Language Teaching Methods (Lang.) 

221. The Teaching of Foreign Languages. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Required of all students 
who are prospective foreign language teachers on the secondary level. 

292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project. 

421. Teaching Foreign Language in College. I, II. 1-6 hr.* Methods and techniques of 
teaching a foreign language at the college level. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* Required each semester of all graduate 
assistants in the Department of Foreign Languages. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 145 



Linguistics (Lingu.) 

202. Phonology. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 1, 111 or consent. Description of sounds and sound 
systems in language. Articulatory phonetics. Structural and generative approaches 
to phonetics. 

217. Structure of Spanish. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Description of the phonological or grammatical systems of Spanish, with emphasis 
on contrastive analysis (Spanish/English) and applied linguistics. 

247. Structure of Modern French. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Study of phonology, morphology, and syntax of modern French together with a 
constrastive analysis of French and English. 

257. Structure of German. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Phonological, morphological, and syntactical structure of contemporary German 
language. 

267. Structure of Russian. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Russian and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Phonological, morphological, and syntactical structure of contemporary Russian. 

283. Transformational Grammar. S. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill and consent. Emphasis on 
generative syntax in English, German, Romance, and Slavic languages. 

284. History of Linguistics. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill or consent. Development of linguistics 
from Greeks and Romans to contemporary researchers with concentration on 
major linguists and schools of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. 

287. Psychoiinguistics. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill or consent. Provides an insight into the 
many areas of psychoiinguistics study, including language acquisition, sentence 
processing, animal communication, dichotic listening, aphasia, and semantics. 

288. Sociolinguistics. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 or 111 or consent. 
Linguistic study of geographical and social variation in languages; effects of 
regional background, social class, ethnic group, sex, and setting; outcomes of 
conflict between dialect and between languages. 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

311. History of the Spanish Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish 
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Evolution of Castilian from Vulgar Latin to its modern 
standard form through a study of historical phonology, morphology, and syntax, 
together with the external factors which influenced the development of the 
language. 

313. Oid Spanish. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 

341. History of the French Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French and 
Lingu. Ill or consent. Evolution of French from Vulgar Latin into the Modern 
French standard through a study of historical phonology, morphology, and syntax, 
together with the external factors which influenced the development of the 
language. 

343. Old French. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of the oldest monuments of the French 
language including the Chanson de Roland and Aucassin et Nicolette in an effort to 
trace the evolution of Francien, Anglo-Norman, and Picard and Vulgar Latin. 

351. History of the German Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German 
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Historical development of standard German with 
emphasis on its relationship to the other German languages and dialects. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

146 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



353. Middle High German 1. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Study of the linguistic developments of Middle High German from the eleventh to 
the fifteenth centuries with illustrative readings from the Niebelungenlied. 

354. Middle High German 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 353. Continuation of Lingu. 353 with 
illustrative readings from the Middle High German lyric poets and the courtly 
epics. 

361. History of the Russian Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Russian 
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Development of Russian from Indo-European to the 
present. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project. 

Russian (Russ.) 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: 18 hr. of Russian or equiv. 

305. Reading Russian. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division standing. (Russ. 305-306 
is intended for graduate students from other departments to teach them to read 
general and technical Russian.] 

306. Reading Russian. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of Russian or equiv. or Russ. 305. (Graduate 
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement hy achieving a grade 
of B or better in this course.) 

Spanish (Span.) 

221. Golden Age Literature. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or consent. Consideration of 
Spanish literature of the Renaissance and the Counter Reformation with readings 
in the novel, the comedia, and lyric poetry. 

223. Estudios De Estilo. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

224. Introduccion a la literatura. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A study of basic genres, 
themes, and techniques. Intensive reading of selected texts from various periods. 
Emphasis on Peninsular and/or Spanish American literature. 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

315. Lyric Poetry. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

324. Explicacion De Textos. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

325. The Picaresque Novel. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

391. Cervantes. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or consent. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

395. Sixteenth Century Literature. I. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in Spanish or consent. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project. 

•Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 147 



FORESTRY 

Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry 

322-A Percival Hall 

Harry V. Wiant, Jr., Coordinator of the Graduate Program 

Degrees Offered: M.S.F., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Armstrong, Brock, Carvell, Hassler, Hicks, Patterson, 

Tajchman, White, Wiant, Yandle, and Zinn. Associate Members Coster, Jackson, and 

Kidd. 

Master of Science in Forestry (M.S.F.) 

Admission requirements are listed on page 383 for the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry. Additionally, students seeking admission for the 
degree of Master of Science of Forestry (M.S.F.) should have completed an 
undergraduate curriculum in forestry. A student whose undergraduate 
degree is in a field other than forestry will ordinarily be required to take 
supplemental undergraduate courses. Candidates for the degree may major in 
forest biometry, forest ecology, forest economics, forest genetics, forest 
meterology, forest management, silviculture, or wood industry. The candidate 
must complete 30 hours of approved study, 6 hours of which shall constitute a 
thesis. The program ordinarily requires two years of residence. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

A candidate for the Doctor of Philosophy degree in Forest Resources 
Science in the College of Agriculture and Forestry may choose as the major 
field of study forest science, wood science, or wildlife management. Within 
these major fields of study, specialization is limited only by the range of 
competencies in the graduate faculty. 

Curriculum requirements of all candidates include a block of graduate 
courses in the major field which will constitute a comprehensive review of the 
significant knowledge in that field, and a block of graduate courses in a minor 
area of study. A minimum of 60 semester hours beyond the bachelor's degree 
and exclusive of the dissertation will be required. 

The research work for the doctoral dissertation must show a high degree 
of scholarship and must present an original contribution to the field of forest 
resources science. In addition to course work and the dissertation, the 
candidate is required to pass a qualifying examination and a final examination. 

Admission requirements include a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 
during the last years of undergraduate studies, a master's degree, a minimum 
total score of 1,200 on the verbal and quantitative portions of the Graduate 
Record Examination, three letters of recommendation, submission of copies of 
previous publications, at least a 600-word composition indicating the student's 
purpose and objective in undertaking graduate studies as related to major 
issues in that area, and an acceptable TOEFL score if a foreign student. 

Forestry (For.) 

220. Forest Policy and Administration. I and II. 3 hr. PR: Upperclass forestry major or 
consent. Forest policy in the United States; important federal and state laws; 
administration of public and private forests; problems in multiple-use forestry. 

226. Remote Sensing of Environment. II. 2 hr. PR: Math. 3, 4. Measurement and 
interpretation of natural resources and environment from photography, radar, 
infrared, and microwave imagery. 



148 FORESTRY 



233. Principles of Industrial Forestry. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry senior or consent. Analysis 
and case studies of problems pertinent to the integration of wood conversion 
technology with principles of production, marketing, and management. 

310. Biometeorology. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. A description of the physical environment of 
plants and its effect on growth, its modification for increasing yield and for plant 
protection against extreme atmospheric conditions. 

410. Biophysical Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: For. 310 or consent. An analysis of interactions of 
plants and animals with their environment based on principles of environmental 
physics. Energy and mass exchange between plants and animals, and their 
environment; environmental variables and organism parameters. [Offered in Fall 
of even years.) 

419. Microclimatology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A description and quantitative treatment 
of climate near the ground in terms of physiological processes of energy and mass 
exchange. 

470. Special Topics in Forestry, Wood Science, Wildlife, or Recreation. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

474. Seminar in Forest Hydrology and Climatology. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

480. Principles of Research. I. 2 hr. The specific method as applied in the formal, 
concrete, and normative sciences, with special emphasis on forestry-related 
research plans and reports. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of forest resources management, wood science, wildlife management 
resources, and recreation and parks. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled classes. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet resident requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Forest Hydrology (F. Hyd.) 

243. Forest Water Quality. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. (This course will not 
substitute for F. Hyd. 244.) Influences of natural forest cover, forest land uses, and 
harvesting practices on selected water quality parameters that can be detected in 
simple field and laboratory tests. 

244. Watershed Management. II. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12, 211. (Primarily for forest 
management majors.) Influences of silvicultural practices and forest management 
activities on the hydrology of forested catchments. 

Forest Management (F. Man.) 

200. Forest Measurement, Interpretation, Wildlife Management. S. 5 hr. PR: Biol. 51; 
C.E. 5; F. Man. 122. (Course will be taught during four consecutive 6-day weeks.] 
Application and study of forest resources practice with emphasis on field 
problems. 

201. Forest Resources Management Southern Trip. S. 1 hr. PR: F. Man. 200 or consent. 
One-week trip to the Southern Pine Region to observe forest management 
practices on private and public lands. 

FORESTRY 149 



211. Silvicultural Systems. I. 4 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man. 12. Principles 
of regeneration cuttings, intermediate cuttings, and cultural operations, with their 
application to forest stands. 

213. Regional Silviculture. I. 2 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. F. Man. 12; PR or 
Cone: F. Man. 211. Major forest types of the United States: their composition, 
management, problems, and silvicultural treatment. 

215. Principles of Artificial Forestation. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man. 
12. Seeding and planting nursery practice; phases of artificial regeneration. 

216. Forest Genetics and Tree Improvement. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; 
Gen. 272 or equiv., or consent. Forest genetic principles and their application to 
forest tree improvement, including crossing methods, selection systems, and other 
techniques. 

222. Advanced Forest Mensuration. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man. 122. 
Measurement of growth and yield; statistical methods applied to forest measure- 
ment problems. 

230. Principles of Forestry Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; Econ. 51 
and 52 or equiv. Production, distribution, and use of forest goods and services. 
Emphasis on analytical methods and techniques dealing with forest economic 
problems. 

232. Forest Finance. II. 2 hr. PR: Forestry junior standing or consent. Interest, discount, 
and rate earned in forest production and exploitation. Particular reference to 
determining value of standing timber, appraisal of forest damages, and forest 
taxation. 

233. Forest Management. I. 4 hr. PR: Summer Camp; PR or Cone: Forestry major or 
consent; F. Man. 211. Principles of sustained yield forest management. Organization 
of forest areas, selection of management objectives, application of silvicultural 
systems, and regulation of cut. Forest management plan. 

234. Forest Resources Management Planning. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; 
senior standing. Analysis and planning for management of forest resources. 
Development of a management plan for an actual forest tract. 

330. Advanced Principles of Forestry Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51, 52 or equiv.; F. 
Man. 230 or equiv. Intensive study of both micro- and macroeconomics of forestry. 

411. Advanced Forest Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12 or equiv.; F. Man. 211. Ecological 
relationships in forests with emphasis on biogeochemical cycles. 

412. Silvicultural Practices for Hardwood Forest Types. II. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 211. 
Designing proper silvicultural systems for managing Appalachian hardwood 
stands; reconstructing stand histories, recognizing problems, and prescribing 
appropriate silvicultural treatment. 

431. Advanced Forest Regulation. I, II. 2 hr. PR: F. Man. 233 or equiv. Intensive study of 
area and volume regulation suitable for applied forestry in the United States. 

472. Seminar in Silviculture. II. 1-6 hr. per sem.; max. credit, 4 hr. PR: Consent. Reports 
and discussions of recent research in fundamental and applied phases of 
silviculture with emphasis on hardwood forest types. 

473. Seminar in Forest Management. 1 hr. 

Wood Science (Wd. Sc.) 

200. Forest Measurement Field Practice. S. 3 hr. PR: Wood Industry major, Biol. 51, C.E. 
1, F. Man. 122. Application of surveying and mensurational practices with 
emphasis on field problems. 

150 FORESTRY 



201. Wood Industries Field Trip. S. 1 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 134. A one-week trip to observe 
manufacturing methods and techniques of commercial wood industry plants. 
Plants visited include furniture, plywood, veneer, hardboard, particle board, pulp 
and paper, sawmilling, and preservation. 

230. Wood Machining. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to basic concepts of wood 
machining with emphasis on production equipment and furniture manufacturing. 

231. Wood Finishing. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 121 or 123. Surface preparation, composition of 
finishing materials, equipment, techniques, defects, troubleshooting, and quality 
control. 

232. Wood Adhesion: Theory and Practice. I. 2 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123 and 141. Detailed 
theoretical introduction and examination of different types of adhesives and 
gluing techniques used in the wood industry. 

234. Statistical Quality Control. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; Wd. Sc. 134. 
Methods used to control quality of manufactured wood products. Control charts of 
variables and attributes. Acceptance sampling techniques. 

235. Light-Frame Wood Construction. I. 2 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. Use of 
wood in light-frame construction. Basic design procedures and construction 
methods. 

240. Wood Moisture Relationships. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123. Principles involved in the 
relation between wood and moisture, and purposes, effects, and methods of 
seasoning. 

251. Forest Products Protection. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123, 134. Biological organisms 
responsible for deterioration of wood products, their control by preservative 
methods, and study of fire retarding methods. 

260. Plant Layout for Wood Industries. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Relates knowledge 
of wood to industrial wood product processes to optimize production. Study of 
proper arrangement of machines, and work and storage areas. 

262. Forest Products Decision-Making. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing in Forestry. 
Decision-making tools and techniques used by the forest products industry such 
as simulation linear programming, network analysis, forecasting, game theory. 

320. Wood Microstructure. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123; senior standing. Detailed 
examination of wood microstructure as it relates to processing, behavior, and 
identification. 

340. Advanced Physical Behavior of Wood. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 240 or equiv. or consent. 
Physical relationships of water and wood; fluid flow through wood; thermal, 
electrical, and acoustical behavior of wood. Theories of wood drying and their 
application. 

362. Forest Products Operations Research Models. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 262 and 
demonstrated knowledge of Fortran and Basic, or consent. Analysis of operations 
research models currently used by the forest products industry. Students will 
develop new models. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

473. Seminar in Wood Utilization. II. 1 hr. per sem.; max. credit, 4 hr. PR: Consent. 
Reports and discussions of recent research in fundamental and applied phases of 
wood utilization. 



FORESTRY 151 



GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 

Joginder Nath, Chairperson of the Interdisciplinary Faculty 

1120 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Blaydes, R. L. Butcher, L. Butler, Caterson, Charon, 
Gerencser, Kaczmarczyk, Katula, Keller, J. McGraw, Mengoli, Miller, Ong, Overman, 
Pore, Quinlan, Reyer, Schein, Sorenson, Thayne, Tryfiates, Ulrich, Van Dyke, Vrana, 
Wearden, Williams, and Yelton. Associate Members D. F. Butcher, Hall, Kirk, and 
Montiegel. 

The M.S. and Ph.D. degrees are offered in genetics and developmental 
biology, an interdisciplinary program involving the faculty and facilities of a 
number of departments in the various colleges and schools of the University. 
A student may concentrate in genetics or developmental biology. The areas in 
which specialization is offered are as follows: 

Genetics— Biochemical and molecular genetics, cytogenetics, develop- 
mental genetics, mutagenesis, toxicology, human genetics, plant genetics, 
population and quantitative genetics, and animal breeding; 

Developmental Biology— Molecular aspects of development, experimental 
morphogenesis, teratology, regeneration, oncology, descriptive embryology, 
and life cycles of animals and plants. The chairperson for the genetics and 
developmental biology degrees is housed in the College of Agriculture and 
Forestry. 

The student may also minor in one or more other scientific fields. 

The object of this program is to build upon a well-rounded scientific 
foundation, a specialized knowledge of the concepts and methods in a 
discipline, chosen by the student, which will enable the student to pursue a 
productive career in teaching and/or research. Responsibility for a student's 
program is vested in a graduate committee charged with arranging the 
student's course work, conducting examinations, and supervising the research. 

Admission requirements are listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture 
and Forestry. 

Basic training in mathematics, physics, chemistry, and biology is required 
for admission. Students lacking some prerequisites must fulfill them before 
graduation. Applications for graduate study should be sent in as early in the 
year as possible, but no later than April 1 for entry the following August. 
However, applications are accepted year-round for admission to the program 
in the following semester. Official transcripts of baccalaureate and/or 
master's degrees must be sent directly to the WVU Office of Admissions and 
Records. Three letters of recommendation from science teachers should 
accompany the application. Application forms can be received from the WVU 
Office of Admissions and Records, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506- 
6009. For further information, write to the Chairperson. 

Genetics (Gen.) 

290. Crop Breeding. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321. Methods and basic scientific principles 
involved in improvement of leading crops through hybridization, selection, and 
other techniques. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

321. Basic Concepts of Modern Genetics. I. 3 hr. PR: 8 hr. biological science and 1 year 
chemistry. Independent interitance, linkage. Chemical nature of genetic material. 
Control of phenotype by genetic material. Gene action and coding of genetic 
material. 



152 GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 



325. Human Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 or consent. Study of genetic system 
responsible for development of phenotype in man. [Offered in Spring of odd 
years.) 

335. Population Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 or consent. Relationship of gene 
and genotype frequencies in populations of diploid organisms, and the effects of 
mutation, migration, selection, assortive mating, and inbreeding in relation to 
single gene pairs. Application of these concepts to multigenic inheritance of 
quantitative traits. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

370. Medical Genetics. II. 2-4 hr. PR: Second-year medical student standing; graduate 
student in Genetics and Developmental Biology; others by consent. Introduction to 
clinical genetics including molecular, biochemical, and cytogenetic aspects of 
human biology. Application of genetic principles to human health and disease. 
(Also listed as CC MD 370, Med. 370, Pedia. 370.) 

424. Cytogenetics. II. 4 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321, and Biol. 215 or consent. Emphasis on 
macromolecules that carry information of the chromosomes, cell division, and the 
cytological and molecular basis of genetics. Special attention given to visible 
manisfestation of genes, human cytogenetics, cytogenetics of genomes and 
chromosome morphology, and their evolution. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

426. Advanced Biochemical Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 and organic 
chemistry. Physiological and biophysical concepts of genetic material. Structure 
and arrangement of genetic units. Nucleic acids as carriers of genetic information. 
Gene action and amino acid coding. Biochemical evolution of genetic material. 
Genetic control mechanisms. Biochemistry of mutation. (Offered in Spring of even 
years.) 

427. Genetic Mechanisms of Evolution. I. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 orequiv. Molecular genetic 
mechanisms which result in evolutionary change. Origin of life, origin and 
organization of genetic variability, differentiation of populations, isolation and 
speciation, role of hybridization and polploidy , and origin of man. (Offered in Fall 
of odd years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Recent literature pertaining to biochemical, classical, 
human, molecular, and cytological genetics. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. 

GEOGRAPHY 

Robert Hanham, Assistant Chairperson of Department of Geology and Geography 
406 White Hall 
Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Calzonetti, Elmes, Hanham, Isserman, Kite, Martis, 
Pickles, Pyle, and Walker. 

The graduate program in geography at WVU provides students with the 
opportunity to study for an M.A. degree in one of five areas of specialization: 
(1) energy studies; (2) geographic information systems and spatial methods; 
(3) regional development and planning; (4) regional science; and (5) water 
resources and environmental management. Students who are interested in 
pursuing research in an area other than these may do so provided the research 
area matches the interests of a faculty member in the department who agrees 
to supervise the student's program. Students who wish to focus their research 
on a particular region are encouraged to do so. Faculty in the geography 
program currently have research interests in Appalachia, North America, 
Africa, Europe, the Middle East, and the Pacific. 

GEOGRAPHY 153 



The award of an M.A. in Geography requires: (1) 30 hours of graduate 
credit with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0; (2) satisfactory completion 
of Geography 301 (Geographic Theory and Practice, 3 credits), Geography 
302 (Research Design, 3 credits), Geography 399 (Geostatistics and Quantita- 
tive Methods, 3 credits), and 4 credit hours of Geography 496 (Graduate 
Research Seminar); (3) satisfactory completion of at least 18 graduate credit 
hours in geography, of which the 13 listed in (2) immediately above may be 
included; (4) a successful oral examination of the student's knowledge of the 
literature in the student's field of specialization and in the philosophy of 
geography; and (5) completion and successful oral defense of a research 
thesis. 

Prospective students should have an overall undergraduate grade-point 
average of 2.75, and 3.0 GPA for geography courses. Students with degrees in 
other disciplines are encouraged to apply, but they may be asked to make up 
deficiencies in geography during their first year in the program. Incoming 
geography students may also be asked to make up deficiencies if such are 
found to exist during the students' entry interview with faculty immediately 
prior to the first semester of their program. Applicants for the program should 
submit GRE scores, or equivalent qualification, and three letters of reference, 
and official transcripts. 

Each incoming student is interviewed prior to the first semester of his or 
her program. The purpose of this meeting is threefold: to introduce the student 
to the faculty; to ascertain the student's interests; and to assess whether the 
student has deficiencies that should be rectified. Students with well-defined 
interests are assigned an adviser at this time. Other students are supervised 
by the Director of the Graduate Program until the student develops a more 
clearly defined research interest, which should be no later than the end of the 
student's first year in the program. At the end of this year, at least two further 
faculty will be assigned to each student to form the student's program 
committee. At least one of these must be a geography faculty member at WVU. 
Students may change advisers or committee members after consultation with 
the adviser, the Director of the Graduate Program, and the Director of the 
Geography program. 

Students are expected to choose an area of specialization within the first 
semester of their program of study. This choice will determine which courses 
the student shall take. In each area, the student is encouraged to take courses 
both in geography as well as outside the discipline. In general it is expected 
that a student's program will have the following format: 

First Semester, First Year 

•Geog. 301 — Geographic Theory and Practice (3 hr.) 

•Geog. 496 — Graduate Seminar in Geography (2 1-hr. modules) 

•3 credit hours of directed readings or graduate course. 

Second Semester, First Year 

•Geog. 302— Geographic Research Design (3 hr.) 
•Geog. 399— Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences (3 hr.) 
•Geog. 496 — Graduate Seminar in Geography (2 1-hr. modules) 
•1-3 credit hours of directed readings or graduate course. 

First Semester, Second Year 

•9 credit hours of directed readings or graduate courses 

Second Semester, Second Year 

•3 or more credit hours of thesis research. 



154 GEOGRAPHY 



All students shall be examined no later than the end of their third 
semester on their knowledge of the literature in their area of specialization 
and in the philosophy of geography. The examination shall be oral and it will 
be conducted by the student's committee. The student shall pass the 
examination if at least two-thirds of the committee vote in favor of a pass. 
Should the student fail the examination, either the student shall be required to 
undertake some remedial study, such as a course or directed readings which 
must be completed with at least a B grade, or the student will be required to 
retake the examination. No student may retake the examination more than 
once. 

The thesis will represent the outcome of independent research undertaken 
by the student. It must be regarded by the student's program committee as a 
contribution to the discipline of geography. The thesis must also reflect the 
student's knowledge of the literature pertaining to the subject matter of the 
thesis. A student may substitute a thesis of a special nature with the approval 
of the faculty; e.g. policy document, film, and so on. A full proposal regarding 
the thesis research will be presented to the faculty in an oral presentation no 
later than the end of the third semester of the student's program of study. The 
student's committee will determine the proposal's acceptability. If it is 
deemed unacceptable, a further presentation may be required. The proposal 
must be typed and copied and submitted to the committee at least two weeks 
prior to the presentation. The defense of the thesis will take place when the 
student and his/her committee agree that a defensible copy of the thesis is 
complete. For full-time students this shall be no more than three years after 
entry into the program. The examination is graded on a pass/provisional- 
pass/fail basis by a majority vote of the committee. A student who fails may 
submit another thesis or a revised version of the existing one upon the 
approval of the student's committee. No student shall be re-examined more 
than once. A student who is given a provisional pass will generally be 
required to make minor revisions or corrections to the thesis. 

It is expected that full-time students shall not need more than two years 
to satisfy all program requirements. In many cases these can be fulfilled in 
less time than that. 

Research and teaching assistantships are awarded on an annual basis 
and for no more than two years. Awards for the second year are based on 
performance in the first year with respect to both assistantship duties and 
academic progress. Assistantships include a full tuition waiver. 

The graduate program in geography at WVU has strong liaison with the 
University's Geology Program, the Regional Research Institute, the Depart- 
ment of Mineral Resource Economics, Water Research Institute, International 
Studies Program, West Virginia Geological and Economic Survey, and with 
several other units in the University. The department has access to excellent 
computing facilities based on a VAX-750 which supports multiple remote 
terminals, two disc packs, two tape drives, a megatek graphics terminal, 
Benson plotter and digitizer. The VAX is linked to the WVNET mainframe for 
access to all major software packages, including SASGRAPH and additional 
hard- ware, e.g. Zeta and flatbed plotters. Departmental software includes MINITAB, 
SURFACE II, and GIMMS for statistics and graphics. Departmental word- 
processing is available for graduate students. 



GEOGRAPHY 155 



Geography (Geog.) 

200. Spatial Analysis. I. 3 hr. Introduces quantitative techniques for the collection, 
classification, and spatial analysis of geographical data. Emphasizes map analysis 
and the application of spatial analysis to geographical problems occurring in 
everyday contexts. 

201. Geography of West Virginia. II. 3 hr. Study of past, present, and future patterns of 
the physical environment of West Virginia as modified by human activities. To 
learn the use of geographical information systems for planning in West Virginia. 

202. Political Geography. II. 3 hr. Examines the interrelationship between politics and 
the environment, human territoriality, the political organization of space, geopo- 
litical aspects of the nation-state and international problems. 

205. Environmentalism in the United States. II. 3 hr. Surveys natural resource 
exploitation and environmental alteration in the United States from the beginning 
of European settlement, with consideration of changing natural resources, 
conservation, and environmental perceptions and policies. 

209. Industrial Location. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 109 or consent. Applied theoretical aspects 
of location decisions in primary, secondary, and tertiary activities. Emphasis will 
be on the understanding of location patterns and the impact of industries on other 
characteristics of communities. 

210. Global Issues: Inequality and Interdependence. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 
Geog. 1 or 2 or 8. Themes of spatial equity and justice in an increasingly 
interdependent world system. Contemporary issues concerning location, place, 
movement, and region. 

215. Population Geography. I. 3 hr. Study of the geographic distribution of population 
and population characteristics including density, age, fertility, mortality and 
settlement patterns. Problems of migration and population/resource issues also 
will be covered, with an emphasis on developing countries. [Offered in Fall of odd 
years.} 

219. Problems in Geography. I, II. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Independent study or special 
topics. 

220. Seminar in Geography. I, II. 1-9 hr. per sem.; max. 15 hr. PR: Consent. Includes 
separate seminars in urban, economic, physical, behavioral, social, Appalachian, 
transportation, census, planning, resource, international studies, geographic 
model building, rural problems, cartography, aging and environment, and energy. 

221. Geomorphology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. [Optional field trip at student's expense.J 
An examination of the physical processes which shape the surface of the earth, 
with emphasis on fluvial processes and environmental geomorphology. [Also 
listed as Geol. 221.) 

225. Urban Planning Concepts and Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 110 or Pol. S. 121 or 
consent. Explores concepts, techniques, and processes of physical and socio- 
economic planning and their application to urban problems including: land-use 
allocation and control, location of economic activity, housing, transportation, and 
the delivery of social services. 

230. Rural Settlement. I. 3 hr. Analysis of the form and process of settlement in rural 
and urban fringe areas. Topics include housing, employment, mobility patterns, 
service opportunities, and cultural characteristics of rural populations with 
emphasis on current patterns of change. 

235. The Experience of Space. II. 3 hr. Explores the individual's changing experience of 
geographical space over the life cycle as reflected in activity patterns, territoriality, 
and environmental images. Traces environmental design implications for settings 
including schools, nursing homes, parks, and shopping malls. 

156 GEOGRAPHY 



261. Cartography. I, II. 3 hr. An introduction to mapping, including historical 
developments, coordinate systems, projections, generalization, symbolization, 
map design, computer-assisted cartography, landform representation, and data 
manipulation for dot, graduate symbol, chloropleth, and isarithmic mpas. 

262. Cartographic Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 261 or consent. Advanced map 
construction including positive and negative artwork, darkroom techniques, color 
and color proofing, and map reproduction. 

265. Aging and Environment. II. 3 hr. PR: MDS 50 or consent. Explores the older 
person's changing experience of the environment. Physiological, psychological, 
and social changes are related to adjustment within urban and rural community 
environments, special housing for the elderly, and long-term care environments. 

285. Methods of Geographic Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Geographic analysis as problem-solving activity. Practical experience in field 
techniques, library research, hypothesis formation and testing, and report 
preparation and presentation. Students will acquire skills in literary and numerical 
approaches to geographic data analysis. 

290. Geographical Perspectives on Energy. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A survey of the 
distribution of finite, renewable, and continuous energy resources and an 
investigation of the geographical patterns of energy consumption and energy 
flows. The policy implications of an unequal distribution of energy are evaluated. 

295. Internship. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Junior standing and consent. A working internship 
with an agency or company designed to give the student experience in the practical 
application of geographic training to specific problems. 

299. Honors Thesis. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Departmental consent. Thesis proposal, writing, 
and defense for students admitted to the Honors Program. 

301. Geographic Theory and Practice. I. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 285 or consent. Analysis of the 
development and significance of concepts and theories in geographical traditions. 
Introduction to current research interests and specialties of the program. 

302. Geographic Research-Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 200 and Geog. 301. Choosing, 
preparing, and developing research problems of geographic interest. Emphasizes 
proposal writing and research design alternatives. 

329. Problems in Geomorphology. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Also listed as Geol. 329.) 

399. Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212 or 311, Geog. 200 or 
consent. Brief review and introduction to multivariate quantitative techniques as 
applied to geology and geography. (Aiso listed as Geol. 399.) 

491. Advanced Study in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Investigation of topics not covered 
in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through scheduled 
meetings. 

496. Graduate Seminar in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Research seminars in energy 
studies, regional science, regional development and planning, water resource and 
environmental management, geomorphology, area studies, advanced geostatistics, 
and computer analysis. 

497. Research in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 



GEOGRAPHY 157 



GEOLOGY 

Alan C. Donaldson, Chairperson of Department of Geology and Geography 
425 White Hall 
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Donaldson, Dunne, Gillespie, Heald, Kammer, Lang, 
Rauch, Renton, Shumaker, Smosna, Ting, and Wilson. Associate Member Behling. 

The Department of Geology and Geography offers work leading to the 
degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) in 
Geology. 

Applicants for graduate studies in geology must have as a minimum 
requirement a bachelor's degree and an overall grade-point average of at least 
2.75. Acceptance by the Department of Geology and Geography is necessary 
before admission of any prospective student to the program. All candidates 
for a graduate degree in geology must submit scores in the general aptitude 
test of the Graduate Record Examination. 

Before being admitted to programs leading to the M.S. or the Ph.D., a 
student must pass an entrance examination covering physical, historical and 
structural geology, sedimentation-stratigraphy and mineralogy. The exam- 
ination is given from 7:00-9:30 p.m. on the second day of classes each 
semester. 

Students seeking admission to the master's program or the Ph.D. program 
must complete the equivalents of all science and mathematics courses 
required for the B.S. in geology at WVU before being admitted to these 
programs. 

In the descriptions that follow, "formal course" means a lecture or 
seminar course and not a directed, but independent, exercise in the solution of 
a specific problem and the presentation of results. 

A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 must be maintained in required 
formal courses in geology and cognate fields for the Masters degree and 3.3 for 
the Ph.D. Credit will not be allowed for courses in which grades below "B" are 
attained, but these courses will be included in the grade-point average. Loads 
of 9-12 hours are required and no withdrawals are permitted after the first 
two weeks of a semester. A student who fails to maintain the required average 
at the completion of any semester during the graduate program will be 
allowed one academic year (two semesters) to attain the required average. 
Failure to attain this average by the end of the probationary period will 
permanently eliminate the student as a candidate for a graduate degree in this 
department. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

No later than the beginning of the second semester in residence, the 
prospective candidate must choose one of the options leading to the Master of 
Science (M.S.) degree in geology. 

Option One: Master of Science in Geology (M.S.)— Research 

This has been the "traditional" option for the Master of Science in 
geology. Students considering continued studies (Doctor of Philosophy) 
should choose this option. 

A minimum of 24 formal-course hours with grades of A or B and 6 
research hours are required for graduation. A thesis based on original 
research also is required. With consent of the candidate's advisory committee, 
the field work need not be done while in residence at WVU. 

158 GEOLOGY 



Required to Graduate: 30 hours, including certain required courses 
specified by the adviser. 

Option Two: Master of Science in Geology (M.S.) — Professional Studies 

This option is designed specifically for students seeking experience in 
preparing and presenting professional problems. Students choosing this 
option would be seeking employment in technical fields rather than continuing 
studies for a higher degree. 

A minimum of 34 formal-course hours with grades of A or B and 8 
problems hours (Geol. 492) are required for graduation. The problems hours 
are in lieu of a thesis and are designed to simulate the work of professional 
geologists as they seek solutions to open-ended problems. Experience in 
presentation of problems and solutions is an integral part of the program. 

Problems credits may be earned in conjunction with off-campus experi- 
ences by consent of the candidate's advisory committee. 

Required to Graduate: 42 hours, including certain required courses 
specified by the adviser. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The candidate for the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) must complete a 
program of courses outlined by the candidate's doctoral committee. Reading 
competence in a foreign language is required. Written and oral comprehensive 
examinations must be successfully completed. Work on original research is to 
be presented in a dissertation and defended in an oral examination. 

Research 

Close cooperation between the West Virginia Geological and Economic 
Survey, located on Cheat Lake near Morgantown, and the Department of 
Geology and Geography makes a large amount of material available for 
laboratory investigation. This includes the fossil collections of the department 
and the survey. A large number of samples of drill cuttings from deep wells in 
West Virginia and adjoining states are housed in the survey. Complete 
analytical geochemical equipment is available through the survey with 
atomic absorption spectrometer, X-ray diffractometers, and a scanning 
electron microscope. The department also has a number of cooperative 
projects with the Morgantown Energy Technology Center of the U.S. 
Department of Energy. Morgantown is conveniently situated for detailed 
studies of Mississippian, Pennsylvanian, and Permian formations. Mineral 
products of the region near Morgantown include coal, petroleum, natural gas, 
and limestone. The occurrence and utilization of these materials can be 
studied by graduate students interested in economic geology. Department 
geophysical equipment includes a Geometries magnetometer, a Worden 
gravimeter, a refraction seismograph, and a three-component short period 
seismograph. A permanent summer field camp (Camp Wood) is located in the 
Folded Appalachians at Alvon, Greenbrier County. The coastal geology 
program includes an annual trip to the Florida Keys, and three weeks on the 
shore of Virginia. Other summer field courses are carbonate sedimentation in 
the Florida Keys, glacial geology in Maine, and a biannual European geology 
at different sites. Additional oceanography courses and research are available 
at the Marine Science Consortium at Wallops Island, Virginia, with which 
WVU is affiliated. 

The Department has access to excellent computing facilities based on a 
VAX-750 which supports multiple remote terminals, 2 tape drives, a megatek 

GEOLOGY 159 



graphics terminal, Benson plotter and digitizer. The VAX is linked to the 
WVNET and additional hardware, e.g. Zeta and flatbed plotters. Departmental 
software includes MINITAB, SURFACE II, and GIMMS for statistics and 
graphics. Departmental word processing is available for graduate students. 

Geology (Geol.) 

201. Physical Geology for Teachers. I, II. 3 hr. (Credit cannot be obtained for both Geol. 
201 and Geol. 1 or 5.) PR: High school teaching certificate and consent. Composition 
and structure of earth and the geologic processes which shape its surface. 

221. Geomorphology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip at student's expense.) 
An examination of the physical processes which shape the surface of the earth, 
with emphasis on fluvial processes and environmental geomorphology. (Also 
listed as Geog. 221.) 

222. Glacial Geology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip(s) at student's 
expense.] Introduction to glaciology and glacial geology, with emphasis on 
topographic form and the nature of glacial deposits. The Quaternary history of 
North America is stressed. 

228. Photogeology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 127, 152, or consent. Instruction in basic and 
advanced techniques of air-photo interpretation. 

231. Invertebrate Paleontology. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3, 4, 184, Stat. 101, or consent. 
(Weekend field trip required at student's expense.) Invertebrate fossils: biologic 
classification, evolutionary development, ecology, and use in correlation of strata. 

235. Introductory Paleobotany. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3. (Required Saturday field trips at 
student's expense.) Resume of development of principal plant groups through the 
ages, present distribution, mode of occurrence and index species, methods of 
collection. 

251. Advanced Topics in Structural Geology. II. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 152 and 261 or consent; 
Math. 15; undergraduates need consent. (Two two-day field trips required. Basic 
field equipment and field trip at student's expense.) Studies into the development 
of structures emphasizing both theoretical and experimental approaches. [Offered 
in Spring of odd years.) 

261. Stratigraphy and Sedimentation. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 3, 4, 152, 185, or consent. 
[Two-day field trip required. Basic field equipment and field trips at student's 
expense.) Study of sediments and sedimentary rocks. Field techniques stressed as 
data gathered and interpreted from rocks of Pennsylvanian age in the Morgantown 
vicinity. 

266. Appalachian Geology Field Camp. S. 6 hr. PR: Geol. 152, 185, 261, and consent. 
(Living expense in addition to tuition must be paid at time of registration.) 
Practical experience in detailed geological field procedures and mapping. 

270. Mineral Resources. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 184. Description, mode of occurrence, and 
principles governing the formation of ore deposits. 

272. Petroleum Geology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152. Origin, geologic distribution, methods 
of exploration and exploitation, uses and future reserves of petroleum and natural 
gas in the world. 

273. Petroleum Geology Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Geol. 152. Well sample 
description, correlation, and interpretation. Construction and interpretation of 
subsurface maps used in exploration for hydrocarbons. 

274. Coal Geology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152 or consent. Introduction to the origin, 
composition, geologic distribution, and exploration of coals. 

160 GEOLOGY 



287. Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 185, and 385 or consent. 
Review of current theories for generation and evolution of magmas, and techniques 
of determining metamorphic conditions from mineral assemblage. Study of 
igneous and metamorphic rocks in thin section. (Weekend field trip at student's 
expense.) 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

290. Geologic Problems. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (12 hr. max.). PR: Consent. (Aiso includes field 
trips such as Florida Bay carbonate trip.) Special problems for senior and graduate 
students. 

294. Introduction to Geochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 16. Basic review of physical and 
aqueous chemistry, discussion of the basic geochemical processes; calcium 
carbonate chemistry, diagenetic processes, weathering, the silicate and iron 
systems. 

315. Environmental Geoscience. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 221 or concurrent registration or 
consent for nongeology majors. (Field trips and independent field project required.} 
Principles, practice, and case histories in application of earth science to environ- 
mental problems. Includes: water quality; landslides; subsidence; waste disposal; 
legal aspects; and geologic aspects of land-use planning. 

329. Problems in Geomorphology. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Aiso listed as Geog. 329.) 

332. Paleoecology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 231 and 261 or consent. Methods of paleoecologic 
analysis in sedimentary geology. Topics include trace fossil analysis, shell 
biogeochemistry, community paleoecology, biofacies analysis of basins, and 
Precambrian paleoecology. 

341. Carbonate Sedimentology. II. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 231, 261. Origin and distribution of 
modern marine carbonate sediments as models for interpretation of ancient 
limestone and dolomite facies complexes. Laboratory experience in thin section 
petrography of skeletal and nonskeletal carbonate grains, and rock compositions 
and fabrics. 

346. Advanced Sedimentation. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 261 or consent. (Required field trips at 
student's expense.) Origin of sedimentary rocks; principles involved in interpre- 
tation of ancient geography, climates, animals, and plants. Emphasis on detrital 
sediments and rocks. 

351. Tectonics. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152 and 261 or consent; Math. 15; undergraduates need 
consent. Theories of large-scale deformational processes operating within the 
earth's crust and mantile emphasizing regional structural geology outside the 
Appalachians. [Offered in Spring of even years.) 

352. Exploration Geophysics 1. 1. 4 hr. PR: Math. 15, Geol. 152, 261, or equiv. Studies in 
applied geophysics with particular emphasis on techniques in reflection and 
refraction seismology, and gravity, and their application to energy resource 
exploration. (3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.) 

353. Expioration Geophysics 2. II. 4 hr. PR: Math. 15, Geol. 152, 261 or equiv. Geologic 
interpretation of geophysical data with emphasis placed on structural and 
stratigraphic interpretation of seismic records in explorations for hydrocarbon 
deposits. 

357. Basin Structures. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 152, 261, or equiv. The origin, development, and 
distribution of basins and the structure found within basins throughout the world 
are studied. The distribution of energy-related minerals related to basins and 
structural accumulations are emphasized. 

363. Groundwater Hydrology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or consent. Study of the principles of 
groundwater hydrology; occurrence, development, uses, and conservation of 
groundwater. 

GEOLOGY 161 



364. Advanced Groundwater Hydrology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 2, 363 or consent. Review 
of groundwater exploration, flow, and quality in various geologic terrains. 
Groundwater pollution and other environmental effects are covered, along with 
well pumping tests and modeling of groundwater flow. 

376. Coal Petrology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 274 or consent. Microscopic examination and 
determination of optical properties of coals, environment of deposition, diagenesis, 
and metamorphism of coals; coal chemistry and petrography. 

385. Optical Mineralogy and Sedimentary Petrology. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 185 and one year 
of physics. Principles and practice in use of the petrographic microscope in 
identification of minerals by the immersion method and thin section; emphasis on 
sedimentary petrology. 

394. Physical Geochemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 184, 185; Chem. 16. Phase diagrams, 
metamorphic facies, origin of the elements, chemical properties of ions, crystal 
chemistry of minerals, element distributions and geochemical cycles. (Offered in 
Fall of even years.) 

395. Aqueous Geochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. l.Chem. 16, orconsent. Review of basic 
chemical principles as they apply to aqueous geologic environments. Properties of 
water and the types, sources, and controls of the common and environmentally 
significant chemical species dissolved in water. 

399. Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212 or 311, Geog. 200 or 
consent. Brief review and introduction to multivariate quantitative techniques as 
applied to geology and geography. (Also listed as Geog. 399.) 

420. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-12 hr. Includes separate courses in karst, advanced 
hydrology, instrumentation, paleoecology, regional geology, paleobiogeography, 
advanced coal petrology, and advanced paleontology. 

432. Micropaleontoiogy. 1. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 231. Identification of Foraminifera, Ostracoda, 
and conodonts; emphasis on classification, nomenclature, and use of paleonto- 
logical literature. [Offered in Fall of even years.) 

492. Non-Thesis Research. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised non-thesis research 
for M.S. Options 2, 3, and 4. Report required by arranged deadline. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. 

HISTORY 

Robert M. Maxon, Chairperson of the Department 

202 Woodburn Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bagby, Blobaum, Connell, Doherty, Hammersmith, Howe, 

Lewis, Maxon, Maxwell, McCluskey, and Super. Associate Members Arnett, Hudson, 

McLeod, O'Brien, Parkinson, and Zagarri. 

The Department of History offers graduate courses in the history of the 
United States, Europe, Africa, Asia, Latin America, and science and tech- 
nology. Courses are designed to prepare students in historiography, research 
methods, and interpretation. Students can select concentrations leading to 
preparation for careers in teaching and scholarship and as specialists for 
various branches of government, business, and service. Students in the 
program are normally expected to pursue the degrees of Master of Arts, the 
Master of Arts option in public history, or the Doctor of Philosophy. 

162 HISTORY 



Master of Arts (M.A.) 

Admission. Students seeking admission to the M.A. program should have 
the equivalent of a bachelor's degree in history. Application requirements 
include transcripts (a minimum of a 3.0 average in history courses is 
expected), three letters of recommendation, and scores on the Graduate 
Record Examination General Aptitude Test. 

Requirements. Completion of a minimum of 30 hours of course work with 
at least a B grade, and achievement of a reading proficiency in one foreign 
language. All 30 hours may be in history, or students may select up to 6 hours 
outside of the department. The history course work shall include a well- 
defined core area (selected from the fields listed for comprehensive exami- 
nations or approved by the graduate studies committee) of at least 12 hours. In 
addition, students are expected to enroll continuously in Hist. 499— Depart- 
ment Colloquium. Credit for this course does not count towards the degree. 
Students are also required to complete a master's thesis. A maximum of 6 
hours of credit for Hist. 497, Research, can be taken for writing the thesis and 
for fulfilling the 30-hour M.A. requirement. Candidates for the M.A. are 
required to pass a final oral examination on their core area of study and thesis. 

M.A. Option in Public History 

The department offers an M.A. option in public history. This option is 
intended to provide enhanced employment opportunities to graduate students 
interested in using their education in history in a profession other than 
teaching. Extensive resources of the state are used for interpretation and 
preservation. This is the only full public history graduate curriculum in West 
Virginia. 

The public history option is open to selected students in the M.A. 
program. Students apply for admission as they would for the regular M.A. 
program, and should indicate on their application that they are interested in 
public history. In addition, students should submit a two-page letter of 
application, which should indicate the student's background in history or 
public history and why the student wants to be admitted to the option; this 
letter should be addressed to the Chairperson of the Department of History. 
Students may be admitted to the option who do not have a major in history by 
making up deficiencies in their course work for undergraduate credit; these 
courses may be taken while the students are enrolled for graduate classes or 
students may be able to test out of some courses. 

The public history option consists of 15 hours of public history courses 
(introduction to public history, two of three methods courses in historical 
editing, archival management, historic site intepretation and preservation, 
and a 6-hour supervised internship). Special topics courses are occasionally 
offered in historic preservation and may be taken in lieu of courses outside the 
Department of History. Students are required to take a 300-400 level 
readings/research seminar sequence in one subject area in the Department of 
History outside public history. Course descriptions, syllabi, policies and 
procedures, and a list of internship possibilities are available at the Depart- 
ment of History on request by contacting the coordinator of the public history 
option. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Admission. Students seeking admission to the Ph.D. program should 
have the equivalent of a M.A. in history. Application requirements include a 

HISTORY 163 



transcript (a minimum of a 3.0 average in graduate history courses is 
required), three letters of recommendation, and scores on the Graduate 
Record Examination General Aptitude Test. Students should also include a 
statement of purpose and an example of their written work as a part of the 
application. 

Requirements. Requirements for the Ph.D. degree in history include the 
general WVU requirements; a reading knowledge of two foreign languages; 
completion of two readings/seminar sequences beyond those offered for the 
M.A.; completion of one graduate-level historiography course; continuous 
enrollment in Hist. 499 — Department Colloquium; passing the Ph.D. compre- 
hensive examination of two parts (oral and written) administered by a 
committee of faculty members (normally at the end of a full-time student's 
second year of study); preparation of an acceptable dissertation based on 
original investigation, and successful defense of the dissertation in a final 
examination. 

A candidate must offer a program of study in four fields, at least three of 
which must be in history; the other may be in a related field approved by the 
department. The department does not accept courses toward a degree with a 
grade lower than a B. Fields available in the department include ancient- 
medieval, Europe: 1350-1815, Europe since 1789, United States to 1865, 
United States since 1865, Africa, Asia, Latin America, history of science, and 
Britain. 

Dissertation work should normally be modern America, Appalachian/re- 
gional, or modern Africa. 

Students working in these areas, either at the M.A. or Ph.D. level, have 
the opportunity to study with adjunct professors and faculty from other 
departments and universities. 

Program in the History of Science and Technology 

Students interested in pursuing a field in this area should consult 
Professor Emory L. Kemp at the history of science and technology office in 
G-14 Woodburn Hall. 

Faculty includes Emory L. Kemp, Ph.D. (U. 111.), Professor, and Gregory 
A. Good, Ph.D. (U. Toronto), Assistant Professor. 

History (Hist.) 

200. Greece and Rome. 3 hr. Covers the Minoan and Mycenaean civilizations, Archaic 
and Classical Greece, Alexander the Great and the Hellenistic Age, the Roman 
Republic, and Etruscan and Carthaginian states, and the rise of the Roman Empire. 

201. Social and Economic History of the Middle Ages, 300-1000. 3 hr. (Hist. 103 is 
recommended as preparation.) Topics include the social-economic crisis of the late 
Roman and German institutions, the Merovingian and Carolingian economics, 
Pierenne Thesis, and transition to feudal society. 

202. Social and Economic History of the Middle Ages, 1000-1500. 3 hr. (Hist. 103, 201 
are recommended as preparation.) Feudal society, land and population expansion, 
fairs, towns, leagues, Italian leadership, crusades, church influence, black death, 
fourteenth-century revolts, and general decline of the late Middle Ages. 

204. Ancient and Medieval Science. I. 3 hr. Examination of scientific achievements 
from ancient myths to medieval philosophies of nature. Stresses the internal 
coherence of the approaches to nature taken by various cultures. No scientific 
background is assumed. 

164 HISTORY 



205. The Renaissance. 3 hr. The underlying political, economic, and social structure of 
fourteenth and fifteenth century Italy with concentration on the significant 
intellectual and cultural trends which characterized the age. Some consideration 
given to the problem of the impact of the early Reformation movement upon 
Renaissance culture. 

206. The Reformation. 3 hr. Distinguishing theological characteristics of the major 
Reformation movements with concentration on the effect of religious-intellectual 
crisis on the political and social structure of the sixteenth century. 

207. Early European Science and Culture. 3 hr. Examination of European intellectual 
history from the Renaissance to the early eighteenth century with particular 
attention being paid to contribution of Copernicus, Bacon, Descartes, Kepler, 
Galileo, and Newton. 

208. Science and Society, 1750-1914. 3 hr. Historical examination of the relationship 
between science and technology with particular attention being paid to the 
doctrines of Positivism, Darwinism, and Scientific Socialism. 

209. Brazil: Colony to World Power. 3 hr. Examines the transition of Brazil from a 
colony to a world power, with special emphasis on recent economic developments, 
regional diversity, political patterns, foreign affairs, and race relations. 

210. Modern Spain. 3 hr. Survey of the Moslem, Hapsburg, and Bourbon periods 
followed by an examination of modern political and social forces, the Civil War, 
and the rule of Franco. 

211. Technology in the Industrial Revolution. I. 3 hr. Technological and social change in 
Great Britain and United States. Case studies illustrating the nature of techno- 
logical development and providing an understanding of the ways in which 
technology has shaped human experience. 

212. Introduction to Public History. 3 hr. Introduction to a wide range of career 
possibilities for historians in areas such as archives, historical societies, editing 
projects, museums, business, libraries, and historic preservation. Lectures, guest 
speakers, field trips, individual projects. 

213. Bourbon France. 3 hr. French history from the reign of Henry IV to the reign of 
Louis XVI. Special attention given to the reigns of Louis XIII and Louis XIV. 
Political, cultural, and intellectual history emphasized. 

214. The Revolutionary-Napoleonic Era. 3 hr. French history from mid-eighteenth 
century to 1815. Special attention given to the background of the French 
Revolution of 1789, to the political and social history of the revolution, and to 
Napoleon's nonmilitary achievements. 

215. European Diplomatic History, 1815 to 1919. 3 hr. Develops an understanding of the 
forces, men, and events which determined diplomatic relations between the major 
powers. 

216. European Diplomatic History, 1919 to Present. 3 hr. Scope similar to Hist. 215. 

219. Revolutionary Russia, 1905-1939. 3 hr. Detailed study of the revolutionary era of 
Russian/Soviet history with emphasis on the origins of Russian radicalism, the 
upheavals of 1905 and 1917, and Stalin's "revolution from above." 

220. The U.S.S.R., 1939 to Present. 3 hr. Detailed study of the recent social and political 
history of the Soviet Union. The Soviet experience in World War II, Stalin's last 
years, and the conflict between reformism and conservatism since Stalin's death. 

222. Twentieth-Century Germany from Weimar to Bonn. 3 hr. The Weimar Republic, 
the Third Reich, and the two German states created after World War II. 

HISTORY 165 



225. History of Modern China. 3 hr. Introduction to modern China (since 1839) with 
attention to China's Confucian heritage; examines in detail the Chinese effort to 
modernize in the face of Western diplomatic and economic pressure; specific 
attention to China's Nationalist and Communist revolutionary traditions. 

226. History of Modern Japan. 3 hr. Modern Japan (since 1868) with attention to the 
development of Japanese institutions and ideas in earlier periods, especially the 
Tokugawa Era (1600-1868); examines the rapid pace of economic change in the 
nineteenth and twentieth centuries along with the important social, political, and 
diplomatic implications of this change. 

227. East Africa to 1895. 3 hr. East Africa from earliest times to beginning of European 
control. Population movement and interaction, development of varying types of 
polity, revolutionary changes, and the European scramble for East Africa form the 
major focus. 

228. East Africa Since 1895. 3 hr. History of colonial rule and movement to independence 
in East Africa. Political, economic, and social changes will be examined with 
particular emphasis on the rise and triumph of African nationalism. 

229. History of Africa: Pre-Colonial. 3 hr. History of Africa from earliest times to the 
middle of the nineteenth century. Particular emphasis on population movement 
and interaction, state formation, and the development of trade in sub-Saharan 
Africa as well as the impact of such external influences as Christianity and Islam. 

230. History of Africa: European Dominance to Independence. 3 hr. History of Africa 
from the middle of the nineteenth century to the 1960s. Political and economic 
trends will form major focus. 

231. Seventeenth Century Britain, 1603-1715. 3 hr. The more significant political, 
social, economic, religious, and intellectual developments of Britain during a 
century of revolution and of the men and women who interacted with those 
movements. 

232. Eighteenth Century Britain, 1715-1832. 3 hr. The Age of Aristocracy, the political, 
social, religious, economic, and intellectual forces which produced it, and the 
reasons for its decline under the combined impact of the Industrial, Agricultural, 
American, and French revolutions. 

241. English Social History, Fourteenth to Eighteenth Century. 3 hr. Topical examination 
of English society from the time of Chaucer to Milton. Major topics: society in town 
and country, economy, politics, religion, and thought. 

242. English Social History, Eighteenth Century to the Present. 3 hr. Topical exami- 
nation of English society from the time of Queen Anne to the present. 

245. History of American Women. 3 hr. Examination of the history of American women 
from 1607 to the present, with emphasis on working conditions, women's rights, 
development of feminism, women's role in wartime, and women in the family. 

246. History of European Women. 3 hr. A survey of the history of European women 
from antiquity to the present, with emphasis on the philosophic, economic, and 
societal sources of women's oppression and on women's role in work, the family, 
and feminist movements. 

251. History of Black People in America to 1900. 3 hr. Slave trade and evolution of 
slavery in the New World, the attack upon slavery and its destruction, the South 
and the blacks during Reconstruction, and the age of Reaction and Racism, 
1875-1900. 

252. Afro-American History Since 1865. 3 hr. Reconstruction, the age reaction and 
racism, black migration, black nationalism, blacks in the world wars, and 
desegregation. 

166 HISTORY 



253. Civil War and Reconstruction. 3 hr. Causes as well as the constitutional and 
diplomatic aspects of the Civil War; the role of the American black in slavery, in 
war, and in freedom; and the economic and political aspects of Congressional 
Reconstruction. 

257. The United States From McKinley to the New Deal, 1896 to 1933. 3 hr. American 
national history from William McKinley to Franklin D. Roosevelt. Particular 
attention is given to the great changes in American life after 1896; national, 
political, economic, social, and cultural development; the Progressive Era in 
American politics; and alterations in American foreign relations resulting from the 
Spanish-American War and World War I. 

259. Recent American History, 1933 to Present. 3 hr. Detailed study of American 
national history from the inauguration of Franklin D. Roosevelt to the present. 
Emphasis on the New Deal; on Roosevelt's foreign policies and their impact on 
American social, technological, and cultural developments; and United States 
domestic problems and foreign relations since 1945. 

263. American Diplomacy to 1918. 3 hr. (Assumes some knowledge of the period such 
as that obtained in Hist. 52 and 53.} American foreign policy and diplomacy from 
the adoption of the Constitution to the end of World War I. 

264. American Foreign Policy and Diplomacy, 1918 to the Present. 3 hr. (Assumes some 
knowledge of the period such as that obtained in Hist. 2, 53, or 161.) America's 
foreign policy and growing involvement in international relations including the 
U.S. role in World War II, the Korean War, and Vietnam. 

266. American Economic History to 1865. 3 hr. Origins and development of American 
business, agricultural, and labor institutions; problems, and policies, from 1600 to 
1865; influence of economic factors upon American history during this period. 

267. American Economic History Since 1865. 3 hr. Scope similar to that stated for Hist. 
266. 

268. The Old South. 3 hr. (For advanced undergraduate and graduate students.] 
History of the South — exploring peculiar differences that led to an attempt to 
establish a separate nation. The geographical limitation permits a detailed study 
of economic and social forces within the context of the larger national history. 

269. The New South. 3 hr. Integration of the South into the nation after the Civil War. 
Emphasis on southern attitudes toward industrialization, commercial agriculture, 
organized labor, and the black. Special attention to the southern literary renais- 
sance and conservative and progressive politics of the southern people. 

273. Appalachian Regional History. 3 hr. Historical survey of Central Appalachia's 
three phases of development: traditional society of the nineteenth century, the 
transformation of a mountain society by industrialization at the turn of the 
twentieth century, and contemporary Appalachia. 

274. The City in American History. 3 hr. A survey of urban history in the United States, 
including the Colonial period, with emphasis on the nineteenth and twentieth 
centuries, focusing on physical development of cities (planning, transportation, 
architecture, suburbanization) and social history. 

290. Introduction to Historical Research. 3 hr. (Required for History majors; non- 
majors by consent.) Introduction to research techniques useful for history. 
Instruction in locating sources, taking notes, and writing research papers. 

301. Readings in Medieval History. 3-6 hr. Crusades and intellectual history are the 
focus. Readings in preparation for the medieval field may be selected by graduates. 
Hist. 103 is urged strongly for undergraduates; also a reading knowledge of Latin, 
French or German is recommended for all students. 

HISTORY 167 



305. Readings in English History. 3-6 hr. Directed readings of scholarly books and 
articles, primarily in the history of England from about 1450 to about 1625 but 
with some opportunity for the student to fill gaps in the student's knowledge of 
other periods of English history. 

309. Readings in Central European History. 3-6 hr. All students will read and discuss 
selected works illustrating outstanding scholarship or interpretative problems 
related to fifteenth, sixteenth, and early seveneteenth century history. In addition, 
opportunity will be provided for each student to pursue an independent reading 
project tailored to the student's special interests. 

310. Historic Site Interpretation and Preservation. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Introduction to 
historic site interpretation and preservation, including establishing criteria, site 
inventory, and recording techniques using the "case study" method. Lectures, 
films, discussions, and field projects will introduce students to the rapidly 
growing area, including environmental impact work. 

311. Archival Management. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Principles and practices of archival 
work within a laboratory context. Includes lectures and selected readings 
illustrated by holdings and policies of West Virginia and Regional History 
Collection of the WVU Library. 

312. Practicum in Historical Editing. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Principles and practices of 
historical editing in a laboratory context. Includes lectures and readings with 
illustrations from ongoing editing projects. Student prepares materials from the 
West Virginia Collection of the WVU Library for publication. 

313. Readings in Eastern European History. 3-6 hr. Intensive readings on specific 
topics in Russian, Soviet or East European history. Students should normally have 
had History 117 and 118, or their equivalents. Primarily designed for graduate 
students and selected undergraduates. 

317. Readings in Western European History. 3-6 hr. This course, primarily for graduate 
students and selected undergraduates, is designed for an intensive reading 
program on special problems in western European history. 

321. Readings in Asian History. 3-6 hr. Intensive readings in the history of East Asia 
(especially China and Japan) since the nineteenth century; students should 
normally have had Hist. 225 and 226, or their equivalents; reviews, as well as 
bibliographical and historiographical essays, required. 

325. Readings in African History. 3-6 hr. This course will normally focus on readings 
and discussion on problems in the history of pre-colonial Africa, the major works 
in African history, and recent interpretations in the field. 

355. Readings in American History, 1763-1865. 3-6 hr. A course of supervised reading 
and reports designed to prepare students for intensive study in a seminar or for 
field examinations in the early national period. Students are expected to acquire 
comprehensive and detailed bibliographical knowledge. 

359. Readings in American History, 1850-1898. 3-6 hr. A survey of the narrative and 
interpretative literature of the Civil War, Reconstruction, and the Gilded Age. 
Students will be expected to make weekly or biweekly reports on assigned 
readings and also to prepare a critical essay on some aspect of American 
historiography for this period. 

363. Readings in American History, 1898 to Present. 3-6 hr. Readings and class-led 
discussion of one paperback book per week, and preparation of a paper based on 
these books and the class discussion of them. Usually concentrates on post-World 
War II foreign relations. 

373. Readings in Local and Regional History. 3-6 hr. A course for graduate students and 
seniors in the history of West Virginia and neighboring states, which form what is 
known as the Trans-Allegheny or Upper Ohio region. 

168 HISTORY 



375. Readings in Science and Technology. 3-6 hr. Directed reading of scholarly books 
and articles dealing with selected topics in the history of science and technology. 

381. Intellectual and Social History of the United States to 1876. 3 hr. The objective of 
the course is to establish for graduate students usable frames of reference for 
intellectual and social history. The basic premises of various historians are 
examined as they have been applied to the history of the United States before 1876. 

382. Intellectual and Social History of the United States Since 1876. 3 hr. A continuation 
of Hist. 381, with the same objective of establishing usable frames of reference for 
intellectual and social history, with the focus on the history of the United States 
since 1876. Special attention is devoted to the problems of very recent or 
contemporary history. 

391. The American Labor Movement. 3 hr. A readings course which emphasizes the 
various labor unions and labor's political activities in the United States from the 
eighteenth century to 1960. Careful attention is given to the economic and social 
conditions that have shaped the history of labor in this country. The course treats 
the story of American labor as an integral part of the history of the United States. 

392. History of American Agriculture. 3 hr. A readings course to acquaint students 
with the origins and evolution of American agriculture, with particular emphasis 
upon scientific, technological, and economic development; to familiarize them 
with some public and private agricultural organizations; and to give them an 
historical understanding of contemporary agricultural problems and policies. 

402. Seminar in Medieval History. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 301 and reading knowledge of Latin 
plus French or German or Italian. Crusades and intellectual history of Europe in 
the Middle Ages with emphasis on the period from 1000 to 1300. 

406. Seminar in English History. 3 hr. Directed research in selected topics in the history 
of England from about 1450 to about 1625. Training in bibliography, research 
methods, and paleography. 

410. Seminar in Central European History. 3 hr. An intensive survey of the biblio- 
graphical aids and printed source materials available in the field of Reformation 
history. A research paper and a bibliographical essay will be presented by each 
student. Reading knowledge of German and French strongly recommended. 

411. Internship in Public History. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212 and two of following: Hist. 310, 
311, 312. A professional internship at an agency involved in a relevant area of 
public history. Supervision will be exercised by both the Department of History 
and the host agency. Research report or finished professional project required. 

414. Seminar in Eastern European History. 3-6 hr. PR: Hist. 117, 118orequiv. Research 
seminar on selected topics in Russian, Soviet or East European history. One major 
paper and extensive reading based on available source materials is required. 

418. Seminar in Western European History. 3 hr. A research seminar in selected topics 
in western European history. Requirements: examinations, problem papers, 
research papers, and extensive reading. A reading knowledge of the appropriate 
languages is required. 

422. Seminar in Asian History. 3 hr. Advanced readings and research in East Asian 
history; specific emphasis on research tools and techniques; research paper based 
on English-language sources required; students should normally have had Hist. 
225 and 226 or their equivalents. 

426. Seminar in African History. 3 hr. The seminar will normally focus on Eastern 
Africa in the colonial period. Location and use of source materials will be 
emphasized as well as economic and political developments. Students will spend 
considerable time in research and writing on selected aspects of Eastern African 
history. 

HISTORY 169 



441. Seminar in Latin American History. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Survey of Latin American 
historiography, location and use of primary source materials, discussion of 
research techniques, and the writing of a research paper. Reading knowledge of 
Spanish, Portuguese, or French will be helpful. 

456. Seminar in American History, 1763-1865. 3 hr. Students work together and with 
the instructor on historical materials of the era, confronting the problems and 
learning the techniques for using different kinds of original materials. Periodic 
progress reports are required at each meeting and one major paper, derived 
primarily from the original materials being used. 

460. Seminar in American History, 1850-1898. 3 hr. Directed research in recent 
American history including guidance in method of research and manuscript 
preparation. 

464. Seminar in American History, 1898 to Present. 3 hr. Directed research in recent 
American history including guidance in method of research and manuscript 
preparation. 

474. Seminar in Local and Regional History. 3 hr. A seminar for graduate students in 
the history of West Virginia and neighboring states, which form what is known as 
the Trans-Allegheny or Upper Ohio region. 

475. Seminar in Science and Technology. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 375. Directed research in 
selected topics in the history of science and technology. 

477. American Historiography. 3 hr. A review of the major American historians and 
biographers and their interpretative studies. The nationalism, imperial, frontier, 
sectional, social and intellectual schools of history are studied as well as those 
historians who have concerned themselves with the problems of writing history. 

478. European Historiography. 3 hr. Readings of selected works representative of each 
of the following historical periods: Ancient, Medieval, Renaissance-Reformation, 
Early Modern, and Modern. Reports required with attention to style, purpose, 
philosophy, and methodology of the historians selected. Attention to trends, major 
breakthroughs, and classics in the writing of European history. Reading knowledge 
of Greek, Latin, French, German, or Italian an asset. 

481, 482. Special Problems. 1-3 hr. ea. 

490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college teaching 
of history. (Note: This course is intended to insure that graduate assistants are 
adequately prepared and supervised when they are given college teaching 
responsibilities.) 

493. Folger Institute Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (Enrollment is by special 
application only. Contact department chairperson for information.) Seminar 
conducted by distinguished scholars and held at the Folger Institute of Renaissance 
and Eighteenth Century Studies in Washington, D.C. Topics vary. (Also listed as 
Engl 493.) 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

HORTICULTURE 

Bradford C. Bearce, In Charge of Graduate Program in Horticulture 
2086 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Baugher, Blizzard, Ingle, and Singha. Associate Members 
Bearce, Hickman, and Young. 

The College of Agriculture and Forestry offers a Master of Science degree 
in horticulture based upon the biological and physiological sciences. Students 

170 HORTICULTURE 



entering the program must have an adequate background in agriculture, 
biology, and chemistry. Deficiencies in these areas must be corrected early in 
a student's program by enrollment in specified courses. Admission require- 
ments are those listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture and Forestry. 

The following courses must be completed with a passing grade before 
admittance to regular graduate student status: Hort. 107, one semester of 
organic chemistry, Biol. 169, and Agron. 2. 

The following courses must be completed with a passing grade before the 
Master of Science in Horticulture can be conferred: Hort. 204, Ento. 204, and 
PI. Path. 201. The credit hours from these may be counted toward the Master 
of Science degree in horticulture if they are taken as part of the last 10 hours of 
undergraduate course work with prior permission or if they are taken during 
graduate work. 

Faculty and facilities are available for thesis research in weed science, 
plant propagation, greenhouse management, ornamental production, tree and 
small fruit production, and fruit physiology and storage. A thesis is required. 
Graduates are employed by private industry, governmental agencies, and 
educational institutions, or become self employed. Horticulture students 
interested in studying for the Ph.D. degree enroll in the crop science option of 
Agronomy. 

Horticulture (Hort.) 

204. Plant Propagation. II. 3 hr. PR: PL Sc. 52 or consent. Study of practices of plant 
propagation and factors involved in reproduction in plants. 

242. Smail-Fruits. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Hort. 107, or consent. (One 2-day field trip 
required.) Taxonomic, physiological, and ecological principles involved in pro- 
duction and handling of small-fruits. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

243. Vegetable Crops. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. (One 3-day field trip required.) 
Botanical and ecological characteristics influencing the production of vegetable 
crops. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. [Offered in Fall of even years.) 

244. Handling and Storage of Horticultural Crops. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52; Chem. 16. 
Characteristics of perishable crops. Methods and materials used to maintain 
quality. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

245. Greenhouse Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Two semesters of Inorganic Chemistry and 
Hort. 107 or consent. Greenhouse as a controlled plant environment. How to 
regulate factors influencing plant growth and development within specialized 
environments of greenhouses. 

246. Tree Fruits. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. Principles and practices involved in 
production of tree fruits. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

301. Post-Harvest Physiology. II. 3 hr. Physiology and biochemistry of harvested 
crops. 1 lee, 2 labs. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

HORTICULTURE 171 



INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 

Ralph W. Plummer, Chairperson of the Department 
727 Engineering Sciences Building 
Degrees Offered: M.S.I.E., M.S.E., M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Ahluwalia, Byrd, Creese, Iskander, Jaraiedi, Moore, 
Myers, Nunez, Plummer, Stobbe, and Tompkins. Associate Member Fowler. 

Graduate programs in industrial engineering are designed to give 
students experience in developing innovative solutions to real problems. 
Innovation in this case implies the implementation of creative ideas, in 
contrast to pure research, which is conducted without an intended potential 
use. In this context, graduate students in the department are actively involved 
with the people and organizations that need creative solutions to real 
problems. Graduate students can expect to develop their creative abilities to 
be effective in innovative environments while developing their abilities to 
communicate and working with individuals to implement new ideas. 

Master of Science in Industrial Engineering (M.S.I. E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 
Master of Science (M.S.) 

Three degrees are offered at the master's level: M.S. I.E., M.S.E., and an 
M.S. with an emphasis in Occupational Health and Safety Engineering. The 
M.S. I.E. degree program is appropriate for students with a B.S. in Industrial 
Engineering, whereas the M.S.E. degree program is designed for students 
having a baccalaureate degree in a technical field other than industrial 
engineering who wish to pursue a broader, more interdisciplinary program of 
graduate studies. In both the M.S. I.E. and the M.S.E. degree programs, 
students will select courses in decision sciences and production systems, 
manufacturing systems, or the ergonomics areas. A description and listing of 
requirements for the M.S. in Occupational Health and Safety Engineering, 
which is administered by the Department of Industrial Engineering, are 
presented elsewhere in Part 2 of this catalog. 

An undergraduate degree in either another engineering field or the basic 
sciences is required for admission to both the M.S.E. and M.S. programs. 
Students trained in the areas of mathematics, statistics, physics, and 
computer science are generally well prepared for graduate study with an 
emphasis in decision sciences/operations research techniques, or production 
systems, while many chemistry and biology majors will find excellent career 
opportunities in the field of occupational health and safety. The M.S. program 
is designed specifically for this latter group of students. 

Students must comply with the rules and regulations as outlined in Part 5 
of this catalog for graduate work in the College of Engineering. Each master's 
candidate must follow a planned program of study which contains a minimum 
of 30 semester credit hours, including a thesis of not more than 6 hours of 
research or 36 credit hours, including a problem report of not more than 3 
hours of credit. 

Required courses for the M.S. I.E. and the M.S.E. are determined by the 
emphasis area of the student (i.e., decision sciences, manufacturing systems, 
or applied ergonomics) and can be obtained by writing to the department. 
M.S. in Occupational Health and Safety Engineering course requirements are 
listed elsewhere in Part 2 of this catalog. Specific requirements may be 
obtained by writing to the department. 

172 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 



As a general rule, each student must satisfy the listed prerequisites for 
each course included in his/her graduate plan of study. Prerequisite deficien- 
cies are usually made up by taking the necessary prerequisite courses, which 
will be included in the plan of study, but normally are not counted for credit 
toward the master's degree. However, certain prerequisite courses can be 
taken by examination. 

While required credit in research (I.E. 497) is devoted to a problem report 
or thesis preparation, neither is automatically approved after the required 
number of semester hours of research work have been completed. The thesis 
or problem report must conform with the general requirements of the 
University and with the written requirements of the Department of Industrial 
Engineering. 

Final Examination. A candidate will be required to pass an oral exami- 
nation on course work and the thesis or problem report. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) must comply 
with the rules and regulations of the College of Engineering and the 
University. A program with a major in industrial engineering, designed to 
meet the needs and objectives of each student, will be developed in consultation 
with the student's adviser and the student's Advisory and Examining 
Committee. Early in the doctoral program the student must pass an exami- 
nation to demonstrate master's-level proficiency in industrial engineering 
subject matter. Upon completion of the course work, the student must pass an 
examination to be admitted to candidacy. An acceptable dissertation must be 
written. 

Industrial Engineering (I.E.) 

200. Manufacturing Processes. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 105; Cone: M.A.E. 43. Lectures, demon- 
strations, and laboratory work relating to methods, materials, properties, and 
equipment, and characteristics of machining, casting, joining, and forming 
operations. Engineering and economic analysis of the processes. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

201. Principles of Solidification. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200 or consent. Material and energy 
balances, solidification of metals, riser and gating systems for castings, fluidity of 
metal, casting design, and molding processes. 

202. Manufacturing Processes. 2 hr. PR: Ch.E. 105, M.A.E. 43. Lectures and demonstra- 
tions relating to materials, properties, parameters, design, equipment, economics 
and computer control of processing systems emphasizing casting, machining, 
joining and forming operations. 

203. Manufacturing Processes Laboratory. 1 hr. Coreq.: I.E. 202. Laboratory experiments 
and demonstrations of the basic manufacturing operations of casting, machining 
and joining. Process parameter measurement, inspection techniques and CNC 
programming are performed and laboratory report writing is emphasized. 

214. Analysis of Engineering Data. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113. Introduction to linear statistical 
models. Design and analysis of simpler experimental configurations occurring 
frequently in engineering studies. Similarities and differences between regression 
and experimental design models emphasized in a vector-matrix setting. 

215. Statistical Decision Making. 3 hr. PR or Cone: I.E. 113. Basic concepts of 
probability theory. Discrete and continuous distributions, joint and derived 
distributions, with application to industrial and research problems. Introduction 
to generating functions and Markov chains. 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 173 



216. Industrial Quality Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113. Principles and methods for 
controlling the quality of manufactured products, with emphasis on both economic 
and statistical aspects of product acceptance and process control. 

222. ]ob Evaluation and Wage Incentives. 3 hr. Principles used in evaluating jobs, rates 
of pay, characteristics and objectives of wage incentive plans; incentive formulae 
and curves. 

240. Labor and Productivity. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The work force as a critical element of 
productivity. Topics include industrial engineering involvement in collective 
bargaining, labor relations, and work practices. 

242. Production Planning and Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 140; Cone: I.E. 214. Principles and 
problems in forecasting, aggregate planning, material management, scheduling, 
routing, and line balancing. 

243. Facility Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 242, 250. Problems of facility and 
equipment location. Long-range planning of industrial facilities. Block and 
detailed layout of manufacturing plants and general offices. Space utilization and 
allied topics in facility design. 

249. Design of Dynamic Materials Systems. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 140 or consent. Application of 
industrial engineering theory and practice to selection of material systems and 
equipment including efficient handling of materials from first movement of raw 
materials to final movement of finished product. Present quantitative design 
techniques. 

250. Introduction to Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113, 281. Basic tools and 
philosophies of operations research. Tools include: linear programming, Markov 
chains, queueing theory, and simulation. Other operations research techniques are 
presented as they relate to the overall systems philosophy. 

251. Analytical Techniques of Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 or consent. 
Nonlinear optimization techniques useful in operations research and industrial 
engineering studies. Classical optimization techniques, quadratic, geometric, and 
dynamic programming, branch and bound and gradient techniques. 

259. Introduction to Systems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250, or consent. Quantitative 
synthesis of OR models. Definition of terms. Development and testing of 
assumptions, objectives, and restrictions. Measurement of parameters in the 
model. Optimization techniques and error sensitivity of the optimal solution. 
Implementing, utilizing, and upgrading the model. 

260. Human Factors Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and I.E. 140 or equiv. Includes the 
study of ambient environment, human capabilities, and equipment design. 
Systems design for the man-machine environment interfaces will be studied with 
emphasis on health, safety, and productivity. 

261. System Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The concepts of hazard recognition, 
evaluation analysis, and the application of engineering design principles to the 
control of industrial hazards. 

277. Engineering Economy. 3 hr. Basic concepts of financial analysis investment 
planning and cost controls as they apply to management technology investment in 
manufacturing; financial planning and budgeting as applied to an engineering 
function. 

280. Industrial Engineering Problems. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Special problems. 

281. Computer Applications in Industrial Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Engr. 2, I.E. 140. 
Introduction to computer applications in manufacturing. Emphasis on system 
design and analysis and the role of computers in productivity improvement. 

174 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 



282. Digital Computer Concepts. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 or consent. Principles of digital 
computer functional components. Study of digital operating systems including 
structure of the various subsystem components such as monitors, input control 
systems, and loaders. 

283. information Retrieval. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 or consent. Tools, elements, and theories of 
information storage and retrieval. Documentation, information framework; in- 
dexing; elements of usage, organization, and equipment; parameters and imple- 
mentation; theories of file organizations and system design. 

284. Simulation by Digital Methods. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113, 281, or consent. Introduction to 
Monte Carlo simulation methods and their application to decision problems. 
Student identifies constraints on problems, collects data for modeling, and 
develops computer programs to simulate and analyze practical situations. Inter- 
pretation of results emphasized. 

291. Design of Production Systems 1. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in industrial engineering. 
The integration of industrial engineering principles in the design of productive 
systems. Emphasis will be on the analysis of different systems for productivity 
improvement. 

292. Design of Productive Systems 2. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in industrial engineering. 
Continuation of I.E. 291. 

300. Special Topics in Manufacturing Processes and Automation. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200 or 
equiv. Special topics concerning manufacturing processes and automation with 
special emphasis on manufacturing management. 

302. Advanced Manufacturing Processes. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200. Metal cutting economic 
models, solidification processes, bulk deformation, sheet metal and drawing, 
joining design and economics. Overall view of manufacturing systems. Introduction 
to numerical control programming and projects on numerical control equipment. 

304. Materials and Processing Systems Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200. The engineering 
design process, material design properties and selection systems, decision making 
and problem analysis techniques for materials and processing. Economic and cost 
systems, expert systems, failure analysis and quality systems for materials and 
process selection. 

308. Advanced Problems in Manufacturing Engineering. 1-3 hr. PR: I.E. 300 or 302; 
graduate standing. Special problems relating to one of the areas of manufacturing 
engineering, such as manufacturing processes, robotics, CAD/CAM, group tech- 
nology, and manufacturing systems engineering. 

314. Design of Industrial Experiments. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 214 or consent. Continuation of I.E. 
214. More complex experimental design especially useful to engineering and 
industrial researchers, including factorials and optimum-seeking design. Emphasis 
on use of existing digital computer routines and interpretation of results. 

325. Engineering Management. 3 hr. Unique problems of engineering organizations 
including project planning, managing creativity, coordinating design and devel- 
opment, and other topics relevant to engineering organizations. 

338. Technology Forecasting. 3 hr. Various procedures used in forecasting technical 
developments. 

339. Technology Assessment. 3 hr. Various procedures used in technology assessment. 
Implications of technology in various aspects of society will be stressed. 

340. Work Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of industrial engineering's involvement 
in analyzing work situations. Particular emphasis will be given to the use of 
industrial engineering as a change agent in improving work practices. 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 175 



341. Methods Analysis and Work Simplification. 3 hr. Advanced study of the 
techniques of methods analysis, including modern means of methods research. 
Development of appropriate cost analysis to accompany improved operating 
plans. A study of the design, installation, and administration of work simplification 
programs, suggestion systems, and remuneration policies, and the means of intra- 
plant communications concerning such programs. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

342. Advanced Production Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250. Different mathematical models 
useful in the design of effective production control systems. The various models 
include: static production control models under risk and uncertainty; dynamic 
models under certainty, under uncertainty, and under risk. 

353. Applied Linear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Application of the 
assignment, transportation, and simplex algorithms to typical industrial problems. 
The methods and computational efficiencies of the revised simplex and other 
algorithms are also studied. 

354. Case Studies in Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The applications of 
operations research procedures. Examination of factors which lead to successful 
model building through case studies. 

355. Scheduling and Sequencing Methods. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250. Theory and applications of 
analytical models used in the scheduling of operations. Topics include: single 
machine scheduling models; flow shop models; job shop models; and assembly line 
balancing methods. 

358. Special Topics in Systems Analysis and Operations Research. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. 
Special topics from recent developments in operations research and related fields. 
Special emphasis will be placed on interests of current graduate students. 

359. Operations Research for Public Administrators. 3 hr. Examination of role of 
quantitative analysis in public administration and decision-making. 

360. Human Factors System Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or consent. Theoretical aspects 
and practical applications of man/machine relationships as they influence future 
system design. The student will examine human limitations with respect to 
acceptance of information, decision making, and ability to transmit the result of 
such decisions to controlled equipment systems to obtain design optimization. 2 
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

361. Industrial Hygiene Engineering. 3 hr. Introductory course in industrial hygiene 
legal standards, historical context, and development. Topics include respiratory 
physiology, particle size and deposition, ionizing and nonionizing radiation, 
physical stress, solvents, metals, pesticides, painting, welding, and degreasing. 

362. Systems Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 261 or consent. Analysis of manufac- 
turing methods, processes, and properties of materials from a system safety 
engineering viewpoint. Emphasis will be on hazard analysis techniques (fault tree, 
MORT, failure modes and effects) and machine guarding methods. 

364. Industrial Ergonomics. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or consent. Practical experience in the 
application of ergonomic principles to industrial problems. Safety and production 
implications of work physiology, industrial biomechanics, and circardian rhythms, 
as well as current interest topics. 

368. Advanced Problems in Human Factors. 1-3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or 360 and graduate 
standing. Special problems relating to one of the areas of human factors, such as 
simulation, controls, vigilance, safety, and occupational health. 

377. Advanced Engineering Economy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Special emphasis on depre- 
ciation, engineering and economic aspects of selection and replacement of 
equipment; relationship of technical economy to income taxation; effect of 
borrowed capital and pricing model. 

176 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 



381. integrated Data Processing. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 and consent. Advanced work in 
electronic data-processing systems and procedures design. Case studies of 
integrated data-processing systems. Course projects will include individual use of 
a computer in management data-processing analysis problems. 

385. Digital Computer Applications. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing in engineering, physical 
science or mathematics. Special study of selected programming languages. 

389. Special Topics in Industrial Data-Processing Systems. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 or consent. 
Selected topics relating to industrial applications of computer and data-processing 
systems. Emphasis on applications not in the FORTRAN language. 

451. Nonlinear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Advanced study of the 
techniques of nonlinear programming and their applications. Topics include 
steepest descent, Newton's method, Fletcher-Powell, conjugate gradients, Powell's 
method, and penalty function methods. 

452. Queueing Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and 250 or consent. Analytical modeling of 
waiting line systems with emphasis on determining the best operating conditions 
for those systems. Single-channel and multi-channel models. Computational 
methods (including Monte Carlo techniques) are examined. Applications to 
problems such as maintenance and inventory control. 

453. Theory of Linear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Study of procedures 
available for solving large-scale problems using linear programming. Topics 
include decomposition techniques, multiple pricing, cycling, inverse generation 
and storage, ranging procedures, and upper bound algorithms. 

454. Inventory Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and 250 or consent. Techniques used in 
optimization of inventory systems. Elements of static, deterministic inventory 
models, and static, stochastic inventory models. Dynamic inventory models. 
Selected topics related to inventory analysis. 

455. Probability Theory for Engineers. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 or consent. Probability theory 
and its application to industrial systems with particular emphasis on inventory, 
queueing, maintenance, reliability, and quality control systems. Markov processes 
are covered. 

456. Applied Stochastic Processes. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 455. Stochastic systems with emphasis 
on application to inventory and queueing theory. Conditional probability, Poisson 
processes, counting processes, renewal processes, Markov chains with discrete 
and continuous parameters. 

457. Dynamic Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Introduction to basic 
structure and computational aspects of dynamic programming and applications 
including sequential decision problems, deterministic and probabilistic models 
over finite and infinite planning horizons, and Markovian decision processes. 

458. Integer Programming and Applied Networks. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. 
Introduction to application of integer programming and maximum flow networks 
to engineering and operations research problems. Emphasis on problem formulation 
and solution. 

480. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Discussion of research in industrial engineering and 
special problems. 

484. Advanced Digital Simulation. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 284 or consent. Analysis and 
comparison of special purpose digital simulation languages such as GPSS, SLAM, 
SIMAN, SIMSCRIPT, CSMP, DYANOMO, and JOB SHOP simulation. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 177 



INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs 
412 Armstrong Hall 

Office of Graduate Programs, College of Business and Economics, 
West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 
Telephone: (304) 293-5408 
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. Option 

Graduate Faculty: Members Elkin, Schaupp, and Zeller. Associate Members Bucklew, 
Decker, Grasso, Humphreys, Miller, Smith, and Tapper. 

The Department of Industrial and Labor Relations offers a Master of 
Science in Industrial and Labor Relations (ILR). The AACSB accredited 
program of study prepares students for professional positions in human 
resources and labor relations. Course work can be structured to prepare 
students for doctoral studies in industrial and labor relations, economics, 
management, or law. 

The department operates, in conjunction with the Department of Economics 
Ph.D. program, an Industrial Relations Ph.D. option. M.S. students who plan 
to pursue the industrial relations option in the Ph.D. in Economics program 
should align their master's work with the degree requirements. 

Entry-level professional opportunities for ILR graduates include such 
positions as employee relations associate, assistant personnel manager, 
human resources administrator, labor relations representative, professional 
research analyst, compensation analyst and benefits administrator. Other 
positions include staff representative with organized labor, apprentice 
arbitrator, labor-management consultant, National Labor Relations Board 
field examiner, government employee relations representative, and employ- 
ment analyst. Most graduates are employed by Fortune 500 companies. Some 
find positions with organized labor, all levels of government, and advocacy 
organizations. The department, in conjunction with the WVU Career Services 
Center, makes a concerted effort to place graduates in positions that fulfill 
student job objectives. 

The curriculum is a blend of theory, analysis, and pragmatism. Core 
course work serves two purposes: to provide in-depth knowledge and skills 
pertaining to the human resource and labor relations functions of organi- 
zations, and to acquaint students with the operation of the other organizational 
functions. A substantial number of elective courses allows the student to 
tailor the curriculum to meet particular career goals and interests. More than 
50 faculty members in a dozen departments offer course work and/or conduct 
research in the human resources and ILR areas. 

Students are encouraged to participate in academic-related extra-curric- 
ular activities. Many are co-sponsored by the Industrial Relations Student 
Association and the department, including a speakers and workshops 
program, the ILR Newsletter, resume mailings, social events, and honors 
banquets. Outstanding academic achievement is recognized by membership 
in the Industrial Relations Honor Society. The faculty makes "Outstanding 
ILR Student" awards yearly to two persons selected on the basis of 
scholarship, informal leadership and extracurricular activities. 

Financial aid. A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition 
scholarships are available on a competitive basis. Major selection criteria 
include the applicant's grade-point average in prior academic work and 
GMAT scores. Graduate assistants are paid a cash stipend during the regular 
semesters that is competitive in amount with that offered by other universities; 



178 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



they are assigned to faculty members to assist in research, teaching and other 
academic endeavors. Additional scholarships are available on a competitive 
basis to minority students. Additional information and application forms can 
be obtained from the Director of Graduate Programs. 

Academic Common Market. The Master of Science program in Industrial 
and Labor Relations is an Academic Common Market program. Residents of 
Alabama, Arkansas, Florida, Georgia, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Mis- 
sissippi, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, or Virginia who are admitted to 
the MS-ILR program can pay tuition at West Virginia University's in-state 
(resident) rates. 

Admission. The Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations 
program is interdisciplinary in nature and no specific undergraduate major is 
required. Course work in computer science, labor economics, statistics, and 
business disciplines is helpful. Admission is competitive and on a space- 
available basis. 

To gain admission into the program, an applicant must have a bachelor's 
degree (in any field) from an accredited college or university and a grade- 
point average of at least 3.0 (either overall or on the last 60 credit-hours of 
undergraduate and/or graduate work completed). In addition, the applicant 
must have a Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) score of at least 
500. Applicants with a GPA below 3.0 (or a GMAT below 500) must show a 
correspondingly higher GMAT (or GPA) achievement. International students 
must also submit a satisfactory TOEFL score. 

Although not required, applicants may wish to send additional supportive 
material, including letters in support of their application, reference letters, a 
resume of work experience, and an example of written work. 

Students may enter the graduate program in any semester/session. 
Application deadlines are July 1 for the fall semester, December 1 for the 
spring semester, and April 1 for the summer sessions. Later applications, 
while acceptable, may diminish the changes for admission due to the graduate 
class being filled. Since no admission decision can be made without the 
applicant's GMAT score being submitted, applicants should keep in mind the 
GMAT test schedule. 

Institute of Industrial and Labor Relations 

The mission of the Institute of Industrial and Labor Relations (IILR) is to 
coordinate instruction, research, and public service activities, which embrace 
a study of the elements of human resources development uniquely identified 
with the economy of West Virginia. Membership is open to faculty who have 
an interest in the mission of the IILR. 

The IILR serves as a means of rational response to economic trends based 
on an amalgamation of the three University functions: faculty/student 
research on a continuing basis in search of human resource development 
possibilities; use of research results in credit instruction to produce a growing 
cadre of graduates aware of and trained to be able to contribute to the state's 
economic goals; and, using both of the former, extension and public service 
efforts designed to place the state's human resource development and use 
activities on their most economically rational courses. 

Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations 

The Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations has a two-part 
core. The total length of the program will not be greater than 47 semester 
hours nor less than 42 hours. Program length depends upon the composition of 
course work taken as an undergraduate. 

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 179 



ILR Core 

The required ILR core classes are designed to provide a solid, multidisci- 
plinary foundation of ILR theory and practice. ILR 314 presents an overview 
of ILR theory, practice, and issues from a management perspective. Its 
counterpart is ILR 316 which covers the same subjects from the perspective of 
organized labor. In ILR 312 the concepts of industrial psychology are applied 
to ILR. An eclectic view of collective bargaining and labor relations complete 
the sequence (ILR 262). 

The 12 hours of required ILR core are: 

Hr. 

ILR 262— Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations 3 

ILR 312 — Organizational Theory, 

Behavior and Communication 3 

ILR 314— Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy 3 

ILR 316— Labor Organization Industrial Relations 3 

Common Body of Knowledge (CBK) Core 

Industrial and labor relations functions are not separate from other 
organizational activities. Firms, labor organizations, and government units 
integrate ILR with their management, business law, economics, accounting, 
finance, and marketing activities. The common body of knowledge (CBK) core 
is designed to provide ILR students with the common body of knowledge 
necessary to these functions. They also include skills classes in computer 
hardware and software, management information systems, and integrative 
policy formulation. Students who have acquired equivalent knowledge of 
these areas as undergraduates may waive up to 5 hours of this functional core. 
If equivalent undergraduate course work exceeds 5 hours, ILR elective course 
work will be substituted for CBK core hours. 

Program length may vary between 42 and 47 semester hours. Students 
who have no CBK background will complete a 47 credit-hour program. Those 
with equivalent course work may waive up to 5 hours to a 42 credit-hour 
program. The CBK core is as follows: 

Hr. 

Acctg. 311 — Financial Accounting for Decision Making 3 

B. Law 311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment 2 

Econ. 317— Economic Decision Making 2 

Fin. 311— Managerial Finance 2 

Manag. 301 — Organization Behavior and Ethics 3 

Manag. 311— Management Information Systems 3 

Manag. 321 — Operations Management/ 

Applied Quantitative Analysis 3 

Manag. 351— Policy and Strategy 3 

Mrktg. 311— Marketing Management 2 

The remaining hours will be chosen from the following courses after 
consultation with the adviser. While the listed courses are preferred, 
considerable latitude may be given the student by the adviser to choose other 
courses which are particularly appropriate to the student's background and 
interest. Approval must be obtained in advance. No more than 3 elective hours 
may be taken at the 200 level. Electives may be chosen from the following: 

Industrial and Labor Relations Hr. 

301— Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 1 3 

302 — Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2 3 

330 — Compensation Issues 3 

180 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



Hr. 

332— American Trade Unionism 3 

333— Seminar: Quality of Work Life 3 

334— Work Group Dynamics and Leadership 3 

337— Practicum in Industrial Interviewing 3 

340— Arbitration Theory and Practice 3 

342— Advanced Collective Bargaining 3 

344— Benefits 3 

345— Equal Employment Opportunity Problems 3 

491A— Advanced Study: Practicum in Research Methods 1-6 

491B— Advanced Study: Research Theory 3 

491C— Advanced Study: Women in the Labor Force 3 

491D— Advanced Study: Practicum in ILR 3 

Management 

217— Personnel and Compensation 3 

218— Focal Points in Management 1-3 

225— Business Policy 3 

325— Organizational Design 3 

330— Organizational Development 3 

335— Human Resource Management 3 

336— Managerial Skills Building Seminar 3 

Business Law 

211— Personnel Relations and the Law 3 

311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment 3 

Sociology and Anthropology 

204— Complex Organizations 3 

233— Sociology of Work and Work Places 3 

375— Fundamentals of Gerontology 3 

Economics 

211— Micro Economic Analysis 3 

212— Macro Economic Analysis 3 

310 — Advanced Micro Theory 1 3 

312— Advanced Macro Theory 1 3 

318— Economic Policy 3 

340— Public Finance 3 

360— Advanced Human Resource Economics 3 

364— Seminar in Labor Economics 3 

Public Administration 

341— Administrative Organization and Management 3 

343— Public Personnel Administration 3 

348— Legal/Political Foundation of Public Administration 3 

443— Public Sector Labor Relations 3 

448— Legal Environment 3 

Industrial Engineering 

222— Job Evaluation and Wage Incentives 3 

260— Human Factors Engineering 3 

261— System Safety Engineering 3 

361— Industrial Hygiene Engineering 3 

362— Systems Safety Engineering 3 

Law 

360— Compensation Law 3 

391— Arbitration 3 

391— Public Sector Labor Law 3 

391— OSHA 3 

391— Civil Rights 3 

391— Labor Law 1 4 

349— Labor Law 2 2 



INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 181 



Counseling Hr. 

301 — Fundamentals of Counseling 3 

320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 3 

Rehabilitation Counseling 

312— Psychological Aspects of Disability 3 

320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 3 

Computer Science 

301 — Computers in Research 3 

The industrial relations program requires that the student maintain a 
grade-point average of at least 3.0 on all work taken as a graduate student 
while enrolled in the College of Business and Economics. In addition, the 
student must maintain a 3.0 average in all work counting toward the graduate 
degree. A student whose cumulative grade-point average falls below 3.0 will 
be placed on probation. If the student's average is not brought up to 3.0 by the 
end of the following semester, the student will be suspended from the 
program. A grade below C in any course taken while enrolled as a graduate 
student will result in suspension from the program. 

Industrial Relations Ph.D. Option 

Graduate work in industrial relations typically is interdisciplinary in 
nature. The Ph.D. option retains this orientation while providing students 
with a Ph.D. level of understanding of economic theory and economic 
analysis. Students in the industrial relations option take the eight core 
courses in the Ph.D. in Economics program, take comprehensive examinations 
in microeconomic theory and macroeconomic theory, and follow the rules and 
requirements for obtaining the Economics Ph.D. 

Students are required to complete three fields of concentration. One field 
must be industrial relations. Since industrial relations is within the College of 
Business and Economics at WVU, it is not necessary to have the two 
remaining fields be in economics. However, it is necessary that there be a 
12-hour (four courses) field in this discipline within the College of Business 
and Economics at WVU. That 12-hour field of industrial relations is listed 
below. The industrial relations field consists of four courses: 

ILR 334 — Leadership and Work Group Dynamics 

ILR 342— Advanced Collective Bargaining 

ILR 491A — Practicum in Research Methods 

ILR 491B— Research Theory 

Of the two remaining fields, each typically 6 credit hours, one must be 
from within the Department of Economics. Most commonly, this field is labor 
economics. The second field may be selected from economics, industrial 
psychology, public administration, statistics, human resources management, 
industrial engineering, or law, and ideally should complement the student's 
research interest. 

Students must pass written comprehensive examinations in their three 
fields of concentration. 

Industrial and Labor Relations (ILR) 

262. Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations. 3 hr. Examination of the theory and 
practice of collective bargaining. Topics include economics and historical envi- 
ronment, labor law, unionization, contract negotiation, patterns in contract 
content, conflict resolution, grievance handling, and an introduction to arbitration. 



182 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



301. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 1. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR 
graduate program and C.S. 5 or equiv. Introduction to the software and hardware 
appropriate for use in human resource applications, emphasizing efficient and 
effective use of previously developed software. Introduction to quantitative 
analytical decision-making techniques. 

302. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR 
graduate program. Further development of the quantitative analytical techniques 
and of business information systems used in the human resources field. Emphasis 
on quantitative decision-making and information systems in an industrial 
relations setting. 

310. Human Resources Economics. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR graduate program. 
Consideration of the conditions of employment and unemployment at both macro 
and micro levels under varying degrees of competition, including the process of 
labor force preparation, labor market data and policy. 

312. Organizationai Theory, Behavior, and Communication. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis 
on the communication processes involved in problem resolution including organi- 
zational decision making. Problems include organizational evaluation methods, 
training and leadership development, staffing, evaluation of proficiency of 
individuals, systems, and procedures. 

314. Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Explores the 
integrative dimensions of organizational policies and their relationship to the 
personnel and industrial relations function. Business ethics in the industrial 
relations function. 

316. Labor Organization Industrial Relations. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to 
dynamics (adversary/cooperative) of industrial relations from a union viewpoint. 
Topics include conflict resolution, union government, alternatives to economic 
conflict bargaining, interaction, the state of industrial relations and work society. 

330. Compensation Issues. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar in compensation designed to 
develop further understanding of compensation theory and practice. Topic areas 
will include labor supply, wage theory, legal constraints, motivation, equity 
theory, organizational development as well as compensation structure and 
administration. 

332. American Trade Unionism. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 or 316 or consent. Examines the rise of 
American unionism and traces historical factors shaping its philosophy. Topics 
include economic conditions and union history, comparisons of AFL and CIO 
structures and the AFL-CIO as a government. 

333. Seminar: Quality of Work Life. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of current trends and 
approaches in "quality of work life improvement" with special attention to 
developments in participative management, job enrichment and gain sharing. 
Results of current research are featured. 

334. Work Group Dynamics and Leadership. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Small group or 
individual research on topics related to leadership and group dynamics in the 
work environment including training and other human relations programs. 

337. Practicum in Industrial Interviewing. 3 hr. PR: I.R. 312 and consent. Experiential 
learning of industrial interviewing techniques covering legal and technical 
aspects of employment interviewing and other types of interviewing. 

340. Arbitration Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 and consent. Study of the 
purpose of arbitration, trends, principles of contract construction, hearing 
procedure evidence, remedies, training and education of arbitrators, training of 
advocates, and decision writing. Students will arbitrate mock cases. 

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 183 



342. Advanced Collective Bargaining. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 or consent. Development of the 
economic theory, empirical analysis and policy implications of the impact of 
collective bargaining on wages, employment, market structure, and prices. 

344. Benefits. 3 hr. Considers employee benefits from the perspective of the industrial 
relations specialist who is responsible for articulating and administering a 
corporate program. Includes study of all benefits covered by major federal 
legislation. 

345. Equal Employment Opportunity Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A series of lectures 
by specialists in equal employment opportunity affairs. Lecturers will include 
attorneys, directors of state and national EEO agencies, and representatives 
of business and industry and the labor movement. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

CBK Core Courses 
Acctg. 

311. Financial Accounting for Decision Making. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic accounting 
assumptions and standards underlying financial statements, the significance of 
financial statement measurements, and the relevance of such data for planning 
and control. Emphasis on financial statement and cash-flow analysis. 

B. Law 

311. Legal and Regulatory Environment. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the legal 
environment in which business decisions are made and the response of the legal 
environment to change. Familiarization with the role of administrative agencies in 
the regulatory process. 

Econ. 

317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. Analysis of the firm as an 
optimizing unit operating in the market place. Examination of product demand, 
production and costs, pricing theory and practices, risk, and capital budgeting. 

Fin. 

311. Fundamentals of Finance. 2 hr. PR or Coreq: Acctg. 311 or consent. Covers the 
basics of standard financial activities of the firm including: financial planning, the 
structure of financing, and asset selection. 

Manag. 

301. Organization Behavior and Ethics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpersonal relationships 
through which administration becomes effective. Emphasis on human factors, but 
influences of economic and technological factors also are considered. Focus on 
ethics and importance of harmony between individual needs and organization 
goals. 

302. Introduction to Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of management 
science models and techniques with applications in business decision making 
problems. Coverage includes mathematical programming models, decision theory, 
simulation, network models, and other current management science topics. 

321. Operations Management/Applied Quantitative Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Review of concepts, techniques, and models encountered in manufacturing and 
service operations. Modeling approach and computer applications in operations 
management and management science are emphasized. 

351. Policy and Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. M.B.A. capstone course. Integrates 
functional knowledge with strategy formulation and strategy implementation 
concepts. Cases of organizations varying in size, national affiliation, and profit 
orientation are analyzed with special emphasis on ethics and social responsibility. 

184 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



Mrktg. 

311. Marketing Management. 2 hr. Introduction to marketing management with 
specific emphasis on consumer behavior and market segmentation, product 
planning, promotion, distribution, and pricing. 

JOURNALISM 

John H. Boyer, Director of Graduate Studies in Journalism 
306 Martin Hall 
Degree Offered: M.S.J. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Cremer, Elwood, McCartney, Ours, and Seymour. Associate 
Members Ernst, Findley, Paty, Stewart, and Yagle. 

The Master of Science in Journalism (M.S. J.) program in the Perley Isaac 
Reed School of Journalism is designed to help persons involved in the various 
aspects of mass communication better understand and cope not only with the 
increased complexity of their own field, but also with fields outside mass 
communication. 

The program, designed to help each student reach full potential as a 
worker, teacher, or scholar in mass communication, helps prepare a student 
not only for a first job— although students who obtain the M.S.J, degree 
should excel in the skills of the profession— but also for long-term and 
productive career development through the study of mass communication and 
related fields. 

The M.S.J, program is intended to afford the liberal arts graduate an 
opportunity to concentrate advanced study in mass communication; provide 
intensive study for persons who have undergraduate journalism training, but 
who wish to pool their journalistic skills with extensive knowledge in another 
substantive area or areas (e.g., political science, economics, science); and give 
persons who have had considerable professional experience an opportunity to 
broaden their academic bases through carefully selected advanced studies. 

Admissions and Advising 

Admission to the M.S.J, program is limited to holders of baccalaureate or 
equivalent degrees from institutions of higher learning. Applicants should 
have combined verbal and quantitative scores on the Graduate Record Exam- 
ination (GRE) Aptitude Test of at least 1000 and overall grade-point averages 
(GPA) of at least 3.0 on a 4.0 scale. Each applicant also should submit to the 
director of graduate studies in the School of Journalism a detailed essay 
explaining why the student wants to undertake graduate study in journalism, 
what the student hopes to get from the graduate journalism program, what the 
long-term goals are, and how graduate education in journalism can help 
achieve those goals. 

An applicant who doesn't meet the minimum GRE and/or GPA require- 
ments) may be accepted only if the low GPA or GRE scores are offset by other 
factors. Excellent recommendations, unusual grading patterns (e.g., a steady 
rise of grades), an outstanding statement of purpose, or examples of 
professional accomplishment sometimes can offset low GRE scores or a low 
GPA. 

Students applying for admission to the M.S.J, program are encouraged to 
send nonreturnable supporting material to the director of graduate studies in 
the School of Journalism. Examples of published or unpublished writing, 
research, or photography, a detailed listing of professional media experience 
or other relevant job experience, and other supporting materials will be 

JOURNALISM 185 



considered by the admissions committee. All other materials (e.g., transcripts, 
GRE scores, application forms) should be sent to the Office of Admissions and 
Records. 

A student who does not have a bachelor's degree in journalism or 
extensive professional experience must meet these additional requirements: 

1. Must have completed a core of journalism courses, with subjects and 
grades acceptable to the School of Journalism, or 

2. Must complete undergraduate journalism and other courses to be 
prescribed by the School of Journalism, or 

3. Must demonstrate knowledge and competence in a number of journal- 
ism topics to be prescribed by the School of Journalism, or 

4. Must meet a combination of the foregoing requirements. 

All applications for admission are considered by the director of graduate 
studies and one other member of the graduate studies committee (GSC). The 
entire GSC considers special cases and appeals. 

The director of graduate studies advises all students about general 
problems and concerns, courses to take, projects to undertake, special 
training to obtain, and appropriate outside areas for study. 

Early in the student's program, usually by the completion of 6-9 credit 
hours of graduate course work, the student and the adviser draw up a plan of 
study to show the direction of the student's course work. The plan may also 
indicate a general time frame anticipated for the completion of this work and 
may contain the direction and outline of the research problem to be 
undertaken. This plan of study becomes a part of the student's record, and 
constitutes, with some degree of specificity, the terms and conditions that the 
student must meet for completing the degree requirements. Subsequent 
changes in the plan of study must be approved by the student and the adviser, 
and no graduate student may take a course S/U or Pass-Fail without written 
permission of the graduate director. 

A writing proficiency examination, administered by the Journ. 300 
instructor, is given during the course. Students who fail it on the first attempt 
are required to enroll in Journ. 15 and must pass the test the second time they 
take it in order to continue their journalism graduate studies. 

Graduate Assistantships and Internships 

Approximately seven assistantships and internships are available in and 
through the School of Journalism each year. Graduate assistants teach 
laboratories and assist professors with their courses. Interns work in mass 
communication-related jobs on campus to obtain solid professional experience. 

Students receive stipends for the academic year and may apply for tuition 
remission for the entire year. Although sometimes renewed for a second year, 
assistantships and internships are granted for one academic year. Graduate 
assistants and interns work an average of 15 hours per week during the 
academic year. 

Persons who want to be considered for assistantships or internships 
should have their applications on file with the director of graduate studies in 
the School of Journalism before March 1. 

Program Requirements 

The School of Journalism offers two tracks — the teaching-research track 
and the professional track — within the M.S.J, program. 

The teaching-research track is generally a program for persons who want 
to go on for a Ph.D. degree, teach in a community college, or conduct research 

186 JOURNALISM 



in some areas of mass communication. Persons in the track normally take 
research and theory courses both inside and outside the School of Journalism, 
statistics, and social science courses. The program culminates in a thesis, 
which is a scholarly study of an important aspect of mass communication. 

The professional track is designed primarily for persons who wish to 
become excellent practitioners in some field of mass communication and who 
have little desire to teach or become mass communication researchers. 
Persons in the professional track normally take communication and outside 
area courses that will help them become better practitioners. The program 
culminates in a professional project, which helps a student extend his or her 
knowledge about a given aspect of mass communication but which should be 
the sort of nonroutine project on which the student might work as a 
professional. 

Students must complete all requirements for their degrees, including 
either a thesis or professional project within four years of the start of the first 
course work in their programs. 

Course Work 

For the master's degree in journalism, the student must meet the 
following requirements: 

Teaching-Research Program. A minimum of 30 semester hours of accept- 
able graduate credit, including a thesis for 6 hours of credit. 

(a) As part of the 30 hours, a minimum of 18 hours, including the thesis, 
in School of Journalism courses. 

(b) Included in the 30 hours, a minimum of 9 hours in a minor conducted 
outside the School of Journalism. 

Professional Program. A minimum of 30 semester hours of acceptable 
graduate credit, including a professional project for 6 hours of credit. 

(a) As part of the 30 hours, a minimum of 18 hours, including the 
professional project, in School of Journalism courses. 

(b) Included in the 30 hours, a minimum of 9 hours in a minor conducted 
outside the School of Journalism. 

In either program, the candidate is allowed to take more than the 
minimum required number of hours. 

The following courses are required for all Journalism graduate students: 
Journ. 300— Introduction to Graduate Studies (no credit); Journ. 304— Mass 
Media and Society (3 hr.); Journ. 320 — Advanced Journalistic Writing and 
Research (3 hr.); and Journ. 401— Research Methods (3 hr.). 

Upper-Level Courses Required. In both programs, 60 percent of the 
graduate credits submitted for the degree must be in courses numbered 300 or 
above. 

Grades. Course work must be completed with a minimum grade-point 
average of 3.0. The thesis and professional project are graded as S or U 
(Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory). 

Except for thesis, professional project, and internship courses, no student 
will be permitted to take a course on a Pass-Fail or Satisfactory-Unsatisfactory 
grade basis without prior approval of the Director of Graduate Studies. 

Examination. The candidate for the master's degree will pass an oral 
examination on the thesis or professional project. In addition, the thesis or 
professional project will be evaluated as a test of the candidate's writing skill. 

The kinds of courses taken in the M.S.J, program largely depend on each 
student's background and interests. The program is intended to accommodate 
students of differing academic and professional backgrounds and interests. 

JOURNALISM 187 



A student typically will take all outside courses in one area (e.g., biology, 
political science, history), although the student may decide after consultation 
with the adviser to take courses in two or more outside areas. Courses outside 
the School of Journalism are selected by students in consultation with their 
advisers; outside courses selected are subject to the availability of space and 
prerequisite requirements in the offering departments. 

Thesis/Professional Project 

Each student must complete a thesis or professional project involving 
original work in the student's area of interest. The student should have a 
thesis or professional project proposal written by the end of the semester in 
which the first 12 hours of course work are completed. 

Each student is responsible for developing ideas for the thesis or project. 
Through consultations with members of the journalism faculty, the student 
determines faculty interests and areas of expertise, and ideas are refined to 
the point where the student has a significant and feasible idea in mind. 

The student, with the approval of the Graduate Studies Committee, 
selects the journalism faculty member who would be best able to chair the 
advisory committee, subject to the agreement of the faculty member. If 
questions arise about a faculty member's interest or knowledge, the student 
directly asks the faculty member or consults the academic adviser or other 
members of the Graduate Studies Committee. 

With the chairperson, the student further refines the idea to a "preliminary 
proposal" stage, in which ideas and appropriate methodology are on paper, 
but not necessarily in formal proposal form. 

After the student has written a preliminary proposal and selected a 
faculty chairperson, the student should select other members of the advisory 
committee, subject to their willingness to serve. The advisory committee must 
consist of not fewer than four members, one from outside the School of 
Journalism; two persons must be members of the WVU graduate faculty. 

At this point, students in the professional track must submit their 
proposals to the Graduate Studies Committee, which must approve all 
professional project topics (but not research methods, specific research 
questions, or hypotheses, etc.). Students may attend the meetings at which 
their proposals are discussed. After securing Graduate Studies Committee 
approval, students in the professional track schedule hearings with their 
guidance committees. Hearings with the guidance committees are required of 
all students (including those in the teaching research track). 

Working under the guidance of the advisory committee, the student 
prepares a complete thesis or project proposal, extended from the preliminary 
proposal. Guidance for preparing a proposal is available from the director of 
graduate studies. 

The student then has a consultative meeting, during which final revisions 
of and refinements in the proposal are discussed with the members of the 
advisory committee. Notices of the public meeting (to which students are 
invited) must be placed in the boxes of all members of the School of 
Journalism faculty and posted outside the dean's office at least two weeks 
before the meeting. One copy of the thesis or project proposal must be placed 
on reserve in the journalism reading room. 

After the consultation, the committee votes to accept or reject the 
proposal. The student whose proposal is approved works closely with the 
committee in the completion of the thesis or project. All committee members 

188 JOURNALISM 



should be kept informed and consulted for advice (as needed and as desired by 
them) as the thesis or project develops. 

After each member of the advisory committee is satisfied with the work, a 
public oral examination is scheduled. Two weeks' notice must be given to all 
faculty of the School of Journalism (notices should be placed in all faculty 
boxes and posted outside the dean's office). One copy of the final thesis or 
project must be placed on reserve in the journalism reading room. Students 
also should make certain their shuttle sheets are filed with the Director of 
Graduate Studies in Journalism two weeks before the date of the oral defense. 

Only committee members may vote on acceptance or rejection of a thesis 
or project. A majority vote is sufficient to approve the thesis or project, 
although a dissenting vote may be recorded. Furthermore, at least three 
signatures (two of which must be signatures of graduate faculty members) 
must be on the approval sheet. If one committee member is outvoted and feels 
he/she cannot sign the approval sheet, he/she may resign from the committee. 
Such action may force a reconstitution of the committee and repetition of 
earlier mentioned steps leading to the oral examination. 

The chairperson of the advisory committee will decide whether final 
corrections (after the oral examination) have been made properly, and he/she 
will check the style and form of the final typed version. The MLA Stylesheet 
or other approved stylebook should be carefully followed during preparation 
of a thesis or professional project. 

Four copies of the final thesis or two copies of a project should be 
delivered to the School of Journalism. 

Maintenance of Scholarship 

All students are expected to maintain satisfactory progress toward the 
degree. A student's graduate record begins with the first course credited to the 
degree and includes all subsequent courses. All students must maintain a 
grade-point average of at least 3.0 and complete all requirements within four 
years. Students who fail to meet this standard will be dropped from the 
program permanently. 

Each student working toward the M.S.J, degree must register for at least 
one semester hour each regular (Fall and Spring) semester. This enrollment 
may be in course work or in Journ. 497. 

Foreign Students 

Believing that mutual benefit is derived when students from other 
countries study in the WVU School of Journalism, the school welcomes 
foreign students. At the same time, the school recognizes that journalism, 
more than many other fields, requires language skill. To profit by journalism 
study, foreign students must have a ready understanding of English. They 
will be called on to follow rapid speech in interviews, press conferences, 
public addresses, and in the classroom, as well as to deal with abstract ideas 
communicated in English. Award of the master's degree in journalism attests 
to the student's facility in English. Foreign students must maintain the same 
3.0 grade-point average required of other students. 

Recognizing the language difficulty, the School of Journalism offers 
foreign students a transition semester. Unless students obviously are fluent 
in English and pass a test in which they demonstrate comprehensive 
knowledge of English fundamentals (grammar, punctuation, syntax, spelling), 
they will be offered a semester of undergraduate study (not for graduate 

JOURNALISM 189 



credit), which will enable them to sharpen language skills. Such a transitional 
semester also will permit foreign students to study other selected courses in 
preparation for graduate study. These courses will help them adapt to the 
American system of journalism and to the new cultural environment. 

Journalism (journ.) 

231. Color Photography. II. 3 hr. PR: Journ. 120 and 130 or consent. The theory of color 
slides and prints, including slide development, as applied to multi-media presen- 
tations. (Supplies will cost $50.00-70.00] 

241. Internship. I, II, S. 2-3 hr. PR: Foundation courses in one of the sequences. Student 
must have a signed contract detailing terms of the learning experience. [Graded on 
Pass/Fail basis.) 

299. Contemporary Media Issues and Ethics. I, II. 2 hr. (Required of all senior 
journalism majors.] In-depth study of contemporary media issues such as right of 
access to media, morality in news and advertising, new FTC and FCC regulations, 
media responsibility to society, and social responsibility of media professionals. 
Individual research papers on issues with ethical considerations. 

300. Introduction to Graduate Studies. I. (No Credit.) (Required of all graduate 
journalism students.] Designed to orient students to graduate study. (Class meets 
once a week.) 

302. Seminar in Communications Theory. II. 3 hr. PR: Studies in human behavior. 
Communications theory drawing heavily on social psychology and sociology and 
anthropology. Philosophy of science. Theory as scientific knowledge. Character- 
istics of theory. Begin learning how to draw on experts, to apply theory. 

304. Mass Media and Society. II. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate journalism students.) 
Study of mass media and their role in and influence on society; includes analysis of 
the social, political, and economic determinants of media content and character. 

312. Fund Raising and Foundation Management. I. 3-6 hr. (Open to graduate journalism 
students and to seniors with a 3.0 grade-point average; consent.] Seminar. Studies 
in fund raising, alumni relations, and foundation management. 

320. Advanced Journalistic Writing and Research. I, S. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate 
journalism students.] Study of advanced journalistic writing and research 
techniques. Students will practice the writing and research techniques on topics of 
their own choosing. Academic or popular topics may be selected. 

337. Eighteenth-Century Journalism. II. 3 hr. Importance of British and American 
periodicals in the political, cultural, and economic patterns of the century; 
especially emphasizes the role of Colonial journals in reducing regionalism and 
forging a nation. 

340. Corporate Communications. I. 3 hr. Conferences to examine the synergistic effects 
of advertising, journalism, and public relations for different kinds of corporations. 
Team projects and presentations. 

341. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Student proposes idea for substantial reading, 
research, writing in area of interest; requirements may include conventional term 
paper, series of articles, slide presentation, oral presentations, etc. Student works 
independently of classroom setting. 

380. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Approved thesis proposal. 

390. Professional Project. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Approved professional project proposal. 
Non-thesis professional project for students preparing for some field in mass 
communication. 

190 JOURNALISM 



401. Research Methods. I. 3 hr. [Required of a 11 graduate journalism students.] Study of 
quantitative methods common to research in communications. An introduction to 
sampling, measurement, analytic procedures, and data. 

402. Seminar in Research Problems. II. 3 hr. Advanced study of methodological 
techniques. Research project chosen from area of student's major interest. A 
written report of the study undertaken is required. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. For graduate students not seeking course work credit but 
who wish to meet residence requirements, use the University's facilities, and 
participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Advertising (Adv.) 

203. Advertising Media Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113 and senior standing or consent. 
Buying, estimating, scheduling of print and broadcast media. Preparation of media 
rationale for national campaigns based on research and statistical analysis and 
computerized data. Determination of advertising allocations; sales representation; 
promotion. 

204. Media Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113, 114, and 203 or consent. Planning of 
advertising appropriations in national and international print and broadcast 
media. Client, agency, media responsibilities. Evaluation of advertising. Presen- 
tation. 

210. Graphic Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 110 or consent. Design layouts for print media. 
Includes buying, supervising, and scheduling of art, typography, and print 
material. 2 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab. 

214. Advertising Copywriting. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Journ. 50, Adv. 113 and 114 or consent. 
Copy concepts, copy platforms, techniques and strategies for print and broadcast 
media. Writing and production of broadcast commercials; preparation of a print 
national campaign. 2 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab. 

239. Seminar in Advertising Management Problems. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Senior standing and 
major or minor in advertising. Application of the study of advertising research, 
law, and theory in the preparation of a national advertising campaign. Aspects of 
the campaign to cover marketing, research, creative, media, sales promotion, and 
presentation. 

251. Direct Marketing. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113 and 114 or consent. Mailing, marketing, 
and creation of direct-mail letters, brochures, involvement pieces, and reply cards. 
Postal regulations, direct mail law, and printing procedures. 

Broadcast News (BN) 

285. Special Topics in Broadcast Journalism. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: BN 186 and consent. 
Directed investigation of selected topics in broadcast journalism. 

287. Broadcast Journalism 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: BN 186 and consent. Continuation of Journ. 
185, with course content oriented to television news, including electronic news 
gathering (ENG). 

News-Editorial (N-E) 

220. Writing for Magazines. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Upper-division or graduate standing; 
Journ. 15 or equivalent preparation in grammar, punctuation, and spelling. 
Professional approach: magazine analysis, query letters, writing, rewriting; 
submitting manuscripts for publication. 

JOURNALISM 191 



225. High School Publications Advising. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Journ. 18, 19, 
Adv. 113. [For students seeking journalism certification.) Emphasizes writing 
styles, newspaper/yearbook layout, rights and responsibilities of the teacher, 
students, and school system. Enrollees will construct instructional portfolios 
based on research and classroom discussion concepts. 

227. History of Journalism. I. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 52 and 53 or consent. (Open to all 
University students.) Impact of the American press on the nation; development of 
today's- media from the beginnings in seventeenth-century England and in the 
American colonies; great names in journalism; freedom of press and its current 
implications. 

228. Law of the News Media. II. 3 hr. (For seniors and graduate students.) The law as it 
affects the mass media. Considered are such areas as libel, public records, criminal 
pre-trial publicity, freedom of information, obscenity. 

230. Editorial and Critical Writing. I. 3 hr. (Open to all University students.) The 
student will analyze and write editorials and commentaries; study typical 
editorial pages and the ethics governing editorial page content; become familiar 
with libel, privacy, contempt, and other problems — operating and political — as 
they arise. 

Public Relations (PR) 

222. Public Relations Case Studies. II. 3 hr. PR: PR 124. Seminar based on in-depth 
studies of public relations programs developed and applied in support of our 
institutions. Primary emphasis on successful campaigns, but unsuccessful efforts 
also will be examined for causes of failures. 

LIBERAL STUDIES 

Henry L. Ruf, Director 
252 Stansbury Hall 
Degree Offered: M.A. 

The Master of Arts in Liberal Studies interdisciplinary degree provides 
the opportunity for highly motivated students to continue their studies 
beyond the baccalaureate under a coherent program, but without the 
exclusive concentration in one discipline. 

Each student, in conjunction with a graduate adviser, will put together a 
personalized curriculum centered around some topic or interdisciplinary area 
of special interest to the student. Topics might include area studies (e.g., 
Appalachian Studies, Women's Studies, American Studies), period studies 
(e.g., the history, literature, art, and philosophy of the eighteenth century), or 
some other special interest that will tie together studies in several different 
disciplines. The central theme is essential to the degree program, otherwise 
the degree would reflect nothing more than an unrelated collection of courses. 
The focus provided by a central topic will ensure that studies are pursued in 
depth and justify the granting of a graduate degree. 

Program Faculty 

There are more than 750 graduate faculty members at WVU who can be 
called upon to assist students in their individual plans of study. The program 
is administered by the Master of Arts in Liberal Studies Committee, which is 
appointed by the Dean of Arts and Sciences and is responsible for admitting 
candidates to the program, approving study contracts, overseeing the final 
evaluation, and determining whether degree requirements have been met. 

192 LIBERAL STUDIES 



This committee serves roughly the same administrative function for the 
Master of Arts in Liberal Studies (M.A.L.S.) as an academic department 
serves for more traditional degree programs. 

Candidates for the M.A.L.S. Program 

The M.A.L.S. is intended to be of interest to two majorgroups of students: 
(1) Adults who have been out of school for some time but who seek advice and 
guidance in pursuing advanced study in some area of special interest. 
Consequently, much of the work can be done off-campus. (2) Younger, on- 
campus students, who wish to do interdisciplinary work at the graduate level. 

Admission Requirements 

Requirements for admission to the M.A.L.S. program: 

1. Baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

2. Minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0. Probationary 
status may be granted for those who do not meet this standard. 

3. An essay of at least 1,000 words including: (a) a description of the 
student's relevant professional experiences, current orientation, and future 
goals, and an indication of how these goals will be served by the M.A.L.S. 
program, and (b) an outline of the course of study to be pursued, including the 
central focus of the study and a preliminary identification of course work to 
be taken, as well as an indication of how the courses are related to this central 
topic. The essay is an important admission criterion; it not only demonstrates 
motivation and direction, but it also helps to determine which faculty member 
would be the most appropriate adviser. 

Study Contract 

Upon admission to the program, the student is assigned an adviser. With 
the assistance of the adviser, the student works out a study contract, outlining 
the course of study and method of final evaluation. This contract must be 
approved by the M.A.L.S. committee, and a master's committee, drawn from 
appropriate graduate faculty, is appointed to assist the student and adviser in 
planning and evaluating the study. 

Degree Requirements 

Besides the general requirements listed in the graduate catalog for all 
graduate programs at WVU, the M.A.L.S. program has the following specific 
requirements: 

1. A minimum of 36 semester hours of approved course work, but subject 
to the following restrictions: a. Ordinarily no more than 12 hours will be 
approved for graduate course work taken before admission to the program; b. 
Because the degree is intended to be interdisciplinary no more than 18 hours 
can be taken in one departmental discipline; c. No more than 12 hours of 
independent study will be approved; d. The final 12 hours must consist of 
WVU course work; e. The program must include at least 3 hours of course 
work in research methodology. 

2. A minimum 3.25 grade-point average for all course work in the degree 
program. 

3. Fulfillment of all requirements of the study contract. 

4. Successful completion of a final project (e.g., a comprehensive exam- 
ination, project paper, performance or research project). When the student's 
final project does not include a comprehensive examination, a written 

LIBERAL STUDIES 193 



document summarizing and synthesizing the student's graduate experiences 
in relation to the chosen topic must be submitted to the student's master's 
committee. 

MATHEMATICS 

Alphonse Baartmans, Chairperson of the Department 

203 Eiesland Hall 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Baartmans, Chak, Christie, Diamond, Ganser, Gingold, 
Goodykoontz, Gould, Hattori, Irwin, Johnson, Kim, Mays, Moseley, Nadler, Pierce, 
and Zhang. Associate Members Dowdy, Easton, Lightbourne, Miller, Randolph, 
Schreuder, and Simons. 

The Department of Mathematics offers the Master of Science (M.S.) 
degree. Programs are designed to provide education for students desiring to 
study pure mathematics, for students who wish to do interdisciplinary work 
(in preparation for work in industry and elsewhere), and for students who are 
or intend to be teachers of mathematics. 

Entering students should have the equivalent of the mathematics re- 
quirements for an undergraduate major at WVU. Students who desire a 
preparatory program for teaching at the secondary level should have 
completed the courses required for a teaching field in mathematics. Deficien- 
cies may be remedied by the completion of recommended undergraduate 
courses or by examination. Such remedial work cannot be used to meet the 
degree requirements. 

Each student, upon beginning a graduate program, will be assigned an 
Advisory Committee. The committee will assist the student in designing the 
plan of study which takes into account the student's interest and objectives. 
The program will usually include 30-33 hours of graduate courses. A thesis 
may account for at most 6 hours of the total. A final examination (comprehen- 
sive in nature) or project is required for the degree. 

Students are expected to maintain at least a 3.0 (B) average in their 
mathematics courses and to present at least a 3.0 average in all work offered in 
fulfillment of the degree program. 

For a more complete statement of requirements, the student is referred to 
the department's handbook Graduate Students in Mathematics. 

Mathematics (Math.) 

213. Partial Differential Equations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 or consent. Introduces 
students in mathematics, engineering, and the sciences to methods of applied 
mathematics. First and second order equations, canonical forms, wave, heat and 
Laplace's equations, representation of solutions. 

215. Applied Modern Algebra. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Finite fields, algebraic coding 
theory, Boolean algebras, monoids, finite state, and Turing machines. 

217. Applied Mathematical Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. The algebra and differential 
calculus of vectors, solution of the partial differential equations of mathematical 
physics, and application of functions of a complex variable. 

219. Seminar in Applied Mathematics. I, II. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Selected topics in 
applied mathematics. Topics previously offered include vector calculus and 
stochastic processes. 



194 MATHEMATICS 



220. Numerical Analysis 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17 (or both Math. 16 and C.S. 120) and a 
programming language. Computer arithmetic, roots of equations, interpolation, 
Gaussian elimination, numerical integration and differentiation. Numerical solu- 
tion of initial value problems for ordinary differential equations. Least square 
approximations. (Equiv. to C.S. 220.) 

221. Numerical Analysis 2. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. Solutions of 
linear systems by direct and iterative methods. Calculation of eigenvalues, 
eigenvectors, and inverses of matrices. Applications to ordinary and partial 
differential equations. (Equiv. to C.S. 221.) 

224. Mathematics of Compound interest. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or 128. A problem- 
solving course focusing on the measurement of interest, annuities, amortization 
schedules, and sinking funds, and the valuation of bonds and other securities. 

226. Mathematical Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or consent. (Designed for 
mathematics teachers.) Frequency distributions, averages, probability, popu- 
lations, samples, probability distributions, estimations, hypothesis testing. Al- 
though no previous knowledge of computer language is assumed, the computer 
will be used in this course. 

228. Discrete Mathematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 and 120 or equiv. Applications of 
discrete mathematics to computer science. Methods of solving homogeneous and 
non-homogeneous recurrence relations using generating functions and character- 
istic equations; digraphs to analyze computer algorithms; graph theory and its 
ramifications to computer algorithms. (Equiv. to C.S. 228.) 

231, 232. Introduction to Mathematics for the Elementary Teacher. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. 
PR: Math. 34 or consent. (Not open to students who have credit for Math. 131.) (For 
in-service elementary mathematics teachers.) Systems of numeration; sets, 
relations, binary operations, the algebraic structure of various number systems; 
the notions of length, area, and volume; coordinate geometry. 

239. Elementary Number Theory. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or 131 or consent. Divisibility, 
congruences, linear and quadratic diophantine equations, number theoretic 
functions, and applications of number theory to other areas of mathematics. 

241. Applied Linear Algebra. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17; Math. 18 or consent. Matrix 
algebra with emphasis on algorithmic techniques and applications of physical 
models. Topics include solution of large systems of equations, orthogonal 
projections and least squares, and eigenvalue problems. 

251, 252. Introduction to Real Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 163 or consent. A 
study of sequences, convergence, limits, continuity, definite integral, the derivative, 
differentials, functional dependence, multiple integrals, sequences and series of 
functions. 

255. Advanced Real Calculus. S. 3 hr. Math. 18 or consent. Limits, series, metric spaces, 
uniformity, integrals. 

256. Complex Variables. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. Complex numbers, functions of a 
complex variable; analytic functions; the logarithm and related functions; power 
series; Laurent series and residues; conformal mapping and applications. 

269. Advanced Topics in Mathematics. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. PR: Consent. An independent but 
directed study program, the content of which is to be mutually agreed upon by the 
individual student and instructor. 

271. Projective Geometry. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141, 241, or consent. Projective and affine 
spaces, transformation groups for planes. Introduction to axomatic plane geo- 
metries. 

MATHEMATICS 195 



291, 292. Theory of Probability. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 18. Fundamental 
theorems. Development of density and distribution functions in the discrete and 
continuous cases. Classical problems and solutions. Moments, characteristics 
functions, limit theorems. Applications. 

301, 302. Combinatorial Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: One year of calculus. 
Permutations, combinations, generating functions, principle of inclusion and 
exclusion, distributions, partitions, compositions, trees and networks. 

305, 306. Theory of Numbers. I, II. 3 hr. PR: One year of calculus. Introduction to 
classical number theory covering such topics as divisibility, the Euclidean 
algorithm, Diophantine equations, congruences, primitive roots, quadratic res- 
idues, number-theoretic functions, distribution of primes, irrationals, and com- 
binatorial methods. Special numbers such as those of Bernoulli, Euler, and 
Stirling. 

313. Intermediate Differential Equations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17, 18. A rigorous study of 
ordinary differential equations including linear and nonlinear systems, self- 
adjoint eigenvalue problems, non-self-adjoint boundary-value problems, pertur- 
bation theory of autonomous systems, Poincare-theorem. 

317, 318. Advanced Calculus. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 18. Primarily for engineers 
and scientists. Functions of several variables, partial differentiation, implicit 
functions, transformations; line surface and volume integrals; point set theory, 
continuity, integration, infinite series and convergence, power series, and improper 
integrals. 

319. Seminar in Applied Mathematics. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Selected topics in applied 
mathematics. Topics previously offered include applied linear algebra, compu- 
tational fluid dynamics, numerical partial differential equations, ordinary differ- 
ential equations, perturbation methods, and stochastic processes. 

320. Solution of Nonlinear Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. 
Solution of nonlinear systems of equations. Newton and Secant Methods. 
Unconstrained optimization. Nonlinear overrelaxation techniques. Nonlinear 
least squares problems. (Equiv. to C.S. 320.) 

330. Introduction to Applied Mathematics. S. 1-6 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. 
(Designed especially for secondary -school mathematics teachers; others admitted 
with departmental approval obtained before registration.) Problem solving and 
construction of mathematical models in the social, life, and physical sciences. 
Examples illustrating the origins and use of secondary school mathematics in 
solving real world problems. 

333. Modern Algebra for Teachers. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. [Designed 
especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers. Others admitted with 
departmental approval obtained prior to registration.) Introduction to algebraic 
structures: groups, rings, integral domains and fields. Development and properties 
of the rational and real number systems. 

334. Modern Algebra for Teachers. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141 or 333 or consent. Further 
investigation of algebraic structures begun in Math. 333. (Emphasis on topics 
helpful to secondary-school mathematics teachers.) Topics include Sylow theory, 
Jordan-Holder Theorem, rings and quotients, field extensions, Galois theory and 
solution by radicals. 

335. Foundations of Geometry. S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. (Designed especially 
for secondary mathematics teachers; others admitted with departmental approval 
obtained before registration.) Incidence geometries with models; order for lines 
and planes; separation by angles and by triangles; congruence; introduction to 
Euclidean geometry. 

196 MATHEMATICS 



336. Transformation Geometry. S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141 or 333 or consent. (Designed 
especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers; others admitted with 
departmental approval obtained before registration.} A modern approach to 
geometry based on transformations in a vector space setting. The course unifies 
the development of geometry with the methods of modern algebra. 

337. Foundations of Probability and Statistics. S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. 
(Designed especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers; other admitted 
with departmental approval obtained before registration.) Introduction to proba- 
bility and statistics with emphasis on topics helpful to secondary-school math- 
ematics teachers. Topics include: density and distribution functions, probability 
distributions, sampling, confidence intervals, point estimation, hypothesis testing, 
student's t-distribution. Chi-square distribution. 

339. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. 

341, 342. Modern Algebra. I, II. 3 hr. persem. PR: Math. 141 orconsent. Concepts from 
set theory and the equivalence of the Axiom of Choice. Zorn's Lemma and the 
Well-Ordering Theorem; a study of the strucutre of groups, rings, fields, and 
vector spaces; elementary factorization theory; extensions of ring and fields; 
modules and ideals; and lattices. 

343. Linear Algebra. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 241 or consent. Review of theory of groups 
and fields; linear vector spaces including the theory of duality; full linear group; 
bilinear and quadratic forms; and theory of isotropic and totally isotropic spaces. 

351, 352. Theory of Functions of Real Variables. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 181, 252. 
A development of the Lebesgue integral, function spaces and Banach spaces, 
differentiation, complex measures, the Lebesgue-Radon-Nikodym theorem. 

355, 356. Theory of Functions of Complex Variables. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252. 
Number systems, the complex plane and its geometry. Holomorphic functions, 
powerseries, elementary functions, complex integration, representation theorems, 
the calculus of residues, analytic continuation and analytic function, Elliptic 
functions, Holomorphic functions of several complex variables. 

357. Calcuius of Variations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, 252, (or 318). Necessary conditions 
and sufficient conditions for weak and strong relative minimums of an integral, 
Euler-Lagrange equation. Legendre condition, field construction, Weierstrass 
excess function, and the Jacobi equation. 

381, 382. Topology. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252 or consent. A detailed treatment 
of topological spaces covering the topics of continuity, convergence, compactness, 
and connectivity; product and identification space, function spaces, and the 
topology in Euclidean spaces. 

385, 386. Rings of Continuous Functions. I, II, S. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 341 and 381, 
or consent. A study of the algebraic structure of the ring of all continuous real- 
valued functions on a topological space and its relation to the topological 
properties of the space. 

400. Seminar in Number Theory. I, II. 1-12 hr. 

402. Special Functions. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, 252. Operational techniques, 
generalized hypergeometric functions, classical polynomials of Bell, Hermite, 
Legendre, Noerlund, etc. Introduction to recent polynomial systems. Current 
research topics. 

405, 406. Analytic Number Theory. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 306, 356. Selected 
topics in analytic number theory such as the prime number theorem, primes in an 
arithmetical progression, the Zeta function, the Goldbach conjecture. 

MATHEMATICS 197 



441, 442. Group Theory. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 141 or consent. Elementary group 
theory; Sylow theory, extended Sylow theory in solvable groups, Burnsides 
theorem on normal complements, transfer homomorphism. Representation theory. 
Emphasis throughout on finite groups. 

443, 444. Algebraic Theory of Semigroups. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 342 or equiv. 
Ideal theory, matrix representation of semigroups, decompositions and extensions, 
simple semigroups, inverse semigroups, congruence relations, recent research. 

451, 452. Functional Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 181, 241, 252. A study of 
Banach and Hilbert spaces; the Hahn-Banach theorem, uniform boundedness 
principle, and the open mapping theorem; dual spaces and the Riesz representation 
theorem; Banach algebras; and special theory. 

457, 458. Theory of Partial Differential Equations. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252. 
Cauchy-Kowalewski theorem, Cauchy's problem, the Dirichlet and Neumann 
problems, Dirichlet's principle, potential theory, integral equations, eigenvalue 
problems, numerical methods. 

460. Thesis. I, II. 1-6 hr. 

471, 472. Algebraic Geometry. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 141, 271. Foundations of 
affine geometry, the geometry of quadratic forms. Structure of the general linear 
group, symplectic groups, and orthogonal groups. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of mathematics. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Each graduate student will present at 
least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student body of the 
student's program. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 

Donald W. Lyons, Chairperson of the Department 

323 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S.A.E., M.S.M.E. 

Options for M.S.E. and Ph.D. in Engineering 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bajura, Banta, Celik, Chattree, Clark, Dean, Fanucci, 
Flemmer, Johnson, Jurewicz, Kale, Kang, Kuhlman, Long, Loth, Lyell, Lyons, Means, 
Morris, Mucino, Nagarajan, Palmer, Prucz, Sivaneri, Smith, Sneckenberger, Stanley, 
Steinhardt, Venable, and Yang. 

Faculty members in the department have extensive industrial and 
teaching experience and have published widely in the technical literature, a 
combination which assists students in selecting relevant courses and research 
topics to meet their educational goals. The department has laboratory space 
on two floors in the Engineering Sciences Building and provides support for 
both instructional and research activities through the services of three shop 
facilities, the wind tunnel laboratory, and the flight test hangar at the 
Morgantown Municipal Airport (Hart Field). Funded research allows the 

198 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



department to maintain up-to-date instrumentation, equipment, and facilities, 
including computer-controlled data acquisition systems for laboratory use. 

Graduate Programs 

The objectives of the departmental graduate-level programs are: (1) To 
provide master's level education for students in or entering the engineering 
profession, and/or (2) To provide an advanced graduate educational experience 
for students pursuing the doctoral degree. Two separate master's degrees are 
offered in the department. They are the Master of Science in Aerospace 
Engineering (M.S.A.E.) and the Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering 
(M.S.M.E.). Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) and the Doctor of 
Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree, an undesignated degree, is offered by the College 
of Engineering and is interdisciplinary in nature. 

Graduate Degree Requirements 

Course Work and Grade-Point Requirements 

All of the degree programs require the student to attain an overall grade- 
point average of 3.0 or higher in order to meet graduation requirements. The 
grade-point average is calculated on the basis of courses and excludes credit 
for research, which is graded on an S/U basis. Some of the course work can be 
at the 200-level, dependent upon the program desired by the student and the 
agreement of his/her advisory committee. Students are generally advised to 
select a minimum number of 200-level courses for their programs of study and 
concentrate upon developing proficiency in course material offered at the 
300-and 400-levels, which are designated as graduate-level courses by WVU. 

Only courses with grades of C or higher may be acceptable for graduate 
credit, although all course work taken will be counted in establishing the 
student's average. No more than 9 hours of 200-level credit can be counted 
toward meeting the course work requirements for the M.S. degree. All 
doctoral options must include a minimum of 18 semester hours of course work 
taken at WVU. No more than 20 percent of the course work for a doctoral 
degree can be at the 200 level. A minimum of 24 semester hours of research 
credit is required for dissertation requirements. Two semesters of full-time 
attendance at the WVU Morgantown campus are necessary to meet residency 
requirements in the Ph.D. program. 

The Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering requires six 
hours of advanced mathematics for M.S. programs of study and a minimum of 
six additional hours of mathematics for the Ph.D. option. Although these 
courses need not be taken explicitly from the Department of Mathematics, the 
general thrust of the courses must be equivalent to the 300-400 level of effort 
required for the major portion of a plan of study. 

Maximum Time for Completion 

Master's: All requirements for a master's degree must be completed 
within eight years preceding the student's graduation. Students should 
petition for admission to candidacy for the degree during the first semester of 
residency by filing a plan of study approved by his/her advisory committee. A 
minimum of 30 hours of course work (including research) is required for the 
degree. Students must pass a final examination administered by their 
advisory committee before being certified for the degree. 

Doctorate: The doctorate is a research or performance degree and does not 
depend on the accumulation of credit hours. The requirements for the degree 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 199 



are admission to candidacy, residency, completion and defense of a research 
dissertation, and satisfactory compliance with the Interdisciplinary Ph.D. 
requirements of the College of Engineering. Two members of the Graduate 
Faculty from outside the department are required to serve on the advisory and 
examining committee. 

The Ph.D. degree signifies that the holder has the competence to function 
independently at the highest level of endeavor in the chosen field. Hence, the 
number of years involved in attaining or retaining competency cannot be 
readily specified nor can an exact program of study be defined. Students 
seeking admission to the Ph.D. program must show the potential for 
conducting independent research at the level required to make a contribution 
to the advancement of knowledge in the field of study. The course work taken 
should be sufficient to broaden the student's background in at least one other 
area of the department in addition to the major area of study. A minimum of 
two minor areas is recommended in addition to the required proficiency in 
mathematics. 

Ph.D. Qualifying/ Candidacy Examination— The Ph.D. qualifying/candi- 
dacy examination is the method of assessing whether the student has attained 
sufficient knowledge of the discipline and supporting fields in order to 
undertake independent research or practice. Students are required to pass a 
qualifying examination administered by the department which tests for a 
minimum level of proficiency expected of all students in a given area. It is 
expected that students will take the qualifying exam during their first 
semester of enrollment in the Ph.D. program, however it is required that 
full-time students complete the qualifying examination no later than the end 
of their second semester past the master's degree. The advisory and examining 
committee of the student is charged with evaluating the student's competency 
in the specific area of study through the evaluation of a dissertation proposal 
for the research to be completed and the evaluation of the student's plan of 
study and associated course work. After these requirements are completed, 
the student is formally admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. Only at 
this point can a student be called a doctoral candidate; admission to the 
graduate program for the purpose of pursuing the Ph.D. is not equivalent to 
becoming a Ph.D. candidate. Doctoral candidates are allowed no more than 
five years to complete the remaining degree requirements after admission to 
candidacy. An extension of time can be obtained only by repeating the 
qualifying examination and meeting any other requirements specified by the 
student's committee. 

Graduate Degree Programs 

Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering (M.S.A.E.) 

Students wishing to pursue a program leading to an M.S.A.E. degree are 
required to have a B.S.A.E. or B.S.M.E. from an accredited ABET curriculum, 
or their equivalent. Students with an engineering background other than 
aerospace or mechanical engineering normally will be required to strengthen 
their background. Programs of study must comply with the rules and 
regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the 
College of Engineering. The student's program of study is formulated jointly 
by the student and his/her advisory committee. Normally, a thesis is required 
of all candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering. 

Programs of study for the M.S.A.E. degree must include six semester 
hours of advanced mathematics beyond a first course in differential equations 

200 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



and at least 12 semester hours of aerospace engineering courses taken from 
any two areas of the department. The remainder of the course work may 
consist of other courses from Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, other 
departments in the College of Engineering, or advanced course work in 
mathematics, chemistry, and physics. A maximum of six hours of credit is 
counted toward degree requirements for thesis work. Students not completing 
a thesis will be required to include three hours of methods courses in their 
programs of study. 

Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering (M.S.M.E.) 

Students wishing to pursue a program leading to an M.S.M.E. degree are 
required to have a B.S.M.E. or B.S.A.E. from an accredited ABET curriculum, 
or its equivalent. Students with an engineering background other than 
mechanical or aerospace engineering normally will be required to strengthen 
their background. 

The program of study must include at least six hours of advanced 
mathematics beyond a first course in differential equations, and 12 total 
hours of courses from at least two areas of study in mechanical engineering. 
Students are normally required to write either a thesis or problem report 
unless they can present compelling evidence of equivalent experience. A 
maximum of six hours of research credit is counted toward meeting degree 
requirements for the thesis option; a maximum of three hours of research 
credit is counted for the problem report option. The student's plan of study is 
formulated jointly with his/her advisory committee based upon the interests 
and educational goals of the student. Students not completing a thesis or 
problem report will be required to include three hours of methods courses in 
their programs of study. Programs of study must comply with the rules and 
regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the 
College of Engineering. 

Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

The M.S.E. program administered by the College of Engineering is 
generally intended for students who desire to do graduate work in areas other 
than their baccalaureate major. Students desiring to pursue such a program in 
the department must meet similar general requirements as for the M.S.A.E. 
and M.S.M.E. degree programs, although their overall program may be more 
flexible. 

Each plan of study in the M.S.E. program must include six hours of 
advanced mathematics and nine hours from any two academic areas in the 
department. The plan of study may follow thesis or problem report programs 
applicable to the designated master's programs. Students not completing a 
thesis or problem report will be required to include three hours of methods 
courses in their programs of study. Programs of study must comply with the 
rules and regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate 
work in the College of Engineering. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Students intending to pursue a doctoral program in the College of 
Engineering with an emphasis in mechanical or aerospace engineering should 
have earned a B.S. or an M.S. degree in some discipline of engineering. While it 
is possible for a student with a B.S. degree to enroll directly in the Ph.D. 
program, it is advisable to earn a master's degree first. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 201 



As with the department's master's programs, the doctoral courses of 
study are selected to fit the individual interests and objectives of the student, 
with proper attention given to broadening related areas of study. 

The research work for the doctoral dissertation may entail a fundamental 
investigation into a specialized area or a broad and comprehensive program of 
study. Programs of study must comply with the rules and regulations as 
outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the College of 
Engineering. 

Academic Areas in Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering 

Courses in the department are organized under the four academic areas: 
aerodynamics and fluids engineering; solid mechanics, materials and struc- 
tures; system control and design; and thermal sciences and engineering. In 
addition, students may pursue studies leading to a specialization in bioengi- 
neering. 

Aerodynamics and Fluids Engineering 

Students may pursue an advanced degree with specialization in aero- 
dynamics and fluids engineering in either the aerospace engineering or the 
mechanical engineering program. A variety of courses and facilities support 
graduate research in these areas. Laboratories are located in the Engineering 
Sciences Building, with separate wind tunnel and wind turbine facilities in 
adjoining buildings and remote sites. Flow facilities include instrumented 
subsonic and supersonic wind tunnels, shock tubes, and several flow loops 
mainly used for research in gas-solid and density stratified flows. Available 
instrumentation includes eight channels of hot wire/film anemometry, two 
single-component and one three-component laser doppler velocimeter (LDV) 
systems. A hydraulic facility is also available for flow metering studies and 
includes a calibration system and pressure transmitters. The department 
owns well-instrumented V/STOL and Cessna U-206 flight test aircraft 
housed in hangar facilities at Hart Field. A complete library of full-length 
films and film loops developed by the National Committee for Fluid Mechanics 
Films is available for student use. A significant portion of the current activity 
involves numerical solutions to flow problems and is supported by a 
computing facility dedicated to graduate research. 

Although the faculty background and interests are broad, recent research 
has been concentrated on problems in multiphase and density-stratified 
flows, low-speed aerodynamics, shock phenomena in two-phase systems, 
boundary layer control and high-speed aerodynamics. These research areas 
include topics such as fluidized bed combustion, aerosol sampling, flow 
metering, flow distribution systems, numerical solutions to gas-solid flows, 
and fluid-particle turbulence interactions, including deposition on solid 
surfaces. The low-speed aerodynamics work is related to the design of 
vertical axis wind turbines and STOL airfoils. The research in high-speed 
aerodynamics deals with viscous-inviscid interactions in transonic, super- 
sonic, and hypersonic flow. 

The faculty has a wide range of experience and expertise in aerodynamics 
and fluids engineering. Their professional service activities include flight 
instruction and ham radio operation, service on local A.I.A.A. and A.S.M.E. 
section programs, and service at the national level in organizing and chairing 
technical meetings and symposia. 



202 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



Solid Mechanics, Materials and Structures 

Students wishing to pursue graduate studies in the solid mechanics, 
materials, and structures (SMMS) academic area may do so within the 
department under the M.S.E. program, the traditional M.S.A.E. or M.S.M.E. 
program, or the doctoral (Ph.D.) program. This area of study encompasses the 
theoretical and experimental study of solid bodies, from concentration on 
local behavior of deformable bodies to the global response of structural 
elements or the motion of rigid bodies. Hence, SMMS students may explore 
the mechanical behavior of materials near micro-scale defects such as cracks 
or investigate the behavior of large-scale bodies such as aerospace structures. 

The thrust of the SMMS faculty is toward the application of mechanics to 
solve contemporary problems in engineering; hence, research is of an applied 
nature. Some samples are: numerical simulation of interbody contact, a 
numerical simulator for crack growth in layered geo-strata, thermal stress in 
layered composite materials, experimental fracture mechanics, and the 
aeroelastic response of helicopter blades. Furthermore, in cooperation with 
the Department of Civil Engineering, SMMS students may pursue studies 
related to civil engineering; one typical example is soil-structure interaction. 
An array of laboratories (structures, vibrations, photomechanics and photog- 
raphy, and fracture mechanics), computers (Amdahl V/7A, VAX 11/780, VAX 
11/785, microcomputers), and shop facilities serve this end. 

Regardless of one's chosen specialty, the SMMS student is required to 
take nine hours of core courses which are fundamental and essential to a 
strong program. The core courses are M.A.E. 305, 318, and 320. This 
requirement may be waived for students who possess equivalent knowledge. 
With completion of these courses, together with the entire plan of study, the 
SMMS student is well prepared to apply mechanics to meet modern 
engineering challenges. 

System Control and Design 

The system control and design academic area offers instructional and 
research opportunities for qualified students who are personally challenged 
to attain the expertise required to design or control the behavior of a system in 
a dynamic environment. Instructional offerings furnish students with a 
foundation for developing prototype systems and for improving the perfor- 
mance of existing systems. These offerings provide such emphasis as 
elastodynamic analysis, computerized design, and active control in automated 
machines. 

The research endeavors of its faculty reflect a close association with 
current industrial-type situations. These endeavors have achieved improve- 
ments for such applications as lung system modeling, acid control in streams 
or rivers, railroad yard retarder design, noise control in industrial nozzles, 
coal feeder system design, engine acoustic impedance modeling, and the 
control of energy systems in buildings. 

The system control and design faculty has active relations with other 
engineering colleagues, having interests in process control, microprocessor 
applications, and computer-aided manufacturing. The expertise of the faculty 
includes the successful completion of programs for governmental agencies 
(NASA, U.S. Forest Service, West Virginia Department of Natural Resources, 
Department of Energy, Department of Health and Human Services), and 
industrial firms. One of the faculty is a member of the Examining Board for 
Professional Engineers in West Virginia. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 203 



Recent activity in the department has centered on programs in robotics 
and artificial intelligence. A Rhino robot system has been acquired for 
teaching and research. A computer aided design (CAD) laboratory has been 
developed along with appropriate course work and research activity. 

Thermal Sciences and Engineering 

The thermal sciences and engineering academic area encompasses the 
fields of thermodynamics, combustion, heat transfer, and power and energy 
systems. The faculty has a substantial amount of service in industries 
involving fossil and nuclear power generation, propulsion, and combustion 
problems. Graduate course offerings cover a wide range of topics in this area 
with applications both to aerospace and mechanical engineering problems. 
Recent research efforts include topics such as the analysis of transients in 
power plants, in-situ underground coal gasification, cross-flow coal gasifi- 
cation, flashing flow-through valves, fluidized bed combustion, gas separation 
membranes, solar energy rooftop heat exchangers, corrosion testing in high- 
temperature gases, energy analysis of buildings, gas turbine, heat transfer, 
spacecraft thermal design, and solar-assisted heat pumps. 

Research facilities include a high-altitude simulation chamber for ablation 
and wear studies; a fluidized bed combustion experimental system; a thermal 
analyzer; an electrically-heated, natural convection water facility; schlieren 
systems for flows with varying density; a 48-channel recording thermocouple 
data-acquisition system; a water reservoir for thermal stratification studies; 
and high-temperature thermocouple calibration equipment. 

Bioengineering Program 

The department also cooperates with other departments in the College of 
Engineering and the School of Medicine at WVU to offer a program in 
bioengineering culminating in the M.S.E. degree or a designated master's 
degree, depending upon the student's background and area of specialization. 
A typical program consists of 36-39 hours of course work in view of the depth 
required in both the engineering and medical subjects comprising this area of 
study. Students whose B.S. degrees are in disciplines other than engineering 
may be required to complete prerequisite courses. Admission to the Bioengi- 
neering program requires the acceptance of the student by the WVU 
Bioengineering Committee and the Department of Mechanical and Aerospace 
Engineering. 

The plan of study for an M.S. program typically includes six hours of 
advanced mathematics, 9 or 12 hours of course work in the department 
(depending upon degree program), nine hours of bioengineering courses, nine 
hours of medical course work, and research experience in the form of 
internships, problem reports, or thesis work. Students can continue toward a 
Ph.D. in bioengineering by following a plan of study tailored specifically to 
their research interests. 

Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering (M.A.E.) 

200. Advanced Mechanics of Materials 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43 or consent. Advanced 
topics in applied stress analysis: stress concentrations, strain energy, beams, 
thick-walled cylinders, torsional warping, fracture. 3 hr. lee. 



204 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



210. Kinematics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 130 and Math. 18 or consent. Geometry of constrained 
motion, kinematics synthesis and design, special linkage. Coupler curves, inflection 
circle, Euler-Savary equation, cubic of stationary curvature and finite displacement 
techniques. 3 hr. lee. 

215. Experimental Fiuid Dynamics 2.3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 115. Continuation of M.A.E. 115 
with increased emphasis on dynamic measurements. Shock tube/tunnel and 
subsonic and supersonic measurements. Experiments include optical techniques, 
heat transfer to models, and viscous flow measurements. Error analysis of test 
data. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

216. Applied Aerodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 116. Chordwise and spanwise airload 
distribution for plain wings, wings with aerodynamic and geometric twist, wings 
with deflected flaps, and wings with ailerons deflected. Section induced drag 
characteristics. 3 hr. lee. 

220. Guided Missile Systems. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117 and/or Cone: M.A.E. 150. Design 
philosophy according to mission requirements. Preliminary configuration and 
design concepts. Aerodynamic effects on missiles during launch and flight. 
Ballistic missile trajectories. Stability determination by analog simulation. 
Performance determination by digital and analog simulation. Control, guidance, 
and propulsion systems. Operational and reliability considerations. 3 hr. lee. 

226. Mechanics of Composite Materials. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17, M.A.E. 43. Fundamental 
methods for structural analysis of fiber reinforced composites-lamination theory 
and micromechanics. Particularities of composite applications in design and 
manufacturing of structural components-performance tailoring, failure criteria, 
environmental effects, joining and processing. 

232. V/STOL Aerodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117. Fundamental aerodynamics of 
V/STOL aircraft. Topics include propeller and rotor theory, helicopter performance, 
jet flaps, ducted fans and propeller-wing contributions. 3 hr. lee. 

235. Fluid Dynamics 4. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117. One-dimensional, non-steady gas 
dynamics. Shock tube theory and applications. Fundamentals of supersonic and 
hypersonic flow and the determination of minimum drag bodies. 3 hr. lee. 

236. Systems Analysis of Space Satellites. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Introduction to 
engineering principles associated with analysis and design of space satellites. 
Emphasis on the interdisciplinary nature of satellite systems analysis. 3 hr. lee. 

240. Problems in Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. Thermodynamic 
systems with special emphasis on actual processes. Problems presented are 
designed to strengthen the background of the student in the application of the 
fundamental thermodynamic concepts. 3 hr. lee. 

241. Flight Mechanics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 146. Fundamental concepts of feedback 
control system analysis and design. Automatic flight controls, and human pilot 
plus airframe considered as a closed loop system. Stability augmentation. 3 hr. lee. 

242. Flight Testing. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 146. Applied flight test techniques and instrumen- 
tation, calibration methods, determination of static performance characteristics, 
and introduction to stability and control testing based on flight test of Cessna 
Super Skywagon airplane. Flight test data analysis and report preparation. 1 hr. 
lee, 6 hr. lab. 

243. Bioengineering. 3 hr. PR M.A.E. 43, Phys. 201 or consent. Introduction to human 
anatomy and physiology using an engineering systems approach. Gives the 
engineering student a basic understanding of the human system so that the student 
may include it as an integral part of the design. 3 hr. lee. 

244. Introduction to Gas Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 144 or consent. Fundamentals of 
gas dynamics, one-dimensional gas dynamics and wave motion, measurement, 
effect of viscosity and conductivity, and concepts from gas kinetics. 3 hr. lee. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 205 



249. Space Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, M.A.E. 42. Flight in and beyond the earth's 
atmosphere by space vehicles. Laws of Kepler and Orbital theory. Energy 
requirements for satellite and interplanetary travel. Exit from and entry into an 
atmosphere. 3 hr. lee. 

252. Advanced Topics in Propulsion. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 150 or consent. Special problems 
of thermodynamics and dynamics of aircraft power plants. Chemical rocket 
propellants and combustion. Rocket thrust chambers and nozzle heat transfer. 
Nuclear rockets. Electrical rocket propulsion. 3 hr. lee. 

254. Applications in Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158. Application of basic heat 
transfer theory and digital computation techniques to problems involving heat 
exchangers, power plants, electronic cooling, manufacturing processes, and 
environmental problems. 3 hr. lee. 

262. Internal Combustion Engines. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 101 or 141. Thermodynamics of the 
internal combustion engine; Otto cycle; Diesel cycle, gas turbine cycle, two- and 
four-cycle engines, fuels, carburetion and fuel injection; combustion; engine 
performance, supercharging. 3 hr. lee. 

264. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. 
Methods and systems of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning of various types 
of buildings; types of controls and their application. 3 hr. lee. 

265. Aeroelasticity. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 160. Vibrating systems of single degree and 
multiple degrees of freedom, flutter theory and modes of vibration, torsional 
divergence, and control reversal. 3 hr. lee. 

270. Microprocessor Applications in Mechanical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 181. 
Fundamentals of programming and interfacing a microprocessor. Hands-on, 
hardware oriented. Assembly language and BASIC programming. RAM, EPROM, 
analog to digital and digital to analog converters, stepper motors, encoders, AC 
devices. Interfacing project required. 3 hr. lee. 

275. Computer-Aided Design: Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 132 or 161; Co-req.: 
M.A.E. 250. CAD fundamentals. User-computer interface and interactive pro- 
gramming for rational design. Computational tools, finite elements and modeling 
techniques. Interactive graphics, pre-post processor applications. Case studies: 
conceptual-preliminary-detail iterative design and analysis. 

280. Aerospace Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Upper-division and graduate standing. 

282. Engineering Acoustics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 or consent. Theory of sound propagation 
and transmission. Important industrial noise sources and sound measurement 
equipment. Noise criteria and control methods. Assessment of noise abatement 
technology. Laboratory studies and case histories. 

284. Applied Feedback Control. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 122 or consent. Application of 
automatic control theory. Transfer functions and block diagrams for linear 
physical systems. Proportional, integral, and derivative controllers. Transient 
and frequency response using Laplace transformation. 3 hr. lee. 

285. Thesis. 2-6 hr. PR: Senior standing and consent. 

286. Design of Robotic Systems. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 113 or consent. Mechanical 
automation design associated with robotic systems, including economic justifica- 
tion and ethics. Geometric choices and controller specifications for programmable 
manipulators. Workstation strategies such as CNC and CIM for computer-based 
flexible manufacturing. 

290. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing, and consent. 
206 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



291. Introduction to Research. 1-3 hr. PR: Senior standing and consent. Methods of 
organizing theoretical and experimental research. Formulation of problems, 
project planning, and research proposal preparation. 

292. Research Problems. 2-6 hr. PR: M.A.E. 291 or consent. Performance of the research 
project as proposed in M.A.E. 291. Project results are given in written technical 
reports with conclusions and recommendations. 

294. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing, and consent. 

299. Special Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

300. Seminar. Credit. Attendance required of all aerospace graduate students at 
scheduled seminars. 

301. Advanced Engineering Acoustics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 282 or consent. Study of 
complex sound generation and the propagation, transmission, reflection, and 
absorption of airborne and structure-borne sound. Coupling of sound and 
vibration in structures. Acoustical behavior and characteristics of materials, 
aeroacoustics, and acoustics of combustion systems. 

305. Analytical Methods in Engineering 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Index notation for 
determinants, matrices, and quadratic forms; linear vector spaces, linear operators 
including differential operators; calculus of variations, eigenvalue problems, and 
boundary value problems. 

306. Analytical Methods in Engineering 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 305 or at least two semesters 
of advanced calculus. Intended for advanced graduate students interested in 
modern analysis for engineering applications. 

307. Nonlinear Analysis in Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics in nonlinear 
analysis of various types of engineering systems. Various numerical, approximate, 
and analytical techniques chosen to suit the needs and interests of advanced 
graduate students. 

310. Advanced Mechanics of Materials 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 320 or consent. Mechanics of 
composite materials: anisotropic stress-strain relations and property character- 
ization, lamina behavior, general laminate analysis, environmental effects. 3 hr. 
lee. 

312. Inelastic Behavior of Engineering Materials. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41, 42, 43, and 
consent. Characterization and modeling of typical engineering materials, elastic, 
viscoelastic, and plastic materials, design considerations. 

315. Fluid Flow Measurements. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117 or consent. Principles and 
measurements of static and dynamic pressures and temperatures, velocity, and 
Mach number and forces. Optical techniques and photography. Design of exper- 
iments. Review of selected papers from the literature. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

316. Energy Methods in Applied Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Variational principles 
of mechanics and applications to engineering problems; principles of virtual 
displacements, minimum potential energy, and complementary energy. Castig- 
liano's theorem. Hamilton's principle. Applications to theory of plates, shells, and 
stability. 3 hr. lee. 

318. Continuum Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41,42,43. Basic laws of physical behavior 
of continuous media. Analysis of stress; equations of motion and boundary 
conditions; kinematic analysis; rates of strain, dilation and rotation; bulk time, 
rates of change; constitutive equations with special attention to elastic bodies and 
ideal fluids; energy equations and the first law of thermodynamics. 3 hr. lee. 

320. Theory of Elasticity 1. 3 hr. Cartesian tensors; equations of classical elasticity, 
energy, minimum, and uniqueness theorems for the first and second boundary 
value problems; St. Venant principle; extension, torsion, and bending problems. 3 
hr. lee. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 207 



322. Advanced Vibrations 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 122 or consent. Dynamic analysis of 
multiple degree of freedom discrete vibrating systems. Lagrangian formulation, 
matrix and numerical methods, impact and mechanical transients. 3 hr. lab. 

325. Experimental Stress Analysis. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43. Classical photoelasticity, 
brittle lacquers, birefrigent coatings, strain gage techniques and instrumentation, 
as applied to problems involving static stress distributions. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

330. Instrumentation in Engineering 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of measuring systems, 
emphasizing measurement of rapidly changing force, pressure, strain, temperature, 
vibration, etc. Available instruments, methods of noise elimination, types of 
recording studied. Of special value to students in experimental research. 2 hr. lee, 
3 hr. lab. 

333. Advanced Machine Design. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 135 or consent. Design for extreme 
environments, material selection, lubrication and wear, dynamic loads on cams, 
gears, and bearings, balancing of multiengines and rotors, electromechanical 
components. 

340. Advanced Thermodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. First and second 
laws of thermodynamics with emphasis on the concept of entropy production. 
Application to a variety of nonsteady open systems, thermodynamics of multi- 
phase, multicomponent and reacting systems. Criteria for equilibrium and 
stability. 

342. Advanced Thermodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Continuation of 
topics related to reactive systems. Adiabatic flame temperatures, reaction kinetics, 
conservation of species equations, flame propagation and detonation. 

344. Statistical Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Microscopic thermo- 
dynamics for Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein, and Fermi-Dirac statistics. Schrodinger 
wave equation, partition functions for gases and solids. 

348. Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Undergraduate course in heat transfer or consent. 
(Primarily for mechanical and aerospace engineering students.) Topics include 
one-, two-, and three-dimensional thermal conduction involved in mechanical 
processes both for constant and time varying temperature fields, free and forced 
convection in heat exchangers, heat power equipment and aircraft and radiative 
heat transfer between surfaces and absorbing media as found in furnaces, 
industrial processes, and aerospace applications. 

350. Conduction Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Analytical, numerical, 
graphical, and analog solutions of steady and non-steady heat conduction 
problems in isotropic solids. Thermal properties, extended surfaces, thermal 
stress, interphase conduction with moving interface, socalized and distributed 
sources. 

352. Intermediate Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 42. Newtonian and Lagrangian mechanics. 
Dynamics of discrete systems and rigid bodies analyzed utilizing Newtonian and 
Lagrangian formulations. 

353. Advanced Dynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 352 or consent. Analytical mechanics. 
Stability of autonomous and nonautonomous systems considered and analytical 
solutions by perturbation techniques introduced. Hamilton-Jacobi equations 
developed. Problems involving spacecraft, gyroscopes, and celestial mechanics 
studied. 

354. Convection Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Laminar and turbulent 
flows. Analytical, numerical, and analogical solution. Selected study of current 
research. 

208 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



355. Radiation Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Classical derivation of 
black body radiation laws; gray body and non-gray analysis; radiant properties of 
materials, radiant transport analysis, specular-diffuse networks, gas radiation, 
thermal radiation measurements; analytical, numerical solutions, and study of 
selected publications. 3 hr. lee. 

360. Fluid Mechanics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 144 or equiv. Advanced dynamics and 
thermodynamics of fluids. Basic laws of conservation of mass and momentum in 
differential, vector, and integral forms. Application to internal flows, fluid 
machinery, and structures. 

364. Turbomachinery. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 140 or consent. Flow problems encountered in 
design of water, gas, and steam turbines, centrifugal and axial flow pumps and 
compressors, design parameters. 

380. Special Problems. 2-4 hr. Consent of department chairperson. For graduate 
students in the non-research program. The student will select a specialized field 
and follow a course of study in that field under the supervision of a counselor. 

384. Feedback Control in Mechanical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 284 or consent. 
Control analysis of hydraulic and pneumatic closed-loop systems including spool 
valves, flapper valves, pumps, servomotors, and electrohydraulic servomecha- 
nisms. Investigation of nonlinearities by phase plane, Liapunov, and describing 
function techniques. Programming for analog and digital computer simulation. 
Introduction to fluidic elements and logic circuits. 

394. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing. 

399. Special Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing. 

411. Dynamics of Viscous Fluids. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Exact solutions of the Navier- 
Stokes equations. Laminar incompressible and compressible boundary layer 
theory, similarity solutions, and integral methods. 3 hr. lee. 

412. Fundamentals of Turbulent Flow. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 411 or consent. Basic 
experimental data. Application of semi-empirical theories to pipe, jet and 
boundary layer flow. Turbulent heat and mass transfer. Statistical theory of 
turbulence and recent applications. 3 hr. lee. 

413. Dynamics of Real Gases. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 411 or consent. Fundamentals of 
multicomponent, chemically reacting, gas flows; thermodynamic properties of 
equilibrium mixtures from satistical mechanics; chemical kinetics; effects of the 
chemical model on high-temperature, high-speed flow properties. 

414. Theory of Elastic Stability. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Stability of discrete mechanical 
systems, energy theorems, buckling of beams, beam columns, and frames, 
torsional buckling, buckling of plates and shells, special topics. 

419. Topics in Fluids and Solids. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Finite elasticity and viscoelasticity, 
non-Newtonian fluids, nonlinear constitutive theories, special topics in solids and 
fluids. 

421. Theory of Elasticity 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 320 (or M.A.E. 310 and consent). Complex 
variable methods, stress couples, nonlinear elasticity, numerical methods, potential 
methods, boundary value problems, various special topics. 3 hr. lee. 

422. Advanced Vibrations 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 222, M.A.E. 322 or consent. Dynamic 
analysis of continuous media. Vibration and wave motion analysis of strings, 
elastic bars, beams, plates and fluid columns. Earthquake wave propagation. 

424. Theory of Plates and Shells. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 310. Cylindrical bending, theory of 
rectangular and circular plates, membrane shells of revolution, shells with 
bending stiffness, dynamic response of plates and shells, numerical applications. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 209 



425. Perfect Fluid Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Conformal mapping including Schwarz- 
Christoffel and Joukowski transformations. Inviscid flows over airfoils, spheres, 
cones, wedges, and bodies of revolution. 3 hr. lee. 

428. Photomechanics. 3 hr. PR: M. A.E. 200, 325. Theory of optics, birefringence, stress- 
optic law, polariscope, compensation. Techniques of model making, photography, 
polariscope use. Photoelastic coating methods and use of various reflective 
polariscopes. Data interpretation by various methods including principal stress 
separation by shear difference, oblique incidence and graphical integration. 2 hr. 
rec, 3 hr. lab. 

431. Instrumentation in Engineering 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 330. Continuation of M.A.E. 330 
with emphasis on transducers for static and dynamic measurement and their use 
in practical measuring systems. 3 hr. rec. 

435. Gas Dynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112 or consent. Nonsteady gas dynamics and 
shock tube theory. Shock tubes in aerospace research. Compressible flow theory in 
subsonic, transonic, and supersonic regimes. 3 hr. lee. 

436. Gas Dynamics 2. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 435 or consent. Transonic flow-hodograph 
method, the Chaplygin-Karman-Tsin approximation. Hypersonic flow-bluntbody 
field theory. Shock wave and viscous interaction with flow fields, blastwave 
theory and similar solutions. 3 hr. lee. 

440. Irreversible Thermodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Phenomenological 
treatment of the laws of dynamics and thermodynamics for irreversible processes 
in continuous media. Linear laws for combined irreversible phenomena including 
viscous dissipation, heat conduction, diffusion, chemical reactions and electric 
and magnetic effects, are developed taking into account Curie's principle and the 
Onsager relations. The principle of the minimum rate of creation of entropy is 
extended to establish criteria for the stability of stationary states. Tensor and 
variational methods are employed. 

441. Irreversible Thermodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 440. Continuation of M.A.E. 440 
with emphasis on selected topics from such applications as thermoelectricity, 
anistropic heat conduction, stability of fluid motion, thermal diffusion and 
separation, viscochemical drag, electrochemical cells, and other coupled phenom- 
ena of physical or biological interests. 

442. Advanced Flight Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112, 142. Dynamic stability. 
Obtaining flight characteristics of the vehicle from dynamic flight test techniques 
such as frequency response, and transient response methods. Problems of 
automatic control. 3 hr. lee. 

449. Space Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 245, M.A.E. 112, 150. Variational formulation of 
mechanics. Theory of orbits and trajectories with applications to astronomical 
problems. Introduction to the space environment. 3 hr. lee. 

450. Fundamentals of Combustion. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112 or consent. Kinetic theory, 
transport phenomena, chemical equilibrium and reaction kinetics. Flames, their 
gross properties, structure and gas dynamics. Solid and liquid propellant 
combustion. 3 hr. lee. 

454. Advanced Dynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study in dynamics. Topics 
covered are either nonlinear vibration, advanced control theory, or stability 
theory depending on student demand. 

458. Foundations of Magnetohydrodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Ionization in gas 
flows; equations of state, charge, mass, momentum, and energy conservation; 
effects of self-generated and external electric and magnetic fields on electrically 
conducting fluids and transport coefficients. 3 hr. lee. 

210 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



459. Applied Magnetohydrodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Incompressible and viscous 
MHD channel flow; plane waves in fluids, discontinuities and MHD shock waves; 
applications of MHD to electric power generation, etc. 3 hr. lee. 

461. Fluid Mechanics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 360 or equiv. Statistical nature of turbulence, 
correlation functions, and Fourier representations. Kinematics of isotropic and 
nonisotropic turbulent flows. Experimental methods. Application to dynamic 
loading on structures, diffusion and dispersion of contaminants by turbulent 
fields and heat and mass transfer. 

465. Dynamics of Aerospace Structures 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 474 or consent. Free and 
forced vibrations of systems with finite and infinite degrees of freedom. Effect of 
rotary inertia and shear on lateral vibrations of beams. Hamilton principle and 
Lagrange equations in vibration problems. 3 hr. lee. 

466. Dynamics of Aerospace Structures 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 465. Two- and three- 
dimensional wing theory in incompressible and compressible flow. Wings and 
bodies in three-dimensional unsteady flow. 3 hr. lee. 

474. Advanced Aerospace Structures 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 161 or consent. Stress 
analysis; deflection of trusses and beams. Statically indeterminate problems. 
Hardy cross moment distribution and slope deflection methods. Matrix methods 
of structural analysis; force and displacement methods. 3 hr. lee. 

475. Advanced Aerospace Structures 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 474 or consent. Principles in 
structural analysis, beam-column, sandwich beams and plates. Methods of 
obtaining exact and approximate solutions (Raleigh-Ritz, Galerkin, etc.). Buckling 
loads in compression. Stiffened panels, wrinkling in sandwich construction. 
Minimum weight design. Shells. 3 hr. lee. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study in areas not covered by 
formal courses. 

492. Seminar: Engineering Education. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Studies and group discussion 
of selected problems in engineering education. Emphasis on application of 
educational principles to specific areas in engineering education. 

493. Seminar: Bioengineering. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. An exposition of contemporary 
topics in bioengineering. Topics include advancements in biomedical instrumen- 
tation, prosthetics, cardiovascular research, biological controls, biomechanics, 
neurophysiological research, human factors and anthropometrics. 

494. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Discussion, library readings, and individual study 
reports in the mechanical and aerospace engineering fields. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Ph.D. dissertation research. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not seeking 
course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use University 
facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

Jean D. Holter, Interim Director of the Program 
2138 Basic Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Holter, Iammarino, S. Jagannathan, Mengoli, Moore, and 
Rodman. 

The WVU Medical Technology graduate program prepares graduate 
medical technologists for positions either as administrators and teachers in 
medical technology educational programs or as supervisors in special areas of 
the clinical laboratory. The primary objective is to assist in development of 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 211 



knowledge in an area in administration, in education, or a special area of 
interest selected by the student which may be a special medical laboratory 
science as the specific area applies to laboratory medicine. Specializations 
include clinical chemistry, clinical microbiology, hematology, and immunohema- 
tology. The specific course work requirements for the master of science degree 
rests with the graduate adviser in the student's specific area of interest. 

Graduate Committee: J. Holter, R. Iammarino, S. Jagannathan, H. Mengoli, 
D. Moore, Jr., and N. Rodman. 

Admission 

Applicants must have a baccalaureate degree in medical technology from 
an accredited institution or a baccalaureate degree in an allied field and be a 
certified medical technologist with an acceptable certifying agency. 

Information concerning the Medical Technology undergraduate program 
may be found in the WVU Health Sciences [Medical Center) Catalog. 

The area of concentration in medical technology desired by the student is 
considered in the evaluation of the undergraduate as follows: 

1. Individuals who desire to do special study in clinical chemistry, 
hematology, or immunohematology must have completed 8 hours of physics, 3 
hours of mathematics, 4 hours of organic chemistry, and 4 hours of analytical 
chemistry on the college level. 

2. Individuals who desire to do special study in microbiology must have 
completed 4 hours of organic chemistry and 16 hours of biological sciences. 

3. A minimum of one year's experience in a clinical laboratory is required 
for admission. 

Students will be required to make up deficiencies in the above, as well as 
other deficiencies deemed necessary by the adviser. 

Applicants must have a minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 
2.5 (based on A=4.0 grade points) for admission. 

All applicants are required to take the general aptitude part of the 
Graduate Record Examination. Results should be sent to the WVU Medicar 
Technology Programs Office, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Two letters of reference must be on file in the Medical Technology Office. 
One letter should be from the major adviser in the undergraduate college and 
another from the immediate supervisor of the applicant's present position. An 
interview will be requested for all applicants who meet the requirements for 
admission. 

Applicants are selected for admission on the basis of scholastic standing, 
recommendations, and interest in the field of medical technology. The number 
of applicants accepted is necessarily limited by the available facilities; and in 
general, applicants with the most experience are considered first. 

Application Procedure 

A preliminary application is filed in the Medical Technology Programs 
Office. 

Letters of recommendation are sent to the Medical Technology Programs 
Office. 

After approval of the preliminary application, the admission procedure is 
the same as for other WVU graduate programs. 

A personal interview is required before final admission to the program. 
This interview will give the graduate student an opportunity to evaluate the 
program and to determine if the program will offer the educational opportu- 
nities which the student desires. 

212 MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 



Course of Study 

It is expected that the students who enter the graduate program in 
medical technology will have a goal in mind and a special field of interest in 
medical technology. The program is tailored to the needs of the student as far 
as possible. A minimum of 36 semester hours of credit, including a research 
problem, is required. The student selects a major area of concentration from 
either education, supervision, or administration, and a minor area from 
clinical microbiology, clinical chemistry, clinical hematology, or immuno- 
hematology. 

A minimum of 15 semester hours of course work from the following 
courses is required dependent upon major area of concentration. 

(A). Ed. P. 320— Introduction to Research (required). 

(B). If the major area is education, the following 3-hour courses are 
available: HI. Ed. 320 (Roles and Functions of Health Education), Ed. A. 320 
(Personnel Administration), Ed. A. 351 (Administrative Procedures in Adult 
Education), Ed. A. 462 (Higher Education Law), Ed. A. 463 (Higher Education 
Finance), Ed. F. 320 (Philosophic Systems and Education). 

(C). If the major area is supervision and/or administration, the following 
3-hour courses are available: Ed. A. 320 (Personnel Administration), Ed. A. 
462 (Higher Education Law), Ed. A. 463 (Higher Education Finance), Pub. A. 
341 (Administrative Organization and Management), Pub. A. 344 (Public 
Personnel Administration), Pub. A. 345 (Public Administration and Policy 
Development). 

(D). Other 3-hour courses available for either major for additional credit 
are: Ed. P. 231 (Sampling Methods), Ed. P. 321 (Design of Experiments), Ed. P. 
343 (Statistical Analysis in Education), Ed. P. 260 (Medical and Micro- 
computers in Instruction), Ed. P. 301 (Introductory Behavior Analysis: 
Human Resources), Ed. P. 364 (Precision Teaching), Ed. P. 370 (Programmatic 
Research), HI. Ed. 308 (Community Health: Death Education), HI. Ed. 309 
(Community Health: Drug Education). 

(E). Ed. P. 311 (Statistical Methods), Stat. 311 (Statistical Methods), or 
C. Med. 311 (Biostatistics), is strongly recommended. 

Other courses to complete 36 semester hours are selected by the student 
(with the help of the adviser) in the area of concentration selected by the 
student. Students may select courses in departments in schools other than the 
School of Medicine. 

All students must complete a minimum of 18 semester hours in a science 
related to medical technology including Seminar (3 hr.) and Problem Study (6 
hr.). 

All students must rotate for orientation purposes through all sections of 
the University Hospital Clinical Laboratories to include microbiology, hema- 
tology, chemistry, immunohematology, and histopathology for a minimum of 
two days in each laboratory or a total of ten days. 

In addition, at the discretion of the student's adviser, other requirements 
in teaching, supervision, and administration may be necessary. 

The adviser formulates with the student a plan of study for the entire 
graduate program. This plan is usually made at the end of the first semester of 
the student's graduate study. A copy of this "plan of study" is signed by the 
adviser and student and sent to the Medical Technology Office to be put in the 
student's file. 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 213 



Examinations 

A final written comprehensive examination in the major and minor 
interest areas is given approximately one month before the oral defense. 

An oral defense of the problem is given about one month after submission 
of the Problem Study in its final form to the student's Graduate Committee. 

Requirements for Degree 

All requirements for the master of science degree, as outlined in this 
catalog, must be fulfilled. These requirements can be fulfilled in three 
semesters of full-time work, but ordinarily at least four semesters are 
required for completion of the degree requirements. 

Degree candidates must have a 3.0 grade-point average and must have 
removed all incomplete grades and deficiencies. 

All students must complete a problem study (see M. Tec. 497). 

Medical Technology (M. Tec.) 

300. Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. Seminars include topics in laboratory management and 
education in medical technology, and timely topics. Minimum of 3 semester hours 
to include all three topics is required of all graduate students in the medical 
technology program. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Student is required to pursue study on a problem in the 
student's area of concentration. This study is reported in a thesis-style manuscript. 
For this study and report, the student registers in M. Tec. 497. Total number of 
hours earned in M. Tec. 497 is determined by the student's adviser. As many as 9 
semester hours may be taken during one semester or, by arrangement with the 
adviser, credit hours may be taken over several semesters. In the final compilation 
for degree requirements, only 6 semester hours in M. Tec. 497 will be counted 
toward fulfillment of the 36 required semester hours for the degree even though the 
student may have registered for as many as 15 hours in M. Tec. 497. 

MICROBIOLOGY (Medical) 

Irvin S. Snyder, Chairperson of the Department 

2095-B Basic Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Burrell, Charon, Landreth, Lewis, Mengoli, Olenchock, 

Pore, Snyder, Sorenson, Stenberg, Thompson, and Yelton. Associate Members V. F. 

Gerencser, Sheil, and Young. 

The Department of Microbiology offers programs of study leading to the 
degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) in 
Medical Microbiology. The basic philosophy of the department is that the 
students should have a strong foundation in basic concepts of microbiology 
and flexibility in choosing advanced course work in their specific areas of 
interest. The students are given extensive training in microbiological research 
methodology. The overall aim of the program is to produce students capable of 
teaching microbiology and designing and doing independent research in 
microbiology. 

Admission Requirements 

Applicants must have had at least four upper-level courses in the 
biological sciences, two semesters of organic chemistry, two semesters of 

214 MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL) 



physics, and a strong background in mathematics — including calculus— in 
order to be considered for admission. Applicants must submit to the 
Department of Microbiology a departmental application form, three letters of 
recommendation, and Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores— both 
aptitude and advanced. In addition, transcripts and an official application for 
admission must be sent directly to the WVU Office of Admissions and 
Records, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. Applicants for 
admission to a degree program should have a grade-point average of 3.0, or 
better, and a score of 600 or above in each subject area of the GRE 
examinations. Early application is encouraged. Applicants desiring financial 
aid should complete their application before January 1. All applications must 
be completed by June 1 for fall admission. Applications for admission in the 
spring semester must be completed by November 1. 

Program Requirements 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Every student must take courses or demonstrate proficiency by exam- 
ination in each of the following areas: M. Bio. 310 (Structure and Activities of 
Microorganisms), M. Bio. 317 (Special Problems in Basic Immunology). At 
least 3 hours of credit in one or more of the following M. Bio. 491 courses must 
be completed: Genetics, Immunobiology, Microbial Physiology (including 
laboratory). The student must also enroll in M. Bio. 391— Advanced Topics. 
Two semesters of biochemistry are required. The remainder of the course 
work is selected by the student and the advisory committee from the 
following courses: M. Bio. 301, 327, 399, or from any of the microbiology 
advanced study courses (M. Bio. 491). M. Bio. 496— Seminar is a required 
course each semester the student is in residence. All full-time students in the 
Department of Microbiology are required to participate in teaching at least 
one semester a year. 

The Master of Science program requires 30 hours course work of which at 
least 20 hours must be in microbiology. Six hours must be in research (M. Bio. 
397). A thesis representing original research and a final oral examination are 
required. A grade-point average of at least 3.0 must be maintained. In general, 
two years are needed to complete the M.S. program. 

Doctor of Philosphy (Ph.D.) 

The Doctor of Philosophy candidate must demonstrate knowledge in 
microbiology and biochemistry equivalent to that of an M.S. student. In 
addition, appropriate course work, as determined by the student's research 
advisory committee, with a grade-point average of 3.0 is required. Where 
appropriate, course work in related subjects such as computer science, cell 
biology, biochemistry, physical chemistry, and statistics will be required. 
M. Bio. 496 (Seminar) is a required course each semester that the student is in 
residence. The Doctor of Philosophy program requires a dissertation repre- 
senting the results of an original research investigation and passing of 
qualifying and final oral examinations. All full-time students are required to 
participate in teaching at least one semester a year. Three years are usually 
needed to complete the Ph.D. program. 

Other 

The Department of Microbiology has informal noon-hour journal clubs in 
immunology and in microbiology. All students are expected to participate in 
one or more. 

MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL) 215 



For additional information write to the Chairperson, Department of 
Microbiology, WVU Health Sciences Center, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Research and Instruction 

Pathogenic Bacteriology: mode of action of microbial products in patho- 
genicity; identification and classification of anaerobic microorganisms in- 
cluding filamentous bacteria; oral microbiology; ecology of the oral cavity; 
clinical microbiology. 

Mycology: pathobiology of medical mycoses; environmental health im- 
plications of fungal and algal toxicoses. 

Physiology: nutrition and metabolism of a variety of pathogenic micro- 
organisms, growth and protein synthesis in obligate intracellular bacteria. 

Genetics: basic studies on the mechanisms of genetics including transfer 
of genetic information; recombinant DNA studies. 

Virology: Development of rapid viral diagnostic tests, cytomegalovirus 
molecular genetics; glycoproteins in cytomegalovirus infection, papilloma 
virus diseases; bacteriophage-host interactions. 

Parasitology: host-parasite relationships between helminth parasites 
and insects and vertebrate hosts; endosymbionts in protozoa. 

Immunology: immunopathology of pulmonary disease; inflammatory 
response to inhaled organisms; developmental aspects of immunity, mech- 
anisms of T-cell function. 

Other programs: detection of environmental pollutants; effect of environ- 
mental agents on host resistance. 

Microbiology (M. Bio.) 

220. Microbiology. (For pharmacy students.) II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: Biochemistry. 
Pathogenic microorganisms, including immunology and antimicrobial agents. 

223. Microbiology. (For medical technology students; graduate students with consent.) 
II. 5 hr. PR or Cone: Organic chemistry. Basic microbiology. Emphasis on 
immunology, pathogenic microorganisms, and clinical laboratory techniques. 

224. Parasitology. (For medical technology students.) II. 4 hr. Study of animal parasites 
and disease vectors with emphasis on disease manifestations, parasite biology, 
and laboratory diagnosis. 

301. Microbiology. (For medical students only.) I. 5-7 hr. PR: Organic chemistry, 
biochemistry. Detailed study of pathogenic microorganisms and immunology. 
Emphasis on use of microbiology in solving clinical problems. 

302. Microbiology. (For dental students only.) I. 5 hr. PR: Organic chemistry. Detailed 
study of pathogenic microorganisms. Emphasis on oral flora. 

310. Structure and Activities of Microorganisms. I. 2 hr. PR on Cone: Biochemistry; 
consent. Structure and function of microbes. 

317. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. 1-7 hr. per sem. 

A. Special Problems in Basic Immunology. I. 2 hr. PR or Cone: M. Bio. 310; 
biochemistry; consent. 

B. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. VR. PR: Consent. 

327. Parasitology. (For graduate students.) II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Study of animal 
parasites and disease vectors with emphasis on disease manifestations, parasite 
biology, laboratory diagnosis, and current concepts in parasitological research. 

391. Advanced Topics. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Assigned study to develop research 
laboratory techniques. [Graded as S or U.j 

216 MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL) 



397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, 317A, 391. 
Students may enroll more than once. (Graded as S or U.) 

490. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practice in college 
teaching of microbiology. (Graded as S or U.). 

491. Advanced Study. 

Pathogenic Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 and 317A or equiv.; consent. 
Pathogenesis of medically important viruses and mechanisms for their control. 

Pathogenic Bacteriology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, 317A or consent. Pathogenic 
bacteriology, with an emphasis on the mechanisms of pathogenesis. Topics 
include microbial adherence, toxin production and mechanisms, and normal flora 
and disease. 

Clinical Laboratory Bacteriology. I, II. VR. PR: M. Bio. 310, or 317A or equiv.; 
consent. Lectures on the identification of pathogenic microorganisms with an 
emphasis on bacteria. The laboratory includes a rotation through the hospital 
clinical microbiology laboratory. Limited enrollment. (Graded as S or U.) 

Microbial Genetics. II. 4 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 or equiv.; consent. Molecular aspects of 
mutation, gene transfer mechanisms, genetic mapping, and genetic control using 
bacteria and bacteriophage systems as models. 

Microbial Metabolism. II. 2 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, biochemistry, consent. Physiology, 
metabolism, and regulation of representative microbial groups. 

Microbial Metabolism Laboratory. II. 1 hr. Open to departmental graduate 
students only. Research techniques in metabolic regulation. 

Immunobiology. II. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 317A or equiv.; consent. Discussion of the 
biological and cellular aspects of immunology. Immunobiology, immunopathology, 
and cellular immunology receive strong emphasis. This course is designed to 
complement Bioch. 423. 

Medical Mycology. I. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of the fungi of medical 
importance, including the pathobiology of mycoses and toxicoses. 

Tumor Virology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 315 or equiv.; consent. A consideration of the 
molecular and biochemical aspects of viruses which cause tumors and the 
mechanisms by which they cause cellular transformation. 

Clinical Laboratory Virology. S. 3 hr. per 6-week session. PR: M. Bio. 491 
(Pathogenic Virology) or equiv.; consent. Lectures and laboratories on isolation of 
viruses from clinical specimens. Includes serological methods. 

Molecular Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 and 317A or equiv.; consent. Molecular 
biology of viruses that are important both biologically and medically. Includes a 
basic introduction to replication and genetics as well as current topics in 
molecular virology. 

496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 or equiv. (Graded as S or U.j 

497. Ph.D. Research or Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Students may enroll more than 
once. (Graded as S or U.) 



MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL) 217 



MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 

Department of Mineral Processing 

Richard B. Muter, Chairperson, Engineering 

2 White Hall 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Cho and Muter. 

Adam Z. Rose, Chairperson, Department of Mineral Resource Economics 

214 White Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Labys, Miernyk, and Rose. Associate Member Torries. 

Master of Science in Mineral and Energy Resources 
Mineral Resource Economics Option 
Mineral Processing Engineering Option 

The Departments of Mineral Resource Economics and of Mineral Pro- 
cessing Engineering in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources offer a 
master's program leading to the Master of Science in Mineral and Energy 
Resources and a Ph.D. program in Mineral and Energy Resources. Within 
these programs, several options and areas of emphasis or specialization are 
available. To apply for admission to any one of these programs, an applicant 
must first apply to the Office of Admissions and Records for admission to the 
University as a graduate student. If an applicant's credentials meet University 
criteria for admission, the office forwards the application to the faculty of the 
College of Mineral and Energy Resources for admission to the program. 

A master's degree from the Department of Mineral Resource Economics or 
from the Department of Mineral Processing Engineering requires a total of 24 
credit hours, a thesis for an additional 6 credit hours, and the maintenance of 
an overall 3.0 average. No course with an earned grade of less than 'C counts 
toward the 24 credit hour total. At least 60 per cent of course work must be in 
300 or 400 level courses; 40 per cent may be from 200 level courses. 

When students are accepted for graduate study, they meet with the 
program director so that individual graduate committees may be formed with 
the students' consent and input. A graduate committee, made up of three 
faculty members, meets with its student to plan a graduate program that will 
include the student's particular interest and career plans. After completion of 
a minimum of 12 credit hours of study with a minimum grade-point average of 
3.0, the student may make formal application for candidacy for a degree. 
Faculty approval of this application makes the student eligible for the degree. 

Academic Requirements 

Each student will, with the approval of the student's graduate commit- 
tee—appointed with the consent of the student within the first semester of 
registration — follow a planned program. The program contains a minimum of 
24 hours of course work and 6 hours of independent and original study in the 
minerals field leading to a master's thesis. At least 60 percent (18 hours) of the 
course credits must be from 300-level or 400-level courses while the 
remainder can be made up of 200-level courses. 

Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is 
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate study may request 
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester 
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based 
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been 
recorded. 

218 MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 



No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported 
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate 
student must have a grade-point average of least 3.0 based on all courses 
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must 
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original 
study in the minerals field. 

Doctor of Philosophy in Mineral and Energy Resources 

The primary objective of the Ph.D. program offered by the Department of 
Mineral Resource Economics is to educate men and women so that they are 
fully capable of meeting the demands of the highest levels of their professions. 
The mineral resource economics concentration leads to a Ph.D. in Mineral and 
Energy Resources. 

The Ph.D. program in Mineral and Energy Resources accepts applicants 
with either baccalaureate or masters degrees in engineering, earth sciences, or 
physical sciences. Students completing the program are qualified for careers 
with research institutes, industry, governmental agencies concerned with 
mineral and energy resource use, technical management of mining, petroleum, 
and natural gas firms, and for leadership roles in the field of mineral 
economics. 

Mineral and Energy Resources (M.e.r.) 

for the Mineral Resource Economics Option 

245/345. Energy Economics. I, II. 3 hr. Analysis of the energy sector and its 
relationship to the rest of the economy. Emphasis on current policy issues: OPEC, 
energy security, deregulation, hard vs. soft paths, impediments to coal use. (May 
not be taken for both undergraduate and graduate credit.) 3 hr. lee. 

260 / 360. Resource Appraisal and Exploration Decisions. I. 3 hr. Appraisal techniques 
for mineral resources including deposit, project, and regional evaluation. Explo- 
ration decisions and Bayesian analysis. (May not be taken for both undergraduate 
and graduate credit.) 3 hr. lee. 

303. Economic Analysis of Mineral Markets. I. 3 hr. Microeconomic theory applied to 
mineral demand, supply, prices, trade, and industrial organization. Forecasting 
techniques incorporating risk and uncertainty developed to analyze mineral 
markets. 3 hr. lee. 

307. Mineral Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: M.E.R. 360 or 365. Economics of mineral 
resources and public policy decisions; problems and effects of regulation and 
taxation; forms of government taxation and participation; mineral rents. 3 hr. lee. 

309. Quantitative Methods in Mineral Economics. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or Econ. 125. 
Probability and statistical techniques for mineral economics. The development 
and application of computer programs; mineral market models, time-series 
forecasting techniques, input-output analysis, geostatistical methods, project 
analysis. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

331. Minerals Technology Assessment. II. 3 hr. Methods of studying the effects of 
modifications in technology on the production or utilization of minerals, and the 
effects on mineral demand, supply, substitution, and markets. 3 hr. lee. 

341. Economics of the Metal Industries. II. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, production, 
technology, costs, prices, and problems of the metals industry. 3 hr. lee. 

342. Economics of Industrial Mineral Industries. I. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, 
technology, costs, prices, and problems of the industrial mineral industries. 3 hr. 
lee. 

MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 219 



365. Mineral Finance. II. 3 hr. Methods, risks, and problems of financing mineral 
projects. Large foreign-project financing, concerns of host governments, multi- 
national mining concerns, and financial institutions. 

394. Special Topics in Mineral Economics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Selected economic 
problems in petroleum and natural gas engineering and the mineral industries. 3 
hr. lee. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

403. Theory of Resource Economics. II. 3 hr. Allocation and distribution of natural 
resources in static and dynamic contexts. Welfare economics, cost-benefit analysis, 
and optimal control approaches. Applications to resource valuation, exhaustion, 
taxation, and regulation in theory and practice. 3 hr. seminar. 

435. Resources and Development Planning. I, II. 3 hr. Role of natural resources in the 
economic development of the U.S. and lesser developed countries. Input-output 
and programming models and their linkage to econometric and computable general 
equilibrium models. 3 hr. lee. 

438. Models of Mineral Commodity Markets. II. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 325, 326. Applies 
advanced econometric methods to specification, estimation and simulation of 
dynamic models of domestic and international fuel and non-fuel mineral markets 
and industries. Programming and forecasting techniques. 3 hr. seminar. 

447. Oil and Gas Industry Economics. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of the various 
stages of the oil and gas industries. Combines geology, engineering, and economic 
theory to evaluate industry structure and performance. 

448. Economics of the Coal Industry. I, II. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, production, 
technology costs, prices and problems of the coal industry. Includes environmental, 
productivity, and transportation issues. 3 hr. seminar. 

453. Resources in Trade and Development. I. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211, 212; Econ. 250 
recommended. Causes and consequences of international mineral trade and 
investment. Commodity market structures, trade expansion, stabilization, and 
host government-foreign investor relations. Impact of resource production, 
processing and exports on macroeconomic development. 3 hr. seminar. 

457. Energy and Regional Development. I, II. 3 hr. Role of energy resources in regional 
development. Role of energy in the West Virginia economy and various regions of 
the U.S. 3 hr. seminar. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

495. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Graduate Research. I, II. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

M.E.R. for Mineral Processing Engineering 

310. Advanced Hydrometallurgy. I. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 221 or consent. Advanced concepts 
of hydrometallurgy. Recent technology of leaching, concentration, recovery of 
metal and mineral values, various mechanisms of leaching of minerals. Techniques 
such as continuous ion exchange, thermal precipitation, and current electrolytic 
technology. 

317. Advanced Coal Preparation. II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 217 or consent. The origin and 
distribution of mineral matter in coal including specific gravity distributions. Fine 
grinding and beneficiation by flotation technology. Coke blending, solid waste 
disposal, and advanced plant design. 

220 MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 



318. Advanced Mineral Processing. II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 219, 220, or consent. Advanced 
surface phenomena techniques including rigorous treatment of electrokinetic 
measurements and applications. Advanced concepts of collector adsorption on 
minerals and flotation response. 

320. Modeling of Mineral Extraction Processes. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of particle 
size distribution functions and population balance models, size reduction kinetics 
and interphase transfer kinetics and application to the separation of dissimilar 
solids by physical and chemical methods. 

324. Advanced Special Topics. I and II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special advanced problems 
in mineral process engineering including choices among topics related to coal 
preparation, conversion, and process metallurgy. 

Mineral Processing Engineering (M.p.e.) 

217. Coal Preparation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16, Chem. 16. Formation of coal, rank 
classification of coal, coal petrography, principles of preparing and beneficiating 
coal for market with laboratory devoted to sampling, screen analysis, float and 
sink separation, and use of various types of coal cleaning equipment. 2hr. lee, 3hr. 
lab. 

218. Mineral Processing. II. 4 hr. PR: Math. 17 or consent. Application of particle 
characterization, particle behavior in fluids, industrial sizing, size reduction and 
fluid-solid separations are discussed. Introduction to froth flotation, and magnetic 
and electrostatic separation for the concentration of minerals is described. 3 hr. 
lee, 1 hr. lab. 

219. Surface and Interfaces. I. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 218. Surface tension phenomena, surface 
thermodynamics, electrical double layer, polarized and nonpolarized electrodes, 
insoluble monolayers, adsorption phenomena, colloidal foams, and emulsion 
consideration as applied to mineral surfaces. 

220. Mineral Flotation. II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: M.P.E. 219. The application of surface 
phenomena for the beneficiation of minerals, including naturally hydrophobic, 
insoluble oxides, and semi-soluble and soluble minerals. Activation and depression 
of sulfide minerals. Engineering and design of flotation circuits. 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

221. Hydrometallurgy. II. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 141, 142; Cone: M.A.E. 101. Electrochemical 
aspects and rates of solid-liquid reactions as applied to leaching, concentration, 
and recovery of minerals. Solvent extraction, ion exchange, electrowinning, and 
other current industrial processes. 

222. Rate Phenomena in Extractive Metallurgy. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone: M.A.E. 114; Chem. 
141, 142. Momentum, heat and mass transfer phenomena theory; concepts of 
boundary layers and techniques of process analysis as applied to metallurgical 
reaction systems. 3 hr. lee 

224. Mineral Problems. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing or consent. Special 
problems considered in minerals beneficiation and processing, including choices 
among design and research projects in coal preparation, coal conversion, hydro- 
and extractive metallurgy or mineral economies. 

250. Control Systems in Mineral Processing. II. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing in mineral 
processing engineering. Instrumentation and automatic control systems used in 
today's mineral processing technology are studied including data recording and 
control and process optimization. 3 hr. lee 

270. Design and Synthesis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 217, 219; M. 281. The logic and 
quantitative tools required for synthesizing mineral processing systems are used 
on a realistic problem by students working independently. Specific attention is 
given to economic and environmental implications. 3 hr. lee 

MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 221 



Minerals (M.) 

281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving 
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas 
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies. 

MINING ENGINEERING 

Syd S. Peng, Chairperson of the Department 

118 White Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.S.E.M., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Adler, Grayson, Khair, Peng, Rollins, and Wang. 

Master of Science in Engineering in Mines (M.S.E.M.) 

A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit at the master's level 
in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources must first apply for admission 
and state the major field. 

An applicant with a baccalaureate degree in mining engineering will be 
admitted on the same basis as graduates of WVU. Lacking these qualifications, 
the applicant must first fulfill the requirements of the Department of Mining 
Engineering. 

Academic Standards. Each student will, with the approval of the 
student's graduate committee— appointed with the consent of the student 
within the first semester of registration — follow a planned program. The 
pogram contains a minimum of 24 hours of course work and 6 hours of 
independent and original study in mining engineering leading to a master's 
thesis. At least 60 percent of the course credits must be from 300-level or 
400-level courses while the remainder can be made up of 200-level courses. 

Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is 
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request 
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester 
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based 
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been 
recorded. 

No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported 
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate 
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0, based on all courses 
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must 
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original 
study in mining engineering. 

Doctor of Philosophy in Mineral Engineering (Ph.D.) 

The principal objective of the Ph.D. program in Mineral Engineering is the 
education and training of men and women so that they are capable of attaining 
the highest levels of the mineral engineering profession and performing the 
professional roles of developing or improving the efficient extraction of solid 
mineral resources. The two areas of specialization are mine systems, and rock 
mechanics and ground control. 

All applicants must have earned a M.S. degree in Mineral Engineering 
with a grade-point average (GPA) of 3.5 or higher. The Graduate Record 
Examination (GRE) is required, and the applicant must have scored in the 
75th percentile or higher for quantitative and analytical analysis. For all 
foreign applicants whose native language is not English, a TOEFL test score of 
550 or better is required. In addition, each applicant is required to submit at 

222 MINING ENGINEERING 



least three letters of recommendation, one of which must be from the 
applicant's previous thesis adviser or an academic equivalent. All letters of 
recommendation should evaluate the student's potential for performing 
independent doctoral-level research. 

The Ph.D. program in mineral engineering consists of 54 hours of course 
work and 36 hours of independent research beyond a bachelor's degree in 
mining engineering. The successful completion of a qualifying examination 
and an approved dissertation are also required. 

Engineering of Mines (E.m.) 

204. Mining Methods for Vein Deposits. I. 3 hr. PR: M. 2, Geol. 151, Math. 16. Methods 
and systems of mining other than flat seams. Emphasis on selection of methods in 
relation to cohesive strength of ore bodies and their enclosing wall rocks. Mining 
of anthracite included. 

205. Coal Mining. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing or consent. (Not open to mining 
engineering students.) Introduction to elements of coal mining. 

206. Mining Exploration. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, Phys. 12, Math. 16. All phases of 
mineral exploration. Geological and geophysical methods, exploration drilling, 
data reduction and interpretation, preliminary feasibility studies and evaluation. 

207. Longwali Mining. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 104. Elements of longwall mining including 
panel layout and design considerations, strata mechanics, powered supports, coal 
cutting by shearer or plow, conveyor transportation, and face move. 

211. Ground Control. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, M.A.E. 41, 43, Geol. 151. Rock 
properties and behavior, in situ stress field, mine layout and geological effects; 
designs of entry and pillar and roof bolting, convergence of openings and surface 
subsidence engineering. 

214. Rock Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43 or consent. Elastic and plastic properties of 
rock, Mohr's criteria of failure, elastic theory, stress distributions around 
underground openings, open pit and underground stability, rock testing techniques. 

217. Geotechnics for Mining Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, Phys. 11, Math. 16. 
Characteristics of earth material, geotechnics, and geology concerning mine 
design, mine refuse disposal, slope stability, and other earth structures. Ground- 
water hydrology for mining application. 

224. Special Subjects for Mining Engineering. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate 
standing or consent. Special problems in mining engineering, including choices 
among operations research, mine systems analysis, coal and mineral preparation, 
and coal science and technology. 

225. Mine Equipment Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 101, E.M. 104, Chem. 16, M.A.E. 43; junior 
standing. Analysis of equipment requirements for mining functions; design of 
specific equipment components and operations; and optimization of equipment 
and layout choices. Course will focus on equipment. 

226. Mine Machinery. I. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 101, E.M. 103, 104, M.A.E. 43, junior standing. 
Design and control of fixed and integrated excavating and bulk handling 
machinery. Analysis includes components, operation, production, and possible 
failure modes. Studied are conveyors, hoists, hydraulic transport, boring machines, 
longwalls, bucket wheel excavators, and dredges. 

227. Advanced Mining Equipment Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 225, 226. Structural, 
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical characteristics of the more common items of 
mining equipment. Controls, electrical and hydraulic circuits, and mechanical 
transmissions with associated problems. Laboratory design of a control system 
for a mining machine. 

MINING ENGINEERING 223 



231. Mine Ventilation. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 104, M.A.E. 114. Engineering principles, 
purposes, methods, and equipment applied to the ventilation of mines. 

242. Mine Health and Safety. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104. The nature of the federal and 
state laws pertaining to coal mine health and safety; emphasis will be placed on 
achieving compliance through effective mine planning, design, and mine health 
and safety management. 

243. Industrial Safety Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing or consent. Problems of 
industrial safety and accident prevention, laws pertaining to industrial safety and 
health, compensation plans and laws, and industrial property protection. 

251. Explosive Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 16, Phys. 12, M.A.E. 42. Theory and 
application of explosives, composition, properties and characteristics of explosives, 
blasting design fundamentals, legal and safety considerations. 

271. Mine Management. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104. Economic, governmental, social, and 
cost and labor aspects of mining as related to the management of a mining 
enterprise. 

276. Mine and Mineral Reserve Valuation. I. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Methods used to 
value mineral properties; factors affecting value of mineral properties. 

286. Fire Control Engineering. II. 3-4 hr. PR: Senior standing. Aspects involved in the 
control from fire, explosion, and other related hazards. Protective considerations 
in building design and construction. Fire and explosive protection organization 
including fire detection and control. Lectures (3) and/or 3 hr. lab. 

287. Applied Geophysics for Mining Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, Phys. 12, 
Geol. 151 or consent. Origin of the universe and the planets, heat and age of the 
earth. Application of the science of geophysics in the location and analysis of 
earthquakes and in prospecting for oil and minerals. 

291. Mine Plant Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 225, 226; senior standing. Layout, analysis, 
and detailing of the major mine installations and support facilities. Locations 
include: the surface plant, shaft and slope stations, section centers. Systems dealt 
with are bulk handling, power, ventilation, supplies, water, and personnel. 

295. Mine Systems Design. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, consent. Each student selects and 
designs a mine subsystem under specified conditions, including extraction, 
transportation, ventilation, roof control, exploration, plant design, surface facil- 
ities, etc. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

296. Mine Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 206, 211, 225, 226, 231, 242, 271. Comprehensive 
design problem involving underground mining developments or surface plant or 
both, as elected by the student in consultation with instructor. Preparation of a 
complete report on the problem required, including drawings, specifications, and 
cost analysis. 

311. Advanced Ground Control— Coal Mines. I, II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211 or consent. 
Ground and strata control for underground and surface coal mining, including 
slope stability and subsidence. 

312. Surface Subsidence Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211. Elements of surface 
subsidence engineering due to underground mining: theories of surface subsidence, 
characteristics and prediction of surface movements, and effects of surface 
movements. 

316. Advanced Rock Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 214 or consent. Testing techniques and 
interpretation, strength and fracture, classification, anisotropy, friction, jointed 
rock, fluid pressure, fragmentation, and excavation. 

224 MINING ENGINEERING 



320. Mobile Excavating and Materials Handling. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and 
consent. Mobile mining equipment will be systematically analyzed as to functional, 
production, failure, and operational aspects. Included will be routine and innova- 
tive methods, and surface and underground applications, such as the hydraulic 
shovel and impactors. 

321. Integrated Excavating and Materials Handling. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and 
consent. Integrated mining equipment will be systematically analyzed as to 
functional, production, failure, and operational aspects. Included will be routine 
and innovative methods, and surface and underground applications, such as the 
longwalls and monorails. 

331. Mine Ventilation Network Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 231, M. 281, or consent. 
Theory and computational techniques for mine ventilation network problems with 
emphasis on computer-aided analysis of complex mine ventilation systems. 

332. Advanced Mine Ventilation. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 231. Advanced topics in mine 
atmospheric control including control of methane, dust, humidity, and heat. Also 
covers leakage characteristics, fan selection, analysis of ventilation networks, and 
planning of mine ventilation system. 

342. Advanced Mine Health and Safety. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 242 or graduate standing. 
Special emphasis will be placed on mine rescue, mine disaster prevention and 
organization, and mine property and equipment loss prevention. 

351. Explosive Engineering Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 251 or consent. Rock drilling, total 
blast systems simulation, experimental studies in blast design, rock fracturing, 
chemical thermodynamics, kinetics, and reaction rates. 

365. Deterministic Methods for Mineral Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Analysis and solution of mineral engineering problems which require use 
of deterministic models. Application of deterministic methods to mineral trans- 
portation, mineral resource allocation and extraction problems, and mine planning 
and equipment utilization problems. 

366. Stochastic Methods for Mineral Engineers. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Application of stochastic methods to mineral engineering problems in 
equipment selection, renewal processes, mine ventilation, mine production, and 
mineral extraction. 

391. Advanced Mine Design. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. Advanced 
detail design and layout of coal mine plant, particularly incorporating new ideas of 
machines and mining methods. 

394. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. Selected field of 
study in mining engineering. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

398. Advanced Mine Design 1. 1-6 hr. PR: E.M. 296. Detailed design of the components 
of coal mine subsystems including ground control, excavation and handling, and 
life support subsystems. 1-6 hr. lee. 

399. Advanced Mine Design 2. 1-6 hr. PR: E.M. 296. Examination of the broad aspects of 
mine design for non-coal deposits. Consideration of deposits of various shapes, 
materials and qualities including country rock. Comparison of principles estab- 
lished for coal mine design. 1-6 hr. lee. 

411. Theories of Surface Subsidence. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 312. Theories of surface subsidence 
due to underground coal mining including empirical, profile function, theoretical 
and physical modeling methods, and time factors. 3 hr. lee. 

MINING ENGINEERING 225 



416. Theory of Rock Failure. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 214 or consent. Friction, elasticity, 
strength of rock, mechanism of brittle failure, factors affecting failure process, 
theories of failure, fracture propagation in rock, fracture toughness of rock and 
coal, fluid pressure, size, stress gradient, and time-dependent effects. 

417. Laboratory and Field Instrumentation. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211, 214, or consent. 
Principles and applications of strain gages and photoelasticity for stress analysis 
in rock/coal; displacement/velocity gages and accelerometer for ground motion; 
holography and acoustic emission for non-destructive tests. 

418. Rock Mechanics in Mine Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211, 214, or consent. Design 
process in mining engineering; design approaches for excavations in rock; input 
parameters for design; empirical, observational, and analytical methods of design; 
integrated designs. 1 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab. 

451. Theory of High Explosives. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 351 or consent. The application of 
chemical thermodynamics and the hydrodynamic theory to determine properties 
of high explosives, chemical equilibria and calculation of detonation and explo- 
sion-state variables. 

491. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing, consent. 
Selected field of study in mining engineering. 

492. Directed Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Directed study, reading, and/or research. 

493. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Contemporary topics selected from recent developments in mining engineering. 

494. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Special seminars for advanced graduate students. 

495. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Faculty supervised study of topics not available through regular course offerings. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate 
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate 
student body of the student's program. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Minerals (M.) 

281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving 
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas 
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies. 

MUSIC 

Cecil B. Wilson, Chairperson of the Division of Music 

Degrees Offered: M.M., D.M.A., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Beall, Brown, J. Crain, Faini, Godes, Haller, Hudson, 
Lefkoff, Miltenberger, Powell, Skidmore, Taylor, Trythall, Wilcox, Wilkinson, and 
Yeend. Associate Members Catalfano, Crotty, J. Hunt, Kefferstan, Peri, Weigand, 
Wilkes, Winkler, and Wilson. 

The Division of Music is an accredited institutional member of the 
National Association of Schools of Music, the only nationally recognized 
accrediting agency for professional music instruction. All programs comply 
with objectives and guidelines as required by this organization. 

226 MUSIC 



Prospective graduate students in music are required to have completed 
the appropriate curriculum of undergraduate study in music at WVU, or its 
equivalent at another institution of recognized standing. For acceptance into a 
degree program the applicant must submit the following to the Director of 
Graduate Studies, Division of Music, P.O. Box 6111, Morgantown, WV 
26506-6111. 

1. For the Master of Music degree, an undergraduate transcript showing 
an average of at least 2.5 on all undergraduate study; for the Ph.D. and Doctor 
of Musical Arts, a transcript showing an average of at least 3.0 on the master's 
degree or equivalent; 

2. Results of the Graduate Record Examination (not required of M.M. 
applicants in applied music); 

3. Three letters of recommendation from individuals qualified to judge 
the applicant's potential success as a graduate student in music; the writers 
should submit the letters directly to the Director of Graduate Studies. 

Applicants in certain programs are also required to demonstrate, by 
audition or tape recording, a level of attainment in the principal performance 
area which is prerequisite to the curriculum sought. The evaluation of 
performance proficiency is based on technical ability, repertoire, and musi- 
cianship. A listing of representative material for each performance area, 
graded by proficiency level, is available upon request. 

The audition for acceptance as a degree student, when required, is 
assessed for general admission purposes. The estimated proficiency level 
must be confirmed by a jury examination at the end of the first semester of 
applied study. Credit in Applied Music at the 400 level will count toward 
degree requirements only when the proficiency level prerequisite has been 
reached. 

Evidence of previous teaching or professional experience is desirable in 
the consideration of doctoral applicants. 

Admission to the Ph.D. program with a specialization in Music Education 
is contingent upon the receipt of evidence that the applicant has been a 
successful music teacher for at least three years. Such evidence may be in the 
form of a letter of recommendation from a school official. 

Applicants accepted for degree study must take tests in theory and music 
history, and audition on piano. The results of these might indicate the need for 
remedial study, which must be completed before admission to candidacy. 
Applicants for the areas of Theory and Composition will be tested more 
specifically in counterpoint (both sixteenth and eighteenth century), form, 
instrumentation, and orchestration. Applicants seeking acceptance as com- 
position majors also must submit representative compositions for evaluation 
and approval. 

Applicants whose averages and test scores do not meet the qualifications 
outlined above may be considered for acceptance as Provisional or Non- 
Degree students. If, upon completion of up to 12 semester hours of graduate 
study they have achieved a B (3.0) average, and after any previous under- 
graduate deficiencies or other conditions have been removed, such students 
may be accepted as degree students. 

If a tape recording is submitted, it must be of a high quality and have 
clearly indicated the student's name, titles and composers of works performed, 
and date of recording. Even the best recordings leave much to be desired, and a 
personal audition is encouraged. The auditions are normally administered on 
specially scheduled weekends, although in exceptional cases individually 
scheduled appointments may be made. These should occur at least six weeks 
before registration. 

MUSIC 227 



Master of Music (M.M.) 

Candidates must establish an overall grade-point average of 3.0 within a 
maximum of 36 hours. Applicants will be considered for candidacy upon the 
completion of 12 semester hours of graduate study. No student will be 
admitted to candidacy before removal of all undergraduate deficiencies. A 3.0 
average in all students work must be maintained. 

Candidates for the Master of Music degree may major in one of five fields: 
music education, applied music, theory, composition, or history of music. In 
the latter four, a minimum of 30 hours is required. 

Students majoring in music education will be allowed one of four options, 
to be determined in consultation with the program consultant: (1) thesis 
option; (2) recital option (if the candidate demonstrates proficiency level 8 in 
the major performance area within the first 12 hours of enrollment); (3) 
thirty-six course-work hour option; and (4) certification option (intended for 
persons possessing a bachelor's degree with a major in music other than music 
education), leading to eligibility for certification for teaching grades K-12 in 
the public schools of West Virginia. For the first three options the following 
requirements apply: 

1. Thirty graduate hours for thesis and recital options, 36 graduate hours 
otherwise, with an average of 3.0. 

2. For the thesis or 36-hour options, 4 hours of applied music, either 
Music 400 (principal performance area) or Music 310 (secondary performance 
area.) 

3. Demonstration of the ability to integrate music history, music theory, 
and music education by passing comprehensive written and oral examinations. 

4. Successful completion of a 4-credit thesis or 2-credit recital for the 
thesis and recital options, respectively. 

For the certification option, a combination of graduate and undergraduate 
courses will be selected to satisfy certification requirements. The 36 graduate 
hours will include 12 hours of graduate music education courses and electives 
chosen to provide a good background for teaching. Undergraduate courses 
may be necessary to make up deficiencies, especially in areas of performance 
or conducting. A descriptive leaflet is available upon request. 

Music Education Hr. 

(PR: Level 2 in piano.) 

Music Education courses at the 300 or 400 level* 12 

One Theory course and one Music History course 5-6 

For Thesis Option: 

Music 400 or 310— Applied Music 4 

Music 497 — Research (Thesis) 4 

Electives 4-5 

For Recital Option: 

Music 398— Master's Recital 2 

Music 400 — Applied Music (major performance area) 6 

Electives 4-5 

For 36-hour Option 

Music 400 or 310— Applied Music 4 

Electives 14-15 

Totals 30 or 36 

*Students in the Thesis option must include Music 446. 



228 MUSIC 



History of Music Hr. 

(PR: Level 7 in the major performance area; Level 4 on piano; 4 semesters of a 
foreign language; 7 hours upper-division theory; 15 undergraduate hours in 
music history.) 

Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

Music History, chosen from Music 221-225 6 

Music 491— Special Topics 6 

Theory Elective 3 

Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4 

Electives* 8 

Total 30 

Applied Music Hr. 

(PR: Level 10 in the major performance area, and Level 3 in piano; for 
organists, Level 5 in piano; for pianists in the piano pedagogy option, Level 9 
in piano and one year of piano pedagogy/group or equivalent teaching 
experience; for voice majors, the same language requirements as those for the 
B.M. degree.) 

Music 400— Applied Music (major performance area) 8 

Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

For Performance Option: 

Music 398— Master's Recital 4 

One of the following 2 

Music 398— Master's Recital 

Music 431— Research Problems for Performers 

One theory course and one music history course 5-6 

Music electives (no more than 4 hr. in major performance area) 7-8 

Total 30 

For Piano Pedagogy Option: 

Music 398— Master's Recital 2 

Music 312— Studies in Keyboard Performance and Pedagogy 6 

Music 392— Guided Studies (Teacher Internship) 4 

One theory course or one music history course 2-3 

Music electives 4-5 

Total 30 

Composition Hr. 

(PR: Level 8 in the major performance area; Level 4 in piano; evaluation of 
previous compositions at a graduate major level.) 

Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

Music 460— Composition 6 

Music 468— Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music 3 

Music 475— Pedagogy of Theory 3 

Music 483— Theory Topics 3 

Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4 

Music electives (must include one of the following: 

Music 460— Electronic Music Composition 

Music 467— Analytical Techniques 

Music 470— Transcription and Arranging) 8 

Total 30 

MUSIC 229 



Theory Hr. 

(PR: Level 8 in the major performances area; Level 4 in piano.) 

Music 430 — Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

Graduate music history 3 

Music 467— Analytical Techniques 3 

Music 468 — Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music 3 

Music 475— Pedagogy of Theory 3 

Music 483 — Theory Topics 3 

Music 497 — Research (Thesis) 4 

Electives 8 

Total 30 

*To be eligible for graduation, the candidate must demonstrate attainment of Level 8 on the 
major instrument. 

A representative public recital is required of candidates majoring in 
Applied Music. Composition majors must submit as a thesis a composition in 
a large form. 

All candidates for the Master of Music degree are required to participate 
for credit for two semesters (or summer sessions) in a performing group 
which meets at least two clock hours per week and which is selected with the 
adviser's approval. 

A general comprehensive oral examination must be passed by all 
candidates for the Master of Music degree. Candidates may repeat this 
examination after a three-month period. The results of the second oral 
examination will normally be considered final. The examining committee will 
decide immediately after an unsuccessful second attempt whether a petition 
for a third attempt will be granted. 

Time Limitation. Students must complete their programs in eight calendar 
years. Failure to do so will result in the loss of credit for courses taken at the 
outset of the program. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Admission. Acceptance to the doctoral program is competitive; admis- 
sions decisions are made each year in the spring for entrance the following 
fall. Applicants to the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy 
must present necessary credentials for evaluation of previous training and 
experience to the Division of Music. These include a score on the Graduate 
Record Examination, a transcript of all grades submitted through the WVU 
Office of Admissions and Records, and evidence that the applicant has 
completed a minimum of 28 hours in liberal arts studies. Before admission to 
the program the Division may, at its discretion, require the applicant to take 
entrance tests in various fields of music, or it may require the applicant to be 
present for a personal interview. Under normal circumstances, the applicant 
must have maintained a minimum average grade of B in courses taken for the 
master's degree. However, if sufficient professional experience should war- 
rant, the Division may waive the requirement of a B average or may grant an 
applicant conditional admittance subject to the satisfactory completion of 
certain specified courses or the attainment of a specified grade-point average 
within a semester's work. 

Curriculum. The exact amount and nature of course work undertaken will 
be determined by the adviser with the approval of the student's doctoral 

230 MUSIC 



committee in light of previous preparation and field of specialization. The 
student is expected to take Music 494— Doctoral Seminar— as required by the 
field of specialization. Whatever preparatory courses (languages, statistics, 
bibliography, etc.) are needed must necessarily be taken early in the course of 
study. A paradigm of recommended courses and other requirements in each 
field of specialization is available upon request. 

Candidacy. Upon completion of the requirements of the Division of Music 
and the general WVU graduate studies requirements, the student will be 
recommended for admission to candidacy for the degree. These requirements 
are (in order or occurrence): 

1. Demonstrate the ability to read German and French. For applicants in 
music education, either French or German 305-306, or Statistics 311-312 must 
be completed satisfactorily. Upon recommendation of the adviser, a different 
romance language may be substituted for French. 

2. Pass written qualifying examinations satisfactorily to show: 

a. Broad knowledge in theory and music history and literature. 

b. Appropriate knowledge in the minor field. 

c. Knowledge in depth in the field of specialization. 

3. Pass satisfactorily a comprehensive oral qualifying examination. 

4. Present and have accepted an outline and prospectus of the dissertation. 
The requirement for doctoral seminars must be completed before the presen- 
tation of the prospectus. 

Graduate students who have met these requirements and who have 
maintained an average of B in courses completed shall be admitted to 
candidacy. The qualifying examinations administered after satisfaction of 
the language requirement shall be considered as one integral examination or 
alternative consisting of the written and oral parts. If a student does not pass 
the examination, the student is allowed to attempt the entire examination a 
second time. The second attempt is considered final. However, the applicant's 
committee may elect to discourage a second attempt if the first does not 
indicate probable success upon repetition. 

Residence. Completion of the requirements for this degree normally 
requires at least three years of full-time graduate work. A minimum of two 
semesters must be spent in residence in full-time graduate study at WVU 
beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. 

Dissertation. The candidate must submit a dissertation produced at WVU 
under the direction of a major professor which demonstrates a high order of 
independent scholarship, originality, and competence in research, and which 
makes an original contribution to the field of specialization. 

Final Examination. When the dissertation is approved and all other 
requirements have been fulfilled, the candidate's doctoral committee will 
administer the final oral examination. However, a final examination will not 
be given in the same semester as the qualifying examination. At the option of 
the student's committee, a final written examination may also be required. 
The final examination(s) shall be concerned with the dissertation, its 
contribution to knowledge, its relation to other fields, and the candidate's 
grasp of the field of specialization. 

Time Limitation. Following admission to candidacy, doctoral students 
are allowed five years to complete all remaining degree requirements. An 
extension of time may be permitted only upon repetition of the qualifying 
examination and completion of any other requirements specified by the 
student's doctoral committee. 



MUSIC 231 



Doctor of Musical Arts 

Program Objectives. The primary objective is professional competence at 
the highest level. Historical and theoretical knowledge sufficient to support 
individualized interpretations for performers and original creative work for 
composers is also expected. Writing and speaking skills needed to communicate 
clearly and effectively are required. In order to achieve these objectives, the 
course of study includes requirements in performance or composition, 
academic course work, and research. 

Admission. Acceptance to doctoral programs is competitive; admissions 
decisions are made each year in the spring for entrance the following fall. 
Applicants to the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Musical Arts 
(D.M.A.) must present necessary credentials for evaluation of previous 
training and experience. These include a score on the Graduate Record 
Examination, a transcript of all grades submitted through the WVU Office of 
Admissions and Records, and evidence that the applicant has a minimum of 
28 hours in liberal arts studies. Before admission to the program the Division 
may, at its discretion, require the applicant to take entrance tests in various 
fields of music, or it may require the applicant to be present for a personal 
interview. Under normal circumstances the applicant must have maintained a 
minimum average grade of B in courses taken for the master's degree. 
However, if sufficient professional experience should warrant, the Division 
may waive the requirement of a B average or may grant an applicant 
conditional admittance subject to the satisfactory completion of certain 
specified courses or the attainment of a specified grade-point average within a 
semester's work. 

Applicants in performance should submit copies of programs of recent 
major recitals. The applicant must be approved for the program by an 
audition committee by giving evidence of superior performance, artistic 
maturity, and extensive repertoire as specified under Graduate Applied 
Music Requirements. The audition committee will include the Chair of the 
Division of Music, the Director of Graduate Studies, the graduate adviser in 
applied music, and the major professors involved with the area of specializa- 
tion. 

Applicants in composition must be approved for the program after 
evaluation of scores of the applicant's works, accompanied by recordings if 
possible. These should show successful handling of various forms and media 
and indicate the applicant's capacity to attain professional standing in the 
field. 

Fields of Specialization. The degree of Doctor of Musical Arts may be 
taken in performance and literature (with specialization in piano, voice, or 
organ), or in composition. 

Curriculum. The exact amount and nature of course work undertaken will 
be determined by the adviser with the approval of the student's doctoral 
committee in light of previous preparation and field of specialization. A 
paradigm of recommended courses and other requirements is available upon 
request. 

Candidacy. Upon completion of the requirements of the Division of Music 
and the general WVU graduate studies requirements, the student will be 
recommended for admission to candidacy for the degree. These requirements 
are (in order of occurrence): 

1. Demonstrate reading proficiency in a foreign language by successful 
completion either of an examination administered by the Division of Music or 
the equivalent of the fourth semester of recent language study with a 

232 MUSIC 



minimum grade of B. Ordinarily, the language would be French or German; 
exceptions may be allowed depending upon the needs of the student. 

2. Pass written qualifying examinations satisfactorily to show: 

a. Broad knowledge in Theory and Music History and Literature. 

b. Knowledge in depth of the literature of the field of specialization or 
of the craft of composition. 

3. Pass satisfactorily a comprehensive oral qualifying examination. 

4. Present a public recital (performance specialization only). 
Graduate students who have met these requirements and who have 

maintained an average of B in courses completed shall be admitted to 
candidacy. The qualifying examinations, administered after satisfaction of 
the language requirement, shall be considered as one integral examination 
consisting of written and oral parts. If a student does not pass the examination 
the student is allowed to attempt the entire examination a second time. The 
second attempt is considered final. However, the applicant's committee may 
elect to discourage a second attempt if the first does not indicate probable 
success upon repetition. 

Residence. Completion of the requirements for this degree normally 
requires at least three years of full-time graduate work. A minimum of two 
semesters must be spent in residence in full-time graduate study at WVU 
beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. 

Performance requirements (for performance majors) include private 
lessons, master classes in applied repertory, and public performance of at 
least two solo recitals and other types of presentations appropriate for the 
preparation of an artist-teacher, such as chamber music programs, concerto 
performances, major roles in opera or oratorio, or major accompaniments. 
Credit for each public performance is established in advance by the student's 
committee. 

Composition requirements (for composition majors) include private 
lessons and the creation of a composition portfolio. Credit for each composition 
is established by the student's committee prior to its completion; it will be 
subsequently evaluated on a pass-fail basis. Ten credits of the composition 
portfolio must be completed before admission to candidacy. Work on the 
major project must commence only after admission to candidacy. 

Academic course requirements include courses in music history and 
theory, and, for performers, an appropriate course in the literature of the 
major performance area. 

Research requirements are intended to develop theoretical and historical 
investigative techniques sufficient to enable the performer to develop valid 
individualized interpretations and to assist the composer in developing an 
original style. These requirements consist of the course "Introduction to 
Music Bibliography" (Music 430), demonstration of reading proficiency in 
either French or German, for composers a doctoral seminar, and for all 
students a research project culminating in an extended written study related 
to the student's area, although not necessarily constituting original research. 
This project will be supervised by a Regular Graduate Faculty member who is 
a member of the student's doctoral committee in consultation with the entire 
doctoral committee. 

Final Examination (performance specialization only). The final exami- 
nation will consist of a major solo recital (which will be regarded as the 
equivalent of the Ph.D. dissertation defense). Immediately following the 
public performance the candidate's committee will meet to evaluate the 
performance as evidence of mature musicianship and finished technique. 

MUSIC 233 



Such a final examination recital will not be given in the same semester as the 
qualifying examination. 

Final Examination [composition specialization only). When all compo- 
sitions and the major project are approved and all other requirements have 
been fulfilled, the candidate's doctoral committee will administer the final 
oral examination. At the option of the committee, a written examination may 
also be required. The final examination(s) shall be concerned with the 
compositions, the major project, and the candidate's grasp of the field of 
specialization and its relation to other fields. The final examination will not 
be given in the same semester as the qualifying examination. 

Time Limitation. Following admission to candidacy, doctoral students 
are allowed five years to complete all remaining degree requirements. An 
extension of time may be permitted only upon repetition of the qualifying 
examination and completion of any other requirements specified by the 
student's doctoral committee. 

Music (Music) 

200. Directed Music Studies. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. [May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. 
Studies in applied music, music education, music theory, music history, compo- 
sition; includes directed or independent study in special topics. 

210. Piano Class Methods and Materials. I. 3 hr. Methods, materials, and pedagogical 
techniques, including presentation of keyboard theory as used in functional piano. 
Practical organization of piano classes. Laboratory: observation of experienced 
class teacher and student teaching. [Not offered in 1988-89.) 

212. History of Keyboard Pedagogy and Technic. II. 3 hr. Study of keyboard development 
and technique, including pedagogical works of the eighteenth through twentieth 
centuries and application to specific teaching problems. Laboratory: student 
teaching and observation, emphasizing analysis and solution of technical problems. 
[Not offered in 1988-89.) 

213. Introduction to Jazz Improvisation. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 63, 64, and Proficiency Level 
4. Development of improvisatory skills in the jazz idiom using melodic, harmonic, 
and rhythmic motives and patterns, and the application of knowledge of tonal 
centers, chord progressions, and functions. 

214. Advanced Jazz Improvisation. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 213 or consent. Continuation of 
Music 213. Analysis of chord progressions with emphasis on chord substitutions, 
turnbacks, and scales. Development of jazz repertoire through performance. 

218. Repertoire. I. 0-2 hr. 

219. Repertoire. II. 0-2 hr. 

221. Music Before 1500. 1, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A study of sacred 
and secular monophony, Notre Dame organa, thirteenth-century motet and 
conductus, and fourteenth- and fifteenth-century polyphony in France and Italy. 
[Not offered in 1988-89.) 

222. Music of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 
or consent. A study of styles and forms from the High Renaissance to the Late 
Baroque. [Offered Spring 1989.) 

223. Music of the Eighteenth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A 
study of styles and forms of the Late Baroque through the Classic period. [Offered 
Summer 1989.) 

224. Music of the Nineteenth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A 
study of styles, forms, and theoretical concepts illustrative of nineteenth-century 
music. [Offered Fall 1989.) 

234 MUSIC 



225. Music of the Twentieth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A 
study of stylistic trends during the twentieth century. [Offered Summer 1988 and 
Spring 1990.) 

226. History of Jazz. I. 3 hr. History and repertory of jazz from its Afro-American 
origins to c.1975 with attention to its major exponents (including Joplin, Armstrong, 
B. Smith, Morton, Ellington, Gillespie, Parker, Davis, Coltrane) and its evolving 
style. 

230. Music of Africa. S. 3 hr. Traditional music of selected areas of Africa south of the 
Sahara with particular reference to East Africa. The diverse musical cultures with 
emphasis on historical background, instruments, ensembles, forms, and styles, 
and music in its social context. 

239. Collegium Musicum. I, II. 1-2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. Study 
of outstanding musical works not in the standard repertory. Performance of vocal 
and instrumental music, investigation of performance practices, preparation of 
editions, and direction of rehearsals under supervision. 

240. Clinic Chorus, Band, and Orchestra. I, II. 1 hr. Experience in selection, preparation, 
and class performance of music appropriate for high school choral and instrumental 
groups. [Not offered in 1988-89.) 

243. Music Workshops. I, II, S. 1-2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) 

245. Marching Band Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: One semester college marching band 
experience or consent. Study and practical application of techniques of planning 
and preparation of school marching band performances. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

248. Music Arranging for Public School Groups. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Music 66. Practical 
experience in techniques of making simple, workable arrangements of music for 
public school choral and instrumental performance groups. 

260. Upper-Division Composition. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Two 
semesters Music 160, or consent based on scores submitted. Creative writing with 
emphasis on practical composition for performance. 

263. Counterpoint. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Sixteenth-century counterpoint. 

264. Counterpoint. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Eighteenth-century counterpoint. 

265. Analysis of Musical Form. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Detailed study of the 
structure of music. 

267. Electronic Music. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 and consent. Technology of producing 
electronic music. Methods of producing electronic compositions, relationship 
between sound signal and sound perceived, ear training, analysis of examples 
from electronic music literature, and composition of electronic music. 

268. Electronic Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 267. Continuation of Music 267. 

273. Arranging for Small Jazz Ensemble. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 171, and Music 173 or 
consent. Scoring, voicing, and arranging in various jazz styles, with emphasis on 
small ensembles comprising three to nine players. 

274. Arranging for Large Jazz Ensemble. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 273 or consent. Continuation 
of Music 273, with emphasis on arranging for big band and studio jazz ensemble. 

310. Secondary Applied Music. I, II, S. 1 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) Group or 
individual instruction in performance on a minor instrument (or voice), with 
emphasis on methods and materials for school music teachers. 

312. Keyboard Performance and Pedagogy. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) 
(Offered in 1-credit modules of which students may take one or more each 
semester.) Pedagogy, repertoire, interpretation, and other topics which will 
enhance preparation of private piano teachers. 

MUSIC 235 



335. Survey of Vocal Music. I. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. upper-division music history. Survey of 
masses, oratorios, cantatas and operas from late Renaissance to the twentieth 
century. Solo repertoire will not be included. fNot offered in 1988-89.) 

336. Survey of Instrumental Music. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. upper-division music history. 
Survey of instrumental ensemble music, concertos, symphonies, and other 
orchestral music from late Renaissance to the twentieth century. Solo repertoire 
will not be included. {Not offered in 1988-89.) 

341. Music in the Elementary School. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 30, 41, 42, or equiv. [Not open to 
music majors.) Development of skills, procedures, techniques, and materials used 
by the general classroom teacher of music in grades K-8. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

342. Teaching of Music Appreciation. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 30, 41, 42, or equiv. (Not open to 
music majors, j Review of information, materials, sources, and techniques involved 
in teaching appreciation of music in public schools. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

343. Contemporary Techniques in Classroom Music. 3 hr. PR: Music 152 or consent. 
Principles and practice of contemporary techniques in elementary and junior high 
school classroom music, including those of Orff and Kodaly. (Offered Summer 
1989.) 

344. Appalachian Music for the Classroom. I. 3 hr. Lecture, demonstration, and 
practical experience in performance of Appalachian vocal and instrumental music 
and in use of this music in public school classrooms. May involve field trips and 
construction of inexpensive instruments. [Offered Spring 1989.) 

346. Musicmaking in Middleschool/Junior High. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, equiv., or 
consent. Identification and sequencing of appropriate concepts and skills for 
general music class students. Selection and use of materials including popular 
music. Emphasis on student music-making activities. Evaluation procedures 
included. [Offered Fall 1988-89 and Spring 1989-90.) 

347. Music in Early Childhood. S. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv., or concent. 
Musical experiences for children three through ten years. Emphasis on intellectual, 
physical and social/emotional needs and characteristics of children. Materials and 
activities for developing music concepts, skills, and positive response. (Offered 
Summer 1990.) 

392. Guided Studies in Music. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
Intensive individualized reading reported in group discussions. Course may be 
repeated as many times as necessary, in as many areas as needed; different 
sections (i.e. areas) may be pursued simultaneously. 

398. Master's Recital. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Music 299 (Senior Recital) or consent. Master's 
Applied students shall be permitted to give a recital only after they pass a 
qualifying audition before a designated faculty committee in a semester previous 
to that in which the recital is to be given. 

400. Applied Music. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Open to qualified students in any field in Applied 
Music. May be repeated.) Normally offered for 2 credits (one 30-minute lesson per 
week) or 4 credits (one 60-minute) lesson per week. A student must demonstrate 
ability of grade-level 4 on an instrument to receive credit in Music 400 on that 
instrument. 

409. Master Class in Applied Repertoire. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Consent. Designed to give coverage through performance of the literature of a 
specific D.M.A. Applied Music field. 

410. Conducting. S. 3 hr. PR: Music 53 or equiv. Instrumental and choral conducting. 
Major works are prepared and conducted through the use of recordings and music 
organizations. 

236 MUSIC 



419. Opera Theatre. I, II. 0-4 hr. PR: Music 19 or consent. Continuation of Music 19. 
Performance of major roles and advanced production techniques. Qualified 
students will undertake production-direction projects under supervision. 

423. Keyboard Literature. S. 3 hr.PR: Music 218, 219. Intensive study of the literature 
for keyboard instruments and the history of the literature. (Not offered in 
1988-89.) 

424. Song Literature. S. 1-3 hr. PR: Music 218, 219. Intensive study of the Art Song and 
the Lied and the history of their development. fNot offered in 1988-89.) 

428. Aesthetics of Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 33, 34 or consent. Examination of the main 
classical and contemporary aesthetic theories and their applications to music. 
(Not offered in 1988-89.) 

429. Survey of Sacred Music. S. 4 hr. PR: Music 33, 34 orequiv. Study of music suitable 
to the liturgical year, including the historical background of the Jewish, Catholic, 
and Protestant liturgies. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

430. Introduction to Musical Bibliography. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 33 and 34 or equiv. Survey 
of musical bibliography with appropriate research assignments. 

431. Research Problems for Performers. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 430. Discussion of problems 
of music literature, performance practice, history, and instruments; preparation of 
a research paper under individual supervision. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

438. History of Notation. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Detailed study in transcribing 
the musical manuscripts of the Middle Ages. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

439. History of Notation. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Continuation of Music 438 
covering the Renaissance period. (Not offered in 1988-89.) 

440. Choral Techniques. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 151, 152 or equiv. Advanced techniques and 
procedures involved in development of choral ensembles. (Offered Summer 1989.) 

442. Instrumental Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv. Advanced 
techniques and procedures involved in individual performance and instruction 
through lecture-demonstrations by applied music faculty. (Offered Fall 1989-90.) 

444. Music Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152 or equiv. Survey and critical study of 
the total music education program. (Offered Spring 1988-89.) 

445. Supervision of Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 151 or 152, or equiv. Concepts, 
responsibilities, duties and techniques that the supervisor needs to effectively 
exercise leadership in developing, coordinating, and refining the complete Music 
Education program in public schools from kindergarten through twelfth grade. 
(Not offered in 1988-89.) 

446. Introduction to Research in Music Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv. 
Methods and measures necessary for conduct and understanding of research in 
music education. (Offered Fall 1988-89.) 

448. Psychology of Music Learning. 3 hr. Application of learning theory to music 
learning; nature of musical talent; music talent testing. (Offered Fall 1988-89.) 

449. Psychology of Music. II. 3 hr. Introductory study of musical acoustics and 
psychology of perception of music. (Offered Spring 1989-90.) 

460. Composition. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. Primarily for 
candidates for graduate degrees in theory or composition. 

467. Analytical Techniques. I, II, or S. 3 hr. Analytical techniques and their application 
to scholarship and performance, with emphasis on pre-twentieth century styles. 
(Offered Spring 1989-90, Summer 1989.) 

MUSIC 237 



468. Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music. I, II, or S. 3 hr. Analysis of 
twentieth-century music with emphasis upon music composed since 1950. 
[Offered in Fall 1989-90 and Summer 1990.) 

470. Transcription and Arranging. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated once for credit.) PR: 
Music 172 or equiv. Major projects in scoring for orchestra, band, or wind 
ensemble. 

475. Pedagogy of Theory. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Consideration of 
various approaches to the teaching of theory. (Offered Spring 1988-89.) 

483. Theory Topics. I, II, or S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 8 hr. credit.) Various 
types of analytical and theoretical problems and approaches to their solutions. 
(Offered Fall 1989-90.) 

491. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. 

492. Advanced Studies in Music. I, II. 1-8 hr. PR: Consent, which in some cases may be 
contingent upon doctoral foreign language examination or a course in statistics. 
Intensive individualized reading reported in group discussions. Course may be 
repeated as many times as necessary, in as many areas as needed; several different 
sections (i.e., areas) may be pursued simultaneously. 

494. Doctoral Seminar. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for max. 8 hr. credit.) PR: Consent. 
Intensive individual investigation and preparation of research papers. Presented 
by the combined doctoral staff in music. 

496. Lecture Recital I, II. 2 hr. PR: Music 430. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Music 430 or consent. 

498. Doctoral Recital. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Music 398 (Master's Recital) or consent. 
Master's Applied students shall be permitted to give a recital only after they pass a 
qualifying audition before a committee of at least three specialists in the area in a 
semester previous to that in which the recital is to be given. Acceptance of the 
recital will be at the discretion of the student's doctoral committee. 

NURSING 

Lorita D. Jenab, Dean of School of Nursing 
Luz S. Porter, Chairperson of the Graduate Program 
1144 Basic Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: M.S.N. 

Graduate Faculty: Members M. Counts, L. S. Porter, and M. J. Smith. Associate 
Members L. D. Jenab, L. Ostrow, K. L. Riffle, M. N. Smith, J. Stemple, and J. Wang. 

Master of Science in Nursing 

The School of Nursing offers a program of study leading to the Master of 
Science in Nursing (M.S.N.) degree to prepare the professional nurse for the 
role of nurse clinician in the advanced practice of nursing in primary health 
care. The program, which is administered by the Graduate Academic Unit, is 
offered at the University main campus in Morgantown and at selected 
extension sites. 

Designed in an integrative fashion, this non-traditional graduate program 
offers a curriculum model which allows students to enroll on a part-time or 
full-time basis. Throughout the curriculum, students are guided in the 
processes of self-development aimed at pursuing excellence in scholarly and 
professional endeavors. The program allows flexibility within the basic 
curricular structure through the individualization of learning experiences, 
electives, thesis, and the opportunity to investigate an area of interest in 
advanced study. 

238 NURSING 



The pattern of duration for the individual student study plan is determined 
in consultation with a faculty adviser and is based upon the student's 
background and goals. The program can be completed in four semesters of 
full-time study at the Morgantown campus, averaging a load of 9-12 credit 
hours per semester. 

The program is accredited by the National League for Nursing. 

Admission Requirements 

The applicant must: 

1. Meet the admission requirements of graduate education at West 
Virginia University. 

2. Have completed a baccalaureate program in nursing which is accredited 
by the National League for Nursing (NLN). Applicants with a baccalaureate 
degree from nursing programs without NLN accreditation are required to take 
the NLN Comprehensive Achievement Test for Baccalaureate Nursing Stu- 
dents, Form 3113, and are considered on an individual basis. 

3. Have completed a course in introductory statistics (3 credit hours). 

4. Provide the following: 

a. Statement of philosophy of nursing and professional goals. 

b. Letter of recommendation from each of the following: head of 
undergraduate nursing program, employer, and a colleague. 

c. Evidence of a current professional nursing license in at least one 
state. 

5. Have an interview with a Graduate Academic Unit faculty member. 

Five parameters are used for review of applicants: (1) academic achieve- 
ment; (2) residency/employment; (3) professional experience; (4) careergoals; 
and (5) recommendations. WVU School of Nursing is an equal opportunity/af- 
firmative action institution. 

Once admitted, the student is assigned to a faculty adviser who guides the 
student in curricular and academic matters. Enrollment in nursing courses is 
based upon readiness, availability of space and other essential resources. 

The application process must be completed by January 1 for summer 
(May) enrollment; March 1 and August 1 for fall and spring enrollment, 
respectively. Class sizes are limited, based on available faculty resources and 
space. 

Application Process 

Applicants need to complete the following steps in order to be considered 
for admission: 

1. Complete two application forms as indicated and return to the 
appropriate offices to avoid unnecessary delay in the review process. 

a. Application for Admission to Graduate Studies — To be returned 
with a $20.00 nonrefundable service fee to: Office of Admissions 
and Records, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, 
WV 26506-6009. 

b. Application for Admission to the Master of Science in Nursing 
Program— To be returned to: Chairperson, Graduate Academic 
Unit, WVU School of Nursing, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

2. Request an official transcript of records from each college or university 
attended. Transcripts and records should be sent directly to the WVU Office 
of Admissions and Records. 



NURSING 239 



3. Send three recommendation letters directly to the Chairperson of the 
School of Nursing Graduate Academic Unit. 

4. Participate in an interview with a faculty member teaching in the 
graduate program. The interview is for the purpose of verifying application 
materials, reviewing admission criteria, identifying deficiencies and trans- 
ferable credits and, where possible, projecting a tentative plan of study. It is 
expected that the applicant will take an active role in the interview process to 
be informed about the basis for the admission criteria. 

Degree Requirements 

1. Completion of 42 semester credit hours, including 30 hours (master's 
paper option) to 33 hours (thesis option) in nursing and 9 hours of non-nursing 
electives. The required non-nursing electives are restricted to 3 hours in 
computer utilization and 6 hours of humanities and/or social sciences. 
Students opting for a master's paper must complete an additional 3 hours of 
electives by advisement. 

2. Completion of a thesis (6 hours) or a master's paper (3 hours). 

3. Achievement of an overall academic average of at least B in all work 
attempted in the master's program. The grade C in two nursing courses will 
require a faculty review of the student's program progression. 

4. Removal of all conditions, deficiencies, and incomplete grades. Credit 
hours for courses in which the grade is lower than C will not count toward 
satisfying graduate degree requirements. 

Students are expected to register for courses with letter grades (A, B, C). 
Electives may be opted for satisfactory (S) or unsatisfactory (U) grades — 
subject to the approval of the adviser. 

M.S.N. Curriculum 

Nursing Theory, Practice, and Research (30-33 hours) Hr. 

Nsg. 300— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 1 3 

Nsg. 301 — Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 2 3 

Nsg. 302— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 3 3 

Nsg. 310 — Advanced Nursing Practice 1 3 

Nsg. 311— Advanced Nursing Practice 2 3 

Nsg. 312— Advanced Nursing Practice 3 3 

Nsg. 370— Theories in Nursing 3 

Nsg. 373— Research Process and Methods in Nursing 3 

Nsg. 400 — Advanced Nursing Practice 4 3 

Nsg. 497 — Research (master's paper/thesis)* 3-6 

30-33 

*Students electing the master's paper option are required only 3 hours of Nursing 497. 

Electives [9-12 hours) 

Master's paper option: 

Cognates (Non-Nursing) 9 

Electives by Advisement 3 

Thesis option: 
Cognates (Non-Nursing) 9 

TOTAL 42-45 



240 NURSING 



Sample Progression Plan [Full-time Study) 



Semester I 


Hr. 


Semester II 


Hr. 


Semester III 


Hr. 


Semester IV 


Hr. 


Nsg. 300 
Nsg. 310 
Nsg. 370 


3 
3 
3 


Nsg. 301 
Nsg. 311 
Nsg. 373 
Elective 


3 
3 
3 
3 


Nsg. 302 
Nsg. 312 
Nsg. 497 
Elective 


3 
3 
3 
3 


Nsg. 400 
Nsg. 497 
Elective 


3 
3 
3 



9 12 12 9 

Nursing (Nsg.) 

300. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 1. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Nsg. 370. 
Analysis and synthesis of concepts in nursing and related sciences relevant to the 
development of a conceptual framework for nursing in primary health care. 
(Emphasis on individual system.) 

301. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 2. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 310; PR or Cone: 
Nsg. 373. Development of a conceptual model for nursing with emphasis on 
developing strategies to promote client health. (Emphasis on family system.] 

302. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 3. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 311. Further 
development and or refinement of a conceptual model for nursing with specific 
emphasis on planned change strategies and how these strategies impact health. 
(Emphasis on community system.) 

310. Advanced Nursing Practice 1. 1. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 300. Advanced nursing practice 
focusing on applicability of concepts in students' developing conceptual frame- 
work. (Emphasis on individual system.) 

311. Advanced Nursing Practice 2. II. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 301. Advanced nursing practice 
focusing on development and application of nursing strategies within the context 
of students' conceptual model. (Emphasis on family system.) 

312. Advanced Nursing Practice 3. I, S. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 302. Advanced nursing 
practice focusing on application and testing of students' conceptual model, 
identification of a health problem area within the practice setting, and preparation 
of a planned change strategy. (Emphasis on community system.) 

370. Theories in Nursing. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing; consent. Introduction to the 
structure and function of extant theories in nursing as a basis for developing a 
conceptual framework for nursing. 

373. Research Process and Methods in Nursing. II. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 310, 370. Study of the 
research process and methods for incorporation into students' conceptual model, 
practice and research in nursing. 

400. Advanced Nursing Practice 4. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 312. Collaborative practice 
focusing on the evaluation and modification of students' conceptual model for 
nursing and implementation of a planned change strategy. (Emphasis on role 
synthesis.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing; consent. In-depth study of 
topics related to current issues in primary health care. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled seminars. 

497. A. Research. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 373; PR or Cone: Nsg. 312; consent. Refinement and 
implementation of research proposal to meet requirements for the master's thesis, 
or completion of the master's paper. 

497. B. Research. 1-3 hr. PR: Nsg. 497. Completion of master's thesis. 

NURSING 241 



OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH 
AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 

Terrence J. Stobbe, Coordinator of the Program 

529 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Myers, Plummer and Stobbe. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

This program provides master-level students the opportunity to study 
industrial hygiene and systems safety. This degree is designed for students 
who are interested in pursuing a career in occupational safety and health. 

Students are admitted as regular graduate students for work leading to 
the Master of Science (M.S.) degree, provided they hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an approved institution of higher education in the areas of 
biology, chemistry, engineering, mathematics, or physics, have a minimum 
2.5 undergraduate grade-point average, and satisfy prerequisites in the 
courses for which they register. In order to receive the degree, the student 
must have a minimum 3.0 grade-point average in all course work leading to 
the degree and satisfy all general WVU graduate requirements. 

The following courses are prerequisite or corequisite, depending on the 
applicant's academic and professional experience: statistics (Stat. 311, I.E. 
113 or equivalent); chemistry (Chem. 15 and 16 or equivalent); computer 
programming (C.S. 5 or equivalent); physics (Phys. 11 and 12 or equivalent); 
mathematics (Math. 15 and 16 or equivalent). Pre- and co-requisite coursework 
decisions are made on a case-by-case basis by the program admissions 
committee; the student is informed about his/her requirements at the time of 
acceptance into the program. 

Admission to candidacy for the M.S. degree is required before obtaining 
the degree. A graduate student may apply for admission to candidacy by 
formal application after completing a minimum of 12 hours of graduate 
courses within the program with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on 
all graduate courses taken in residence, for which the student has received a 
grade at the time of application. Admission must be gained before completion 
of 18 hours. 

A minimum of 36 hours is required for the Master of Science degree. 

A writing requirement is an integral part of the master's program. This 
requirement can be satisfied with either a 3 credit-hour problem report, which 
is based on some research, or a 6 credit-hour thesis. 

Course credit for all of the above is applicable against the 36-hour 
requirement. 

Program of Study 

FALL 

I.E. 260— Human Factors Engineering* 

I.E. 261— Systems Safety Engineering* 

I.E. 361 — Industrial Hygiene Engineering* 

I.E. 480— Seminar— Fire Protection Engineering* 

C.E. 245— Properties of Air Pollutants** 

Seminar (required) 

*Required courses for both industrial hygiene and systems safety students. 
**Required course for industrial hygiene students only. 



242 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 



SPRING 

OHSE 321— Epidemiology: Principles and Practices* 

OHSE 325— Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Analysis* 

I.E. 362— Systems Safety Engineering 2*** 

Pcol. 362— Occupational Toxicology* 

I.E. 364— Industrial Ergonomics* 

Seminar (required) 

SUMMER 

OHSE 328— Noise and Ventilation Control Technology* 

OHSE 326— Safety and Health Measurement and Instrumentation* 

*Required courses for both industrial hygiene and systems safety students. 
**Required course for industrial hygiene students only. 
***Required course for systems safety. 

Eiectives 

Industrial hygiene and systems safety have a minimum of 4 elective hours each. 

Occupational Health and Safety Engineering 

Ch.E. 290, 390, 391. 

Chem. 210. 

C.E. 251, 349, 350, 359, several additional 400-level courses qualify if students possess 

prerequisites. 
E.M. 201, 213, 216, 247. 
I.E. 214, 249, 314, 325, 341, 360, 368. 
Manag. 216. 
M.A.E. 242, 282, 330. 
Phys. 201. 

Psych. 225, 232, 301. 
Saf. S. 301, 334, 418. 
Stat. 312. 

Occupational Health and Safety Engineering (OHSE) 

320. Foundations of Environmental Health Practice. I, II, S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Designed 
to enable the environmentalist to recognize and identify environmental stresses 
and the effect of these stresses on man. Topics include occupational health, 
physical stress, safety, and basic and broad principles of toxicology. 

321. Epidemiology: Principles and Practices. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. 
Principles and methods of epidemiology with emphasis on descriptive and 
analytical epidemiological methods. 

325. Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 361 and consent. 
Calibration and use of sampling and analytical equipment used by industrial 
hygienists to evaluate the work environment. Advantages and disadvantages of 
different equipment under various conditions. Biological monitoring as an 
evaluation tool. 

326. Safety and Health Measurement and Instrumentation. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Practical experience in setting up industrial hygiene field studies, air sampling, 
and analysis. Practical experience with safety equipment and instrumentation 
used in the field and in research. Field trips and case studies exposing students to a 
variety of industrial processes. 

328. Noise and Ventilation Control Technology. S. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 361 or consent. The 
course will demonstrate techniques for the recognition, evaluation, and control of 
noise and ventilation problems. Students will use monitoring equipment to 
evaluate situations and perform several design projects. 

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 243 



380. Internship. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. (May be repeated.) PR: Consent of committee 
chairperson and department chairperson. Professional internship providing on- 
the-job training under supervision of a previously approved environmentalist in 
settings appropriate to professional objectives. 

ORTHODONTICS 

Dennis O. Bernard, Chairperson of the Department 

1077 Basic Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bernard, McCutcheon, and Overman. 

Master of Science 

The School of Dentistry and its Department of Orthodontics offer a 
program of advanced study and clinical training leading to the degree of 
Master of Science (M.S.). The program requires a minimum of 24 months (two 
academic years and two summers) of full-time residency in the School of 
Dentistry, and is designed to qualify dentists for careers in orthodontic 
clinical practice, teaching, and research. 

Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the 
Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs. Those applicants approved for 
admission to the program will be notified soon after January 15. 

Requirements for Admission to the Orthodontic Program 

1. Graduation from an accredited dental school. 

2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement that would indicate 
the applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature. Generally, a 
minimum grade-point average of 2.75 is required for admission. 

3. Each applicant must file with the department all information requested 
in the department application form. 

Requirements for Master of Science Degree 

1. Fulfillment of WVU general requirements for graduate study. 

2. Twenty-four months (two academic years and two summers) of 
consecutive residency at the School of Dentistry. 

3. An approved master's thesis based on original research completed 
during the period of residency in an area related to orthodontics. 

4. Must satisfactorily pass a final oral examination. 

5. Must complete a minimum of 50 credit hours. These include 35 hours of 
orthodontic courses, a minimum of 9 hours of selected basic sciences subjects, 
a minimum of 6 hours of elective allied subjects, and a thesis (6 hours). 

6. Must have demonstrated satisfactory clinical competence in the 
student's field. 

7. Must have maintained a grade level commensurate with graduate 
education. 

Orthodontics (Dent.) 

416. Biomechanics. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Design and function of the teeth and their 
surrounding structures, and response of these tissues to orthodontic procedures. 

417. Orthodontic Technique. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Laboratory course in techniques 
related to fabrication and manipulation of orthodontic appliances. 

418. Orthodontic Materials. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Physical properties of materials 
used in orthodontic appliances. 

244 ORTHODONTICS 



419. Orthodontic Diagnosis. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar-type class on 
technique of patient examination, acquiring diagnostic records, and analyzing and 
correlating this information to the treatment of clinical problems. 

420. Cephalometrics. S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Use of radiographic cephalometry in 
studying growth of the human face, analysis of dentofacial malformations, and 
evaluation of orthodontic treatment. 

421. Orthodontic Mechanics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Dent. 416, 417. Seminar and laboratory 
course on basic orthodontic mechanical properties. 

422. Advanced Orthodontic Mechanics. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Dent. 421. Continuation of 
Dent. 421 involving more difficult type cases and introducing more sophisticated 
appliance therapy. 

423. Growth and Development. II. 1-5 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar-type course on normal 
and abnormal growth of the human head and its application to orthodontics. 

425. Orthodontic Seminar. I, II, S. 1-8 hr. PR: Consent. Discussions involving all 
branches of dental science, with special emphasis on the orthodontic interest. 
Assigned topics and articles in the literature discussed. 

426. Orthodontic Clinic. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Dent. 416, 417. Clinical treatment of 
selected patients. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

Pathology (Path.) 

397. Pediatric Oral Pathology. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Lecture and seminar course on 
inherited diseases and other pathologic situations of oral cavity and face specific 
for pediatric age group. 

Statistics (Stat.) 

311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math 3. Statistical models, distributions, 
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regres- 
sion, correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of 
variance and multiple comparisons. (Equiv. to Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311.) 

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 

Samuel Ameri, Chairperson of the Department 

111 White Hall 

Degree Offered: M.S.Pet.E. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Ameri, Aminian, Puon, Wasson, and Yu. 

Master of Science in Petroleum Engineering (M.S.Pet.E.) 

A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit at the master's level 
in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources must first apply for admission 
and state the major field. 

An applicant with a baccalaureate degree, or its equivalent in petroleum 
or natural gas engineering, will be admitted on the same basis as graduates of 
WVU. Lacking these qualifications, the applicant must first fulfill the College 
of Mineral and Energy Resources requirements of the Department of Petroleum 
and Natural Gas Engineering. 

Academic Standards. Each student will, with the approval of the 
student's graduate committee— appointed with the consent of the student 
within the first semester of registration— follow a planned program. The 

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 245 



program contains a minimum of 24 hours of course work and 6 hours of 
independent and original study in the petroleum and natural gas engineering 
field leading to a master's thesis or 30 hours of course work and 3 hours of 
independent study leading to a comprehensive problem report. At least 60 
percent of the course credits must be from 300-level or 400-level courses while 
the remainder can be made up of 200-level courses. 

Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is 
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request 
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester 
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based 
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been 
recorded. 

No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported 
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate 
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on all courses 
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must 
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original 
study in petroleum engineering. 

Each degree candidate is required to take Pet.E. 496. 

Petroleum Engineering (Pet.E.) 

207. Natural Gas Engineering. 1. 4 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233, M.A.E. 101, 114, Math. 18. Natural 
gas properties, compression, transmission, processing, and application of reservoir 
engineering principles to predict the performance and design of gas, gas- 
condensate, and storage reservoirs. Includes a laboratory devoted to gas mea- 
surements. 3 hr. lee; 3 hr. lab. 

208. Natural Gas Production and Storage. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 207, 234 or consent. 
Development of gas and gas-condensate reservoirs; design and development of gas 
storage fields in depleted gas, gas-condensate, oil reservoirs and aquifers; design 
of natural gas production and processing equipment. 

210. Drilling Engineering. II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: Geol. 1, M.A.E. 114. Rock properties, 
functions and design considerations of rotating system, hoisting system, and 
circulation system; drilling fluids calculations and selections; hydraulic programs; 
drilling optimization; casing and casing string design; cementing programs; and 
pressure control. 

211. Production Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 210. Well completion, performance of 
productive formation, drill stem tests, completion of wells, flowing wells, gas lift 
methods and equipment, pumping installation design, well stimulation, emulsion, 
treating, gathering and storage of oil and gas, field automation. 3 hr lee. 

212. Drilling Fluids Laboratory. I, II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Pet.E. 210, Chem. 141, M.A.E. 
114. Topics include clay hydration, viscosity of water-based fluids, mud weight 
control, filtration studies, thinning agents, chemical contaminants, lime muds, 
polymer muds, rheological models, and liquid and solid determination. 

215. Transport Phenomena in Petroleum Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41. Intro- 
duction to fluid flow in pipes, two-phase flow, rotary drilling hydraulics, primary 
cementing jobs, flow calculations, flow measuring devices, fluid machinery, 
dimensional analysis, and heat transfer. 

216. Petroleum Engineering Design. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234 or consent. Comprehensive 
problems in design involving systems in oil and gas production, field processing, 
transportation, and storage. Three 3-hr. labs. 



246 PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 



224. Petroleum Engineering Problems. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Investigation 
and detailed report on a special problem in petroleum engineering. Supervised by a 
member of the Petroleum Engineering faculty. A final oral examination is 
required. 

233. Elements of Petroleum Reservoir Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 236 or consent. 
Basic properties of petroleum reservoir rocks. Fluid flow through porous materials. 
Evaluation of oil and gas reserves. 3 hr. lee. 

234. Applied Petroleum Reservoir Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233 or consent. 
Application of reservoir engineering data to calculation of recovery potentials and 
to analysis, simulation, and prediction of reservoir performance under a variety of 
production methods to effect maximum conservation. 3 hr. lee. 

235. Formation Evaluation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 210 or consent. Various well logging 
methods and related calculations with exercises in interpretation of data from 
actual well logs. 3 hr. lee. 

236. Petroleum Properties and Phase Behavior. I, II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Chem. 141. 
Theoretical and applied phase behavior of hydrocarbon systems and hydrocarbon 
fluid properties. Applications to petroleum reservoir and production engineering 
design. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

241. Oil and Gas Property Evaluation. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 235; Coreq. Pet.E. 211 and 234, 
or consent. Reserve estimation, decline analysis, petroleum properties evaluation 
including interest calculations, costs estimation, and taxes evaluation. Overview 
investment decision analysis and computer applications in properties evaluation. 

244. Petroleum Reservoir Engineering Laboratory. I, II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Pet.E. 233. 
Laboratory evaluation of basic and special petroleum reservoir rock properties. 3 
hr. lab. 

262. Introduction to Reservoir Simulation. I. 3 hr. PR: M. 281, Pet.E. 234 or consent. 
Partial differential equations for fluid flow in porous media and the use of finite- 
difference equations in solving reservoir flow problems for various boundary 
conditions. Study of individual well pressures and fundamentals of history 
matching. 

299. Well Stimulation Design. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43, Pet.E. 210, 233, 235. (Field trips 
required.) Fundamentals of well stimulation, treatment design and their appli- 
cations to low permeability formations. 

302. Fluid Flow in Porous Media. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234, Math. 18 or consent. Theoretical 
and practical aspects of the physical principles of hydrodynamics in porous 
media. 3 hr. lee. 

340. Secondary Recovery of Oil by Water Flooding. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233. Theory of 
immiscible fluid displacement mechanism, evaluation and economics of water 
flood projects, and oil field flooding techniques. 3 hr. lee. 

343. Advanced Secondary Recovery. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 340. Secondary recovery of oil 
by gas flooding, miscible fluid injection, in situ combustion, and heat injection. 3 
hr. lee. 

362. Reservoir Simulation and Modeling. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 262 or consent. Application 
of finite-difference equations to multi-phase fluid flow in porous media in two or 
three dimensions with gravity and capillary pressure effects. Simulation of water- 
flood performance and enhanced recovery techniques. 

384. Pressure Transient Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234 or consent. Methods of 
analysis of pressure transient data obtained from well testing for the purpose of 
determining in-situ reservoir conditions including porosity, lateral extent, average 
reservoir pressure, and formation permeability. 

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 247 



394. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Selected fields of study in petroleum 
and natural gas engineering. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Individual study and oral presentation of 
selected topics in petroleum engineering. Current petroleum literature and 
research are discussed. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

General Minerals Program (M.) 

281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving 
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas 
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies. 

PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 

John W. Mauger, Coordinator of Graduate Pharmaceutical Sciences Studies 

1121 Basic Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Brushwood, Fifer, Gwilt, Howard, Jacknowitz, Kirsch, 
Lim, Lively, Ma, Malanga, Mauger, Nematollahi, O'Donnell, Riley, Rosenbluth, Shah, 
Stout, and Waters. Associate Members Abate, Brister, Khoury, O'Connell, and Ponte. 

The School of Pharmacy offers graduate programs in the pharmaceutical 
sciences aimed at educating competent researchers and teachers. Programs 
for the degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 
provide flexible, research-oriented curricula designed to develop the interests, 
capabilities, and potential of the individual student. 

Applicants for admission must satisfy the general requirements for 
admission as graduate students. The applicant must possess a baccalaureate 
degree with a background in a suitable area of study, an overall grade-point 
average of at least 2.75, and the aptitude and interest for graduate work in the 
pharmaceutical sciences in order to be admitted with regular student status. 
Applicants not meeting criteria for admission with regular student status will 
be considered for admission under alternate admission classifications, as 
explained in Part 4 of this catalog. In addition, graduate record examination 
scores in the verbal, quantitative, and analytical portions of the examinations 
are required from all students, and TOEFL, or similar scores, are required of 
foreign students. While the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores are 
preferred for applicants in the area of behavioral and administrative pharmacy, 
test scores on the Graduate Management Admissions Test (GMAT) are 
acceptable. 

Academic Standards 

No credits are acceptable toward a graduate degree with a grade lower 
than a C. 

The graduate student must have a cumulative grade-point average of at 
least 3.0 in all graduate courses to qualify for the degrees. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The School of Pharmacy offers programs of graduate study leading to the 
degree of Master of Science (M.S.) in the pharmaceutical sciences. Students 

248 PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 



may specialize in pharmacy administration, pharmacology and toxicology, 
pharmacognosy, pharmaceutical chemistry, industrial pharmacy, medicinal 
chemistry, pharmaceutics, biopharmaceutics, and pharmacokinetics. 

Requirements for M.S. Degree 

To be eligible for the M.S. degree, the student must complete a minimum 
of 30 hours of graduate credit, of which no more than six hours may be for 
research and thesis. 

Upon completion of the course work and research requirements, and after 
submission of the thesis, an oral examination will be administered by the 
appointed examination committee. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The School of Pharmacy offers programs of study leading to the Doctor of 
Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree in the pharmaceutical sciences. Specialty areas of 
study include medicinal chemistry, pharmaceutics/biopharmaceutics/phar- 
macokinetics, and behavioral and administrative pharmacy. 

Requirements for Ph.D. Degree 

The student's first semester is usually occupied with course work while 
he or she is under the guidance of an assigned interim committee. During this 
time, each student will confer with several faculty members concerning the 
research project, and a major professor should be chosen by the end of the first 
semester of graduate study. The student's research committee should be 
chosen by the end of the first year of study (18-20 hours of graduate course 
work). The interest to pursue the M.S. en route to the Ph.D. degree should also 
be stated at this time. It is necessary for all students to complete all 
requirements for the M.S. degree in order to qualify for admission into the 
Ph.D. program, although the student, with committee advice, may elect to 
complete the requirements for this degree in progress toward the Ph.D. 
Students bypassing the M.S. must meet all requirements for the M.S., except 
for preparing and defending a thesis. 

A formal plan of study and research plan must be submitted by the 
student, the major professor, and the research committee. 

Progress will continue with guidance from the research committee and by 
the end of the second year the student should have completed the language/ 
research tool requirements. 

To be admitted for candidacy for the Ph.D. degree the student must 
satisfy the above requirements and pass oral and written qualifying exam- 
inations. 

After admission to candidacy a substantial part of the program is devoted 
to an original research project which culminates in a dissertation. To be 
recommended for the Ph.D., the dissertation must be satisfactorily completed 
and defended at an oral examination. 

Pharmaceutical Chemistry (Ph. Ch.) 

375. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Spectroscopic methods of 
analysis with emphasis on their applications in pharmaceutical problems and in 
biological sciences. 

376. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Continuation of Ph. Ch. 375, with 
emphasis on electro-analytical methods and preparation of samples from pharma- 
ceutical dosage forms and from biological materials. 

PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 249 



377. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Physical-chemical principles 
involved in methods development. A special problem is assigned as an integral 
part of the course. 

Pharmacognosy (Pcog.) 

340. Organic Plant Constituents. I or II. 3 hr. Occurrence, properties, biogenesis, etc. of 
a number of classes of organic compounds derived from plants. Emphasis on 
secondary metabolites which contain products of pharmaceutical or medicinal 
interest. 

341. Isolation of Plant Constituents. I or II. 3-5 hr. Acquaints the student with 
techniques used in extraction, separation, and isolation of plant constituents. 

Pharmacy (Phar.) 

300. Industrial Pharmacy. I. 4 hr. Major aspects and principles of dosage form 
development and manufacture. Structure of industry and government influences. 
Laboratory experiences in manufacturing and development techniques. 

301. Advanced Biopharmaceutics. I or II. 3 hr. Concepts of biopharmaceutics and 
pharmacokinetics in relation to the design and evaluation of dosage forms and 
determination of rational dosage regimens in health and disease. 

314. Cosmetic Formulation. II. 3 hr. PR: Phar. 203. Introduction to principles and basic 
considerations of cosmetic formulations, including review of anatomy/physiology 
of skin. Laboratory exposes students to practical aspects of processing the more 
popular cosmetic products. 

315. Physical Pharmacy. I or II. 3 hr. Designed to illustrate the special application of 
physicochemical properties of materials to pharmaceutical and physiological 
systems. Especially useful in delineating formulation considerations impinging 
upon the stability of complex systems. 

370. The Synthesis of Drugs. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 332 and consent. A survey of the 
approaches employed in the synthesis of a variety of examples of pharmacologically 
useful agents. Emphasis is placed on retrosynthetic analysis of target molecules 
and the application of synthetic procedures to multi-step synthesis. 

390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. 

391. Seminar in Pharmaceutical Sciences. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. A multidisciplinary 
weekly presentation and discussion of special topics and research in the pharma- 
ceutical sciences. [Weekly attendance is required and grading is on an S/U basis 
only.) 

396. Special Problems in Pharmaceutical Sciences. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Where special interest 
is shown by the student in an area other than of the student's thesis research, a 
faculty member will supervise individual study and research. 

484. Special Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. For use by disciplines in the pharmaceutical 
sciences wishing to have graduate students and faculty participate in seminars 
and group discussion on specialized or technical topics at the advanced level. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Supervised 
practices in college teaching of pharmacy. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

250 PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 



496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Formal presentation by graduate 
students to assembled graduate faculty and students of research or special topics 
approved by adviser. Title to be presented at start of semester. Required at least 
once annually. {Grading is S/U.) 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

Pharmacy Administration (Phar. Ad.) 

320. Drug Regulation and Control. I or II. 3 hr. Legislation affecting the development, 
introduction, control, and utilization of drugs in the American economy. 

321. Drug Distribution Systems. I or II. 3 hr. Detailed study and analysis of drug 
distribution in institutional environments. 

323. Economics of the Pharmaceutical Industry. I or II. 3 hr. History, background, and 
formation of major drug industries, Oligopolistic practices, mergers, combines, 
costs of research, and production. 

Pharmaceutics (Pceut.) 

302. Advanced Pharmaceutics. I or II. 3 hr. Physiochemical and biopharmaceutical 
principles involved in disperse systems (liquid, semi-solid, and solid) which 
function as dosage forms. Considerations of properties of solid dispersions, 
micromeritics, diffusion of liquid dispersions, interfacial phenomena, emulsifi- 
cation, suspensions, prolonged action medication, etc. 

PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 

William W. Fleming, Chairperson of the Department 

3151 Basic Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Azzaro, Colasanti, Craig, Davis, Fedan, Fleming, Maw- 

hinney, Reasor, Robinson, Smith, Stitzel, Strobl, Taylor, Van Dyke, Weber, Wierda, 

and Worley. 

Pharmacology and toxicology involve all aspects of the action of drugs on 
living systems and their constituent parts. These range from the chemical 
reactions taking place within cells to the evaluation of a drug in the treatment 
of human disease. The Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology offers 
graduate studies leading to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of 
Philosophy, with research concentrations in such areas as autonomic phar- 
macology, biochemical pharmacology, neuropharmacology, molecular phar- 
macology, cardiovascular pharmacology, endocrine pharmacology, pharma- 
cogenetics, malarial chemotherapy, immunotoxicology, and renal, hepatic, 
and pulmonary toxicology. 

Admission Requirements 

Regular applicants for the graduate program in pharmacology and 
toxicology should present, as a minimum, the following undergraduate 
courses: one semester of biology; two semesters of physics; one semester of 
calculus; five semesters of chemistry including two semesters of organic 
chemistry and one semester of physical chemistry. Reading knowledge of at 
least one foreign language is strongly recommended. Three letters of recom- 
mendation from science professors, an official transcript, and the results of 
the Graduate Record Examination— including the advanced test in either 

PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 251 



chemistry or biology — are also required. The prospective student should have 
a minimum 3.0 overall grade-point average at the undergraduate level. 

In general, students requesting financial support should have all creden- 
tials forwarded by February 1. For additional information write to the 
Director of Graduate Studies, Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology, 
WVU Health Sciences Center, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Master of Science 

Ordinarily the department does not accept graduate students solely into a 
master's program. However, the master's degree is offered and is available as 
an intermediate degree en route to the Ph.D. Its primary function, as viewed 
by the faculty, is as an aid to the student new to research for the formulation, 
conduct, and writing of an abbreviated, but complete, independent research 
project. The course work requirements for the M.S. in pharmacology and 
toxicology usually consist of Physiology 344 and 345, Biochemistry 231, 
Statistics 311, Pharmacology and Toxicology 361, 363, 364, 367, 461, 462, and 
497. Most students, with the faculty's concurrence, choose to proceed directly 
with their doctoral research without a master's degree. These students must 
submit a comprehensive progress report on their research in lieu of a thesis. 

Doctor of Philosophy 

Before official admission to candidacy for the doctorate, the student must 
satisfactorily complete a grant-writing exercise, an acceptable progress 
report, and an oral comprehensive qualifying examination. 

A doctoral examining committee will be formed at the time of submission 
of the grant proposal (at the beginning of the third year in the program). The 
committee will generally consist of at least three members from within the 
Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology and two from outside the 
department. Before any doctoral committee is appointed, its membership 
must be approved by the department faculty. The committee will then meet 
with the student to approve the grant-writing exercise and to discuss the 
details of the proposed dissertation research. Regardless of whether the 
student takes an M.S. or elects to do a progress report, he/she and the 
committee must agree on the final plan for the dissertation research. The 
committee is to be informed if major changes in the plan are contemplated and 
will meet periodically with the student to discuss his/her progress. Three or 
four months before the completion of the research project, the committee will 
again meet with the student to decide specific details of the dissertation 
preparation. 

The oral preliminary examination will be held in early January of the 
student's third year in the program. The scheduling of the preliminary 
examination is contingent upon successful completion of all work to that date, 
including a satisfactory grant application. The student's doctoral committee 
will constitute the oral examining body. 

If the student successfully passes the oral examination, a progress report 
should be submitted to his/her dissertation committee on or about March 1 of 
the third year. 

If a student is not successful in the oral preliminary examination, the 
committee may recommend a second attempt to take place not less than one 
nor more than three months later. Alternatively, the committee may recom- 
mend to the entire faculty that the student should write a master's thesis. 



252 PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 



A progress report is expected to be written by each student in the 
program, except those students who are receiving an M.S. degree. M.S. 
students will write a master's thesis. The progress report should be written in 
the style of a dissertation and should be presented in an acceptable form to the 
dissertation committee on or about March 1 of the student's third year in the 
program. The student will defend the progress report before the dissertation 
committee. 

Dissertation 

Upon admission to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, the 
candidate must select a topic for the dissertation under the direction of the 
candidate's adviser, complete a dissertation which makes a contribution to 
knowledge in the candidate's area of concentration, and pass an oral 
examination based primarily upon the dissertation. After successful comple- 
tion of the oral examination and submission of the final copy of the 
dissertation, the candidate will be recommended for the degree. 

Research and Instruction 

Autonomic pharmacology: autonomic regulation of the cardiovascular 
system and of smooth muscle; sensitivity to autonomic drugs; electrophysio- 
logic studies of cardiac and smooth muscle; synthesis, storage release, and 
metabolism of transmitters and adrenal medullary hormones. 

Chemotherapy: antimalarial agents, anticancer agents, effects of pharma- 
cological agents on single-cell organisms. 

Biochemical pharmacology: drug metabolism, effects of drugs on lipid 
and nucleic acid metabolism. 

Endocrine pharmacology: mechanism of action of steroids, metabolism of 
sex accessory tissues, relationship of hormones to tumor growth and 
development. 

Neuropharmacology: biochemical basis of epilepsy, mechanism of action 
of anticonvulsant drugs, neuromediators in the central nervous system. 

Toxicology: metabolism of toxic agents, pulmonary toxicology, renal 
toxicology, immunotoxicology, environmental toxicology, and perinatal 
pharmacology and toxicology. 

Electron microscopy: effects of drugs on the ultrastructure of cells. 

Pharmacology and Toxicology (Pcol.) 

243. Pharmacology for Pharmacy Students. I. 4 hr. PR: Completion of first year in 
Pharmacy; approval of course director. Principles, pharmacodynamic actions, and 
therapeutic applications of clinically useful drugs. 

360. Pharmacology and Therapeutics. (For dental and graduate students.) I. 4 hr. PR: 
Dental student standing or consent. Lecture and demonstrations on pharmacolog- 
ical actions and therapeutic uses of drugs. 

361. Pharmacology. (For medical students and a limited number of regular, full-time 
graduate students in basic medical science departments.) II. 6 hr. PR: Consent of 
department chairperson. Lecture-conference-laboratory on principles, pharmaco- 
dynamic actions, and therapeutic applications of clinically useful drugs. 

362. OccupationaJ Toxicology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. General principles of toxicology 
with special emphasis on occupational health. Classes of chemicals which pose 
problems in the workplace will be emphasized. 



PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 253 



363. Toxicology. I. 3-4 hr. (Variable credit; majors enroll for 4 hr., non-majors for 3 hr.) 
PR: Consent. Theoretical concepts and general principles of toxicology with 
special emphasis on molecular mechanisms of toxicity. 3-4 hr. lee. (Offered 
alternate even years.) 

364. Advanced Pharmacology. I. (Alternate Years.) 1-5 hr. PR: Pcol. 361 or consent. 
Advanced lectures and discussion of general principles of pharmacology and 
toxicology and advanced lectures in biochemical, endocrine, pulmonary, and 
cardiovascular pharmacology. 1-5 hr. lee. (Offered every second year.) 

367. Advanced Neuropharmacology. I. 1-5 hr. PR: Pcol. 361 or consent. Advanced 
lectures and discussion on drug receptor theory, neurophysiological aspects of 
pharmacology, supersensitivity, and the actions of drugs on the central and 
peripheral nervous system. 1-5 hr. lee. (Offered every second year.) 

461. Seminar in Pharmacology. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. PR: Pcol. 361 or graduate status in 
basic medical sciences. 

462. Literature Survey. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. PR: Graduate status in pharmacology and 
toxicology. Current literature pertinent to pharmacology and toxicology including 
journals of allied biological sciences. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Pcol. 361 and consent. (For advanced 
graduate students.) Critical evaluation of preparation and delivery of lectures in 
specified areas of pharmacology and toxicology. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent of chairperson. 
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. per sem. 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

J. William Douglas, Dean, School of Physical Education 

258 Coliseum 

Carl P. Bahneman, Chairperson, Department of Professional Physical Education 

256 Coliseum 

William L. Alsop, Chairperson, Department of Sport and Exercise Studies 

265 Coliseum 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ed.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bahneman, Brooks, J. W. Douglas, Hawkins, Ostrow, 

Ullrich, Wiegand, and Yeater. Associate Members Alsop, Boyd, Carson, K. K. 

Douglas, Fehl, Kurucz, McPherson, Maxwell, Ott, Wiedebusch, and Ziatz. 

Graduate students in the School of Physical Education pursue courses 
and scholarly tasks which may lead to the Master of Science in Physical 
Education or the Doctor of Education, with concentrations in professional 
physical education or sport and exercise studies. Admission deadlines vary 
across program areas. Students who seek a graduate assistantship should 
apply by March 1. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Professional Physical Education Department Admission Standards 

Students are admitted to the Department of Professional Physical 
Education for work leading to the master of science degree if they hold a 
baccalaureate degree from an approved institution of higher education, have a 
2.75 undergraduate grade-point average, and satisfy prerequisites in the 
courses for which they register. 

Students who do not meet the 2.75 grade-point average requirement are 
admitted as provisional graduate students and are required to attain a 3.0 

254 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



grade-point average in the first 12 hours of prescribed course work in order to 
be reclassified as a regular graduate student. Courses taken in off-campus 
education are accepted for degree purposes if the student has had prior 
approval from the student's adviser. In order to receive the degree, the student 
must have a minimum average of 3.0 in all course work leading toward the 
degree and satisfy all department and University requirements. 

Professional Physical Education Department Programs 

The Department of Professional Physical Education offers the master of 
science degree with the following options. Specific course requirements are 
available upon request. 

A. Motor Deveiopment/Master Teacher Program— (1) Internship Option: 
This option is designed to develop a master teacher for the public school 
population. Mainstreaming and individualized instructional skills are em- 
phasized together with a developmental focus; (2) Research Option: This 
option is very similar to the master teacher option. However, more emphasis 
is placed on the development of research skills, with a thesis being required. 

B. Athletic Training— This option is designed to develop the skills 
necessary to be an athletic trainer. West Virginia State certification in athletic 
training is awarded when this option is completed. For those students who 
cannot attend classes during the regular school year, this option can be 
completed in three consecutive summers. 

Sport and Exercise Studies Department Admission Standards 

Students are admitted to the Department of Sport and Exercise Studies 
for work leading to the master of science degree if they hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an approved institution of higher education and satisfy other 
admission criteria designated by the program specialization area (available 
upon request). Admission to the sport and exercise studies program areas is 
highly competitive and limited to 15 students per program emphasis; 
applications should be submitted by April 15. In order to receive the degree, 
the student must have a minimum 3.0 average in all course work leading 
toward the degree and satisfy all department and University requirements. 

Sport and Exercise Studies Department Programs 

The Department of Sport and Exercise Studies offers the master of 
science degree with the following areas of specialization. Specific course 
requirements are available upon request. 

A. Sport Studies— (1) Sport Behavior: This specialization concentrates 
on the psycho/social dimensions of sport. A thesis is required. (2) Sport 
Management: The emphasis is on management and administration of sport 
related agencies and enterprises. 

B. Exercise Studies — (1) Fitness Assessment, Evaluation and Prescrip- 
tion: The emphasis concentrates on assessment and evaluation of fitness 
parameters of all age groups involved in physical activity. Thesis or 
Internship option. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

Professional Physical Education and Sport and Exercise Studies Departments 

Options leading to the Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) degree in the 
Department of Professional Physical Education include motor development 
(with emphasis in pedagogy and special populations) and administration of 
physical education. Options leading to the Doctor of Education degree in the 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 255 



Department of Sport and Exercise Studies include sport behavior and sport 
physiology. 

Admission to the Program 

Regular Graduate Student Status— The following are minimum admission 
criteria for students to be admitted with regular status to the options in motor 
development, administration of physical education, and sport behavior. 
Students interested in sport physiology should consult the latest department 
guidelines: 

•Undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0 from an approved institution; 

•Master's degree grade-point average of 3.5 from an approved institution; 

•Graduate Record Examination score of 1050 (verbal/quantitative) or 
Miller Analogies Test score of 55; 

•TOEFL score of 550 (international applicants); and 

•Three letters of reference. 

All materials and procedures must be completed by March 1 of the year in 
which the applicant intends to begin a doctoral program. Upon completion of 
the above procedures, the student's credentials are reviewed by an appropriate 
screening committee. Acceptance as an advanced graduate student with 
regular status is contingent upon the screening committee's decision regarding 
the applicant's potential for scholarly productivity as judged by Graduate 
Record Examination and/or Miller Analogies Test scores, past performance in 
course work, letters of recommendation, a personal interview, and adviser/pro- 
gram availability. 

Provisional Graduate Student Status— Applicants who have incomplete 
credentials, deficiencies to make up, or a less than minimum required test 
score or grade-point average but who show scholarly promise may be 
admitted as advanced graduate students with provisional status. During the 
semester in which the advanced graduate student with provisional status 
completes the twelfth hour of prescribed course work, the student shall 
request, through the office of the chairperson of the appropriate doctoral 
program, admission to the program with regular graduate status. Advanced 
graduate students with provisional status cannot register for course work 
beyond the twelfth hour without having been admitted to the program as a 
student with regular graduate status. 

Program Requirements— Once the student is admitted to the program, the 
student — in concert with the adviser — selects a doctoral committee. It is this 
committee's responsibility to aid the student in planning the total program. 
During the process of completing a program, the student is expected to fulfill a 
residency requirement specified by the committee. 

Admission to Candidacy Requirements— As the student nears the ter- 
mination of the course work, application may be made to complete the final 
comprehensive examination. This examination shall consist of scholarly 
tasks designed to function as a comprehensive learning experience. The 
examination will be constructed by the student's doctoral committee. Students 
who do not successfully complete this examination may be permitted to 
attempt the examination one more time pending an appeal and subsequent 
sanction of the student's doctoral committee. There must be a time period of at 
least six months between the first and second examination periods. 

Upon successful completion of the final comprehensive examination, the 
student may present to the doctoral committee a prospectus of the dissertation. 
If the opinion of the committee is such that the student may proceed with the 
dissertation, the student is admitted to candidacy. 

256 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 






Final Requirements— Upon the completion of the dissertation, the candi- 
date will appear before the doctoral committee for purposes of orally 
defending the study. Successful defense of the dissertation results in the 
awarding of the degree. All requirements must be completed within five years 
after the comprehensive examination is completed successfully. 

Professional Physical Education (P.p.e.) 

219. Gross Anatomy. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to provide an overview of body 
systems and gross anatomy of the trunk and extremities. 

220. Advanced Athletic Training 1. S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 121, S.E.S. 164, 165, Saf. S. 70 or 
consent. Designed to provide an in-depth analysis of life-threatening situations in 
athletics, athletic conditioning, and general rehabilitation concepts. 

221. Advanced Athletic Training 2. 1, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 121, 219, S.E.S. 164, 165, Saf. S. 
70 or consent. Designed to investigate tissue repair, physiology of hot and cold 
treatment, therapeutic modalities and pharmacology relevant to athletic injury 
management. 

222. Advanced Athletic Training 3. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 219, 220, 221 or consent. 
Designed to provide in-depth analysis of athletic injury mechanisms, injury 
evaluation techniques and rehabilitation; and muscle isolation techniques. 

223. Athletic Training Practicum 1. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of 
athletic training techniques related to general rehabilitation concepts. 

224. Athletic Training Practicum 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of athletic 
training techniques. 

300. Workshop in Physical Education. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

305. Professional Issues in Physical Education. S. 3 hr. PR: Completion of 24 graduate 
hours or consent. Designed to examine current professional issues in physical 
education and the impact of these issues on the professional's life. 

315. Research Methodology in Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Designed for the application of historical, descriptive, and experimental 
research strategies and designs to physical education. 

323. Athletic Training Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to provide 
experience in various practical situations in athletic training and other related 
areas. 

324. Issues in Athletic Training. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to analyze, in-depth, 
various issues and policies in athletic training relevant to training room adminis- 
tration, protective, equipment, liability in athletics, and other selected topics. 

336. Instructional Methods for Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent. 
Designed to provide physical educators with the methodological skill necessary to 
comply with Public Law 94-142 (Education for All Handicapped Children Act). 
The research justification for the methodological approaches examined will be 
emphasized. (Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1985.] 

338. Operant Principles for Physical Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent. 
Designed for the use and evaluation of operant principles in the development and 
control of motor behavior in physical education. Applications will be made to 
traditional group and individually prescribed instructional systems in physical 
education. [Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1987.) 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 257 



346. Curriculum in Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent. Designed to 
examine the factors affecting curriculum development. Emphasis on research in 
the changing curriculum, and the selection and sequencing of developmentally 
appropriate activities for early, middle, and adolescent childhood. [Offered every 
third Summer; next offering: 1986.) 

366. Motor Development. I, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent. Designed to examine 
developmental motor skill acquisition across the entire life span. Hereditary and 
environmental factors unique to the motor-skill development of the maturing 
individual will be emphasized. [Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1987.) 

368. Infant/Early Childhood Motor Development. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 and 366 or 
consent. Examination of motor development during infancy and early childhood 
focusing on physical education's interactive role with the developmental process. 
Emphasizing current developmental research related to the area. 

370. Middie Childhood/ Adolescent Motor Development. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 and 
P.P.E. 366 or consent. Examination of motor development during middle childhood 
and adolescence focusing on physical education's interactive role with the 
developmental process. Emphasizes current developmental research related to the 
area. 

371. Motor Development in Special Populations. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315, 366 or 
consent. Designed to examine the motor developmental patterns of various special 
population groups focusing on physical education's interactive role with the 
developmental process. Current developmental research related to the area will be 
emphasized. [Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1985.) 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

397. Research/Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

446. Advanced Measurement in Physical Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315. Designed 
to extend and apply the basic concepts of measurements and statistical evaluation 
to physical education. 

460. Management Processes in Physical Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Designed to explore analytically the situational, relational processes 
between the administrator of physical education school programs and the teacher 
of physical education, the physical education facility, and the physical education 
planned learning environment. 

465. Professional Physical Education Resource Seminar. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. 
(Required for all doctoral students.) Designed as an introductory seminar for 
doctoral professional physical educators. Discussion, debate, and position state- 
ments on critical issues facing the physical education profession. 

480. Dissertation/Thesis Seminar. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and S.E.S. 315. 
[Required for all doctoral students.) Designed to critically analyze the graduate 
student's dissertation or research proposal. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 3-15 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 
492-495. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. each. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 



258 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



Dance (Dance) 

201. Rhythms and Dance. I. 3 hr. An exploration of dance technique in its relation to 
composition and principles of choreography; developing an aesthetic and critical 
awareness of these principles as they are displayed in dance works. 

202. Modern Dance Techniques and Composition. II. 3 hr. PR: Dance 35 or 37 or consent. 
Scientific principles of movement; basic principles of music as related to dance 
movement; choreographic principles; practicum in dance movement. Principles for 
teaching dance and problems involved in planning programs. 

203. American Folk Dance. I. 3 hr. PR: Dance 39 or consent. American square, contra, 
circle, and round dance, and their relationships in the arts and aspects of American 
culture. 

204. History and Philosophy of Dance. II. 3 hr. Cultural survey of dance as an 
expression of the society it represents; philosophy of dance; relation of dance to 
other art forms; dance as an educational experience. 

210. Theatre Dance 1. I. 2 hr. PR: Dance 9. Develops a basic practical knowledge of 
choreographed movement in the musical theatre dance idiom. Includes a study of 
fundamentals of ballet for the actor, derivative musical/rhythmic forms, and 
elementary Broadway dance vocabulary and styles. (Also listed as Theat. 210.) 

211. Theatre Dance 2. II. 2 hr. PR: Theat. 210/Dance 210. Comprehensive study of 
representative musical theatre dance styles, relative to period (1900 to present) 
and ethnic derivation. Includes study of isolationary movement and principles of 
classical dance applicable to the Broadway idiom. (Also listed as Theat. 211.) 

212. Theatre Dance Repertory. I. 2 hr. PR: Dance 211/Theat. 211. Develops and expands 
the technical and stylistic fundamentals established in the Dance 210-211/Theat. 
210-211 courses, applying them to reconstruction and staging of a variety of 
classic dance sequences from notable Broadway musicals. (Also listed as Theat. 
212.) 

213. Theatre Dance Performance Workshop. II. 2 hr. PR: Dance 212/Theat. 212. 
Continues study of dance technique, isolationary movement and stylistic vocab- 
ularies established in previous theatre dance courses. Emphasizes development of 
original choreography in representative Broadway dance styles. Includes study of 
elements of performance in musical theatre. (Also listed as Theat. 213.) 

Sport and Exercise Studies (S.E.s.) 

225. Program Planning of Recreational Sport. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An in-depth 
study of recreational sport programs, including philosophy, objectives, program 
development, management concepts, and evaluation. 

315. Research Methodology in Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Application of historical, descriptive, and experimental research strategies 
and designs to physical education. (Also listed as P.P.E. 315.) 

320. Individual Interaction in Sport and Physical Activity. I, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315. 
Designed to acquaint the student with the reciprocal relationships between sport 
and physical activity and the societies and cultures out of which sport emerges. 

340. Psychology of Sport and Physical Activity. I, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315. Psychological 
effects and implications of man's participation in sport and physical activity. 
Emphasis is on the personality and behavioral and motivational dynamics of sport 
involvement. 

345. Group Influences in Sports. I. 3 hr. PR: Research, Statistics, S.E.S. 320, 340. The 
manner and degree to which individuals are affected by involvement in sport and 
group interactions. 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 259 



360. Biomechanical Analysis of Sport and Physical Activity. II, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 164 
and 165 or equiv.; S.E.S. 315. Advanced principles of body mechanics and analysis 
of muscle and joint actions in coordinated movement and neuromuscular physi- 
ology. 

367. Theories of Sport Physiology. I, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315. Thorough and workable 
knowledge of principles involved in the interactions of muscles and nerves, 
reflexes, metabolism, cardiopulmonary function, environmental physiology, and 
the practical application of work physiology. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

397. Research/Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

425. Educational Sport. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311, S.E.S. 465. The group dynamics of the 
sport situation for purposes of gaining insight into techniques and methods of 
modifying social behavior through physical education sport activities. 

446. Advanced Measurement in Physical Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315. 
Extension and application of basic concepts of measurement and statistical 
evaluation to physical education. 

460. Management Processes in Physical Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Analytical exploration of the situational, relational processes between 
the administrator of physical education school programs and the teacher of 
physical education, the physical education facility, and the physical education 
planned learning environment. 

465. Professional Physical Education Resource Seminar. S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate 
standing. Introductory seminar for doctoral professional physical educators. 
Discussion, debate, and position statements on critical issues facing the physical 
education profession. [Required for all doctoral students.] 

480. Dissertation/Thesis Seminar. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Critical analysis 
of the graduate student's dissertation or research proposal. [Required for all 
doctoral students.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

492-495. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. ea. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

PHYSICS 

Martin V. Ferer, Interim Chairperson of the Department 

212 Hodges Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Cooper, Edwards, Ferer, F. Franz, Grier, Koepke, Littleton, 

Parmentola, Pavlovic, Seehra, and Weldon. Associate Members Arya, Levine, Rotter, 

and Treat. 

The physics department offers the Master of Science and the Doctor of 
Philosophy degrees with research specialties in: (1) condensed matter 
(magnetic phenomena in highly correlated rare earth and actinide systems; 
electronic structure and magnetic properties of artifically grown solid state 
surfaces and super/lattices; high Tc superconductors; properties of magnetic 

260 PHYSICS 



ions and clusters; elementary excitations in antiferromagnets; phase transi- 
tions and critical phenomena; metal-insulator transitions and electron locali- 
zation; nonlinear fluid dynamics, chaos, and nonequilibrium pattern forma- 
tion), (2) applied physics (fractals and percolation clusters; formation, 
growth, and interaction of aerosols; biophysics of particle ingestion; atmos- 
pheric physics and the propragation of electromagnetic waves), (3) plasma 
physics (plasma waves and instabilities; nonlinear interactions in steady 
state plasma columns; turbulence in plasmas), (4) astrophysics (stellar 
evolution; detonation waves in supernovae; heavy element production), (5) 
nuclear physics (quantum chromodynamic theory of nucleons; solitons and 
nuclear models; proton-nucleus scattering), (6) elementary particle physics 
(high temperature quantum field theory; quark-gluon plasmas; supersym- 
metry; cosmology). 

The physics department is a member of the Southeastern Universities 
Research Association and Oak Ridge Associated Universities and an academic 
affiliate of the Pittsburgh Supercomputer Center. There are active collabora- 
tions with Brookhaven, Los Alamos, and Argonne National Laboratories and 
the Continuous Electron Beam Accelerator Facility. There is a well-equipped 
professional machine shop and a student shop. Computing facilities are 
excellent: faculty and students use microcomputers, VAX and mainframe 
IBM computers, and supercomputers through national communications 
networks. 

The Ph.D. Degree 

A Ph.D. degree requires 36 hours of course work at the 300 or 400 level. 
The following courses are required: 325, 331, 333, 351, 383, and 387. A 
minimum of six hours at the 400 level is required. The minimum grade for 
credit in graduate courses is C. A grade-point average of 3.0 (B) must be 
maintained. 

Admissions Exam: The first two years of courses prepare the student for 
the admissions exam. The purpose of the exam is to determine whether a 
student has the necessary general background to begin research. It is a 
written exam covering electricity and magnetism, classical mechanics, and 
quantum mechanics at the beginning graduate level. This exam is offered 
twice a year and is normally taken after two years of graduate study. 

Qualifying Exam: After completing the admissions exam the student 
chooses a general area of research and an adviser, and starts work on a 
research project. During this period the advisor and the student select a very 
specific sub-field of current research (usually based on a few published 
papers or a textbook) that the student can master rather quickly. The 
qualifying exam consists of a seminar by the student on this sub-field 
followed by questions from a faculty examining committee. This requirement 
is usually completed before the fourth year of graduate study. Upon 
completion, the student is formally advanced to candidacy for the Ph.D. and 
focuses entirely on research. 

Dissertation: The Ph.D. degree is primarily a research degree and 
consequently the student must demonstrate the ability to do independent 
research under the guidance of an advisor. The results of this research must be 
written up as a formal dissertation and defended orally in front of a faculty 
examining committee. 

Language Requirement: The student must demonstrate proficiency in an 
approved foreign language or in computer programming. 

PHYSICS 261 



The Master's Degree 

The master's degree requires 24 hours of course work at the 300 or 400 
level including the following required courses: 331, 333, 351, and 387. The 
minimum grade for credit is C and a grade-point average of 3.0 (B) must be 
maintained. A thesis is required and is considered a valuable part of the 
master's program because it gives the student experience in working on a 
research problem, writing up the results, and defending the work in an oral 
exam. Although the master's projects are more limited in scope than Ph.D. 
research, they are essential to master's degree training and often lead to a 
journal publication. A master's candidate must take the Ph.D. Admissions 
Exam described previously and demonstrate competence in two of the three 
sections. Our master's program provides valuable training as a terminal 
degree or as preparation for the Ph.D., although it is not required for the Ph.D. 

In addition to the Ph.D. and M.S. programs, the department offers a series 
of courses during the summer designed specifically for teachers. They cover 
physics, physical science, and astronomy. 

Application and Admission 

Applications are due by March 1. All applicants will be considered for 
financial support. Applicants are expected to have a bachelor's degree in 
physics that includes upper-division courses in electricity and magnetism, 
mechanics, quantum mechanics, thermodynamics, and mathematical methods. 
Students lacking some of these courses may be admitted conditionally and 
will be encouraged to remedy the deficiencies by taking appropriate under- 
graduate courses during their first year. 

To apply for admission applicants should send the following: (1) WVU 
admission application (Foreign students may defer paying the $20 application 
fee), (2) official transcript of grades, (3) Graduate Record Exam (GRE) scores 
for analytical, verbal, and quantitative sections, (4) Graduate Record Exam 
(GRE) score for physics (077) or the CUSPEA exam in China, (5) summary of 
physics and math background (This form is included in the application 
package.), (6) Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores if English 
is not the applicant's native language (A minimum score of 550 is required.), 
and (7) three letters of recommendation from faculty describing the applicant's 
potential for completion of an advanced degree. 

Physics (Phys.) 

201. Special Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. per sem. (May be repeated to max. of 24 hours.) Study 
of topics of current interest in physics. 

225. Atomic Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124 or equiv. Relativistic mechanics, atomic 
structure, and spectra. 

231, 232. Theoretical Mechanics. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 11, 12 or equiv.; Cone: 
Math. 18. Scalar, vector, and tensor fields; curvilinear coordinate systems. 
Kinematics and dynamics of particles, systems, of particles and rigid bodies. 
Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulation. Relativistic motion. 

233, 234. Electricity, Magnetism, and Radiation Optics. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 
11, 12 or equiv.; Cone: Math. 18. Electrostatics, magnetostatics, introduction to 
electrodynamics, and applications to optics. 

241. Advanced Physics Laboratory. I, II. 1-2 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 11, 12, 124. 
Experiments in physics designed to implement theory courses, give experience in 
data taking and instrumentation, and learn methods of data evaluation and error 
analysis. 

262 PHYSICS 



248. Physics Seminar. I, II. (No credit.) [Suggested for junior, senior, and graduate 
Physics majors.) These lectures acquaint students with topics of current interest 
in physics. 

251. Introductory Quantum Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124, Math. 18. Fundamental 
principles of quantum mechanics; state functions in position and momentum 
space, operators, Schrodinger's equation, applications to one-dimensional prob- 
lems, approximation methods, the hydrogen atom, angular momentum and spin. 

263. Nuclear Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124; Math. 17. Study of characteristic 
properties of nuclei and their structure as inferred from nuclear decays and 
reactions, leading to a knowledge of nuclear forces and models. 

271. Solid State Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124 or equiv.; Math. 17. Properties of 
crystalline solids; includes crystal structure, binding, lattice vibrations and an 
investigation of thermal, electrical, magnetic, and optical phenomena based on 
energy band theory. 

283. Thermodynamics. II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 11, 12 or equiv.; Math. 17. Introduction to the 
statistical foundations of thermodynamics. Application of the fundamental laws 
of thermodynamics to physical and chemical systems. 

301. Special Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. per sem. (May be repeated to max. of 24 hours.) PR: 
Consent. (Primarily for Graduate students.] Specialized topics of current interest 
in physics. 

313. Introductory Electronics. S. 3 hr. PR: 1 year college physics. (Primarily for 
Education majors; not open to Physics majors.) Principles and applications of 
electrical components and circuits, including solid-state electronics. 

321. Optics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 11, 12 or equiv.; Math. 17. A basic course in physical 
optics covering radiation theory, diffraction, interference, polychromatic waves, 
scattering, polarization, double refraction, and selected topics in quantum optics. 

325. Intermediate Atomic Physics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 351. A review of the theory of 
one-electron atoms. The main emphasis is on the theory of two-electron and 
many-electron atoms: para and ortho helium; central field approximation; 
Thomas-Fermi theory; Hartree-Fock theory; L-S, J-J, and intermediate coupling; 
interaction with electromagnetic fields. 

331. Advanced Classical Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 231, 232, and differential 
equations. Lagrange and Hamilton form of equations of motion, rigid bodies, small 
and nonlinear oscillations. Transformation theory, relativistic dynamics, and 
systems with an infinite number of degrees of freedom. 

333, 334. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 233, 234, 
and differential equations. Electrostatic and magnetostatic boundary value 
problems. Maxwell's equations for time varying fields. Green's functions and 
integral representations; applications to radiation; diffraction, wave guides, 
plasma physics, and relativistic motion of charged particles. 

351, 352. Quantum Mechanics. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 251. Breakdown of 
classical physics, the Schroedinger equation and its interpretation, one dimensional 
problems, operator methods and abstract Hilbert space, identical particles, three 
dimensional problems, the hydrogen atom, angular momentum, spin, vector 
coupling, time independent perturbation theory, variational principle, atomic and 
molecular structure, semiclassical radiation theory, scattering theory. 

354. Outline of Physics. S. 3 hr. PR: One year introductory college physics. (Primarily 
for education majors; not open to physics majors.] Elementary study of atomic and 
molecular structures and spectra, solid state and nuclear physics, relativity and 
elementary particles. 

PHYSICS 263 



355, 356. Workshop for Physics Teachers. S. 3 hr. per sem. PR: One year college 
physics; One year of college mathematics. (Primarily for Education majors; not 
open to Physics majors. j Techniques of apparatus construction and demonstration. 

357. Photography. SI. 3 hr. PR: One year of college physics or equiv. (Primarily for 
education majors; not open to physics majors. j The physics and chemistry of 
photography with practical experience. 

358. Light. SII. 3 hr. PR: One year of college physics or equiv. (Primarily for education 
majors; not open to physics majors.) A demonstration course designed to illustrate 
the basic concepts covering light and optics. 

383. Statistical Mechanics. II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 283, 351. Ensemble theory, applications to 
noninteracting systems, as well as perturbative and approximate treatment of 
interactions. Typical applications include equilibrium constants, polymers, white 
dwarves, metals, superfluids, magnetic transitions. 

387. Mathematics for Physicists and Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Calculus, differential 
equations, Phys. 11, 12 or equiv. Complex variables: series, contour integration 
and conformal mapping; ordinary differential equations; Fourier series, Laplace 
transforms; Fourier transforms, special functions; Bessel functions and Legendre, 
Hermite, and Laguerre polynomials; introduction to partial differential equations; 
Poisson's equation, Wave equation, and diffusion equation. 

388. Mathematics for Physicists and Engineers. II. 3 hr. PR: Calculus, differential 
equations, Phys. 11, 12 or equiv. Vector spaces, tensor calculus, group theory, 
integral equations, calculus of variations, nonlinear systems and other topics as 
time permits. 

401. Advanced Research Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated to max. of 24 hours.] PR: 
Consent. Specialized topics in field of physics related to the research interests of 
the department. Open only to students who have completed most of the basic 
graduate courses. 

410. High Energy Physics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 351, 352. Fundamental particle interactions, 
field theory, s-matrix expansions, space time symmetries, internal symmetries, 
unsolved problems. 

463. Advanced Nuclear Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 225, 251, and 263. Detailed 
presentation of nuclear presentation of nuclear models, nuclear reaction mech- 
anism, nuclear forces and theories of nuclear disintegrations. 

471. Advanced Solid State Physics. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Phys. 271, 325, 351. 
Advanced treatment of solid state theory; electronic, vibrational, transport, 
thermodynamic, and magnetic properties of solids. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

Astronomy (Astro.) 

216. Astronomy for Teachers. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic concepts and methods in 
astronomy and how to teach them using the celestial sphere and geometrical tools. 
Observational work at night. The use of a telescope and camera. 

255. Intermediate Astronomy. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or consent. Measurement of the 
universe; trigonometric parallax, statistical parallax, moving clusters, cluster H-R 
diagrams, masses of various binary systems, Kepler's Laws, and the three-body 
problem. 

267. Basic Astrophysics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124 or equiv. The several equations of 
state, the Boltzmann-Saha equation, the H-R diagram and interpretation of 
spectra, introduction to radiative transfer and stellar structure. 

264 PHYSICS 



PHYSIOLOGY 

George A. Hedge, Chairperson of the Department 

3051 Basic Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Baylis, Brown, Castranova, Connors, Franz, Frazer, 

Gladfelter, Goodman, Hedge, Huffman, Johnson, Lee, Miles, Millecchia, Stauber, and 

Yokota. 

The Ph.D. program is designed to produce physiologists of high quality, 
capable of conducting independent research and being effective teachers. 
Students in the department are exposed to all aspects of physiology and a 
variety of related sciences. Our graduates, as a result of this rigorous training, 
may pursue careers in any area of physiology, and can interact creatively with 
scientists in related fields. The Master's program is designed as an introduction 
to research in physiology for students interested in, but not yet committed to, 
a research career. Students in this program receive training in the funda- 
mentals of physiology and experience in a research laboratory. 

Admission Requirements 

Applicants should have a strong background in biology and/or chemistry. 
In addition to a basic biology course, it is strongly recommended that 
applicants have taken cellular or molecular biology and an introductory 
physiology course; a course on comparative anatomy also provides particularly 
useful background information. Inorganic and organic chemistry are basic 
requirements, while physical chemistry is recommended, but not required. 
Finally, as several areas of physiology require an understanding of the 
fundamentals of calculus and physics, introductory courses on these subjects 
are also essential. 

The department requires the following materials for consideration for the 
M.S. or Ph.D. program: Three letters of recommendation; transcripts of all 
undergraduate and graduate grades; a completed departmental application 
form; and Graduate Record Examination scores (aptitude and one advanced 
test). A bachelor's degree, or equivalent, is required for admission; an M.S. 
degree is not a prerequisite for the Ph.D. program. 

A complete application kit and detailed descriptions of the degree 
programs can be obtained by writing to the Graduate Adviser, Department of 
Physiology, School of Medicine, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 
26506. Although applications may be submitted as late as May of the year of 
matriculation, applications must be received before February 1 to be consid- 
ered for financial aid. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Prerequisites for admission to the master's program are the same as those 
for the doctoral program. The first two semesters are devoted largely to 
course work in physiology (12 hours of Graduate Physiology, 4 hours of 
Neurophysiology, and 4 hours of Physiological Methods). Students are also 
introduced to the research interests of the faculty through the graduate 
colloquium and rotations in each faculty member's laboratory. At the end of 
the second semester, students pick a thesis adviser and begin work in that 
laboratory during the summer. The second year is spent primarily on research 
for and writing of the master's thesis. Students are required to take 2 hours of 
Advanced Physiology and present two research seminars during the year. 

PHYSIOLOGY 265 



Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The first year curriculum familiarizes the student with the basic 
information and principles that form a background for advanced work in 
physiology. Much of this overlaps with the basic science material presented 
to medical students so that all students attend several medical school courses, 
including biochemistry and neurophysiology. Much of the first year is 
devoted to graduate physiology (6 hours/semester). This course is based upon 
lectures in medical physiology, supplemented with conference sessions that 
introduce students to current literature. Finally, students lacking a statistical 
background are expected to take a basic statistics course. 

In addition to this course work, students are introduced to the research 
interests of the physiology faculty through the graduate colloquium and 
rotations in each faculty member's laboratory. The latter are designed to help 
students choose a thesis adviser by exposing them to the experimental 
approaches and techniques used in different laboratories within the depart- 
ment. 

During the first summer, students are expected to begin research projects 
in a departmental research laboratory of their choice. This allows a student to 
explore an area of research interest, and to develop a working relationship 
with a faculty member, without a firm commitment to pursue a thesis project 
in that laboratory. 

During the second year the student combines course work with the 
continuing development of research interests. A graduate adviser is selected 
during this year. Courses include: Advanced Physiology (12 hours), Physio- 
logical Methods (4 hours), Graduate Colloquium (2 hours), Graduate Seminar 
(1 hour), and a Teaching Practicum. 

The second-year curriculum takes the student beyond the medical 
curriculum, emphasizing critical appraisal of the current research literature. 
In addition, the student begins to develop his/her teaching skills. The 
purposes of the graduate colloquium and seminar are two-fold. First, they 
give students an opportunity to become informed of the latest scientific 
advances. Secondly students have an opportunity to develop and practice 
presentation of research seminars. In addition to presentations by faculty and 
students from the Department of Physiology, faculty members from other 
departments at WVU and from other institutions are invited to present 
seminars in the program. 

After successful completion of the second academic year, the student 
takes a two-part qualifying examination. The qualifying examination consists 
of a comprehensive written examination covering all of the major areas of 
physiology, followed by a written and oral research design examination. 
Upon successful completion of the qualifying examination, the student is 
admitted to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. 

During the third and fourth years the student may enroll in elective 
courses. Yearly participation in the teaching practicum provides additional 
experience in delivering lectures to undergraduate and professional students. 
However, the student's major effort is directed toward dissertation research. 
Results of this effort are presented annually in the graduate colloquium. 
During these years the student will attend and present papers at national 
meetings of scientific societies (e.g., American Physiological Society, Bio- 
physical Society, Endocrine Society, Federation of American Societies for 
Experimental Biology, Society for Neurosciences). The Ph.D. degree generally 
can be completed in four years. 

266 PHYSIOLOGY 



Research and Instruction 

Research Areas— Faculty laboratories offer opportunities for research in 
cardiovascular, cell, gastrointestinal, endocrine, muscle, neural, renal, and 
respiratory physiology. 

Physiology (Physi.) 

241. Mechanisms of Body Function. 1. 4 hr. PR: College chemistry, biology, physics, and 
algebra or graduate status and consent. A systematic examination of the 
homeostatic functions of the human body with emphasis on the physicochemical 
mechanisms involved. Pathophysiology and clinical correlations are introduced in 
relation to normal physiology. 

248. Experimental Design. (For advanced undergraduate and selected graduate stu- 
dents.) II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory and practical experience in design of 
experiments and processing of physiological data using small laboratory digital 
computers. 1 lee, 2 lab. 

341. Physiological Methods 1. II. 1-5 hr. PR: Consent. Research techniques and 
strategies for physiology. 

342. Physiological Methods 2. I. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Research techniques and 
strategies for physiology. 

343. Fundamentals of Physiology. (For dental students and a limited number of regular 
full-time graduate students in health sciences basic sciences departments.) I. 5 hr. 
PR: College physics, algebra, chemistry, and consent of department chairperson. 
Analysis of basic facts and concepts relating to cellular processes, organ systems, 
and their control. 3 lee, 1 conf., 1 lab. 

344. Medical Physiology 1. (For medical and a limited number of regular full-time 
graduate students in health sciences basic sciences departments.) I. 5 hr. PR: 
College physics, algebra, chemistry, and consent of department chairperson. 
Analysis of basic facts and concepts relating to cellular processes, organ systems, 
and their control, with clinical correlations. 5 lee, 1 conf. -lab. 

345. Medical Physiology 2. (For medical and a limited number of regular full-time 
graduate students in health sciences basic sciences departments.) II. 5 hr. PR: 
Physi. 344 and consent of department chairperson. Continuation of Physi. 344. 5 
lee, 1 conf.-lab. 

346. Neurophysiology. (Forgraduate students in health sciences basic sciences depart- 
ments and a limited number of regular full-time graduate students.) II. 1-4 hr. PR: 
Math. 3 or 141, Phys. 1 and 2 or consent of department chairperson. Properties of 
excitable tissues (nerve and muscle), synaptic transmission, reflexes and central 
nervous system function, and behavior. 1-3 lee, 1 conf. 

350. Graduate Physiology 1. (For graduate students in health sciences basic sciences 
departments and a limited number of other regular full-time graduate students.) I. 
6 hr. PR: Calculus, college physics, organic chemistry, biology, and consent of 
department chairperson. Analysis of basic facts and concepts relating to cellular 
processes, organic systems, and their control. 

351. Graduate Physiology 2. (For graduate students in the health sciences basic 
sciences departments and a limited number of other regular full-time graduate 
students.) II. 6 hr. PR: Physi. 344 or 350 and consent of department chairperson. 
Continuation of Physi. 350. 

399. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Assigned study designed to develop 
research skills. 

PHYSIOLOGY 267 



444. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. (Graded as S or 

U.J 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of physiology. (Graded as S or U.) 

491. Advanced Physiology. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Lecture-conference in: cellular 
physiology, neurophysiology, circulation, respiration, acid-base and renal physi- 
ology, digestion and energy metabolism, and endocrinology. 3 lee, 3 conf. 

497. Research in Physiology. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. (Graded as S or V.) 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. (Graded as S or U.) 

PLANT PATHOLOGY 

William L. MacDonald, In Charge of the Graduate Program in Plant Pathology 

528 Brooks Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Hindal, Kotcon, MacDonald, Morton, Stelzig, and Young. 

Graduate studies in Plant Pathology leading to the M.S. and Ph.D. 
degrees deal with the biology and control of plant diseases. The teaching and 
research faculty is composed of six full-time members with special interests 
in the areas of forage, ornamental, forest, vegetable and fruit-tree pathology, 
as well as mycology and disease physiology. 

Graduate training is designed to offer qualified students a broad 
background in the agricultural sciences through cooperation with other 
disciplines in the College of Agriculture and Forestry, College of Arts and 
Sciences, and School of Medicine. 

The primary objective of the research and training program is to provide 
students with training for professional careers in plant pathology or other 
biology-related areas. 

A thesis (M.S.) or dissertation (Ph.D.) is required. Course work and 
research problems are designed by the student, the graduate adviser, and the 
advisory committee. Admission requirements are those listed on page 383 for 
the College of Agriculture and Forestry. 

Plant Pathology (P. Pth.) 

201. General Plant Pathology. I. 4 hr. Nature and causes of plant diseases; methods of 
control. 

301. Diseases of Economic Plants. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. per sem.; 2 hr. in Summer. PR: P. Pth. 
201 or 303 or consent. Recognition, cause, and control of diseases of economic 
plants. [Sem. I— Diseases of vegetable crops and of tree and small fruits; Sem. 
II — Diseases of ornamental plants and field and forage crops; S — Diseases of forest 
trees. Students may register for 1-3 hr. in Sem. I and II, 2 hr. in Summer, until 8 
hours of credit are accumulated.] (Offered in 1985-86 and in alternate years.) 

302. Principles of Plant Pathology. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 153, 201, or 303, or consent. 
(Primarily for graduate students and seniors majoring in biology or agricultural 
science.) Nature of disease in plants with practice in laboratory methods. (Offered 
in Spring of even years.) 

303. Mycology. I. 4 hr. Lectures and field and laboratory studies of parasitic and 
saprophytic fungi. 

268 PLANT PATHOLOGY 



309. Nematology. II. 3 hr. (Primarily for graduate students majoring in the agricultural 
sciences or biology.) Nematode taxonomy, bionomics, and control, with particular 
emphasis on plant parasitic forms. [Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

402. Physiology of Plant Diseases. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310 and P. Pth. 302, or consent. 
Study of host-parasite interactions, with emphasis on physiological and bio- 
chemical changes that occur in higher plant tissues in response to pathogenic 
organisms. 

430. Physiology of the Fungi. II. 4 hr. PR: Organic chemistry, mycology, and bacteri- 
ology, or consent. Physiological aspects of growth, reproduction, and parasitism 
of fungi, with emphasis on nutrition, environment, and other biotic factors. 
(Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

440. Taxonomy of the Fungi. S. 3 hr. PR: P. Pth. 303. Collection and identification of 
fungi with emphasis upon those of economic importance. (Offered in Summer of 
even years.) 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

200. Recognition and Diagnosis of Plant Disorders. 1. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204. 
Creates an ability for the student to use systematic inspection to determine cause 
or causes of a plant disorder. 

201. Principles and Methods of Plant Pest Control. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204. 
Concepts of control and how they are implemented by exclusion, eradication, 
protection, and immunization. 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Allan S. Hammock, Chairperson of the Department 
316-A Woodburn Hall 
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Brisbin, DiClerico, Duval, Hedge, Hunter, Kim, Stewart, 
Waterman, and Yeager. Associate Members Bingham, Hammock, and Temple. 

The Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy programs in political 
science are designed to give advanced training to students who desire a career 
in government or the private sector as policy analysts or who wish to enter 
selected teaching or research fields with a specialization in public policy. 

Master of Arts with the Public Policy Option 

The Master of Arts with emphasis in public policy is offered jointly by the 
Department of Political Science and the Department of Economics. It is 
designed to provide students with a broad knowledge of the policy making 
process and the many factors influencing public policies at the international, 
national, state, and local levels of government. A problem-analytic approach, 
drawn from both economics and political science, is used to develop the 
ability to comprehend, assess, and evaluate issues, problems, and policies in 
the public sector. Prospective graduates are expected to be skilled at 
gathering and interpreting data, reporting and writing, analyzing policy 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 269 



options and alternatives, and evaluating the intended and unintended 
consequences of public programs and policies. Most graduates will take jobs 
in government or private firms. 

Eligibility. Ideally, applicants for the master of arts degree should have a 
B. A. in Political Science (with a minimum of 6 hours in economics) or a B. A. or 
B.S. in Economics (with a minimum of 6 hours in political science). However, 
students from other fields and disciplines are also encouraged to apply. In 
addition, the applicant should have an overall grade-point average of 2.75, 
and should submit two letters of recommendation from faculty familiar with 
the student's work. Students must also submit Graduate Record Examination 
(general aptitude) test scores. 

Course Requirements. In order to remain in good standing, students must 
maintain a 3.0 cumulative average and receive a 3.0 average in each semester 
for which they are enrolled. Students who do not maintain a 3.0 cumulative 
average will be placed on probation and will be suspended if they fail to regain 
a 3.0 cumulative average in their next 9 hours of study. Students who do not 
achieve a 3.0 semester average will be placed on probation and will be 
suspended if they fail to achieve a 3.0 semester average in their next semester 
of enrollment. 

Admission to candidacy for the M.A. degree requires that the student 
complete a minimum of 36 hours (exclusive of colloquium) in a specialized 
curriculum offered by the Department of Political Science and the Department 
of Economics. This curriculum includes courses in economics, policy evalua- 
tion, the policy process, and public policy analysis. In addition, students must 
complete work in political science methodology and statistical methods. All 
students must enroll in Pol. S. 499 (Colloquium) each semester in residence. 

The M.A. degree provides an optional research practicum or internship 
during the fourth semester of work. The practicum enables the student to 
conduct actual policy research in a public agency. The practicum will carry an 
additional 6 hours of graduate credit. Students may also choose a 6-hour 
thesis option. 

Final Examinations. Students will be expected to pass final written/oral 
examinations in policy analysis. Students who fail examinations may be 
allowed to re-take them at the next regularly scheduled examination period. It 
is contrary to departmental policy to give a third examination. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Public Policy) (Ph.D.) 

The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program is designed for persons in or 
planning to enter teaching or public sector management and policy analysis. 
The principal change in the discipline of political science in recent years has 
been increasing attention to and involvement with public policies. The 
Department of Political Science believes that a Ph.D. recipient should possess 
a comprehensive knowledge of political science as it relates to the formulation, 
implementation, and evaluation of public policies. This requires a thorough 
understanding of political dynamics and institutions, a knowledge of manage- 
ment tools and data management, and competence in research methodology 
and statistical techniques. Further, familiarity with a policy field and the 
contributions of related disciplines, particularly economics, is a distinct 
advantage to both the teacher-researcher and the policy analyst-manager. 

Resources for Graduate Study. The Department of Political Science has 
17 full-time faculty members. More than half of these faculty members are 
teaching in the policy studies graduate programs. In addition, faculty in the 



270 POLITICAL SCIENCE 



Departments of Public Administration and Economics teach in the M.A. and 
Ph.D. curriculums. 

Graduate students have opportunities to perform research with the 
policy analysis group, with individual faculty members, and on research 
grants. Opportunities exist for field experience in various governmental 
agencies. 

Admission. Admission to the Ph.D. program is open to students with 
either a bachelor's or a master's degree. Students with degrees in political 
science, economics, public administration, sociology, psychology, engineering, 
social work, business, law, medicine, or journalism are encouraged to apply. 
An undergraduate applicant should have a grade-point average of 3.0; a 
graduate applicant 3.5. In addition, all applicants must submit the results of 
the Graduate Record Examination and at least three letters of recommen- 
dations from faculty persons familiar with the applicant's work. Admission 
will be based on an overall assessment of the individual's record. 

The work of all individuals admitted to the doctoral program will be 
formally evaluated at the end of the first two semesters (at least 18 credit 
hours of study) at which time one of the following recommendations is made: 
(1) admission to candidacy for the doctoral degree; (2) admission to the 
master's degree program in public policy studies; or (3) termination. 

Course Requirements. The program of each person admitted to the 
doctoral program is designed in accordance with his or her career objectives 
and previous training. A complete description of the Ph.D. program and 
course requirements may be obtained by writing the Director of Graduate 
Studies, Department of Political Science, West Virginia University, Morgan- 
town, WV 26506. This should be done before application to the program. The 
following constitute the formal minimum requirements of the program: 

• Public Policy Core (24 hours). 

• Policy Research Methods (12 hours). 

• Economics (6 hours). 

• Policy Field (12 hours). 

• Elective Sub-field of Specialization (9-12 hours). 

• A dissertation in accordance with individual career goals (24-27 
hours). 

• Passage of comprehensive written and oral examinations. 

In order to remain in good standing, students must maintain a 3.0 
cumulative average and receive a 3.0 average in each semester for which they 
are enrolled. Students are required to spend at least one year (two semesters) 
in residence enrolled in a full-time graduate program of no less than 9 
semester hours each semester. All graduate students must enroll in Pol. S. 499 
(Colloquium) each semester in residence. 

Financial Assistance 

The department has a number of assistantships and fellowships available 
for students in the public policy specialization. Students interested in 
financial assistance should apply directly to the Department of Political 
Science. Graduate assistants may enroll for no more than 9 credit hours per 
semester (excluding colloquium). 

Political Science (Pol. s.) 

200. Quantitative Political Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Upper-division standing. Course 
stresses the understanding of methods, theories, and substantive interests 
identified with behavioral approach to the study of politics. Descriptive statistics 
and the use of SPSS and SAS are included. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 271 



210. The American Presidency. I, II. 3 hr. Institutional, behavioral, and societal forces 
which have given rise to the modern presidency; factors which enhance and 
constrain the exercise of the presidential power over those constituencies with 
which the president must interact; the nature and consequences of the presidential 
decision-making process; desirability and/or feasibility of reforming the pres- 
idency. 

212. Judicial Politics. II. 3 hr. The role of courts and judges in the American political 
process. Topics include the structure and process of courts, factors involved in 
judicial decision-making, and the appropriate role of courts in matters of public 
policy. 

213. American Constitutional Law. I. 3 hr. The role of the Constitution in the American 
political system. Topics covered include the political concept of constitutionalism; 
the role of the Supreme Court in the political process; division of powers among the 
three branches of government; and the constitutional relation between the 
national government and the states. 

214. Civii Liberties in the U.S. I, II. 3 hr. Issues in constitutional law concerning 
personal liberties against government action. Topics include free speech, press 
and association; religious freedoms; abortion; the right to privacy; due process of 
law; and criminal procedure safeguards. 

218. The Legislative Process. II. 3 hr. Structure and organization of legislative bodies, 
powers of legislature, detailed study of law-making procedures, influences of 
outside forces. 

221. West Virginia Government and Administration. I, II. 3 hr. Organization and 
operation of the state government of West Virginia. 

225. Urban Politics. I. 3 hr. Legal basis, structure, processes, and politics of urban 
governments and cooperative-conflict relations with other governmental units. 

226. Problems of State and Local Government. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 120 or equiv. Change 
processes in state and local systems in the context of federalism. 

231. Criminal Law, Policy and Administration. I, II. 3 hr. Legal and administrative 
approach to policy issues in crime and punishment. Focuses on the criminal law, 
court decisions, and implementation of law and policy in the criminal justice field. 

232. Public Opinion and Propaganda. I, II. 3 hr. The formation, measurement, and 
impact of public opinion in the American and cross-national contexts. 

235. Civil Rights Policy and Politics. II. 3 hr. Analysis of the law, politics, and policy 
related to discrimination in public accommodations, voting, education, housing 
and employment based on race, gender, national origin, handicapped status and 
age. 

236. Energy Policy and Politics. II. 3 hr. An examination of U.S. energy policies and 
politics, with particular emphasis placed on the development and implementation 
of energy policies since 1973. 

238. Politics of Environmental Policy. I. 3 hr. Examines the formulation and evaluation 
of United States environmental policy. 

240. Public Administration and Social Change. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 140. The study of 
government and administrative organization in their relationships to the sources 
of change — social, cultural, economic, technological, and environmental — in Amer- 
ican society. 

242. American Administrative Systems. I. 3 hr. Analysis of the nature and processes of 
American public administration (political, legal, economic, and social conditions), 
including the role of the bureaucracy in a democracy. (Equiv. to Pub. A. 242.) 



272 POLITICAL SCIENCE 



244. Administrative Law and Regulation. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 140 or consent. The law of 
public administration, primarily by case method, covering administrative powers 
and limitations, procedure in administrative adjudication and rule-making, 
discretion, ultra vires as check on administrators, notice and hearing, administra- 
tive penalties, judicial control and administrative liability. 

246. Comparative Public Administration. II. 3 hr. Theory and practice of public 
administration in diverse cultures and national political systems. 

250. Government of japan. II. 3 hr. Survey of political institutions and governmental 
process of Japan with special emphasis on the analysis of political problems in the 
post-war period. 

251. Government of Soviet Union and Eastern Europe. II. 3 hr. Survey of the political 
nondemocratic governments of the Soviet Union and its Eastern European 
satellites, with special reference to the guiding role and development of Marx- 
ism-Leninism. 

252. Western Democratic Governments. I. 3 hr. Examination of the government and 
politics of selected western democracies. Included are Canada, Great Britain, 
France, and West Germany. 

254. Government of China. I. 3 hr. Survey of political institutions and governmental 
process of Communist China with a special emphasis on the analysis of political 
problems since 1949. 

255. Governments of Latin America. I. 3 hr. Comparative study of the major nations of 
Latin America. 

256. Governments of the Middle East. II. 3 hr. Governments and political forces of the 
Middle East. 

258. Politics of Africa. II. 3 hr. Historical legacies and current political processes of 
tropical African countries. 

261. International Organization. II. 3 hr. Agencies created since the close of World War 
II. Some reference to development of international law and United Nations. 

262. Nuclear War. 1,11.3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 160 or consent. A study of the current balance of 
terror and the potential threat of a nuclear war. This course addresses the 
sociopolitical and technological dimensions of this issue from 1945 to present. 

263. Public International Law. I. 3 hr. Law governing relations among nations, 
including development of rules, means of enforcement, and conflicts between 
theory and practice. 

264. Conduct of American Foreign Relations. I. 3 hr. Concepts about and factors 
influencing the formulation and execution of United States foreign relations; 
analysis of past policies and current issue areas in relations with major developed 
and developing nations and international organizations. 

265. Politics, Ethics and War. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 160 or consent. An examination of the 
relationship between politics, ethics and war with special reference to nuclear 
weapons and strategies. Emphasis on the causes of the nuclear dilemma. 

266. Soviet Foreign Policy. II. 3 hr. Concepts about and factors influencing the 
formulation and execution of Soviet foreign relations; analysis of past policies and 
current issue areas in relations with major developed and developing nations and 
international organizations. 

267. Latin America in International Affairs. II. 3 hr. Relations of Latin American states 
among themselves, with the United States, the United Nations, regional organi- 
zations, and nonwestern states. Analysis in depth of the Monroe Doctrine and its 
corollaries and the inter-American system. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 273 



268. International Conflict. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 160 or consent. Conflict in international 
relations, particularly armed conflict between nations. The role of force, impact of 
modern technology and nuclear weaponry, theoretical and research approaches to 
causes of conflict and modes of conflict resolution. 

269. Far Eastern International Relations. II. 3 hr. International relations of Far Eastern 
countries with emphasis on historic roots of recent conflicts, the competitive role 
of the United States and the Soviet Union, confrontation between the communist 
and anticommunist countries in the region, and the regional cooperation and 
security problems in the post-war period. 

272. Recent and Contemporary Political Thought. I. 3 hr. Examination of integral 
liberalism and the forces leading to the decline of liberalism and a critical analysis 
of the facist and communist ideologies with their threat to the traditions of 
western civilization embodied in Christianity and conservatism. 

273. American Political Theory. I, II. 3 hr. Major political ideas and their influence upon 
American society and government from the seventeenth century to present. 

279. Analysis of Political Behavior. II. 3 hr. Examines political behavior in terms of 
recent behavior theories emanating from a variety of disciplines. 

299. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. 

300. Introduction to Policy Research. I. 3 hr. Introduction to the research methods and 
techniques used in policy analysis. Topics include logic of inquiry, research 
designs, measurement, and survey and unobtrusive research (3 hr. seminar.) 

310. Intergovernmental Relations. I. 3 hr. Examination of the politics and policy 
consequences of intergovernmental relations in the United States. Topics include 
the development of intergovernmental relations, regulatory federalism, and 
intergovernmental fiscal relations. (3 hr. seminar.) 

330. Policy Analysis. I. 3 hr. Overview of the field of public policy studies. The issues 
and problems involved in studying policymaking, and assessment of policy 
analysis as a mode of thinking and inquiry. (3 hr. seminar.) 

331. Economic Analysis of Public Policies. 3 hr. Application of economic analysis to 
questions of public policy. Consideration of problems of public goods and 
usefulness of cost benefit analysis to policymaking. (Equiv. to Econ. 343.] 

336. Politics of Agenda Setting. I, II. 3 hr. Examines the confluence of social, economic, 
and political influences on the development of public problems and their 
placement on the policy agenda. (3 hr. seminar.) 

345. Public Administration and Policy Development. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 140 or consent. 
Decision-making and policy development in the administrative process by the 
case method. (3 hr. seminar.) 

351. Politics of Planned Development. I. 3 hr. Political aspects of social, economic, and 
technological change, with special reference to the politics of development 
planning and administration. (3 hr. seminar.) 

355. Comparative Public Policy. I, II. 3 hr. Comparison of public policy outputs in 
several western European countries and Japan with emphasis on the analysis of 
variables that account for variations in distributive, regulative, and extractive 
policies. (3 hr. seminar.) 

360. International Public Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. Provides a bridge between the 
conventional study of international relations and the analysis of externally 
directed public policy. Introduces the graduate student to specific policy areas 
such as international trade, aid, resources, and security policy. (3 hr. seminar.) 

274 POLITICAL SCIENCE 



400. Quantitative Methods for Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 300 and Stat. 311, or 
equivalents. Application of range of statistical techniques in public policy 
research. Includes use of selected computer software commonly used in policy 
analysis. 

401. Advanced Quantitative Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 400 or equivalent. Advanced 
topics in quantitative methods for policy research. Methods surveyed include 
multiple linear regression, time-series analysis, causal modeling and linear 
programming. 

403. Internship. I, II. 6-9 hr. per sem.; students may enroll more than once. PR: Consent. 

429. Seminar in State and Local Government. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 

430. Seminar: American Policy Process. I. 3 hr. A survey of the literature which deals 
with how various institutions and linkage mechanisms in U.S. politics affect the 
public policy process. (3 hr. seminar). 

435. Public Policy Evaluation Research. II. 3 hr. Methods and techniques in evaluating 
public policies. Topics include the relation of policy analysis to policymaking; 
types of evaluation; planning evaluations; alternative evaluation designs; mea- 
suring program consequences; problems of utilization; and the setting of evaluation 
research. (3 hr. seminar.) 

438. Seminar in Public Policy Implementation. II. 3 hr. Research seminar focusing on 
factors influencing the capacity of government to deliver services. Includes an 
examination of how socio-economic conditions, technology, public opinion, 
interest groups, institutional actors, and decision-making variables influence 
policy outcomes. (3 hr. seminar.) 

439. Seminar in Policy Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 335 or consent. This course 
requires students to conduct an original piece of quantitative policy research. 
Designed for advanced students, the course is taken following the completion of 
the department's research methods sequence. (3 hr. seminar.) 

441. Directed Reading and Research in Public Administration. I, II. 2-4 hr. per sem.; 
students may enroll more than once. PR: Pol. S. 140 or consent. 

480. Thesis. I, II. 2-6 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

499. Colloquium. I, II. 1-6 hr. 

PSYCHOLOGY 

William J. Fremouw, Chairperson of the Department 

101-A Oglebay Hall 

Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Alavosius, Bradlyn, Caldwell, Chase, Cohen, Cone, 
Cummings, Edelstein, Foster, Franzen, Fremouw, Goetsch, Goodman, Greene, Hansen, 
Harris, Hawkins, Karraker, Larkin, Lattal, Odom, Parker, Perone, Puckett, Reese, 
and Seime. Associate Members Carruth, Comer, and Linton. 

Admission. Students are admitted only at the beginning of the fall 
semester. Application must be completed by the preceding February 1. 
Acceptance is based on: (1) adequate academic aptitude at the graduate level 
as measured by the Graduate Record Examination; (2) a minimum grade- 
point average of 3.0; (3) personal qualities in the applicant which are 
predictive of success in graduate study and satisfactory professional place- 
ment after graduation; and (4) adequate preparation in the biological and 

PSYCHOLOGY 275 



social sciences, experimental psychology, and statistics. By permission, 
deficiencies in preparation may be made up after admission to the department. 
Students are expected to maintain a 3.0 average in their psychology courses 
during the first graduate year and to present a final 3.0 average in all 
psychology courses attempted. 

Special Graduate Students. Graduate courses in psychology are open 
only to regular graduate students except by special departmental permission. 

Master of Arts. Two years of full-time study with a minimum of 48 hours 
of credit are required for the M.A. degree. Six hours of credit may be counted 
for the M.A. thesis if such thesis is required by the option chosen by the 
student. The following options are available for the M.A. degree: 

1. Intermediate Degree for Ph.D. Candidates. Students who are candidates 
for the Ph.D. are expected to complete an M.A. thesis and will receive the M.A. 
degree upon completing the thesis and credit-hour requirements. 

2. Professional M.A. Degree in Clinical Psychology. This program 
prepares the student for work in mental hospitals, mental health clinics, 
school mental health programs, and the like. No thesis is required. 

Doctor of Philosophy. The doctoral programs aim to prepare a small 
number of well-qualified psychologists for three types of careers: (1) teaching 
and research in behavior analysis; (2) teaching and research in lifespan 
developmental psychology; and (3) teaching, research, and practice in clinical 
psychology. A calendar year in an approved internship setting is required of 
all clinical students. 

Students are accepted for study toward the Ph.D. degree upon entry into 
the department. They are formally admitted to doctoral study only after 
completion of the master's degree or its equivalent and may be subject to a 
screening examination to determine their readiness for doctoral work. Prior to 
admission to doctoral candidacy, the student will be admitted to a compre- 
hensive preliminary examination in which competence must be demonstrated 
in the major area of specialization and a knowledge of such other areas of 
psychology as may be required of all graduate psychology students. 

Upon passing the preliminary examination, the student is formally 
promoted to candidacy for the doctorate. For those students required to 
complete an internship as a part of their training, the internship setting must 
be approved by the appropriate program committee. In the clinical psychology 
programs, the internship must be approved by the program and by the 
Director of Clinical Training. 

After completion of a satisfactory dissertation and all other requirements, 
the candidate takes a final examination, written or oral, concerning the major 
emphasis and the dissertation. 

Psychology (Psych.) 

213. Directed Studies. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. [No more than 12 hours may be 
applied to the 42 hours of psychology to which majors are limited.] Individually 
supervised reading, research and/or classroom management projects. 

218. History and Systems of Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: 15 hr. of psychology or consent. A 
survey of psychology from its origins in philosophy, biology, and physics through 
the several major schools of psychological thought to modern perspectives of 
behavior. 

223. Cognition and Memory. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology. Theoretical and empirical 
issues in human learning and memory with emphasis on mechanisms of memory, 
language, verbal behavior, and conceptual processes. 

276 PSYCHOLOGY 



224. Conditioning and Learning. 1,11. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 171. Survey of research in operant 
conditioning and its implications for behavior theory and applications. 

225. Perception. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 131, 141. A survey of the structure and function of 
human sensory systems (primarily visual and auditory) and perceptual issues and 
theories. 

232. Physiological Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 131. Introduction to the physiological 
mechanisms of behavior. 

242. Prenatal and Infant Behavior. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 131. Early influences upon 
behavior and development are investigated; topics include behavioral genetics, 
hazards of prenatal development, sensorimotor development, language development, 
and socioemotional development. 

243. Child and Adolescent Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 141. Theory and research on 
major psychological processes in childhood and adolescence are explored including 
maturation, personality, socialization, sensory, and cognitive development. 

245. Adulthood and Aging. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 141. Cognitive and personality changes 
from maturity to old age. Psychological reactions to physiological change and to 
the establishment and dissolution of family units. Problems of intergenerational 
differences in adult behavior. 

251. Social Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 151. Social factors which determine human 
behavior. Survey of the results of laboratory research in social psychology and its 
implications for social phenomena. 

262. Psychological Assessment. II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology. Theory and practice in 
development and use of psychological assessment procedures. Includes intelligence 
testing, behavioral assessment, and interviewing. 

263. Comparative Personality Theory. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology or graduate 
standing. Theoretical and empirical readings in a survey of major perspectives in 
personality theory, including dynamic, cognitive, humanistic, and behavioral 
theories of personality. 

264. Psychology of Adjustment. II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology or graduate standing. 
Dynamic principles of human personality adjustment. 

274. Survey of Behavior Modification. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 171. Behavior therapy and 
modification including desensitization, covert sensitization, interpersonal skill 
training, aversion techniques, and applied behavior analysis employing operant 
principles. 

279. Community Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 151. Psychological principles applied 
to treatment and intervention strategies at the community level. Manpower 
development, organizational change, and systems analysis. 

281. Abnormal Psychology. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology or graduate standing. 
Major categories of behavioral disorders, e.g., neuroses, psychoses, and character 
disorders are considered in terms of etiology, treatment, outcome, and prevention. 

282. Exceptional Children. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 141. Study of children who present 
psychological problems: (1) mental retardation, learning disabilities, "giftedness"; 
(2) organic disabilities having behavioral consequences, such as cerebral palsy or 
deafness; and (3) behavior disorders. 

297. Honors Investigation and Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit; max. credit 
6 hr.) PR: Admission to Honors Program in Psychology. Supervised readings and 
investigation culminating in the honors thesis. 

301. Personnel Psychology. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101, or equiv. Application of 
psychological principles and techniques of the problems of measurement and 
prediction of proficiency in industry and society. 

PSYCHOLOGY 277 



304. Leadership and Human Relations in Work Groups. I or II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Individual work related to either research or practice in the field of human 
relations training programs. 

307. Practicum in Industrial Interviewing. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 201 or consent. 
Intensive review of principles of selection and validation. Practice interviews 
applying nondirective techniques in employment and other types of interview. 

311. Research Design and Data Analysis 1. 1. 3 hr. Principles of experimental design in 
psychology including group and single subject methodologies. Topics include: (1) 
internal and external validity: (2) simple and complex analysis of variance; and (3) 
reversal and multiple baseline designs. 

312. Research Design and Data Analysis 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 311 or consent. 
Inferential statistics, simple correlation and regression, multiple correlation and 
regression, partial correlation, analysis of covariance, analysis of variance of 
designs with unequal cell sizes. 

313. Directed Study. I. II. S. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Directed reading and research 
in special areas. [Undergraduates register for such projects under Psych. 213.) 

315. Multivariate Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 311. or equiv., and consent. 
Correlational methods in psychology with application to typical research problems. 
Includes simple matrix algebra, multiple correlation, discriminant analysis, and 
an introduction to factor analysis. (Equiv. to Stat. 341.) 

316. Correlational and Quasi-Experimental Designs. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 
Psych. 311 and 312 or equiv. Consideration of the methods, measurement, and 
analysis of nonexperimental research. Includes survey, correlational, and quasi- 
experimental designs; questionnaire and attitude scale construction; nonreactive 
measurement techniques; and data analysis. 

318. Ethical and Legal Issues. II. 2 hr. The ethical standards for psychologists are 
applied to research and clinical problems. The legal regulations and contemporary 
issues in mental health are studied. 

319. Current Issues in Behavior Analysis. 1. 1 hr. PR: Graduate standing in psychology. 
Survey of professional and research issues in general psychology as they relate to 
a behavior analysis approach to psychological problems. 

320. Experimental Analysis of Behavior. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing in psychology 
or consent. Research and theory in the psychology of learning. Assessment of 
traditional and behavior analytic approaches to the study of positive reinforcement, 
aversive control, and stimulus control. Laboratory work with animals. 

321. Human Behavior. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 320. Review of the role of basic human operant 
research in testing the generality of animal-based behavior principles, analyzing 
phenomena that are specific to humans, extending behavior analysis to traditional 
psychological problems. 

323. Applied Behavioral Research. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 320. An examination of 
conceptual and empirical issues in applied behavior analysis as illustrated by 
recent research. The continuum from laboratory to applied research is emphasized. 

324. Organizational Behavior Management. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 320 and 323 or consent. 
Introduction and comparison of behavioral and systems concepts, methods and 
models as they apply to organizations, administration, and human service 
management. 

333. Seminar: Quality of Work Life. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of current trends and 
approaches in "quality of work life improvement," with special attention to 
developments in participative management, job enrichment and gain sharing. 
Results of current research are featured. (Equiv. to ILR 333.) 

278 PSYCHOLOGY 



MO. Advanced Developmental Issues and Methodology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. 
Developmental issues Including historical perspectives, validity, theoretical 

tems, and growth models are presented along with research methods and 

designs employed in life span developmental psychology. 

344. Infant Behavior and Development. I. [Alternate Years.) 'A hr. Examination of 
theories of infancy and evaluation of current research literature in the area-, of 
Cognitive, perceptual, language, and social development. Prenatal and neonatal 
development are emphasized. Related social issues will be dis< 

:i4 r ). Child Behavior and Development. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Examination of the 
psychological literature on developmental changes in such areas as learning, 

Cognition, language, social relations, and personality during early, mid and late 

childhood. Experimental research and theoi y are emphasized and implication! for 

life-span development are discussed. 

MO. Adulthood and Aging. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Comparative theories of life-span 

development; current issues in research on adulthood and aging, including 
personality and socialization, age norms, biological change in adulthood and 

aging. 

352. Community Psychology. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Psychological principles and 
research findings at the community level are applied to various types of 
intervention strategies Manpower utilization, needs assessment, the community 
mental health movement, complex organization theory and behavioral systems 
analysis are included. 

360. Behavior Pathology of Childhood. I. 3 hr. Survey of types of adjustment problems 
of children; incidence and research and theory about etiology. 

364. Child Behavior Modification. II. 3 hr. Assessment, intervention, and evaluation 
strategies appropriate for childhood disorders and based on behavior modification 
principles derived from learning theory. 

375. Fundamentals of Gerontology. II. 3 hr. PR: MDS 50 or consent. An advanced 
multidisciplinary examination of current research in biological, psychological, 
and sociological issues of human aging and the ways in which these impinge on the 
individual to create both problems and new opportunities. (Also listed at Biol 

'MT>.\ 

379. Introduction to Clinical Psychology. I. 2 hr. PR: Graduate student in psychology or 
consent. Basic interviewing skills and current problems in the practice of clinical 
psychology. 

380. Adolescence and Young Adulthood. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Examination of 
psychological, psychiatric, and sociological research and theory as they pertain to 
these phases of the life span Addresses socioemotional and affective development, 
cognition, puberty, peer group and familial relationships, labor force entry, and 
parenthood. 

381. Behavior Pathology. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 281 or equiv. Advanced study of diagnostic 
classification, functional analysis, and experimental research in psychopathology 
of child, adult, and geriatric adjustment problems. 

397. Master's Thesis. I and II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

411. Advanced Topics in Single-Subject Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 
Psych. 311 and 320. Critical evaluation of single-subject designs in basic and 
applied research. Major topics include historical and conceptual bases of single- 
lubjed methodology's historical and conceptual bases, its relationship to group- 
statistical methods, and its role in behavioristic psychology. 

419. Seminar Methodology. I or II. 2 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Current problems in 
statistics and research or instructional methods. 

PSYCHOLOGY 279 



420. Reinforcement and Punishment. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 325, 326. 
Theories of response acquisition, maintenance, and suppression are examined in 
the context of recent experimental work with animal subjects. 

421. Behavior Theory and Philosophy. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 325, 326 or 
equiv. A critical review of theories, concepts, and methods of psychology. 
Cognitive and methodological behavior perspectives are contrasted with the 
radical behavioral perspective. 

423. Practicum Seminar in Behavior Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 323 and Psych. 324 or 
consent. Supervised applied behavior analysis experience integrated with a 
seminar which will emphasize group solutions to problems that individuals 
encounter in students' applied projects. Progress and final project reports will be 
presented and evaluated. (1 hr. seminar; 2 hr. practicum.) 

424. Social Behavior. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A learning approach to social 
psychology that will include both basic and applied problem areas. The area of 
social exchange such as cooperation, competition, and negotiation will be 
emphasized. 

425. History and Systems. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. The history of psychology is traced 
from European philosophy to the emergence of psychology in the United States. 
Emphasis is placed on the development of psychology in the United States leading 
to current theory and research. 

426. Stimulus Control and Memory. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 325 or 
consent. Contemporary review of basic research in stimulus control and memory 
emphasizing behavior theory. 

427. Behavior Analysis Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Psych. 318 or consent. Supervised 
applied behavior analysis experience in an approved setting. 

428. Seminar in Behavior Analysis. II. 3 hr. [May be repeated for credit with consent.) 
PR: Consent. Current research and problem areas in the learning approach to 
behavior analysis. The topic of a given seminar may be either a basic research or an 
applied research problem area. 

436. Seminar in Learning and Cognition. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. (May be repeated 
for credit with consent.) PR: Consent. Topical seminar on developmental aspects 
of learning and cognition. Specific topic examples include the role of imagery in 
learning and memory; theoretical analyses of age changes in discriminative 
learning and transfer; rules and rule-governed behavior. 

437. Practicum in Developmental Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Provides 
experience in a wide range of applied settings. Sites are chosen to accommodate 
exposure to the entire life-span from infancy through old age. Supervising 
reponsibilities are determined by the instructor-in-charge in the agency. 

438. Seminar: Early Development. II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit with consent.) 
PR: Consent. Developmental processes during early childhood are explored with 
emphasis on theoretical models, methodological and research issues, and experi- 
mental design. The specific topic depends on the instructor. 

439. Seminar in Physiological Psychology. I. 2 hr. Current research and problems in 
physiological psychology. 

442. Topical Seminar: Life-Span Development. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit 
with consent.) PR: Consent. Topical seminar exploring a particular period of the 
life span, e.g., adolescence, or perspectives on the life span, e.g., cross-cultural 
perspectives on the life cycle. 

443. Topical Seminar: Personality and Socialization. II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for 
credit with consent.) PR: Consent. Topical seminar on current issues in personality 
and socialization over the life-span or during selected periods of the life span. 

280 PSYCHOLOGY 



451. Clinical Service Management. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 350 or consent. 
(Specifically designed for doctoral students in psychology.) An overview of 
research and intervention strategies in administration and management of 
complex human service organizations from a behavioral psychology perspective. 

453. Systems Intervention and Consultation. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 350 
or consent. (Specifically designed for doctoral students in psychology.] Consulting 
in complex organizations such as industry, community mental health centers, 
mental hospitals, facilities for the retarded, etc. Systems entry and maintenance 
are stressed as well as complex organizational theory and behavioral systems 
analysis. 

456. Program Evaluation in Clinical Services. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. (Specifically 
designed for doctoral students in psychology.) Examines the nature, method, and 
process of evaluative research, especially as it applies to social and behavioral 
treatment and service delivery programs. 

457. Systems Practicum in Clinical Services. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. (Specifically 
designed for doctoral students in psychology.) Supervised experience in the 
application of behavioral systems analysis and intervention in complex organi- 
zational settings. 

464. Family and Marital Therapy. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Clinical experience 
and/or relevant course practical graduate standing; at least one upper-division 
course in behavior therapy or equivalent. Examines both theoretical and practical 
aspects of the assessment and treatment of family and marital difficulties. 

467. Child Clinical Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised field experience 
in various aspects of delivering psychological services directly or indirectly to 
children. Experience in assessment, treatment, program design, administration, 
and evaluation. 

468. Seminar in Child Clinical Psychology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Current issues 
and research related to a particular area of clinical psychology involving children. 

470. Behavioral Assessment 1. I. 3 hr. Conceptual and methodological bases for 
behavioral assessment; comparison of trait-oriented versus behavioral assessment; 
design and evaluation of measurement systems, particularly self-report, ratings 
by others, and direct observation, within the basic framework of generalizability 
theory. 

471. Behavioral Assessment 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 470, consent. Evaluation of clinically 
relevant behavior and environments by means of testing and other methods. 
Includes test selection, administration, and report writing. 

477. Clinical Psychology Practicum. I and II. 1-6 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Supervised 
practice of psychological techniques in clinics or institutional settings. Experience 
in psychological testing, interviewing, report writing, case presentation, interpre- 
tation of tests and supportive counseling. 

479. Seminar: Clinical. I or II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Research and problems in clinical 
psychology. 

480. Clinical Neuropsychology. II. 1-4 hr. Neuroanatomical foundations, neurobe- 
havioral disorders, neuropsychological assessments, and psychopharmacological 
principles and practices relevant to clinical psychology. 

481. Psychophysiology. II. (Alternative Years.) 3 hr. PR: 3 hr. of physiological 
psychology or consent. The current state of theory, methods, and findings 
concerning the association of physiological response systems and psychological 
states and processes, including biofeedback intervention. 



PSYCHOLOGY 281 



482. Adult Behavior Therapy. II. 3 hr. Reviews the roots and development of behavioral 
intervention with adult populations. Applied clinical intervention is stressed in 
concert with evaluation and research application. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Supervised practice in 
college teaching of psychology. 

497. Research. (Dissertation). I and II. 1-15 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. 

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 

David G. Williams, Chairperson of the Department 

302-B Woodburn Hall 

Degree Offered: M.P.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Hart-Nibbrig, Pops, Stephenson, Williams, and Wolf. 

The Department of Public Administration offers a public administration 
curriculum for graduate students seeking the degree of Master of Public 
Administration (M.P.A.) or a specialization in the field of another graduate 
degree program. This program provides a professional orientation to the 
primary facets of public management. 

Master of Public Administration (M.P.A.) 

The Master of Public Administration curriculum serves the needs of 
students from a variety of backgrounds who wish to pursue careers in public 
service. It directs particular attention to developing an understanding of the 
management function in the public context as well as preparation in utilizing 
advanced management techniques. The study program furnishes the student 
with opportunities to attain comprehensive understanding of governmental 
policymaking and policy execution. The processes of administration are 
reviewed in terms of their relationship with, and applicability to, the 
functioning of government at all levels. 

The program is designed to supply an academic foundation for compre- 
hension of the range of processes and management approaches employed in 
public administration. These include program planning, personnel adminis- 
tration, budgetary policy-making and policy execution, systems approaches, 
organizational dynamics, practically oriented research, and leadership. 
Particular stress is placed on those functions and issues that require the 
greatest degree of adaptation, innovation, and responsiveness on the part of 
the professional administrator. 

The curriculum reflects the diversity of skills required by all levels of 
government. The range of needs is broad in scope; students apply from diverse 
backgrounds, including political science, other social sciences, physical 
sciences, humanities, and from positions in public service. 

Curriculum. The M.P.A. degree requires the completion of 47 credit 
hours. This includes: 

1. Public administration courses in core areas such as administrative 
organization and management, public personnel management, legal and 
political foundations, public budget formulation and execution, public finan- 
cial management, quantitative analysis (Pol. S. 200), applied research, and 
operations research (I.E. 359). 

2. Two semesters of colloquium (guest speakers and special presenta- 
tions). 

3. Intern experience. 

4. Selections from a wide range of specialized public administration 
courses and elective courses offered in other fields. 

282 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 



Most students take 26 hours of required courses and colloquium, 9 hours 
internship, and 12 hours from the specialized public administration and 
elective courses. These general requirements can be tailored to individual 
student needs with revisions agreed upon by both the student and adviser. 

It will usually take the equivalent of one calendar year for full-time 
students to complete on-campus requirements. In addition, the off-campus 
internship will generally be one semester in length and may be taken after 
part of the course work is completed. For those individuals who have been in 
full-time public service positions, projects relating directly to that work 
experience can be designed for internship credit. 

Tool Requirement. While tool skills are included in the required courses, 
it is strongly recommended that students take courses in accounting, 
statistics, and computer science as part of their undergraduate program. 
Course work may also be taken at the graduate level in these subjects (200 and 
above) and counted as elective hours. 

Admission Requirements. Candidates must meet the WVU general 
admission requirements for graduation from an accredited college and grade- 
point average. Admission into the M.P.A. program is competitive with 
decisions based on: 

1. Application for admission and transcripts (submitted to the Dean of 
Admissions and Records). 

2. Three letters of evaluation (forms are available from Chairperson of 
the Department of Public Administration), Graduate Record Examination 
scores for the aptitude test, a vita, any other information that would be 
supportive, and interviews, where possible. (These materials should be 
submitted to the Chairperson of the Department of Public Administration.) 

In the case of practicing administrators, a record of accomplishment in 
administrative performance will be weighed heavily in combination with the 
criteria outlined above. 

Students applying for First Semester or Summer admission should have 
all application materials submitted no later than March 15. Notification on 
admission status will take place around April 1. Students applying for the 
Second Semester should have all application materials completed by October 
15; notification is given around November 1. Late applications for admission 
will be considered when all the above requirements are met, assuming that 
openings in the program are available. 

Application forms and information may be obtained by contacting the 
Chairperson of the Department of Public Administration. 

Public Administration (Pub. A.) 

242. American Administrative Systems. S. 3 hr. Analysis of the nature and processes of 
American public administration (political, legal, economic, and social conditions), 
including the role of the bureaucracy in a democracy.) (Equiv. to Pol. S. 242.) 

341. Administrative Organization and Management. I, II, S. 3 hr. Introduction to public 
administrative organization and such management functions as leadership, 
planning, coordination, communication, and decision-making. 

343. Public Personnel Administration. I, II. 3 hr. Merit system concept, career staffing, 
classification and salary administration, selection, evaluation, manpower utili- 
zation, training, the rights and duties of employees, equal employment, and labor 
relations in the public sector. 

345. Public Administration and Policy Development. I. 3 hr. Policy development 
examined in terms of values, process, specific policy cases, alternative "futures" 
analyses and policy science. 

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 283 



348. Legal and Political Foundations. I, II. 3 hr. Explores the constitutional basis of 
public administration, the legal profession and legal reasoning, U.S. political 
processes and structure, and administrative legal process; provides training in 
legal research and advocacy; examines administrative legal responsibility. 

403. Internship. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. (Students may not enroll more than twice for a total of 9 
hr.) PR: Consent; completion of at least one term of graduate study in public 
administration. A working internship in a government or public service related 
agency, designed to provide students with an opportunity to gain field experience, 
and to relate knowledge gained through course work situation. [Graded S or U.) 

404. Public Service Internship Analysis. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Completion of at least one 
term of graduate study in public administration and registration in Pub. A. 403. 
Designed for students enrolled in Pub. A. 403. Students undertake in-depth 
analysis of elements of their internship (policy matters, organizational questions, 
adminstrative dilemmas, etc.), and prepare a written report. 

439. Administrative Justice. S. 3 hr. Analysis of concepts of justice in public 
administration. The focus is upon conflict between systems of individual and 
social justice, personal ethics in government, and the control of administrative 
discretion. 

440. Readings and Research— Public Administration. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. (Students may 
enroll more than once.j PR: Consent. Designed to give specialized coverage to 
particular areas of public administration for advanced students. 

443. Public Employee Labor Relations. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Provides overview of 
theory, structures, and issues of public-sector labor relations; specific knowledge 
and training in processes and behaviors of contract negotiation and contract 
maintenance; and introduction to conflict management in nonunionized settings. 

444. Public Program Planning. II. 3 hr. Focuses on planning as a determinant of system 
direction, operation, and performance. The course is designed both to survey and 
make various applications of program planning and systems concepts in public 
administration. 

445. Public Budget Formulation and Execution. I, II, S. 3 hr. Emphasizes concepts of 
budgeting and budgetary applications at the federal, state, and local levels of 
government. The case method is utilized to cover objectives, performance criteria, 
output measures, and technical procedures. 

446. Public Financial Management. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Examines 
financial administration in the public sector with particular attention to revenue 
systems, treasury and debt management, financial controls and intergovernmental 
fiscal relations. Public policy implications are developed. 

447. Applied Research in Public Administration. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 200 and consent. 
The student will complete a major field research project. Each project includes 
research design, data collection and analysis, and comprehensive final report. 

450. Administrative Behavior in Public Organizations. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Introduces and familiarizes the student with the nature of individual and group 
behavior in public organizations and bureaucratic settings. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Focuses on those subjects of most 
topical concern in public administration. 

499. Colloquium. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Limited to M.P.A. students. A series of selected speakers 
and presentations on a wide range of topics related to public administration and 
public affairs. (Graded S or U.) 

284 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 



READING 

607 Allen Hall 
Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Fairbanks, Helfeldt, Saltz, and P. Smith. Associate 
Member Hobbs. 

The Division of Education provides opportunities forgraduate study and 
research leading to the Master of Arts for educators and other professionals 
with educational responsibilities. The primary purpose of the master's 
program in reading is to provide increased knowledge, skill, and competence 
for teachers or those who work in the field. The program contains a number of 
related options for emphasis within its framework, making it flexible enough 
to meet a wide variety of needs. 

Options are planned by the student, the student's adviser, and the 
student's graduate committee to fit the student's career plans. In addition to 
the general requirements of the University and the College of Human 
Resources and Education, the department requires a core of courses or course 
areas and supporting competencies. 

All applicants must comply with the general WVU requirements, and 
requirements of the College of Human Resources and Education and the 
Reading Program. 

Graduate students with successful teaching experience at the elementary, 
secondary, or college levels, or those who desire to enter these fields, may 
wish to increase their competence as teachers of reading, to keep informed of 
latest trends and developments in reading education, or to prepare for 
positions of greater responsibility. 

Course offerings provide opportunities to become familiar with the 
organization, implementation, and administration of developmental and 
remedial reading programs at the elementary, secondary, and college levels. 
Advanced students of superior academic and professional background have 
opportunities to participate in clinical work and to become involved in 
research. 

Option tracks for the Doctor of Education degree and the Certificate of 
Advanced Study are worked out individually with each student. Course 
requirements depend upon previous academic background and experience 
and the position for which the student wishes to prepare. Practical training 
for teachers and specialists-in-training is provided by the Reading Clinic. 

For further information on admission and program requirements, write, 
Chairperson of Graduate Programs, Division of Education, College of Human 
Resources and Education, 604 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 
26506-6122. 

Master of Arts in Reading 

Special Program Requirements 

1. Students must complete 6 or more hours in reading within two years 
after admission (probationary or regular) or admission will be invalidated 
and the student will be required to reapply. 

2. Program A— Completion of a minimum of 36 hours including the 
completion of a problem or thesis. 

3. Program B— Completion of a minimum of 36 hours of course work. 

4. Successful completion of a written final examination. 



READING 285 



Course Requirements 

The course requirements in Program A and B lead to reading specialist 
certification. Electives should be decided in conference with adviser. 

A. Required Courses Hours 

Program A B 

Rdng. 321 3 3 

Rdng. 322 3 3 

Rdng. 324 3 3 

Rdng. 326 3 3 

Rdng. 327 3 3 

Rdng. 340 3 3 

Rdng. 341 3 3 

Rdng. 495 6 

C&I 301 or 304 or 307 3 

Ed. P. 330 or Rdng. 380/Measurement/Evaluation in Lang. Arts ... 3 3 

Ed. P. 300 or 450 or 451 or Psych. 263 or 264 or 281 3 3 

Sp. Ed. 250 or Psych. 282 3 3 

36 33 

B. Electives 3 

Total 36 36 



The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia 
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification 
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the Catalog may not be in 
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon 
arrival on campus. 



Reading (Rdng.) 

221. Developmental Reading. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Fundamentals of reading 
instruction. Emphasizes classroom organization and teaching techniques. 

222. Reading in the Content Areas. I, II. 2 hr. Skills and strategies needed by content 
area teachers to reinforce the reading skills necessary for the effective learning of 
secondary students in the content areas. 

240. Corrective Language Arts Techniques. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 221, consent. 
Fundamentals of informal language arts diagnosis and corrective classroom 
language arts instruction. A practicum for the utilization of informal diagnosis 
and correction techniques is provided. 

283. Special Workshop in Reading. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. For elementary and secondary 
students in preservice education programs, as well as for elementary and 
secondary teachers in inservice education. 

321. Reading Instruction in Elementary Schools. I, II, S. 3 hr. Gives students who have 
little or no background in reading an opportunity to study the reading process and 
to learn how to apply effective techniques and methods at the elementary school 
level. Grades K-6. 

322. Reading Instruction in Secondary Schools. I, II, S. 3 hr. The reading skills essential 
at the secondary level and how they may be developed in the various subject- 
matter areas. 

323. Reading and Early Childhood Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Development of a reading- 
language program for young children that includes consideration of: (1) the nature 
of the beginning reading process; and (2) the nature of children's cognitive, 
perceptual, linguistic, psychological, physical, and social growth. 

286 READING 



324. Foundations of Reading Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. The physiological, psychological, 
sociological, and historical foundations underlying the development of reading 
proficiency. For majors in education, reading, counseling and guidance, special 
education, speech communication, and other areas requiring an understanding of 
the reading process. 

325. Survey of Major Problems in Reading. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 321 or 322 and 324. A 
research course in which each student will complete an individual problem in an 
area of special interest. 

326. Reading Leadership Skills. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of M.A. requirements. Roles, 
responsibilities, and practices of reading specialists and administrators in 
organizing reading programs from early childhood through college. 

327. Developing Reading Interests. I, II, S. 3 hr. Emphasis on methods and techniques 
for developing reading habits, interests, and tastes and on motivating individuals 
to read. Special attention is given to integrating the use of children's literature 
with creative oral and written langauge. 

330. Teaching the Language Arts. II, S. 3 hr. The interrelationship of the different 
phases of the language arts. Special attention to organizing the language arts 
program, selecting materials and equipment, and understanding effective tech- 
niques and methods for teaching listening, oral language, written language, 
handwriting, and spelling. 

331. Selection and Evaluation of Reading Materials. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 321. Survey of 
critical reading skills, techniques, and procedures with emphasis on the selection 
of supplementary materials needed for effective development and remedial 
reading programs. 

332. Survey of Major Problems in the Language Arts. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 330 or 
consent. An advanced course covering major problems of the teacher or supervisor 
of language arts instruction. A research course in which the student completes an 
individual problem. 

340. Diagnostic and Prescriptive Reading Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. of Rdng. 
321, 324 or 332. Course designed to develop and implement theoretical concepts in 
the diagnosis and prescription of language problems. Emphasis on techniques 
utilized by classroom and special teachers of reading and language arts. 

341. Problems in Clinical Reading. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 340. Laboratory course in 
remedial reading. Major emphasis on tutoring remedial cases in the Reading 
Center. 

342. Reading Diagnosis and Prescription in Learning Disabilities. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 
Consent. Basic course in diagnostic and prescriptive reading techniques and 
procedures for learning disability majors. Special emphasis on practicum experi- 
ences in administering and interpreting reading tests, as well as prescribing and 
administering remediation suggestions. 

380. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar for master's degree students 
stressing special topics concerned with the education and sociological and 
psychological aspects of language arts instruction. 

381. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics or research in reading 
and language arts for master's degree students in reading. 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Practicum type course for master's degree 
student teaching, and reading administration and supervision practicum experience 
can be pursued. 

442. Diagnosis of Reading Difficulties. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 340. Advanced instruction in 
diagnosis. Emphasis on use of standardization tests, informal tests, machines, and 
observation in determining reading difficulties. 

READING 287 



443. Correction of Reading Difficulties. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 442 or consent. Advanced 
instruction correcting reading difficulties. Emphasis on methods of teaching, use 
of machines and commercial materials, constructing and using teacher-made 
exercises, and evaluating progress. 

444. Advanced Clinical Reading. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 341. Laboratory course in 
remedial reading. Emphasis on diagnosis and treatment of reading difficulties. 

480. Seminar, I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. The interrelationships among the language 
arts: mental, physical, and psychological deterrents to language arts; and similar 
topics. 

481. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Admission to doctoral program in reading and 
consent. Advanced seminar. Weaknesses and strengths in current reading pro- 
grams, needed research in reading, and suggestions for improving reading 
instruction at elementary, secondary, and college levels. 

485. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of reading theory to 
organizing and conducting developmental and remedial reading programs. 

495. Problem in Reading. I, II, S. 3 hr. Research for master's degree in reading. 

RECREATION AND PARKS MANAGEMENT 

Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry 
322-A Percival Hall 

Harry V. Wiant, Jr., Coordinator of the Graduate Program 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members E. C. Bammel and L. L. Bammel. Associate Members 
Hummel-Azzaro and Hutchison. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Division of Forestry of the College of Agriculture and Forestry offers 
programs leading to the degree of Master of Science (M.S.) for students who 
wish to major in recreation and parks management fields. 

Graduate program options include, but are not limited to: recreation 
administration and policy, environmental education and interpretation, and 
recreation planning and resource management. Admission requirements are 
listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture and Forestry. Degree 
requirements are either 30 semester hours of approved study, including a 
6-hour thesis, or 36 hours without a thesis but with a 3-hour problem paper. 
These programs ordinarily require two years of residence. 

Recreation and Parks (Re. & Pk.) 

202. Recreation Internship. I. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 43, 44, 251/263, 233/235/271. 
Supervised, full-time leadership responsibility with a recreation agency for a 
minimum of eight weeks. Program must relate to the student's curriculum option 
and must be approved in advance by the internship program coordinator. 

203. Professional Synthesis. I, II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Re. & Pk. 202. A capstone course for 
seniors that involves the synthesizing of professional training and field work 
experiences. 

216. Philosophy of Recreation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpretation of recreation as a 
basic part of the living process; importance to individual community and national 
welfare; social and economic significance. 

288 RECREATION AND PARKS MANAGEMENT 



233. Wildland Recreation Management. I. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12 or consent. Topics 
include an analysis of administrative agencies concerned with wildland manage- 
ment; methods of ameliorating human impact on outdoor recreation resources; 
discussion of philosophies underlying wilderness recreation; and a review of 
contemporary controversies concerning wildlands. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

234. Wilderness in American Society. II. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 233 or consent. A seminar 
examining political, sociological, and environmental aspects of American wilder- 
ness. A discussion on articles concerning wilderness preservation, management, 
and aesthetics. 

235. Parks and Recreation Administration. I. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. recreation and parks 
courses, junior standing, or consent. Principles of administration as applied to the 
operation of recreation and park agencies, including legal foundations, policy, 
organization, personnel, finance, and programs of service. 

241. Recreational Services for Special Populations. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introductory 
analysis of current therapeutic recreation services; attentiveness to the need for 
broadening recreation and park services to include members of special populations; 
familiarization with the planning consideration for the conduct of such services. 

242. Historical and Cultural Interpretation. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or 
consent. Methods of locating source materials for reconstructing the historical, 
cultural, and physical aspects of an area for an interpretive center; preparing 
brochures, displays, and nature trails to facilitate interpretive activities. 

248. Environmental Concerns in Outdoor Recreation. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Understanding 
and interpreting environmental concerns within the context of outdoor recreation. 

251. Recreation Leadership. I. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or consent. 
Leadership functions and techniques, group dynamics, supervision, and use of 
volunteers. Theory and practice are related through a field placement with a local 
recreation agency. 

263. Program Planning. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or consent. Funda- 
mentals for general program planning; considers needs, facilities, age groups, local 
customs, climatic factors, etc. Planning involved in playgrounds, indoor centers, 
playfields, parks, hospitals, voluntary agencies, industries, and camps. 

265. Planning and Design of Recreation Places. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major 
or consent. Study of planning and design concepts, standards and guidelines, use 
continuum, grants-in-aid, and planning of selected areas of facilities: parks, pools, 
centers, and recreation resource areas development. 

271. Administration of Camping Services. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or 
consent; Re. & Pk. 40 or equiv. Principles involved in modern camping programs, 
and organization and administration of camps. 

280. Therapeutic Recreation Principles and Procedures. I. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 241 or 
consent. Basic intervention techniques in providing therapeutic recreation services, 
including individual and small group techniques, adaptive equipment, assistive 
techniques, standards, regulations, and ethics. 

282. Therapeutic Recreation Program Planning. II. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 241 or consent. 
Design and development of therapeutic recreation programs utilizing a systems 
approach based on leisure related needs of clients. Includes assessment, program 
development, implementation, monitoring, and evaluation. 

408. Practicum in Recreation. I, II. 4 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 472, PESE 396, 397. Program 
planning, curriculum development, and job functions in recreation. 

415. Leisure and Recreation. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of leisure as a social 
phenomenon and its implications for recreation. 

RECREATION AND PARKS MANAGEMENT 289 



421. Recreation Planning in Human Interest Areas. I. 3 hr. Exploration of human 
interest areas as sources of recreation program content; their nature, factors, and 
extent of participation; and their structuring and administration through work 
program planning. (Offered in Fall of even years.] 

462. Community Recreation. I. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 316 or consent. Study of problems 
related to providing adequate recreation services for a community. Standards and 
quality of recreation service; methods of measuring existing services and their 
coordination; community organization procedures. For leaders in voluntary 
agencies, schools, churches, and municipal recreation organizations. (Offered in 
Fall of odd years.) 

472. Seminar in Recreation. I, II. 1-3 hr. (Repeatable up to 6 hr. credit.) Overview and 
critical analysis of literature in recreation interpretation, environmental concerns, 
or leisure studies. 

REHABILITATION COUNSELING 

Robert P. Marinelli, Program Coordinator 

504 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members L. S. Cormier, W. H. Cormier, Jacobs, Majumder, Marinelli, 

Masson, Messing, Srebalus, Tunick, and Yura. Associate Members DeLo, Greever, 

Judy, and Moriarty. 

The rehabilitation counseling program in the College of Human Resources 
and Education offers a curriculum at the master's degree level. All students 
enroll for a general counseling core during their first semester and then select 
an area of emphasis for the balance of their graduate studies. 

General Requirements for Admission 

All applicants must comply with the requirements of the the College of 
Human Resources and Education, and the Department of Counseling and 
Rehabilitation Counseling. The program in rehabilitation counseling requires 
a program application, letters of recommendation, and a program interview. 

Students are encouraged to pursue as much of their programs as possible 
on a full-time basis. 

Core Requirements for Rehabilitation Counseling 

All students will be expected to take the following core courses: 
Coun. 301— Counseling Techniques 
Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 
Coun. 306— Counseling Theories 

Coun. 309— Group Counseling Theory and Techniques 
Rehab. 300 — Introduction to Rehabilitation Services 
Rehab. 310— Medical Aspects of Disability 
Rehab. 312— Psychological Aspects of Disability 
Rehab. 320— Career Development and Job Placement 
Rehab. 472— Counseling Practicum 
Rehab. 475— Clinical Practice 
Rehab. 480 — Research Seminar 

Please contact the program for a listing of the additional required courses 
in this area. 

Rehabilitation Counseling (M.S.) 

This professional counseling specialty provides vocational evaluation 
and counseling services to physically handicapped clients, persons with 

290 REHABILITATION COUNSELING 



learning difficulties, and those who are seeking readjustment from emotional 
problems. Counselors work for both public and private rehabilitation agencies, 
centers, workshops, and industry. The program, which offers training options 
in rehabilitation counseling and vocational evaluation, as well as an option 
combining both areas, is accredited by the Council on Rehabilitation Education. 

The degree requirements include completion of the core courses, required 
rehabilitation counseling courses, and a 10-12 hour supervised clinical 
practice placement (internship) under faculty direction in a rehabilitation 
setting. The rehabilitation counseling and vocational evaluation programs 
require a minimum of 45 semester hours with a 3.0 grade-point average. The 
combined program requires 51 semester hours. In addition to completing all 
course work and the internship satisfactorily, a candidate must demonstrate 
the ability to assume the responsibility required of a professional counselor 
and the personal characteristics essential to effective working relationships 
with others. 

Students may take the professional certification examinations to obtain 
national certification as a rehabilitation counselor or vocational evaluator. 



The College of Human Resources and Education is currently undergoing 
curriculum review. Deviations may occur in the following published pattern of 
anticipated course availability by semester. 



Counseling (Coun.) 

301. Counseling Techniques. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development and application of 
basic counseling skills including interviewing, clinical observation, and a general 
orientation to counseling settings. Evaluation will be based on strengths and 
deficits in intra and interpersonal skills and on demonstration of counseling skills 
in checkout situations. In setting laboratory experience required. 

305. Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of 
standardized evaluation methods commonly utilized in educational and rehabil- 
itation settings. Experience is provided in selection, administration, and interpre- 
tation of selected instruments. 

306. Counseling Theories. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303 and consent. A study of counseling 
approaches commonly used in public schools, colleges, and rehabilitation agencies. 
Application of theory emphasized. 

Rehabilitation Counseling (Rehab.) 

300. Introduction to Rehabilitation Services. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to 
comprehensive rehabilitation, its history and development as a philosophy 
process, and professional area. Professional and ethical issues in rehabilitation 
counseling. Other services involved in various rehabilitation settings. 

310. Medical Aspects of Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An overview of medical 
aspects and implications of disability for the handicapped person in the rehabili- 
tation process. Studies of the more common severe disabilities and their remedi- 
ation also will be included. 

312. Psychological Aspects of Disability. II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Rehab. 310; graduate 
standing and consent. The impact of disability considering cultural, interpersonal, 
and intrapersonal factors. Methods of assisting persons to adjust to problems of 
disability. 

314. Special Problems in Rehabilitation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
Rehabilitation theory and techniques in problems such as blindness, epilepsy, and 
mental retardation. Concentrated study in special institutes. 

REHABILITATION COUNSELING 291 



320. Career Development and Job Placement. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent and graduate 
standing in social sciences or education. Principles and methods involved in the 
vocational counseling and placement of disabled persons. The use of occupational 
and educational information. Theories of career development, occupational 
analysis, and job placement in rehabilitation. 

321. Vocational Evaluation Systems and Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 300. An 
introduction to vocational evaluation. Formal and informal vocational evaluation 
systems and procedures will be explored with the goal of preliminary development 
of individualized evaluation plans. 

322. Advanced Vocational Evaluation Techniques. S. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 321. Advanced 
vocational evaluation systems including empirically based and informal systems 
will be studied. Emphasis will be on administration, scoring and interpretation, 
particularly as it relates to handicapped populations with specific evaluation 
problems. 

323. Seminar in Vocational Evaluation Services. S. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 321 and consent. 
Supervisory and professional issues in vocational evaluation services with an 
emphasis on standards, methods, procedures and resources for developing and 
maintaining vocational evaluation services. 

374. Field Work in Rehabilitation. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised field work 
experience in rehabilitation settings to provide rehabilitation counseling students 
with a more adequate orientation to their profession. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

462. Clinical Conference in Vocational Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 300, graduate 
standing, and consent. Exploration and evaluation of current methods of service 
delivery to vocational rehabilitation clients. Analysis and integration of service 
systems and the needs of the disabled client. 

472. Counseling Practicum. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing, liability insurance, 
and consent. Supervised experience in the application of counseling techniques in 
the rehabilitation process. Demonstration of high professional standards, coun- 
seling skills, and personal characteristics appropriate to the counseling relationship 
are essential. 

475. Clinical Practice. I, II, S. 1-2 hr. PR: Liability insurance, consent, following at least 
one academic semester in the classroom. Clinical practice (internship) in selected 
agencies, rehabilitation centers, clinics, or hospitals conducting an organized 
program of services for the physically, mentally, emotionally, or socially handi- 
capped. Practice will be under direct supervision of faculty and agency personnel. 

480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Administration of programmatic research; 
legal and ethical issues in research and service programs, etc. 

481. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Contemporary issues in the behavioral 
sciences and rehabilitation. 

482. Workshop in Rehabilitation. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Supervision in the 
counseling process; vocational evaluation in rehabilitation; utilization of rehabili- 
tation research; contemporary issues in rehabilitation. 

491. Directed Study and Research. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Readings and/or 
independent research in related topic. 



292 REHABILITATION COUNSELING 



REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY 

E. Keith Inskeep, Chairperson of the Interdisciplinary Faculty 
G-044 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Butcher, Dailey, Goodman, Inskeep, Lewis, Mawhinney, 
and Nath. Associate Members Collins and Horvath. 

The graduate program in Reproductive Physiology, leading to the M.S. 
and Ph.D. degrees, is interdisciplinary, with faculty located in the Departments 
of Animal and Veterinary Sciences, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Pharmacology 
and Toxicology, Physiology, and Plant and Soil Sciences. Requirements for 
admission include at least a 2.75 grade-point average (4.0 system) and 
completion of the following prerequisites with a grade of C or better in each: 
calculus, genetics, organic chemistry, physics, and vertebrate embryology. It 
is recommended but not required that applicants complete both the aptitude 
and the advanced tests of the Graduate Record Examination. Foreign 
languages are not required for a degree in reproductive physiology. Only a 
limited number of students are accepted each year. 

Research Areas: Function and regression of the corpus luteum, aging of 
the oocyte in abnormalities of development, control of postpartum repro- 
ductive performance, metabolism and steroid receptors of male sex accessory 
tissue, environmental factors in reproduction, control of steroidogenesis, 
control of estrus and ovulation, new methods of artificial insemination, 
behavioral aspects of reproduction, endocrine functions of polypeptides, and 
roles of prostaglandins in reproduction. 

Research can involve farm animals and laboratory species. The program 
draws on courses offered in various departments and includes courses in 
endocrinology, advanced reproductive physiology, biochemistry, physiology, 
statistics, and developmental embryology. 

SAFETY STUDIES 

Daniel E. Della-Giustina, Chairperson, Department of Safety Studies 
281 Coliseum 
Degree Offered: M.S. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Della-Giustina, McPherson, Marcum, Shaffron, and 
Sorine. Associate Member Friend. 

Master of Science in Safety Studies 

Concentration in safety studies at the master's and post-master's degree 
level provides opportunity for individuals to elect courses and related 
experiences aimed at developing competencies needed by driver safety 
educators, occupational safety managers, or school safety coordinators. 
Baccalaureate degree programs from which students are usually admitted 
include business management, engineering, technology education, physical 
education, physical science, psychology, sociology and anthropology, or 
safety, provided that a 2.75 grade-point average has been achieved. Otherwise, 
admission must be of provisional status, which requires the student to earn a 
3.0 average during the first 12 semester hours of residence work and also to 
pass qualifying examinations in order to continue. 

University regulations for graduate study govern the general requirements 
of the master of science degree. Additionally, however, the candidate must 
complete a minimum of 36 semester credit hours, including approved research 

SAFETY STUDIES 293 



in safety to qualify as a degree recipient. A grade-point average of 3.0 is 
required for graduation. 

Course work is planned in consultation with the adviser and approval 
must be obtained from the adviser before enrollment in courses. Six semester 
hours of course work may be devoted to directed electives from one of the 
student's undergraduate major or minor fields or from a field allied to safety. 
Students are encouraged to complete the aptitude test of the Graduate Record 
Examination within the first 18 semester hours after matriculation. 

A student is accepted as an advanced candidate for the degree if course 
work and requirements are satisfactory, as judged by the graduate committee 
of the department. During the final session or semester of study, each student 
is required to pass an examination dealing with the core subject matter and 
specialization emphasis. 

Off-Campus Graduate Program 

Courses are scheduled at the four WVU off-campus graduate centers in a 
sequence that should enable interested students to complete programs within 
a three-year period. 

Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.) 

This area of specialization is aimed at preparing individuals with 
emphasis in safety management training beyond the master's degree. The 
completion of a master's degree in safety or the equivalent is comparable to 
the WVU Master of Science in Safety Studies with approved practicum 
experience. In order to graduate, the student must complete 36 semester hours 
of approved graduate work. A minimum grade-point average of 3.2 on all 
course work attempted is required. The student must defend a research 
problem in areas of specialization for the Certificate of Advanced Study, 
which is awarded by the Division of Education of the College of Human 
Resources and Education. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

Option tracks are offered leading to the Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 
degree in safety studies, safety management, loss countermeasures, and 
emergency preparedness. The degree is awarded by the Division of Education. 

Admission to the Program 

Special-Provisional Status— Applicants for admission must submit the 
following: 

• Scores on the aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination or 
Miller Analogies Test; 

• Three letters of recommendation (one of which must be submitted by 
the applicant's immediate employment supervisor or master's degree academic 
adviser); 

• A complete transcript of undergraduate and graduate education. 

All materials and procedures must be completed by April 1 of the year in 
which the applicant intends to begin a doctoral program. Upon completion of 
the above procedures, the student is admitted as an advanced graduate 
student with special-provisional status. During the semester in which the 
advanced graduate student with special-provisional status completes the 
twelfth hour of resident course work, the student shall request, through the 
office of the chairperson of the appropriate doctoral program, admission to 

294 SAFETY STUDIES 



the program with regular graduate status. Advanced graduate students with 
special-provisional status cannot register for course work beyond the twelfth 
hour without having been admitted to the program as a student with regular 
graduate status. 

Reguiar Graduate Student Status— Acceptance as an advanced graduate 
student with regular status is contingent upon the graduate committee's 
decision regarding the applicant's potential for scholarly productivity as 
judged by Graduate Record Examination or Miller Analogies scores, past 
performance in course work, and letters of recommendation, as well as a 
personal interview, if deemed necessary. Applicants who satisfy standards 
for admission are assigned an adviser based upon the student's program 
interest. 

Program Requirements— Once the student is admitted to the program, the 
student, in concert with the adviser, selects a doctoral committee. It is this 
committee's responsibility to aid the student in planning the total program. 
During the process of completing a program, the student is expected to fulfill a 
residency requirement specified by the committee. 

Admission to Candidacy Requirements— As the student nears the ter- 
mination of the course work, application may be made to complete the final 
comprehensive examination. This examination consists of scholarly tasks 
designed to function as a comprehensive learning experience. The examination 
is constructed by the student's doctoral committee. Students who do not 
successfully complete this examination may be permitted to attempt the 
examination one more time pending an appeal and subsequent sanction of the 
student's doctoral committee. There must be a time period of at least six 
months between the first and second examination periods. 

Upon successful completion of the final comprehensive examination, the 
student may present to the doctoral committee a prospectus of the dissertation. 
If the opinion of the committee is such that the student may proceed with the 
dissertation, the student is admitted to candidacy. 

Final Requirements— Upon the completion of the dissertation, the can- 
didate will appear before the doctoral committee for an oral defense of the 
study. Successful defense of the dissertation results in the awarding of the 
degree. All requirements must be completed within seven years. 

Safety Studies (Saf. S.) 

231. Safety in Motor Transportation Services. II. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 131 or consent. Safety 
elements of automotive transportation equipment. Design, operation, planning 
and control plus effects of legislation. The school motor fleet is highlighted. 

232. Safety Education Principles and Content. I. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 131 or consent. Study 
and analysis of content areas usually recommended for instructional programs 
within the field of safety, with emphasis on structured learning experiences. 

233/333. Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Systems. 3 hr. Major elements 
involved in disasters and emergencies, preparedness planning, systems utilization, 
and attention to essential human services, with emphasis on community action. 

234/334. Establishing and Managing Fire Services. 3 hr. Analysis of fire services 
usually provided under safety manager jurisdiction, with special attention to legal 
bases, organizational structure, services rendered, training needs and management 
techniques. 

239 / 339. Security Management Practices and Problems. 3 hr. Safety manager respon- 
sibilities for security of persons and property including organizational patterns, 
personnel competencies expected, surveillance and monitoring methods, and 
occupational problems among security personnel. 

SAFETY STUDIES 295 



254. Teaching Driver and Highway Safety. S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 151 or equiv. and valid 
driver license. Teaching and coordinating driver and highway safety education in 
schools. Arranged ice in providing behind-the-wheel instruction to beginning 
drivers. 

256. Driver and Safety Instructional Innovations. II, S. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Saf. S. 151 and 
254. Multimedia, multivehicle, simulation, and other innovations for classroom 
and laboratory instruction applied to driver and safety education as revealed by 
research and current literature. 

291. Special Topics. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Consent. Consideration of persistent issues and 
changing problems in the safety field. Seminar emphasis extends considerable 
attention to safety interests of participating class members. 

301. Safety Function Management Integration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Consideration 
of integrated arrangements, common constraints, developmental level, essential 
guidelines, staff liaison, project improvement, effectiveness audits, and collabo- 
ration needed to assure success of the safety function. 

303. Risk Counteractant Resource Preparedness. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Counteraction 
of risk involving deficient resource preparedness by emphasizing problems 
delineation, ergonomic adjustments, work-task analyses, performance standards, 
quality supervision, essential training and pertinent management techniques. 

310. Controlling Environmental and Personnel Hazards. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or 
consent. Investigation of hazard control principles relating to environmental 
facilities and equipment including control procedures recommended by authorities 
from the fields of engineering, medicine, and public health as well as from the field 
of safety. 

333. Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Systems. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or 
consent. Major elements involved in disasters and emergencies, preparedness 
planning, systems utilization, and attention to essential human services, with 
emphasis on community action. 

334. Establishing and Managing Fire Services. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or consent. 
Analysis of fire services usually provided under safety manager jurisdiction, with 
special attention to legal bases, organizational structure, services rendered, 
training needs, and management techniques. 

335. Safety Legislation and Compliance Operations. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or consent. 
Comprehensive study and analysis of federal and state legislation which mandates 
compliance with certain safety conditions and practices related to work performed 
in occupational and comparable settings. 

339. Security Management Practices and Problems. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or 
consent. Safety manager responsibilities for security of persons and property 
including organizational patterns, personnel competencies expected, surveillance 
and monitoring methods, and occupational problems among security personnel. 

361. Loss Initiating Adversities Remediation. I, II, S. 3 hr. Perception of adversities 
tolerated as an extension of uncontrolled hazardous exposure with remediation 
concentrated upon identification, confirmation, and correction services including 
utilization of specialist personnel. 

363. Disabled Enterprise Resources Restoration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination 
of management guidelines, reporting procedures, insurance variations, rehabili- 
tation and restoration efforts, and recovery procedures needed to successfully 
restrain losses attributed to disabled enterprise resources. 

418. Safety, Measurement, Evaluation, and Research. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300. 
Analysis of evaluative data and statistical procedures applicable to the safety 
field plus investigation of the nature and purposes of research dealing with safety 
and accident prevention with emphasis on human and environmental factors. 

296 SAFETY STUDIES 



452. Manpower Development for Safety Responsibilities. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate 
standing in safety studies and consent. Safety manpower positions, needs and 
problems in relation to efforts by business, industrial, governmental and educa- 
tional agencies to provide sufficiently effective professional and sub-professional 
preparation of safety practitioners. 

459. Directed Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Doctoral level standing and consent. (Required 
of all candidates for doctoral degrees in safety studies.] Analysis of research 
designs and procedures for compilation, organization, treatment, and interpretation 
of data for safety research projects. 

468. Essential Safety Management Information. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination 
of information needed for safety management success, harm investigation proce- 
dures, evaluation techniques, nonrealized profit calculations, and decision- 
making which should enhance improvement of all safety function affairs. 

472. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing in safety studies and consent. 
Individual and/or group experiences in development, implementation, and par- 
ticipation in special projects involving safety education, safety services, and 
environmental safety in schools, colleges, or communities. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3-15 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-16 hr. 
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

SECONDARY EDUCATION 

Cynthia Sunal, Chairperson of Graduate Programs 

604 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.A. in Secondary Education 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bontempo, Bower, Deay, Haas, Helfeldt, Holtan, Iannone, 

Moxley, Obenauf, Phillips, Reed, Saltz, P. Smith, D. W. Sunal, and Thomas. Associate 

Members Carline and Hobbs. 

The Division of Education offers graduate programs and opportunities 
for research leading to the degrees of Master of Arts, and options for the 
Certificate of Advanced Study, and Doctor of Education for professional 
educators and other professionals for whom advanced study in curriculum 
and instruction and educational responsibilities is important. Areas of 
emphasis include secondary education, higher education, and librarian- 
media education. The major emphases in all programs are curriculum and 
instruction. Optional tracks in specific subject and program areas are 
available. Programs are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser, 
and the student's committee to meet the career needs of the student. In 
addition to the general requirements of the University and the College of 
Human Resources and Education, a core of courses or course areas and 
supporting competencies is required of all graduate students in the department. 

The College of Human Resources and Education offers a Master of Arts in 
Secondary Education program for persons who teach or work in teaching- 
related situations with adolescents and adults. The purpose of the program is 
to provide academic experiences to increase skills in teaching and curriculum 
development and knowledge of a teaching specialization. The program 
provides the opportunity to specialize in working with students in junior, 
middle, and high schools and with adults in post-secondary settings. 
Electives are used to provide a solid basis in the subject area that the student 
teaches. With adviser approval, electives may also be used to enhance 
students' personal goals. While teacher certification is not a part of the 

SECONDARY EDUCATION 297 



master's program, students may be able to complete some courses required for 
certification while working on a graduate degree. 

For further information on admission and program requirements, write 
Program Coordinator, Secondary Education, WVU College of Human Re- 
sources and Education, 602 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 
26506-6122. All applicants must comply with the requirements of the College 
of Human Resources and Education and the Division of Education. 



The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia 
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification 
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not be in 
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon 
arrival on campus. 



Master of Arts Program Tracks 
Secondary Education* 

Hours 

I. Graduate Courses in Education Program A 1 B 2 C 3 

C&I304 3 3 3 

Ed. F. 320 or 340 3 3 3 

Approved course in Curriculum/Instruction 

in student's content field 4 3 3 3 

Approved course in General Teaching Strategies 

or General Curriculum Development 4 3 3 3 

Ed. P. 320 3 3 

C&I391 3 

C&I497 6 

Approved Education Electives 4 3 6-12 

II. Approved Graduate Courses Outside of Education 5 9 9 12-18 

30 30 36 

thesis required. 

2 Problem required. 

3 36 semester hour course work program. 

"Adviser will provide lists of courses which may be selected. 

5 Usually courses in the student's content speciality. 

*Students who plan to teach at the college level, who wish to study the impact of technology on 
people, society, and the environment, or who wish to prepare for a career as librarian-media 
specialist, may pursue a concentration of course work emphasizing those areas. 

Higher Education Curriculum and Teaching 

Hours 
I. Graduate Courses in Education 18-24 

Required Courses in Education 15 

Ed. F. 320 or Ed. F. 340 3 

C&I 307 3 

C&I 387 3 

C&I 489 3 

Ed. P. 300 3 

II. Approved Education Electives 3-9 

18-24 
III. Graduate Courses in an Academic Area 12-18 

Total 36 

298 SECONDARY EDUCATION 



Librarian-Media Specialist 

A combination of undergraduate courses and courses in the graduate 
program is necessary to meet certification requirements. 

Master of Arts in Education 

Hours 

I. Required Courses in Education Program A 1 B 2 

C&I 301 3 3 

C&I 304 3 3 

C&I 387 3 3 

Ed. Found. 320 or Ed. Found. 340 3 3 

12 12 

II. Courses in Library Science 24 12 3 

III. Approved Electives 12 

36 36 

'For those desiring certification as school media specialist K-12. Specific courses in library 
science are required. For further information, see section on library science. 
2 For those who already have certification. 
'Graduate courses other than those required for certification. 

Curriculum and Instruction (C&I) 

205. The Junior High School I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Developing philosophy, 
program, and practices of the junior high school. 

224. Approaches to Teaching Language. II. 2 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 and Engl. 111. Designed for 
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Focus is upon planning and 
implementing methods of teaching English as a language. Materials and resources 
appropriate to public school instruction are analyzed and utilized. 

225. Approaches to Teaching Literature. II. 2 hr. PR: Junior standing. Designed for 
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Course focuses upon method- 
ologies for teaching literature in public schools. Workshop format will provide 
opportunities for peer teaching activities as students apply methods of teaching 
literature. 

280. Special Problems and Workshops. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (Maximum of 8 semester hours 
may be applied toward the master's degree.] PR: 14 hr. in education. Credits for 
special workshops and short intensive unit courses on methods, supervision, and 
other special topics. 

287. Advanced Clinical Experience. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Clinical experience in 
teaching-learning situations at any level. 

304. The Secondary-School Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: High-school teaching 
experience or consent. Emphasizes socioeconomic and cultural influences on the 
curriculum; principles of curriculum development; curriculum building in the 
various teaching fields; techniques of experimentation and evaluation; and 
practice in curriculum building with special emphasis on unit construction. 

306. Curriculum for Middle Childhood. I, S. 3 hr. Survey course which includes: 
historical, social, and cultural influences on the curriculum; the learner character- 
istics; curriculum and instructional organization and their relationship to facilities 
available; evaluation and implementation of middle childhood curriculum. 

307. Curriculum Development. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 or 312 and Ed. F. 320 or 
consent. Basic foundation in the concepts underlying the school curriculum in 
American society. 

SECONDARY EDUCATION 299 



308. Introduction to Alternative Learning Environments. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. 
This course will provide opportunities for educators to explore and analyze the 
trends and issues in alternative learning environments in public education. 

309. Experiences in Alternative Learning Environments. S. (Alternate Years.) 6 hr. PR: 
C&I 308, Ed. F. 320, consent. This course helps teachers to learn and practice the 
skills that are needed to be an effective teacher in an alternative teaching 
environment. 

323. Contemporary Issues in English Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. 
Provides the student with a knowledge of several contemporary issues in English 
teaching which have immediate and long-range ramifications for secondary- 
school English instruction. 1-hr. lee, 2-hr. seminar. 

324. Advanced Methods in English Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (For 
classroom teachers of English.] Will involve an analysis of recent trends and 
innovations in methodology. Readings and discussions will lead to the development 
of instructional strategies and units for secondary English classrooms. 1-hr. lee, 
1-hr. lab., 1-hr. seminar. 

333. Corrective Techniques in Mathematics Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Materials and methods used in diagnosis and remediation of learning difficulties 
in mathematics. 

334. Mathematics in the Secondary School. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Patterns of 
mathematics curriculum in the secondary school; practices in teaching mathe- 
matics; preparation, selection and use of instructional materials. 

337. Mathematics in the Junior High School and Middle School II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. college 
mathematics or consent. Study of teaching of mathematics in the junior high 
school and/or middle school; application of mathematics content to teaching; 
instructional techniques and materials. 

354. Social Studies in the Secondary School. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Nature and function 
of social studies in the secondary school; utilization of community, state, national, 
and world resources in teaching; selection of content for teaching purposes; 
curriculum construction with emphasis on resource and teaching units. 

357. Principles of Economic Education. S. 3 hr. Workshop for principals, teachers, and 
supervisors with emphasis on the economic structure of our society and methods 
of integrating economics into the school program. (Sponsored jointly by College of 
Human Resources and Education and College of Business and Economics.] 

359. Classroom Simulation Techniques. II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. To provide 
experience in the use of learning games and simulations as an instructional 
technique and the opportunity to develop— under supervision— simulated activities 
and games to be used in a variety of learning environments. 

363. Teaching Young and Adult Farmer Classes. I, S. 2 hr. PR: Ed. P. 106. Participation 
in conducting young and adult farmer classes and school-community food 
preservation centers; organization, course of study, and methods of teaching and 
supervision, and young farmers' association. 

364. Organizing and Directing Supervised Farming Programs. II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. 
Planning programs of supervised farming, supervising and evaluating such 
programs for all-day students, young farmers, and adult farmers. 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated.] PR: Department 
approval. Specially designed experiences for those interested in advancing 
professional skills in a particular specialty. Not for degree credit in programs in 
the College of Human Resources and Education. {Graded as S or U.) 

300 SECONDARY EDUCATION 



377. Children's Television: Problems and Potentials. S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Provides 
parents and teachers with strategies for monitoring, evaluating, and directing 
television viewing habits of youth; pertinent research studies, school and 
community action programs, and home and school education programs are 
discussed and practiced. 

380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

385. Supervision of Student Teachers. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. For persons working or 
intending to work with education students in field experiences. Course focuses on 
the development and application of supervisory skills involved in effective 
guidance of student teachers and education students. 

386. Teaching Strategies for Middle Childhood. II, S. 3 hr. Surveys instructional 
strategies appropriate for facilitating preadolescent learning. Including the role of 
the teacher, how the teacher uses resources within and outside the classroom as 
they relate to instruction of the learner ages 10-14 years. 

387. Advanced Teaching Strategies. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Deals with 
methods as one critical variable in teaching. Examines the ways and means to 
describe, plan the use of, implement and evaluate teaching methods. Analysis and 
implementation of teaching methods and component skills of teaching. 

388. Classroom Organization and Management. I, S. 3 hr. Discusses research identifying 
components of classroom organization and environment which influence learning; 
reviews teacher behaviors and learning activities which research indicates lead to 
more effective teaching. Stresses implementation strategies relevant to classroom 
settings. 

389. Education That Is Multicultural. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. 
Provides opportunities for educators to increase awareness of their own ethnic 
backgrounds, foster understanding of racial/ethnic diversity, and develop appro- 
priate teaching materials and methods for elementary and secondary curricula. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. per sem. or session— aggregating not more than 12 hr. 
PR: 9 graduate hours in education. Enrollment with permission of adviser or 
instructor in consultation. Special individual and group projects. To provide 
appropriate residence credits for special workshops, prolonged systematic con- 
ferences or problems and projects in education. 

407. Instructional Models of Teaching. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 320 or consent. Concepts and 
processes involved in teaching and their relationship to the development of 
teacher education programs. 

408. Contemporary Determinants of Curriculum. II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 307 and Ed. F. 340 
or consent. Contemporary determinants of curriculum development. 

409. Curriculum Theories. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 408 or consent. Theories underlying 
curriculum from the past to the present and projected to the future. 

438. Survey of Major Issues in Mathematics Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Individual and group research on selected topics in mathematics education. 

457. Social Studies Curriculum Development, K-12. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 and C&I 
350 or 354. Stresses the application of principles and procedures pertinent to the 
development of social studies programs in elementary and secondary schools. 
Strong emphasis will be placed on the analysis of current social studies 
curriculum materials. 

SECONDARY EDUCATION 301 



460. Planning Programs and Courses for Vocational Agriculture Department. I, S. 2 hr. 
PR: C&I 188. Gathering data, studying the farming problems of all-day students, 
young farmers, and adult farmers, and planning the total program for the 
department. 

488. Higher Education Curriculum. II. 3 hr. An analysis of evaluation of post-secondary 
curriculum with emphasis on organizing, translating, and applying findings. 
Topics include curriculum-shaping forces; institutional patterns; policy, compo- 
nents and change; and principles and techniques of development, experimentation, 
and evaluation. 

489. Teaching in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. A general methods 
course involving instructional concepts and strategies for present/prospective 
faculty in higher education. Comprehensive consideration of objectives, planning 
criteria and methods, teaching strategies, and evaluation in meeting the needs of 
adult learners. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students 
with college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience in a 
teaching situation. [Graded as S or U.) 

491. Advanced Study Project in Education. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. Research for the program 
leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Education. 

496. Advanced Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Opportunity for the advanced graduate 
student to present the student's research to faculty and/or student groups. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Colloquium in Curriculum and Instruction. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For 
graduate students not seeking course work credit, but who wish to participate in 
academic programs, 

SOCIAL WORK 

Sung Lai Boo, Interim Dean of School of Social Work 
Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.S.W. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Boo, Gibbs, N. Lohmann, R. Lohmann, and Porter. 
Associate Members Barbeau, Griffin, Isaacson, Peters, Schultz, White, and Williams. 

The School of Social Work had its beginnings in the early 1930s. In 1971, 
Social Work became an independent school; its programs are accredited by 
the Council on Social Work Education through 1990. Graduates of the M.S.W. 
program are eligible for licensure as social workers in West Virginia and most 
other states. The graduate program is part of the comprehensive program of 
professional education in social work offered by the School of Social Work, 
including degree programs at baccalaureate and master's levels and a range of 
part-time and continuing education opportunities on the campus and in other 
areas of West Virginia. 

The early decades of the graduate program paralleled the period when the 
scope of the mental health movement was being enlarged and emphasis was 
placed upon individual and group intervention and treatment. The 1960s were 
characterized by more political and social change throughout the school's 
programs. At present the graduate program still includes some of these 
aspects but to lesser degree, with three concentrations including aging, 
community health/mental health, and family. 

Social work is primarily concerned with enhancing the problem-solving, 
coping, and developmental capacities of people, promoting effective and 

302 SOCIAL WORK 



humane operation of resources and service delivery systems, linking people 
with appropriate resource and service opportunities, and improving social 
policy. 

The graduate program concentrates upon offering advanced specialized 
training for the development of programs and community leadership in rural 
areas and small towns. The School of Social Work is nationally recognized in 
the area of rural social work practice, and the faculty members regularly 
contribute to this field through presentations, papers, conferences, and other 
means. 

A program of advanced standing for qualified students is offered in 
addition to the regular M.S.W. program. 

Field instruction opportunities are available throughout northern and 
central Appalachia, as well as in a select number of settings outside the 
region. Classes focus upon a blend of local, region, and national perspectives. 
The graduate program in social work offers enhanced educational opportu- 
nities in a number of specialized problem areas: Aging, Families, Health and 
Mental Health. 

Graduates are employed throughout the United States and Canada. They 
work as individual, family, and group treatment specialists, planners, 
community organizers, social researchers, social work educators and admin- 
istrators in a variety of programs, such as mental health clinics, hospitals, 
correctional institutions, courts, delinquency programs, aging programs, 
family counseling agencies, child protective agencies, public welfare depart- 
ments, child development programs, manpower agencies, public schools, 
community action agencies, settlement houses, city governments, state 
government planning agencies, federal administrative agencies, and private 
research and development organizations concerned with human problems. 

There has been a constant growth in the need for professional social 
workers. It is anticipated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and other research 
bodies that the demand for social workers will continue to increase in 
numbers and in varieties of programs in which social workers are employed. 
The WVU social work curriculum is designed to help students prepare for 
these careers. Students are required to work closely with their academic 
advisers in selecting appropriate components in class and field learning to 
meet their individual needs. 

Curriculum 

Increasingly aware of the maturation of baccalaureate social work 
education (in which the School of Social Work has been a national leader), the 
graduate program provides the opportunity to simultaneously broaden and 
deepen the knowledge and skill levels of those with baccalaureate education 
in social work through a program of advanced standing. 

For those who do not have a baccalaureate degree in social work or who 
do not qualify for the advanced standing program, the regular M.S.W. degree 
is offered. Through both the regular M.S.W. program and the program of 
advanced standing, students are exposed to the areas of social work practice, 
social welfare policy, theories of human behavior and social environments, 
social work research, and field instruction. 

In addition, incoming students designate a specialized problem area or 
concentration on which they will focus. Available concentrations are: Aging, 
Community Health and Mental Health, Family, and Alternative Concentration. 

1. Aging Concentration— The Aging Concentration is designed to provide 
an educational program in gerontological social work. The program presents 

SOCIAL WORK 303 



knowledge, values, ethics and skills that enable the student to understand and 
critically assess the aging process; the needs, problems and resources of the 
aged; and the social policies, institutions, programs and services intended to 
address the aged. The concentration courses emphasize long term care and 
rural practice. Both class and field instruction emphasize the role of the 
M.S.W. -level practitioner as the administrator, supervisor, manager or 
planner of services for the aged. 

2. Community Health and Mental Health Concentration — The Community 
Health and Mental Health Concentration provides students with a generic 
model of practice as adapted to the evolving field of health and mental health. 
Particular emphasis is placed on community approaches to primary prevention 
and on the use of community support systems for the deinstitutionalized 
patient. Field placements emphasize the health and mental health field as a 
network of interrelated agencies and functions with attention to the tasks of 
planning, administration, community organization, direct practice, and re- 
search. 

3. Family Concentration — The Family Concentration provides education 
towards the development of the knowledge, skills, and values that enable the 
student to perform competently in human service systems whose programs 
and policies directly affect family well-being. Students learn the tasks of the 
social worker in social service agencies, other community systems, and 
advocacy roles inside and outside the agency and community system. These 
social work roles encompass preventing and treating neglect, abuse and 
exploitation, developing and supervising alternative family care systems, 
deinstitutionalization, policy and program development, and adolescent 
emancipation programs. Particular emphasis is placed on direct practice roles 
in delivering family services. 

4. Alternative Concentration — The Alternative Concentration is for 
students who have an explicit career goal in mind that does not fit into any of 
the other three concentrations. Students opting for the Alternative Concen- 
tration would develop an individual contract with a school committee. Each 
student's request will be reviewed by a school committee and the student will 
only be admitted to the School of Social Work under the designated 
alternative concentration, if the school feels it can meet his/her stated career 



Joint Degree Option 

A joint degree option resulting in the Master of Social Work (M.S.W.) and 
Master of Public Administration (M.P.A.) is available through the School of 
Social Work and Department of Public Administration of the College of Arts 
and Sciences. For a student admitted to the regular M.S.W. program, a total of 
82 credit hours are required to meet the joint degree requirements. For a 
student admitted to the advanced standing M.S.W. program, a total of 70 
credit hours are required to meet joint degree requirements. Many students 
complete such requirements through one additional semester of study beyond 
the semesters required for the M.S.W. degree. 

Applicants for the joint degree program apply to each program separately, 
specifying on each application that they are a joint degree applicant. 
Applicants must meet the admission requirements of each program and 
acceptance by one program does not guarantee acceptance by the other. 

Additional information and descriptive materials about the joint degree 
program are available from either the Assistant to the Dean, School of Social 
Work, 707 Allen Hall, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506, or 

304 SOCIAL WORK 



the Department of Public Administration, 302 Woodburn Hall, West Virginia 
University, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Admissions 

General Admission Requirements 

Students admitted to the graduate program may be admitted to the 
regular M.S.W. program (56 credit hours) or to the advanced standing M.S.W. 
program (44 credit hours). 

Students requesting admission must demonstrate the following: 

1. Proof of academic achievement. Graduate regulations require an 
undergraduate grade-point average of at least 2.5 for approval of candidates 
as a regular graduate student. An accepted applicant whose grade-point 
average is less than 2.5 is classified as Provisional. See the graduate catalog, 
"Classification of Graduate Students" for a description of admission categories. 

2. Evidence of potential to practice social work, such as commitment to 
human service, and a concern and ability to work effectively with people. 

Preference will be given in admissions to students who have a total of at 
least one year of paid and/or volunteer human service work experience. 

Admission to Regular M.S.W. Program 

Applicants falling within the following categories are eligible for admis- 
sion to the regular M.S.W. program (56 credit hours): 

1. Students with a baccalaureate degree in social work or social welfare 
whose cumulative grade-point average in their social work courses is below 
3.0 (on a 4.0 scale). 

2. Students with a baccalaureate degree in social work or social welfare 
whose cumulative grade-point average in all courses is less than 2.5. Such 
students are admitted as Provisional Students in the regular M.S.W. program. 

3. Students with a baccalaureate degree in a field other than social work 
or social welfare. 

Students admitted to the regular M.S.W. program complete a minimum of 
56 credit hours. They are required to complete two professional orientation 
courses: Introduction to Social Work Practice (So. Wk. 340) and Social 
Welfare Policy and Services (So. Wk. 331). They also complete 20 credit hours 
of field instruction. If enrolled as full-time students, they will ordinarily 
complete two semesters and one six-week summer session of course work and 
one six-week summer session and one semester of concentration-focused field 
instruction. 

Admission to Advanced Standing M.S.W. Program 

Applicants meeting the following criteria are eligible for admission to the 
advanced standing M.S.W. program (44 credit hours): 

Students with a baccalaureate degree in social work or social welfare 
from a Council on Social Work Education accredited program whose cumu- 
lative grade-point average in all courses is 2.5 (on a 4.0 scale) and whose 
cumulative grade-point average in their social work courses is 3.0 or higher. 

If enrolled as full-time students, advanced standing students ordinarily 
complete one semester and two six-week summer sessions of course work and 
one semester of concentration-focused field instruction. 

Part-Time Students 

Applicants may be admitted as part-time students to either the regular 
M.S.W. program or advanced standing M.S.W. program. Part-time students 

SOCIAL WORK 305 



must work with their advisers to develop a degree plan that provides for the 
appropriate sequencing of courses. Students are required to complete at least 
6 credit hours each semester while enrolled as part-time students. Only 
one-half of the degree requirements may be completed in part-time status. The 
remaining half of the degree requirements, in accordance with the accrediting 
standards of the Council on Social Work Education, must be completed as a 
full-time student. 

More information about part-time study can be found in the discussion of 
admission dates, plan of study, and program requirements. 

Application Deadline 

Applications for fall semester must be completed by May 1. Applications 
for spring semester must be completed by October 15. Applicants whose 
admission files are completed after the deadline date may be classified as 
Provisional Students, and not allowed to complete more than 12 hours of 
course work until the application is completely accepted. 

Admission Dates 

Full- and part-time students are admitted to either the regular or 
advanced standing M.S.W. programs in Morgantown during the fall semester. 
Full-time students in the regular or advanced standing program are admitted 
only during fall semester. Part-time students in the regular program are also 
only admitted during fall semester. 

Part-time students may be admitted to the advanced standing program 
during the fall or spring semesters. 

Master of Social Work (M.S.W.) 

The degree of Master of Social Work (M.S.W.) is conferred upon those 
students who satisfactorily complete the requirements as established for 
graduate education. These requirements are: 

1. Satisfactory completion of no less than 56 semester hours for those 
admitted to the regular M.S.W. program and 41-44 semester hours for those 
admitted to the advanced standing M.S.W. program. These hours may be 
earned through the Morgantown program on the main campus. Exceptions in 
this category would pertain to candidates whose earned credit entitled them 
to be exempt from certain courses. 

2. Students may request credit for up to 12 hours earned in graduate 
study in approved courses. Requests for such transfer credit must be made at 
the time of application to the program. 

3. Satisfactory completion of all components of the graduate program. 
Those components include course work in social work practice, social welfare 
policy, human behavior and social environments, social work research, a 
concentration area, and field instruction. All M.S.W. candidates must 
complete the requirements summarized below for the degree program to 
which they were accepted (i.e., regular or advanced standing). 

Plan of Study 

Full-time students typically complete 12-15 credit hours per semester 
when they are enrolled in classroom courses. Fourteen hours of credit are 
typically awarded for one semester of field instruction; 6 hours of credit are 
typically awarded for one summer session of field instruction, should the 
student's degree plan require one summer session of field. Full-time students 

306 SOCIAL WORK 



in the Morgantown program are required to complete 12 credit hours in the 
summer sessions. 

Part-time students are required to enroll for 6 credit hours each semester. 
Accrediting requirements require that no more than one-half of the degree 
program can be completed in part-time status. The remaining half of the 
program must be completed in full-time status, with the student enrolling in 
12-15 credit hours per semester. Part-time students must work closely with 
their advisers to assure that their degree plan is consistent with accreditation 
requirements. 

A copy of the typical plan of study for degree candidates is available on 
request from the School of Social Work. 

Field Instruction 

Field instruction is an integral part of graduate social work education. It 
provides the student with an opportunity to test classroom knowledge as well 
as to develop and refine advanced practice skills. 

Field placement settings are located in West Virginia, Pennsylvania, 
Ohio, Maryland, Virginia, and Washington, D.C. Decisions regarding the field 
placement assignment are jointly reached by the student, faculty adviser, and 
concentration committee. Only sites on the School of Social Work's approved 
list may be used for field instruction. The field placement setting that can best 
meet the student's educational needs may be located outside the Morgantown 
area. Therefore, students may find their educational interests best served by 
leaving the home campus for field placement. 

Regular M.S.W. students must have completed, at a minimum, S.W. 313, 
S.W. 321, S.W. 322, S.W. 331, S.W. 340, S.W. 441, the first concentration 
course, and any practice elective specified by their concentration before being 
eligible to enter field placement. All courses must be completed with a grade 
of C or better and students must have an overall minimum grade-point 
average of 2.75. Students are also required to attend a pre-placement 
integrative seminar. Additional requirements may be imposed by the student's 
degree plan. 

Advanced standing students must have completed, at a minimum, S.W. 
313, S.W. 321, the first concentration course, and any practice elective 
specified by their concentration before being eligible to enter field placement. 
All courses must be completed with a grade of C or better and students must 
have an overall minimum grade-point average of 2.75. Students are also 
required to attend a pre-placement integrative seminar. Additional require- 
ments may be imposed by the student's degree plan. 

Full-time regular M.S.W. students typically enter field placement during 
the second summer session (in July) and complete their placement and the 
degree program during their fourth semester (August-December) in the 
program. Their field placement is typically preceded by two semesters and 
one summer-session of classroom work. 

Full-time advanced standing M.S.W. students typically enter field 
placement during their second semester (January-May) in the program. Their 
field placement is typically preceded by one semester of classroom work and 
followed by two summer sessions of classroom work. 

Part-time students typically enter field placement after having completed 
24 credit hours of classroom work for those in the regular M.S.W. program or 
18 credit hours of classroom work for those in the advanced standing M.S.W. 
program. Their field placement is typically followed by one semester of 
full-time classroom study. 

SOCIAL WORK 307 



Field placement is typically completed on a full-time "block" plan. Part- 
time placement is possible so long as the accreditation requirements with 
regard to full-time study are met. Part-time field instruction requires the 
completion of a minimum of three full days per week in field placement. 
Part-time field instruction may be combined with concurrent classroom 
instruction. 

Regular M.S.W. students must complete a minimum of 900 clock hours in 
field instruction. Advanced standing M.S.W. students must complete a 
minimum of 560 clock hours in field instruction. Students are required to 
attend integrative seminars scheduled concurrently with field placement and 
to complete a paper dealing with the integration of field and classroom study. 

Summary of Degree Requirements for Advanced Standing M.S.W. Program* 

Hours 

Advanced Practice Courses 

Practice with Individuals, Families, and Small Groups (So. Wk. 441) ... 3 

Other Practice Courses (Selected in consultation with adviser) 6 

Human Behavior and the Social Environment 

Human Behavior and the Social Environment I (So. Wk. 321)** 4 

Human Behavior and the Social Environment II (So. Wk. 322)*** 2 

Advanced Social Welfare Policy Analysis (So. Wk. 333) 3 

Research Courses 

Social Research Methods (So. Wk. 313) 3 

Research Elective 3 

Concentration Courses 6 

(Selected in consultation with adviser) 

Field Instruction 14 

Total 44 

Summary of Degree Requirements for Regular M.S.W. Program* 

Hours 

Professional Orientation Courses 

Introduction to Social Work Practice (So. Wk. 340) 3 

Social Welfare Policy and Services (So. Wk. 331) 3 

Human Behavior and the Social Environment 

Human Behavior and the Social Environment I (So. Wk. 321)** 4 

Human Behavior and the Social Enrivonment II (So. Wk. 322)*** 2 

Advanced Practice Courses 

Practice with Individuals, Families, and Small Groups 3 

Other Practice Courses (Selected in consultation with adviser) 6 

Advanced Social Welfare Policy Analysis (So. Wk. 333) 3 

Research Courses 

Social Research Methods (So. Wk. 313) 3 

Research Elective 3 

Concentration Courses (Selected in consultation with adviser) 6 

Field Instruction _20 

Total 56 

*Students may elect to take additional courses beyond these requirements. 
**4 hours will be changed to 3 hours. 
***2 hours will be changed to 3 hours. 



308 SOCIAL WORK 



Social Work (So. wk.) 

247. Social Work and Human Diversity. I, II. 3 hr. (Human Behavior and Social 
Environment Course.) PR: So. Wk. 51 or consent. Social work practice with ethnic 
and religious minorities, the poor, women, Appalachians, the physically and 
mentally impaired, etc. Themes include stigmatization, stratification, institutional 
racism, sexism, and strategies for empowerment and equalization of opportunities 
and outcomes. 

250. Social Functioning and Social Work. II. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 200 and 220, Psych. 141, 
Soc. & A. 121. Draws on social and behavioral sciences knowledge to provide a 
framework for analyzing human behavior from a social work practice perspective, 
emphasizing human differences as they affect life opportunities and the meeting of 
human needs. 

280. Oral/Written Skills for Professionals. II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 1, 2. Designed for 
improvement of student's professional skills, specifically oral and written. 
Emphasis is placed on report writing, letter writing, resume writing, listening, 
interviewing, group problem solving, leadership, persuasion, and public speaking. 

290. Social Work Practice Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 210, 222, 250. Designed to 
provide educational support for the field placement practicum. Taken simultane- 
ously with the practicum to assist the student in the integration and mastery of 
practice theory as applied to placement learning activities. 

291. Field Practicum. I, II. 6 or 12 hr. PR: So. Wk. 210, 222, and 250. Coreq.: So. Wk. 290. 
Educationally directed field placement in approved setting. Focuses on the 
professional application of knowledge, values, and skills in demonstating compe- 
tence as a generalist social worker. (Offered on Pass/Fail basis only.) 

313. Social Work Research Methods. I, II. 3 hr. (Research Course. J Basic concepts in 
social research methods. Emphasis on conceptualization of social work problems 
for research, role of social science theories in research, measurement options in 
research design, and analysis of data. 

322. Human Behavior and the Social Environment 2. 2 hr. In this course the objective is 
to increase understanding of organizations, communities, and small groups as 
they develop, change, and affect behavior of those affiliated with them. 

323. Social Support Systems. I, II. 3 hr. (Human Behavior and Social Environment 
Course.) Social science theories pertinent to social support system concepts. 
Formally organized systems and natural helping networks are considered. 
Program models related to particular target populations, such as mentally ill, the 
aged, etc., are examined. 

324. Human Service Organizations. II. 3 hr. [Human Behavior and Social Environment 
Course.) Forces that characterize the establishment, maintenance, and transfor- 
mation of human service agencies. 

325. Social Welfare in American Communities. I. 3 hr. (Human Behavior and Social 
Environment Course.) Current theory and research on social welfare institutions 
in American communities. The course provides a conceptual framework for 
community practice, with particular attention to social movements, inter-organi- 
zational relationships and strategies for social change. 

331. Social Welfare Policy and Services. I. 3 hr. (Policy Course.) Introduction to the 
history, development, and implementation of social policy in the United States. 
Special emphasis is given to those policies which have the greatest impact on 
non-metropolitan areas and the Appalachian region. 

333. Social Policy Analysis. II, S. 3 hr. (Policy Course.) PR: So. Wk. 331. Skill 
development in techniques of social policy analysis. Selection of analytical 
methods and issues offered in different sections. 

SOCIAL WORK 309 



340. Introduction to Social Work Practice. I. 3 hr. [Practice Course.) Focuses on 
developing the basic framework of social work practice theory and professional 
values to working with individuals, groups, families, and communities. 

341. Social Treatment Groups. II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. The use of 
social relationships in small groups in treating personal problems. 

342. Task Group Processes. I. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. The use of social 
relationships in small groups for problem-solving tasks. 

345. Supervision in Social Work. II, S. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. 
Functions, conflicts, and dynamics of supervision of professionals, and the 
relationship of ethical and value principles. 

346. Experiential Groups. S. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. Practice issues in 
skill development and role playing; related concerns in psychodramatic inter- 
vention. 

351. Social Management/Rural Communities. I, II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 
340. Practice issues in skill development and community organization and 
development with special emphasis on rural communities. 

352. Social Planning. II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. Practice issues in skill 
development related to social components of comprehensive planning and func- 
tional planning systems in health, aging, manpower, social service, and other 
areas. 

354. Social Agency and Program Administation. I, II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. 
Wk. 340. Practice issues in skill development in programming, budgeting, 
organization, staffing, and control of social agencies and programs. 

361. Evaluation Research in Social Work. 3 hr. (Research Course.) PR: So. Wk. 313. 
Methods of collecting, analyzing and interpreting data on the need for, implemen- 
tation and effects of social interventions. Examination of the effects of political, 
ethical and resource variables on the research process. 

366. Strategies of Community Research. S. 3 hr. (Research Course.) PR: So. Wk. 313. 
Social systems approach to the study of community social phenomena in 
ecological context. Emphasis on the use of qualitative methods. Students engage in 
participant observation in natural field settings. (Graded as S or U.) 

371. Social Work With the Aged. I. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) Human aging as a 
problem in social theory, research, and practice. 

372. Concepts and Theories in Social Gerontology. S. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) PR: 
So. Wk. 371 or consent. Major conceptual and theoretical perspectives in social 
gerontology are applied to social work practice for the aged. 

374. Community Mental Health. I. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) An overview of the 
field of mental health which addresses major policy, program, practice, theory, 
and research issues as reflected in recent reports of the President's Commission on 
Mental Health. Current federal and state regulations and state plan documents are 
examined. 

375. Individual Consultation. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Individual directed study to develop 
extensive knowledge in social work areas of student's interest. 

376. Explorations in Primary Prevention. S. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) PR: So. Wk. 
374 or consent. This course explores varying conceptual approaches to primary 
prevention, the social science theories and research on which they are based, and 
their adaption to major modes of social work practice. Specific substantive 
knowledge problems are addressed. 

310 SOCIAL WORK 



377. introduction to Family Social Work. I. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.] Describes the 
demography of the population at risk, identifies family theory, major programs, 
and services and policies. Examines gaps in services and major styles of family 
intervention in social work roles. 

378. Family Victimology. S. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 377 or consent. The interface of social 
work practice in family victimology, with emphasis on victim welfare policy and 
service, victim compensation programs, and victim prevention. Social concern for 
physical and sexual abuse, battery, and related topics. 

379. Social Work with Couples/Families. 3 hr. (Concentration Course) PR: So. Wk. 377 
or consent. This course explores social work practice focused on couples or 
families as a unit. Emphasis on intervention models oriented to couple and family 
relationship counseling and on clinical social work techniques. 

380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 3 hr. Topics include: (A) Statistics for Social Work Practice; 
(B) Methods of Data Collection; (C) Computer Applications; (D) Family Sexuality; 
(E) Service Strategies of Aging; (F) Health Planning and Policy; (G) Program and 
Practice Models; (H) Social Work in Health Care. 

381. Social Work in Health Settings. I. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 374. Comprehensive strategies 
for serving clients with physical and/or emotional problems and their families 
with an emphasis on direct practice approaches. Practice in traditional and non- 
traditional settings is examined. 

441. Advanced Practice Affecting individuals, Families, and Small Groups. I, II. 3 hr. 
(Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340 or consent. This course includes: (a) foundation 
course work in social work methods; (b) an emphasis in direct social work 
practice; and (c) practice experiences in social service delivery for employment 
and/or field placement opportunities. 

481. Advanced Field Instruction 1. I, II, S. 5-14 hr. PR: Consent. Graduate field 
instruction in selected settings under the general direction of the faculty. 

482. Advanced Field Instruction 2. I, II, S. 5-14 hr. PR: Consent. Graduate field 
instruction in selected settings under the general direction of the faculty. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 

Ann L. Paterson, Chairperson of the Department 
Robert Foss, Chairperson of the Graduate Committee 
423 Hodges Hall 
Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Althouse, Ball, Foss, Hall, Kolaja, Nichols, Paterson, 
Photiadis, Starr, Stebbins, and Trent. Associate Member Levine. 

The Department of Sociology and Anthropology offers a program of 
study in applied social research leading to the degree of Masterof Arts (M.A.). 
The program is designed for students who seek sound training in research 
methods, either as preparation for more advanced training in a Ph.D. program, 
or as a basis for a career in applied social research. The M.A. curriculum 
emphasizes the interplay between substantive knowledge in some area of 
expertise, social science models, and research methods in solving problems. 
Students are thus prepared equally to enter an academic social science career 
or a career as a research social scientist in the public or private sector. 

Admission. Applicants for admission to graduate study must have a 
bachelor's degree from an accredited institution. Students who do not have 
adequate background in sociological theory, methods, and statistics may be 

SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 311 



required to take remedial work. Applicants are required to submit transcripts 
from their undergraduate institutions, three letters of recommendation, and 
recent Graduate Record Examination aptitude scores (the appropriate ad- 
vanced GRE test score is recommended). Foreign students for whom English 
is not the native language are required by the University to submit "Test of 
English As a Foreign Lanaguage" (TOEFL) scores and may be required to 
participate in the University's language orientation sessions. 

Applications should be completed by May 1 for admission to the first 
semester (April 1 if an assistantship is sought), and by November 15 for 
admission to the second semester. Full-time students who are admitted as 
special provisional students are required to complete 12 hours of approved 
course work with a B average or better within a year. Students who fail to do 
so are suspended. Each spring the department graduate committee assesses 
all students and determine who will continue in the program, with or without 
assistance. 

Degree Requirements. All students in the 39-hour, two-year program are 
required to take courses in survey methods (3 hr.), library and computer 
resources (3 hr.), qualitative methods (3 hr.), comparative methods (3 hr.), 
and data analysis (6 hr.). Students also participate in two seminars, one in 
social systems (3 hr.) and another in social policy (3 hr.). 

All students select three additional courses (9 hr.) which vary depending 
on the student's area of concentration, and they write either a thesis or applied 
problem report (6 hr.). 

The thesis and applied problem options are identical, except that in the 
thesis option one of the electives is replaced by an advanced theory Tutorial 
relevant to the student's thesis problem, and the completed applied problem 
report becomes an internal document of the Department of Sociology and 
Anthropology, whereas the thesis becomes a document housed in the WVU 
Library. The applied problem report normally pertains to an issue of interest 
to public or private sector decision makers, whereas the Thesis may pertain to 
a sociological problem more pertinent to academic social science than to the 
needs of decision makers. In both options, the student, in consultation with 
his or her program committee, chooses electives either in the department or 
elsewhere in the University as a basis for gaining expertise in some specific 
area of concentration. 

Among the possible areas of concentration are aging and gerontology, 
community development, complex organization, criminal justice systems, 
education, health care delivery, energy impact assessment, and occupational 
safety. 

Five-Year B.A./M.A. Program. This special option is available to WVU 
undergraduate sociology and anthropology majors with a grade-point average 
of 3.0. By taking 9 hours of specified graduate work as elective credit during 
the senior year, students can complete a 30-credit MA. in only one year of 
full-time study. (However, students cannot hold an assistantship and still 
complete the degree in one year.) Contact the department chairperson for 
more details. 

Sociology and Anthropology (Soc. & A.) 

201. Sociological Theory. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. and senior standing or consent. 
Systematic analysis of major sociological theories viewed from the historical 
perspective and in terms of current research. 



312 SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



202. Deviant Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Examination of the 
processes by which "deviance" is defined in society, and the methods of social 
control attempted. Provides a critical understanding of society from the perspective 
of those defined as "outsiders"— criminals, addicts, etc. 

204. Complex Organizations. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. The structure and 
functioning of large-scale, bureaucratic organizations, including studies of indus- 
trial organizations, prisons, hospitals, government bureaus, and the military in 
contemporary society. 

205. Class, Status, and Power. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Analysis of 
various systems of social inequality. Emphasis on empirical studies describing 
social class system, distribution of status and power, and patterns of social 
mobility in America. 

211. Social Research Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or 5 or consent. Logic of social 
research, elements of research design, and problems of measurement, with 
emphasis on survey research methodology and data analysis. 

222. Community Development. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 122, 131, or 140, or consent. 
Application of sociological knowledge of structure of communities for planning 
programs and services. Emphasis on techniques of organizing efforts for commu- 
nity change in developing nations. 

223. Sociology of Rurai Life. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or consent. Social aspects of 
rural living. Characteristics of rural population, social structure, and institutional 
arrangements: family, community, education, religion, recreation, health, welfare, 
and local government. 

230. The Criminal Justice System. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 132 or consent. A sociological 
introduction to the criminal justice system. Analysis of police work, court 
activities, and corrections within the context of American social organization and 
societal definitions of crime and justice. 

232. Sociology of Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or consent. Education as a social 
institution, cultural and class influences on education, social roles and career 
patterns in the school system, the school and problems of the community. (Also 
listed as Ed. F. 300.} 

233. Sociology of Work and Work Places. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or consent. Explores the 
significance of work and work relations in contemporary society. Emphasis is 
given to the analysis of employment settings including industrial organizations. 

240. Social Change. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Sociological analysis of 
current major changes in our society, of the forces underlying them, and of 
tensions to which they give rise. Alternative future directions and rational 
manipulation and planning for social change. 

253. Religion, Magic, and Healing. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or 
consent. Symbolism, magic, ritual, shamanism, sorcery, and concepts of sin and 
salvation related to peasant and tribal cosmologies will be examined as causes of 
and remedies for suffering in traditional and modern contexts. 

255. Anthropological Theory. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Theoretical 
landmarks in early and modern anthropology. Includes British functionalism, 
psychological anthropology, French structuralism, and twentieth-century evolu- 
tionism in the United States. 

256. Field Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 211 and Stat. 101 or consent. The distinctive 
craft of data gathering in cultural anthropology. Development of skills in field 
methods and participant observation. 

SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 313 



261. Issues in Crime and Justice. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Senior seminar on crime and 
the social organization of justice. Special focus on problems of professionals in 
prevention, enforcement, corrections, and institutional reform. Emphasis on 
recent research, emerging trends, and key policy choices. 

262. Youth and Social Change. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. A structural- 
historical approach to the study of youth as both product and agent of social 
change.. Emphasizes concepts of human development, life course transition, age 
stratification, birth cohort, lineage, historical period, and sociocultural generation. 

290. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Topics change so 
students may enroll more than once. 

291. Honors Seminar. I or II. 1-3 hr. 

293. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. per sem. PR: 3.0 grade-point average and written 
departmental permission. Directed reading or research for students desiring work 
not available in regular course offerings. 

311. Survey Research Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 211 and Stat. 101 or consent. 
Provides students with an overview of survey research including problem 
definition, research design, sampling, measurement, instrument construction, 
project management, ethical considerations, and report writing. 

313. Qualitative Methods. I. 3 hr. Provides students with supervised field experiences 
in interviewing, participant observation, and other methods of qualitative data 
gathering, analysis, and presentation. 

315. Comparative Research Methods. II. 3 hr. Examines the relationship between 
theory and research through critical comparison of the principal designs and 
methods used in the social sciences. Special attention to alternative strategies for 
studying social service institutions. 

317. Data Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or equiv. Using social science survey data, this 
course integrates statistics, computer usage, and social science theory to examine 
alternative methods of analyzing social science data. Makes extensive use of SPSS 
software package. 

318. Data Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 317. Continuation of Soc. & A. 317. 

319. Microcomputer Applications. I. 1 hr. A directed tutorial in selected social science 
applications of microcomputer use with emphasis on production of research 
reports. fS/U grading only.] (Soc. &■ A. majors only.) 

322. Contemporary Sociological Theory. I or II. 3 hr. Review of recent trends and 
orientations in sociology. Theory construction, typologies, mathematical models, 
and the relationship between theory and research. Review of current literature. 

323. Death and Dying. 3 hr. PR: Graduate status. Sociological and anthropological 
perspectives on death and dying. Examines sociopsychological and structural 
factors supporting the beliefs and practices associated with the institution of 
death, both historically and in contemporary society. [Not open to students with 
credit for Soc. &■ A. 123.) 

372. Sociology of Health. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 125 or consent. A seminar focusing upon 
current issues in medical sociology. 

390. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. A graduate course offered as the need arises. Topics 
change so students may enroll more than once. 

391. Seminar. I, II. 3-9 hr. 

393. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-9 hr. PR: Written departmental consent. Directed 
reading and/or research in a specialized area of interest. 

314 SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



394. Thesis or Applied Problem Research. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. Field Work. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Departmental consent. Supervised field work. 
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

SPECIAL EDUCATION 

Wilfred D. Wienke, Program Coordinator 

504 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: M.A. 

Graduate Faculty: Members Clements, Kaczmarek, Lombardi, G. Nardi, Piatt, Shuck, 

Wienke, and Woodrum. Associate Members H. Hursh, Joyce, Ludlow, Savage, Vaugh, 

and Wolf. 

The program leading to the M.A. in Special Education is designed to 
prepare master-clinical teachers of special education children and adults and 
to provide initial training for the preparation of future supervisors and 
administrators of public-school special education programs. The Division of 
Education awards the Certificate of Advanced Study and the Doctor of 
Education; both may include an emphasis on special education. The post- 
master's special education track leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study 
is individually prescribed, designed to prepare persons for positions as 
program specialists, consultants, supervisors, and administrators of programs 
or agencies providing special education or associated special services. The 
Ed.D. with emphasis in special education is an individually prescribed 
program designed to prepare persons for roles in special education personnel 
preparation, supervision, administration, and applied research. The programs 
also prepare professionals for emerging roles associated with interdisci- 
plinary services to persons requiring special education, resources, or support 
for enhanced development. A particular focus of the program is the delivery of 
services in rural areas. 

All applicants must comply with WVU general requirements and re- 
quirements of the College of Human Resources and Education and the special 
education program. The requirements are based on the 1985 policy 5100 
Standards for Certification. 

M.A. Program Options 

Behavioral disorders K-12 

Early intervention (pre-school) special education 

Girted education 

Mentally impaired (mild and moderate) 

Severe/profound handicaps 

Specific learning disabilities K-12 

Admission Requirements 

Students are admitted as regular, provisional, or non-degree students as 
follows: 

• Regular status: The individual who meets the admission requirements 
is granted regular status as a certification and degree seeking student; 

• Provisional status: The individual who has an earned baccalaureate 
degree from a regionally accredited college or university but who does not 
meet admission requirements may be granted provisional status in the 
program. This status allows the student an opportunity to remediate 

SPECIAL EDUCATION 315 



deficiencies in grade-point average in order to achieve regular status. This 
status is most commonly afforded students with either no or insufficient 
training in education; 

• Non-degree status: The individual who has an earned baccalaureate 
degree and teaching certificate from a regionally accredited college or 
university but who does not seek the master's degree may be admitted as a 
non-degree student, which allows the student to take courses for professional 
development and for additional professional endorsement. 

Full status admission to the programs occurs when the following 
admission criteria have been met: 

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or 
university. 

2. A minimum grade-point average of 2.5. 

3. Teaching certification in early or elementary education. 

Certification 

For certification in K-12 programs, holders of a valid professional 
teaching certificate for elementary education or early childhood education 
must fulfill the core area requirements and the teaching certification require- 
ments for their program area. Holders of professional teaching certificates in 
other areas, such as secondary education, must achieve an acceptable level of 
performance, as designated by the West Virginia Department of Education, on 
the multi-subjects content specialization test and fulfill the core area 
requirements and the teaching certification requirements for their program 
area. 

Students who do not have a valid professional teaching certificate but 
who want certification in the various special education areas of specialization 
must meet the following criteria: 

1. Students must achieve an acceptable level of performance, as deter- 
mined by the State Department of Education and/or the College of Human 
Resources and Education, on the pre-professional skills test and the multi- 
subjects content specialization test. 

2. Students must satisfy the teaching certification requirements for their 
program area, including the core courses. 

Students who do not achieve an acceptable level of performance on the 
multi-subjects content specialization test may take this test a second time. If 
they do not achieve the requisite score on the second try, they will no longer be 
considered candidates for the program. 

Students who do not meet skill/proficiency score requirements for 
admission may choose to avail themselves of the numerous remediation 
options available on campus. These include the Reading Clinic, the Micro- 
Computer Laboratory, and the Learning Center. 

Performance is assessed during course work and practicum. A student 
who fails to achieve an acceptable level of performance in practicum will have 
his or her individual performance deficits reviewed and will be given the 
opportunity to repeat practicum once; such repetition may occur following 
completion of an indicated remediation and/or additional instruction. A 
student who does not meet acceptable levels of performance in the second 
practicum assignment is asked to withdraw from the program. 

Retention in a program requires an overall 3.0 GPA. 

316 SPECIAL EDUCATION 



Written Comprehensive Examination 

Satisfactory completion of a written comprehensive examination is 
required for a master's degree in the program areas of mentally impaired (mild 
and moderate), specific learning disabilities, behavioral disorders, and gifted 
education and early intervention special education. Those students who 
entered a special education master's degree program prior to 1985 should refer 
to the program requirements outlined in the graduate catalog for the year 
when they entered the program. 

Applicants interested in one of the special education program areas 
should contact the special education chairperson for specific information on 
schedule and location of courses. 

Curricula for Special Education 

Master of Arts (36 Semester Hours Minimum) 

A. Core Area Requirements (BD, LD, Ml) Hours 

(12 Semester Hours in All Master Degree Programs) 

Sp. Ed. 250— Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults 3 

Sp. Ed. 260 — Curriculum and Methods for Special Education 3 

Coun. 305— Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 3 

Psych. 281— Abnormal Psychology or 
Psych. 263— Introduction to Personality or 

Psych. 264— Psychology of Adjustment 3 

SPA 250 or 350— Speech & Lang. Disorders Assessment-Remediation 3 

Total 15 

B. Teacher Certification Mentally Impaired: Mild/Moderate Area Requirements 

Sp. Ed. 255— Introduction to Mental Retardation 3 

Sp. Ed. 305— Mathematics for the Mentally Retarded 3 

Sp. Ed. 306— Reading for Mentally Retarded Children 3 

Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Mentally Impaired 3-6 

Total 12-15 

Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 6-9 

C. Teacher Certification Learning Disabilities Area Requirements 

Sp. Ed. 330— Introduction to Specific Learning Disabilities 3 

Sp. Ed. 331— Evaluative Techniques in Specific Learning Disabilities 3 

Sp. Ed. 332— Teaching Strategies of Specific Learning Disabilities 3 

Rdng. 342— Reading Diagnosis and Prescription in Learning Disabilities 3 

Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Learning Disabilities 3-6 

Total 15-18 

Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 3-6 

D. Teacher Certification Behavioral Disorders Area Requirements 

Sp. Ed. 340 — Introduction to Behavioral Disorders 3 

Sp. Ed. 341— Behavioral Dynamics in the School and Community 3 

Sp. Ed. 342— Curriculum and Methods for the BD Child 3 

Sp. Ed. 487 — Practicum: Behavioral Disorders 3-6 

Total 12-15 

Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 6-9 



SPECIAL EDUCATION 317 



E. Teacher Certification Gifted Education Area Requirements Hours 

Sp. Ed. 250 — Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults 3 

Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 3 

Sp. Ed. 370— Introduction to the Gifted 3 

Sp. Ed. 371— Educational Development of the Gifted 3 

Sp. Ed. 372— Strategies for Instruction of the Gifted 3 

Sp. Ed. 481— Seminar: Interdisciplinary Problem Solving 1 

Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Gifted Education 3-6 

Total 19-22 

Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 14-17 

F. Teacher Certification Severe/Profound Handicaps Area Requirements 

Ed. P. 350 — Principles of Behavior Modification 3 

Sp. Ed. 250— Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults 3 

Sp. Ed. 319— Assessment: Severe Handicaps 3 

Sp. Ed. 320 — Curriculum: Severe Handicaps 3 

Sp. Ed. 321 — Instructional Programming: Severe Handicaps 3 

Sp. Ed. 322 — Characteristics and Methods: Physical Handicaps 3 

Sp. Ed. 323 — Teacher/Parent Consultation: Handicapped Populations 3 

Sp. Ed. 324— Classroom-based Language Intervention: 

Handicapped Populations 3 

Sp. Ed. 325 — Secondary/Adult Programming: Severe Handicaps 3 

Sp. Ed. 487 — Practicum: Severe and Profound Handicaps 9 

Total 36 

G. Teacher Certification Preschool Handicaps Early Intervention Area Requirements 

C&I 380 — Early Education Curriculum: Preschool Handicaps 3 

Ed. P. 391— The Growing Years 3 

Sp. Ed. 350 — Assessment of Young Handicapped Children 3 

Sp. Ed. 351— Educational Programming: Young Handicapped Children 3 

Sp. Ed. 352— Program Management: Young Handicapped Children 3 

Sp. Ed. 322 — Characteristics and Methods: Physical Handicaps 3 

Sp. Ed. 323 — Teacher/Parent Consultation: Handicapped Populations 3 

Sp. Ed. 324 — Classroom-based Language Intervention: 

Handicapped Populations 3 

Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Preschool Handicaps 6 

Total 30 

Planned Electives (minimun for degree) 6 

H. Problem or Thesis Area Requirements 

Stat. 311— Statistical Methods or 

Ed. P. 320— Introduction to Research 3 

Sp. Ed. 395 — Problem in Special Education or 

Sp. Ed. 497— Research 3-6 

Sp. Ed. 480— Seminar 3 

Total 9-12 

Elective Requirements 12-15 



318 SPECIAL EDUCATION 



I. Approved Electives 

Coun. 305,464 

C&I 330, 333, 340 

Ed. F. 320, 340 

Ed. P. 300, 320, 330, 333, 341, 342, 343, 350, 420, 440, 450, 451 

Psych. 263, 264, 271, 281, 282, 322, 423 

Rdng. 283, 321, 324, 325, 330, 331, 340, 342 

Sp. Ed. 255, 281, 305, 306, 322, 323, 324, 330, 331, 340, 341, 342, 365, 381, 395, 

480, 481, 487, 496 
Stat. 311, 312 
Others by approval of adviser. 

Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.) 

All applicants must comply with the requirements of WVU, the College of 
Human Resources and Education, and the special education program. 
Additional admissions requirements are as follows: 

1. Completion of a master's degree related to special education. 

2. Submission of scores of the Millers Analogies or the Graduate Record 
Examination aptitude test. 

3. Evidence of successful appropriately selected work experience. 

4. Three positive letters of recommendation. 

5. Statement of goal of program study. 

6. Plan of study approved by adviser. 

Areas of Specialization 

Advanced study may be in any one or combination of areas represented in 
the program including: (1) behavioral disorders; (2) gifted education; (3) 
mental impairment; (4) severe and profound handicaps; (5) specific learning 
disabilities; and (6) early intervention special education. 

Program of Studies 

Courses/Course Areas Hours 

Sp. Ed. 480— Seminar in Special Education 3 

Sp. Ed. 365— Administration and Supervision 

of Programs for Exceptional Children 3 

Individually prescribed course work in 

special education including goal related areas 18 

Research including Sp. Ed. 491— Advanced Study 

Project in special education 6 

Minimum 30 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

All applicants must comply with the requirements of WVU, the College of 
Human Resources and Education, and the Special Education Program. 
Additional entrance requirements are as follows: 

1. Completion of a master's degree, preferably in special education. 

2. Graduate grade-point average of 3.5. 

3. Three letters of reference addressing the candidate's past performance 
and qualities which would make the person suitable for doctoral-level study. 

4. Work experience in special education or with exceptional persons. 

5. Submission of Graduate Record Examination or Miller Analogies 
scores in support of potential for success in doctoral-level study. 

6. Well defined goal statement. 

SPECIAL EDUCATION 319 



Admissions are open year round and inquiries should be addressed to: 
Chairperson, Doctoral Admissions Committee 
Special Education Program 
College of Human Resources and Education 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6122 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6122 

Program of Study 

Programs of study comply with all applicable institutional requirements, 
but typically they include course work in excess of minimum requirements 
because of the clinical nature of special education. Programs are designed by 
the doctoral student, the student's adviser, and the doctoral committee to best 
meet the student's career goals. 

The leadership training provided through this program of studies draws 
on the many available strengths and resources of a major university. 
Development of research skills is a major focus of the program, along with 
advanced training related to the education, development, and habilitation of 
persons with exceptional needs. Normally, students take course work in a 
number of programs and colleges in order to take advantage of available 
interdisciplinary resources. The program encourages study and involvement 
with faculty from a broad range of disciplines in order to best prepare doctoral 
students to meet their individual career aspirations as leaders in special 
education. 



The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia 
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification 
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not he in 
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon 
arrival on campus. 



Special Education (Sp. Ed.) 

250. Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to all 
areas of exceptionality. Definition, psychological and educational characteristics, 
and social and vocational adjustment. 

255. Introduction to Mental Retardation. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Historical, etiological, 
social, educational, and vocational aspects of mental retardation. 

260. Curriculum and Methods for Special Education. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 250, 255 and/or 
consent. Organization of instruction and adaptation of teaching methods in the 
several curricula areas and the construction of materials. 

262. Curriculum and Methods for the Trainable Mentally Retarded. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 
250, 255 and/or consent. Special problems of curriculum development for the 
trainable child and adult and development of original construction of curricula 
materials. 

265. Industrial Arts in Special Education. 3 hr. Experimentation with industrial arts 
and crafts suitable for instruction in special education classes. Discussion of 
factors involved in selection and manipulation of such media as leather, plastics, 
ceramics, wood, and metal. 

280. Student Teaching Clinical Experience in Special Education. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 
Student teaching with the mentally retarded. (Graded as S/L/.j 

320